Grammar of the arabic language

GRAMMAR ARABIC LANGUAGE: INTENDED MORE ESPECIALLY

FOE THE USE OP YOUNG- MEN* PBEPAEING FOB THE EAST INDIA CIYIL SEEYICE; AND ALSO FOE THE USE OF SELF-INSTBUCTltfG STUDENTS IN G-ENEEAL.

DUNCAN FOBBKS, LAM

LLD.,

OF ORIENTAL LANGUAGES IN KING'S COLLEGE, LONDON J MEMBER OF THE ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY OP GEEAT BRITAIN AND ICELAND AND AWTHOU OR EDITO* J OF WORKS ON THE PKESIAN, HINDtJSTANI, AND BENOAXI LANGUAGES. l*fi.OWSSOE

1

LONDON ,

H. ALI/ffiN

&

Co.,

13/WATEBLOO PLACE,

HK&TP0BD J*Y

WTWHIK

;

PEEPACE.

drt, at tho

on Arabic ,

or

to this lo

day, at tart half .

ftananar.-oou.posod

Gorman

** Mt

p,cnt

Tho road w may, thon no

language*.

-^ *

ouostto

ta

of a

tro.4nt ttan what

~

^ that

J)lai nor

oMy jn ^

lm(

I

^

to tho

Mero

null'

I

tho subject to bo

more

Kvo yot ot with in any of the *. to which I havo t ju8 aUudod; and fllis I havo ondoavourod to supply, fa ao following oBt of my

m

I

alllity.

As' I lay a,

oWm

to

origimlity. in flu. work, with (h,, ""option of tho tat and tat tetion,, and .ho gonoral a r-'

of tho subjoot throughout, it is bnt namo tho souroo, ton, whioh I haro dm

te

.

TO.

I-

comprising tho

n U

foUo.

o

Sy^om

of Ittflotion

181S. pp. ^abo, 2nd od. 2 vol..

_fau

Ca.0.

8.

that I

my

nm that

**.

VI

i'KEFAt'ft,

works of reference, but they arc utterly unadopted use of Beginners. extends;

Do

Sacy's

Dr. Ltimsclen's Grammar, so far as

copious even to the exhaustion of

is

for the

the*

it

ttiihjrat*

equally copious, but exceedingly defi'divn with

is

regard to methodical arrangement, as I havo oecamotially

ThiB drawback in Do

pointed out in the following pago,

Saey

meamm* oomponwttwl

in a great

is

however,

?

1>y

tho

copious Indices given at the end of each of his volumon*

Such Arahic Grammars as appeared before tho dayn of

Lumsdon and Do Saoy aro of course mijMWculed by thoao of the latter and Grammars that have boon published ?

;

the time of the last-mentioned masters, contain Uttlo or

nothing that

is

new*

tions to Bosenmiillert

I must, however, express

Grammar,

4to. Lipsiw,

Be

a very judicious condensation of It has ? at tho

same time, the

of arrangement press

;

stffl,

and bosidcs

;

with

faults of y

my

obliga-

1818, which

Saoy's

first

Do Saoy on

in


the

abounds in errors of the

it

all its defects, it is

tho only

work of the

kind that I could have hitherto conscicmtioiwly rmmnncmli'cl to

my In

pupils

when commencing

compiling

the

the study of Arabia

following

Grammar,

I

hara^

upon

the whole, adopted the name $eale fith regard to copious?

ness, as that

used by Rosenmiiller

;

my

the latter, "being to give the student a all

that

is

important in

In the disposal of entirely from

my

my

Do

?

8acy

s

objoet, like that of

Mr

<xmdeffimti0n of

and Lumadcm'ft wofki*

materials I hare ventured to differ

predecessors,

m

may he

by a glance

niEFACE. at

Table of

my

natiu'o, iit

C 0ntentB. f

1 holcl

methodical arrangement

assisting the student^

cult of attainment

all

;

Vii

;

that in works of this

of very great importance

is

Nor

memory.

IB

this object diffi-

that a "writer lias to do,

is

to discuss

plainly and concisely every part of tho subject under treat-

ment, at

Ae

Ike rig ht lime

tho following

instructing

students

in the proper place.

work of

intended for

in

tlie

In tho

first

may

printed In tho larger type, for

MB

not bo deemed

Grammar

elementary

1 think ho itiuy ovon omit Sections IV*

as are

Btticly

and IX,

;

and

altogether.

exorcise himself in reading and trans-

pages of Mr* Schalch's Arabic So-

lati^ji4Uo lootionH, 4to.

self-

1 would advise tho

then,

place,

learner to peruse Huch parts only of this

After that lot him

use of

Arabic language, a few plain

directions for tho guidance of all such irrelevant*

tlio

East India College, 1830

;

or tho first Title in

tho dmwtonuilhiu Arabica of KoBcgurton, 8v<x Lipsito, 1828,

with copious

Both of thoHo works axo and

1 havo mentioned are poinlod in

tlto

Boc.ondly, lot

ultca*

hnn,

Grammar, including of in Hinullor typo,

wo may

call

tho Htndy of tho that

it

a

road

thut,

the whole of

courso, air tho portions of

and marked

finish tho perusal of tho

ThiH

vocnJniltiricH ?

two

fnir

,

^

otc.

;

not encroach

and

it

vc*rjr

let

him

abovo mentioned,

olomontaay oourwo, or ;

this

it

after

roiwling-ljooks

full-

Jj/tKh^go^ in

has this solid advantage, heavily on

the

l

PREFACE.

VU1

The preceding economical

course will prove highly service*

able to three classes of seH-instructing students*

who may wish

To

stationed throughout the

young and middle-aged clergymen, country,

First,

knowledge of

to acquire a moderate

Arabic, as a valuable atixiliary to the study of

Hebrew

;

for

now an acknowledged fact, that a man can no more bo a thorough Hebrew scholar without Arabic? than ho eaia be a it is

Latin scholar without Greek.

To yotmg mon

Secondly,

paring for the East India Civil Service^ to

whom

pre-

the above

course ought to suffice for passing their examination in thin country.

Thirdly and

lastly,

To

those

all

who

intend to rait

any of the exteiMve regions where the MiAammtdan ligion prevails, or

wherever the modern Arabic

is

re-

genemlly

spoken.

The Modern Arabic

differs

from the Ancient or Cteittelj

chiefly in this, that the former has simplification,

undergone a proeesi of

such as the rejection of the nunatim^ and of

the finat short vowels in general

;

also the rejection of the

dual number both in nouns and verbs* is to

IE

faet,

the

Modem

the Ancient Arabic, what the Greek of the presamt day r*

is to that of

Thueydides,

An

elementary knowledge of tho

Classical Arabic will enable a traveller to acquire, with

and in a very short time, every

dialect of the

cue,

Modern Tongua

spoken between the Atlantic and the Tigris,

For a second and finishing course of reading^ dent procure^ in tho Dictioimries,

m

first place,

let the $tii>

one or other of the following

Froytagii (Gfoorgii

WiQwlmi)

PREFACE*

IX

Arabico-Latinum, prsosertim ex Jauharii Firusabadique et

allomm Arabum operlbus

desumttini, etc,;

Voctzm Latiaaram locupletissimus.

4

accedit Index

Halls Sax-

vols. 4to.

an enlarged and vastly improved edition of the far-famed Arabic Lexicon of Gtolius, which onum, 1830-1838.

used to

Is

For ordinary purposes, the

for ten guineas.

sell

abridged

This

edition, of this

work

will suffice^ vis*

-Freytagii

(G. W*) Lexicon AraMco-Latinnm ex opere sue majore In

iiBum Tironiini excerption,

4 to. Halls Saxonum 1837.

such of the following works as he -Arabic Reader, SYO.

may

Calcutta,

royal STO. 1812.

royal 8vo

Kur aE

alb^1840*

i

al>ovo

Bo Saoy

1810*

?

?

by Ibn

?

Aral>

viz.

Shah

?

no date

eto* ? diligoator disposuit

the following works edited

-Oalila ot

TO,

j

1842.

4to. Lipsiso ?

wo may add

peruse

Ikhwanu-s-Safa,

Fliigol's edition^ 4to.

Ooncordantia Oorani^

Gustavus Miigelj

To the

?

may

find convenient

1828*

History of Tlmur,

1817.

By

3

the aid of either of these Lexicons the learner

Bimna en

Aridbo,

by

4to* PaxiB 3

Chrestomathie Arabo, three thick Toltimes 8vo. 2nd

edition^ Parls y 1826.

This last work

of its numerotis eritieal notes ?

aad

is

illustrations of the text-

Los Seances do Hariri en Arabe aree Paris, 1821*

To

theso? again,

works printed at Calcutta

iimluablo on aeooimt

tin

Oommentaire, foL

we may add

sereral raluable

m the course of i3xe present century,

Tiz,~l"afhatn4-Yaman, a Selection of Easy Stories in Prose

ani Terse from the best Authors.

A

4to* 1811.

Hadlkatu4-

tbo Writings of the most

dfetiit*

X

PREFACE.

guided Arabian

Poets, Oratory

1813. All Lailah,

or.

Book

and HislorianH.

of the Thousand

Thin

The

work,

first

literally into

W.

II.

Mac*

4 vola. royal 8vo.

naghtcn, assisted by learned Mouluvics. Gale. 1839-42.

and Om* Nights,

Edited by Sir

(Arabian Nighte* Entertainment).

Itoyul 4 to,

the most complete edition of tho

Is

Fifty Nights

English by

II.

have been tnuutluted v
Torrens.

8vo.

London, 1838,

There arc two otter editions of tho Alf Lailoh, vix*~A If Lailuh

odor Tauaond uud eine Nacht, Arabi0oh, iiaoh uino,

:

Haudschrift

aiis

Ton ML

Tunin, hcrming.

12mo, Brcwlan, 182C-1843.

Ala<>,

12 voln,

Hulrichi,

Alf UiWi, tho Jiulak

oditioE ? from diflferout Arabic MSS,, veiy earefuHy edited

by

some of the most learned natives of Kgypt* 2

Tola. 4 to. Cairo,

Ms

Arabian library

4

Finally, the learner should

1880,

add

to

the Hu'aUakai) with commentary, royal Bvo. Calo. !B2ii(Mi

To complete

knowledge of Anibic Orammar tho &tu

his

?

dent should procure,

Do

if posBible,

tho following works

by IL

Sacy^Yi2;*-^GraiEiimiro Arabo, two thick volumes

A&thologie Grammatieala Arabo, 8vo. 3829.

1881.

by Iba MaHk don's Arabic ?

Mi,at

?

roy. 8vo* 18SS*

Otammar^

To

through

be safely

this second loft

Aiilyu,

b ^my id

aJbraady allo4ed to;

Amil, 4to, Calcutta^ 1814-

8m

aai

The mun who hat

course, or eyen a moiety of it?

thenceforth to

Ms own gmdmo*

With regard to the importance of the Arabic laagiig tho Hebrew student it m sufficient for me to refer Mm to ,

following workij

?k~10t* Di^ortatio do

Origino, eta, Lin-

PREFACE,

guao

Arabic, ojusquo intima Ilebraica, Svo. Edin.

Lingua of the

XI

Affinitate et Convcxdeiitm

1769

?

"by

Dr. James Bobcrtson,

Edinburgh University, the soundest.

sound, Semitic scholar, that Scotland had

2nd. Olavis dialecti

Arabic,

etc.

vorum, 1733, by Albert Sehultons. of

tibis

cum

till

If

not the only

then produced

sm. 4to. Lugduni Bata-

The most complete work

nature, however, is ihe Oiigincs Ilebra^a),

by Albert

cum

Tudicibufl.

Sohultons. Folio, Lugd. Batt. 1161, pp. 048,

All of these are

works on

first-rate

this particular subject;

and they ought long ago to have been translated into our

own

vernacular,

if,

in our country, Semitic studios

had mot

with that attention which their importance demands.

As a

valuable guide in this department 1 would strongly recom-

moAd

the Arabic

Grammar

by

recently published

my

friend

WiJMftn "Wright, Esq., of the British Museum, formerly Professor of Arabic in the University of Dublin, 2 yofe. Svo, Leipzig

and London, 1859 and 1862.

To the general itself as

civilization,,

between the

Grecian literature, and the not

less brilliant

of the Reformation in

so well expressed I3L

Arabic language recommends

the vehicle of science and

brilliant oera of

dawn

scholar, the

by an

modern Europe,

This has been

old and esteemed pupil of mine,

B. Beresford, Esq., late of the Bengal Civil Service, that

I cannot here do better than reproduce

Ms

Borosford, in the preface to a translation

on Arabic Syntax, 1848, says,-

entitled,

very words*

by

Mm

of a

Mr,

work

Hidayatu-n-N"ahwi Svo* London,

"In whatever

?

point of view

wo

regard the

PREFACE.

Xll

Arabic Language, whether as the language of a people who in the Middle

so materially to the literature

Ages contributed

and refinement of Europe, or as the language of a

which numbers upwards of 100,000,000

followers,

religion

and at the

present day affects greater numbers of mankind than Christianity itself; or

whether

it

be regarded as the medium for

communicating sound European knowledge to the whole body

Muhammadans

of the learned

of India, and as one of the

inexhaustible fountains for enriching some of the Indian vernaculars, so

as to

European science and

render them competent vehicles of literature to the great

Muhammadan population throughout

mass of the

British India ; under all

the above, and various other points of view, Arabic said to be an object of deep

and peculiar interest"

In conclusion, I have to acknowledge to

my

my

deep obligi&ftas

friends. Professor Francis Johnson, late of

College, Herts

j

may be

Haileybury

and Dr. Charles Bieu, of the British

Mu-

seum, Professor of Arabic in University College, London.

The kindness shewn

to

me by

and correcting the sheets of the press,

is

this

these gentlemen in perusing

work

m they passed through,

more than I cam ever adeqtiately repay. D.

58,

BUETON CEISOBNT, v,

1863,

FOBBES,

OF

SECTION

r.

"WHICH TBEATS OS THE LETTERS AND SYMBOLS USED 1

Of

******

the Letters of the Alphabet

Of thjj^tmds of the

Letters.

JC'AfU'H

1

*

4

......,,,..

411

*,***,

1415

Of the Primitive or Short f

Of tho TaEwin

or Nunation o x AJsi- Jasnn, or

i?

01 tto Symbol

1

Of

the

^

Ampuiatiou

*

Symbol TasHld-^dJd^lcJI

.

wX>*Ma

Of

tho Letters of

*

x

o

. i*

^

. J

Prolongation'-^ &^j>. 1

s^

Of iho Symbol Madda

$**. i OX

J&

Of tho Symbol "Waila

X* X

or K4J& *Vi/X

UJz> 4?C<*'

J^oriL^

Classificatxoa of the Lottors

*

,

.

t

.

.

,*,*..

.../...,...

l

Of tho Symbol Hamjsa

*

f

*

t

..*

*.**,,

Of thoITiimerioalTaliiooftheliottea*

.#.*,, *,

10

-21

2122 2S**SS

..,...,,.

Of tho Various Arabic Handwritings

1510

.

2324 24

50

20- 2ft sn^ao

XIV

CONTENTS.

Of the Accent

................ PtsS<*S

Of the

Paiise

.

ujwjll

........

.

Exercise for Practice in Beading

.

.....

SECTION

.

.

.

.

.

,

3031

3132 3234

II.

WHICH TBEATS OF THE AKTICLB, THE SUBSTANTIVES, OTMEEALS, ADJECTIVES, AND PBONOTJNS. PS

Of

tfa

O sts

Artich^&JijX^\

..... ..,,*, ..... ....... ..... Nouns

3757

.......***.

4143

3637

.P^-O/-

Sufatwfwe

*Jtl

Of

tfo

On

the Forms and Measures of y

Of Gender

On

c^

ij^\

*

.

.

the Formation of Feminine from Masculine

Of Numbers

Of the

Of

o

,

Nouns

....

.,..........,.* Nouns ^xt"^O

.

4546

......>.....

5157

*

^ Ox

1

.

.

.

.

*

,

...... ........ *

*

.,.,.*,....,, .,**,.,,..,. ...... ,,,....*

The Ordinal Numbers. Fractional

Numbers

Distribuiivo

Numbers

Eolative Numerals

.

.....
Of

fto Atfwtfot

......

..,.,*,

Periodic Numerals.

Numeral Adverbs

,

tf

y

&?))

45

4650

0ftfaffm&ak^$^\*\***\. The Cardinal Numbers

43^

*,,,..,*

Irregular or Broken Plurals

the Declension of

3841

*

.

.

5764 5850 6061 61

61

62

,

,.,..

02

63

#

0864

....... ,**,**

405

*

.

t

,

,

.

,

,

CONTENTS,

J&V "PAGES

f

Of

tJie

Pronoun

13

j+*aA\*

65

*

..*,.......... .....,,.,.,.

Personal Pronouns*

Demonstrative Pronouns

..

Belative Pronouns .

Interrogative Pronouns

*

*....

t

.

*

f

..............

Eeciprocal Pronouns

C5 -68

68

-69

707!

7172

.

,

73

72- 73

SECTION III WHICH TREATS OP THE Of Radical and

Of

,****,

Servile Letters

the Conjugation of a Begular Triliteral Verb

Active Toiee

VERB,

*,..*.

,***,,,**

Passi^5foico

Of the

Preterite

Of the Aorist

7r>

-7U

70-*

77

*

77~78

.

79~88

>

Observations on tto Tenses, etc, of the Regular Triliteral Verb,

7476

...,,,.,..,, ...*.*...*,* n

Of the Imperative'

7080 8085 8i5*80

*......,..,,,., NOUE .,,*.,,,,.

Of the

Participles

Of the

Infinitive or Verbal

Of the Derivative Formations of tho Ecgolor

Triliteral

Tort

*

*

8687 87 -8S

88~9!

General Significations of tho Derivative Verb with reference to the

-.....,.,,.,

Primitivo

On

Quadriliteral Torbs {ix^ox

Of

the Surd Yorb

*Jt

,

**,,., / x

also called

91~97 Qg^jQ],

yFOx-

uicUUt

,*,

"doubloa."

101108

XVI

CONTENTS.

SECTION

IV.

WHICH TEEATS OF THE INFIRM OR IMPEEFECT

YEBBS, ETC. PAOES

General Bules on

tlie

Nature and Permutation of the Letters

j,andu5

*

Bules peculiar to the Letter

Alif

\

..,,*,*

Rules peculiar to the Letter ^ JF&w.

............

Bules peculiar to t^ Fa

Waw

Eules peculiar to ^

\ ,

^

and

Yd

in

common

*

,

.

.

OftLoEamzatod Vcrb-^j^fi Of tho Simile Verb* Of Concave Yorbs

*

118121

122124

^

,.,,*,..* .,**#,*

,.,..

126

127

128130 ISO

13S

13$

184

**

Terb^K /

Of tho Defective

114-^115

.,..*.

.

Derivativo Formations from, Concave Boots

^

114

,

General Bomarks on tho Concave Verbs

Of the Defective

113

124127

Conjugation of the Concave

^s

x

^U1

Of the Defective Terb

113

115118

,

Conjugation of the Concave ^

The Substiitiv

110

,

..*...,....,

r

110118

..,...,...

135^141

*.*...*,.,.*

^

.,,*

,

*

Passives of Defective Yerbs

........... *.,,.,,*,

Defective Derivative Formations

Of Yarbs Doubly Imperfect

Of Yorbs Triply Imperfect

t

,

.

.

,

185

1881 39 1$0

140

141142 142145 146

XVI

CONTENTS,

PAGES

Of the Negative Verb

.

.

Verbs of Praise and Censure

Of Verbs of Admiration

.

.

.

.

.

*

or Surprise^

14614 14

*

.

.

.

.

.

147

.

14

Explanation of "Useful Tables of Trilateral Verbs, "both regular

and Irregular

14!

*

Fiye Useful Tables exhibiting at one view the Conjugation of every species of the Primitive Trilateral Verb

SECTION

Propositions

i

149

.

PARTICLES.

....,... ,....*

^SM c-J*^

X

Of Adverbs, Conjunctions^ and

Inteijoctions

SECTION

15\

V.

WHICH TREATS OF THE INDECLINABLE Of

.

.

155

16C

168

IT'S

VI.

WHICH TBEATS OF THE DERIVATION AND FORMATION OF NOUNS.

N"oTin of

Noun

U KJ1

Time and Place

UT

of Instrament

III

Noun

of Unity

^Jl

X

JToun of Specification Intensity

*

-*

of Abundance

&!LiJl

of Singularity

,

.

.

.

,

180

,

.

182183

.

18318^1

.....

18S

184

o

^

*

.

184

*

*

185

o

^31 ^1 x

Noun

^^

x-PO**0 -

x/xo-*o

Noun

PC

%jd\ xx

Noun of

^

[

*

'

<s

0xO-O

^UjJl

xt.*o^ o

-Ifj^yi

*

.

135

XV111

CONTENTS. M

Noun

of Capacity

Tho Diminutive

*J

*Uj!|

.......

.

..... ... ...... from ..... Broken Plurals-^*^ t^T .....

Noun-yL2^

.

Substantives

t,

ft*~a p

u\

ThePluralof tie Hural

.

*

0-3 <*of

Formation of the

186

**j8!

Adjectives Derived irorn Verbal Boots

Adjectives derived

186

.

o s

<*>>

SECTION

o

186

188

188

189

*89

200

>

.......

201202

VII.

WHICH TREATS OF THE SYNTAX OF THE

ARTICLE,

SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, & Analysis of Sentences

ArrangomeEt of

tlio

.,.,..,..,.,

"Words in a Sentence

Syntm

of fh& Article

SynUx

of

Of the Nominative Case

Of the

Genitive Ca*o

*

Of the Accusative Case

Cardinal

Numbers

Of the Ordinal Numbers

Of the Arabian Months

.

......... ....... ,

,

t

*

205

205

206

2gfc-208

,.**..,*

*..,..*,

*

20B

254

208200

...

209210

.

210212

,

*

,*,**,****

212214

,,,",.....,.

214222

Substantives in Apposition

Of the

Adjectives

.

..,,.

.....

Sutstmtim and

.....

203

...... ...,. ........ .

-

.

*

**. ....*.

222-227

227228

Concord of Adjcctiras with their Substantives

228240

Concord of the Attribute with tho Subject

240241

Of

tho Begreog of Comparison

.,..,,,.,.

241247

CONTENTS, PAGES

..........

Government of Foiins Syntax of

the

......

Pronouns

Personal Pronouns

.

,

.

t

.

***.,, ,

Demonstrative Pronouns

Of the Belative Pronouns

.

,

.

.

.

.

...*.,.

Of the Interrogatire Pronouns

SECTION

247

264

254

271

254

261

261262 262-

-269

269- 271

VIII.

WHICH TREATS OF TEE SYNTAX OF TEEBS

A3TO PABTICIES.

.,.,.., ....,*,..

Use and Application of the Proterito Tcnso

272278

Uso and Application of tho Aorist

278

287

287

290

Uso and Application of tho

*.,.

Infixdtivo

Use and Application of the Participles

Conco*

*

a Verb with

GoYcrnment of Verbs

Of Abstract

.

its

......,

290294

.***.

204302

Wominatiyo

.

.

,

.....,

or Snbstantiye Verbs

Verbs of Praise and Censure

.

.

Verbs of Admiration and Surprise Inchoative and Approximate Verbs

Syntax of Indeclinable Particles

.

.

.

.

f

***,

., .....,,

30^

,$^

306

308 308 309

309- 311

311320

SEOT10H IX "WHICH TEEATS OP THE PBOSODY, O /

Of

the Metrical Feet

xu *

f^>. (pi fT^.|

Of tho Perfect or Standard Feet

,

.

)

.

t

,

322326

COMWTS.

XK

PAGES

Of Imperfect Feet

,

? ?

Of

tie Metres

jjssd\

Classification of the

Of

$

?<S

(pi.

Batffe or the

*

Extended

Of the Metre

TDiaflf, or the

Of the Metre

Sar!

the

Of

the Biff&rmt

d&Uih

Rhyme

f

Of the Kifah the

iw

Ka!dah

Of the Bubi't

^^

,

.

.

Poetio Licence

328329

..,.,,

*.....

334 334-^.335

335

335336

336337 337338

338342

.

and tho Ghazal

^

.

.

.

* **"

330

339340 340

,

B41

341-342

,

,.,,.,,

342343

'

*

333^,334

336

.......,.,.,

^i3Ji

325

326337

*.*

ifju^l

Of the Muzdawj

Conclusion

,

l&nti of Poems V

Of

*

or the Proximate

oy

324-

,......

the Metre Bajaz;, or the Tremulous

Of

Of

Nimble

or the Eapid

y

.

...,*,, ..,.....

or the Perfect

Of

.

,

Of the Metre Kamil,

Of the Moire Muta^arib,

.

333

or the Exuberant

,

.

long

Of the Metre Wafir,

?

.

...,..,.

of^es?).

Metres

foe Metre Tawil, or the

Of the Metre

S

<*

.

t

*

.

*

*

.

.

S43-

344

EBRATA. pu.r

UNI

17

2-3

21

f>

29

1.3

30

1

39

11

42

19

6

Jot'

"on,"

>; "of

rt'ttrf

"of the

frtzrf

vowel.'*

nw

"thus," " " for begin/* read begin with."

for "as,"

>' C^Jj'J

read

"an

>r U^^

48, last line but one, fop

SO

"niuVi "

vowel,"

/or

JliLO

<

old

rm^

man,"

^^aJi

"old men,"

i^jL) v

50

13

ybr "quicwcnt,"

55

11

for

wad

"inert."

road "jwuticloK."

**partIciploH,"

57

u thoir 17 ^br^'in other," rea$ oilier/*

58

25

omit the two words,

(H

19

" for "positive," read comparative."

G
17 and 20, omit the

**

$

J^^

or."

word "both,"

M

21

80

7

OG

19

for "Grammar,"

102

24

jfor

129

17

165

14

,/br

/;>

mtf "AoSfwt." wad " Ortunmawi." "Indefinite/* r^/ "Aorist." "future/'

-

?

"*

omit the two wowlb, "or

" )j|

215

19

/ar "adwtributiou of individuality," road w distribution or individuality* 1 '

284

24

for "conjunction

u

n

raw?

<*

particle tj

ARABIC GRAMMAR. SECTION the Letters

Of 1.

THE

Arabs, like

I.

and Symbols used tlie

in

Writing.

ancient Phoenicians, the Jews and

Samaritans, write and read their letters from right to left

;

The hence their books tegin at what we should call the end. Arabic Alphabet* consists of twenty-eight letters, all of which are considered as consonants. Most of these assume different forms

(some three, and a few others

four), according

commencement, middle, or end of a combined group of letters, as may be seen in the following Thus, in a combination of three or more Table, Column T. as they are situated at the

letters,

the

first

of the group, on the right-hand side, will

haye the form marked Initial ; the the

first

last,

and

on the

last will left,

character

;

be learned

Column

I.

Arabic character ;

III* the detached first;

between

have the form marked Medial ; and the

will have the Final form.

that in this Table, letters in the

letter or letters

contains the II.

Observe,

also,

names of the

the same ia

form of the

letters,

and IY. the corresponding English letttou

* The Alphabet here* described is used, generally speaking, By all those nations who have adopted the religion of Muhammad ; riz-, the people inhabiting the North-west, the North, and the East of Africa, the Turks, the Arabs, tho Persians, the Afgpns, and the

Husalm&n portion of the psople

'

j>f

India and

THE ALPHABET.

THE ARABIC ALPHABET. I

II.

in,

V.

IV.

VI. roRM.

DETACHED FOEM.

Final

Mod ImU

Final.

iul, ;

U L-S

\3

ts

U

tha

o

:

|WVW

th

fim

u. dal

3

t

h

t

Mi

t

J* de

tl

dh

a

cX

J j nn sh

u6

*

ImfutL

THE ALPHABET. THE ABABIC ALPHABET

Continued.

OF THE SOUND** OF THE LETTERS,

4

Besides tho foregoing twenty-eight letters additional (--), (

),

i

here are live

marks or symbols used in writing, viz. ( and (~), with which the student may hero

The

familiarise himself.

firt

is

culled F
(

),

T

),

at oiwe

whieh when

placed over a letter Indicates the presence of the short vowoi

uXU

tlnis,

,

und indicating

()

2nd, Kanra

fftfafc.

taidc r a

Idler

i

plueed

% ^ biki 3rd. Dauuwt which when placed over a letter indicates the* ]>r<js<'n
short

UH in

(

)?

of*

a

*

?

whciii

pkeoil

ovc^r

n letter denote that none of

the*

vowels immediately tblloww; JhnL h\\\* T<whtfitl(~ ), whieh when placed over a letter indicate that mich

nliort

letter in (toubU^l, aw in the

3,

Perliupn the

First, to

best

mode

V

//-arr.

of learning the Alphuhot,

wtile out several tinier the dcitached or 1

the letters in Column. Ill* (if

word

tranfifoir,

in

(jxliil)it(*d

is,

foniw of

Secondly, io olwerve wliut eliungen

any) theso uiHlorgo, wlien combiiuul

words, UH

full

Column V,

in ilic

fonnution of

Luslly, to endeavour Io

into their corresponding Englisli

given as oacompliiioutions in Column

VL

l(tU<jj*H,

Th(*H
the words

wordn are

three in rmml>or, and are to be road, of coiuw*, from right to loft.

Tlioy

tho leading

show

Icsttor,

at once the yuriouK phaneH tisHuined

whether

initial,

nm!m!$ or Jinal.

At

by the

an exercise for tho student we have givou u sprinkling of the fivo Bymboln above noticed. Biiirio

time, as

Of 4,

the

The following

of

ih0

twolvcj letters

n^itm

very

litllo

notice

OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS,

5

as their respective sounds are sufficiently represented

by the

English letters opposite to each in Column IV. The letter " c_> b has the sound of our I in ball;" LJ th^ that of our tk " " " thin

in

j

that of oiir

/,

^

as in "zeal;"

$,

uJ

_

;"

/, as in

w, as in

?/ ?

^

w

as in

* h,

jar ;"

j

^

"sin;"

r,

as in

sh, as in

river ;"

"shin;

J?

"kin;" J /, as in "land;" * "hand." To these we may add

^ when

beginning a word or syllable u being that of our iv in war," and that of

the consonants j and

the sound of

as in

in

L!//^ ? as in

"fin;"

"man;"

s,

j

;

^

These

our y in "yard."

last,

however, when not

initial,

contribute to the formation of long vowels and diphthongs, of

which we

shall treat hereafter, in their proper place.

There are some instances in which the letter J lam of the ox " article Jl al, the/' changes its proper sound in accordance with the initial letter of the substantive to which the article is prefixed (See a.

5.

"We

shall

now endeavour

to give a concise description of

such Arabic letters as have no exact corresponding sound in our

own language

premising, at the same time, that

;

it is

rather a difficult task to convey in writing, in such cases, a correct idea of the pronunciation of foreign letters.

only do so approximately, guages, site

among our

sounds.

of students

by us

by having

"We can

recourse to such lan-

neighbours, as happen to have the requi-

It is highly probable, however, that the majority

may be unacquainted with the languages employed

as illustrations

rule, that the correct

:

hence, it clearly follow^ as a general

sounds of such letters as differ from our

own, must be learned by

the e#r~-we

may

say,

by a good ear;

OF THE 80XJNDS OF THK LETTERS, und, c0nscqueiitly? a long description

applies in particular to tho letters cj> 3

-, ?

^

43 ?

j, and tho various sounds assumed by the

At

The remark

is needless.

3U^

3

letter

^

c

c,

?

^.

beginning of a word or syllable, the letter alif^ like any other consonant, depends for its sound on tho accompanying vowel of itself, it is a very weak anpiratc, like our 6.

tlie

I

:

h in

words

tlio

honour^

Jierl,

and

Unu

identified witli the spiritus

as a7To eVlj op$o9 ?

In

whon we

fact,

Blight

where

?

tlio

It IB

/tour.

of

?

(

)

rejnmmiB Hut

mencomout of utterance


and ub tlmro

utter the syllables ah, ib $

movement of the

elonoly

uch words

Greek, in

llio

apostrophe

more

still

9

IB

a

nuiscloH of tlie throat at the com;

and

t3io

part Vhoro that

movcnumt

takes place, the Oriental grammarians conider to bo the ma$i-

L

of utterance" of tho comontmt fm\ or "place * w

c,

words

4-^1

a5 ?

L^\

ib^

and

c->\ nb^

form the w&KhrQj of

5,

iwd

may bo

or

Phially, tlio

weak

I

juat the

in the nyllablcsB

^

*

Rtim<*

tlio

^/i/fltm tente,

above examples ought

to ImTe been accompanied with tho symbol called luimsm

It

;

prcBcnt stage of

Ms

iiBeless

t^jl &&,

tliuft,

would to quite preposterous however,

some and

to

The very

prjlx

Iho

best Arabic

5.

"

f ka

Bfiiilitut

Ks***

n^raj

irn'&'al

denotes

J)5) as

at tlio

thin etiiiibur-

Ommmnr

laugiiiigOj llml of I)r* Jkumadeu, eschews throughout

la combination with the

(Be

c^l M, and <^1 ub*

progress by carrying along with tw

symbol.

iu4 jJ

.

a. Strictly spoakiug, tlio initial &lif In the

mark

an tho lips

bw{) oj M/,

considered as

aspirate of tho letter

well as tho essoutial vowel

us in iho

P

i*

tlio

iu

urn of

our tlio

^//I

"

the place of f'tuiwiou/' or

1

place of utterance* of a nyllabh consl^iug of a

ancl

a

OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS,

Thus, in the syllable L.J Id, L~> '

vowel.

II,

and

cL>

7

or of * m&, +

t>&,

\,

\

9

mi,

and * m&, the place of utterance

-

raj of the letters

ha,

and

is

c 'ain is

between the

lips

:

so the

maKh-

in the lower part of the throat,

and their true sounds can be acquired only from the rnouth of an Arab. 7.

c^

t.

Tlte

sound of

than that of the English ?r;

or with the

t

this letter is softer t.

It corresponds

of the Italians in the

and more dental

with the Sanskrit

words "$0#fo" and

"petto" c*j th is

8.

"

sounded, as has been said

thin," or the Q theta of the Greeks

and Syria frequently confound

The Turks,

described.

it

4, like

our th in

but the natives of Egypt with the letter c^> t, just ;

and other Musalman people the sound of $. In fact, it would

Persians,

to the eastward, give it

appear that most nations haye an aversion to the aspirate which to us seems such an easy sound.

_ h

9.

is

a very strong aspirate,

somewhat

tk,

like our h in the

word "haul," but uttered by compressing the lower muscles of the throat.

It will be represented in the

Boman

character

by k 10.

M

has a sound like the ch in the word "loch" as

pronounced by the Scotch and IrisE ; or the final German #4 " in the word buch." It will be represented in the Boman character

by M*

Grammar published at Vienna, in 4to. 1813, by a *' Trireverend gentleman named Antonio Aryda, who $tyles himself *' polis Syrise Archipreslbyter/' we ara told, sensibly enough, that f a,

In an Arabic

promiaciatur nti

% Gwcorum* sa

foti

w velnti Germaniouin oh

TO-

smcms

OF Tire

calem a subsoquens." author adds,

explicit, tlic

d lias a

softer

corresponds to the

languages except

utl chrr

;

relation

we

^

j

i,o

aliall

tLut

c^

had

if w<j

etc.,

it in

like

CL^ it

It Tbearn ilio naino

z*

^

^rr/A,

According

by

Eoman

14*

j

rofij)ccliv(ly,

I

wliih

th<s

f

A it

mund ilut

by

W^

upp
uitrl

j

////

of

wight hstw

Ibun our tip of

1

j?.

th it in

ni>r<%Kcnt

?.

pronouncod by the Arabs

IB

Alphabet hud two

exactly (o flic *jtj

Dr. J/ums
character "by

<}

ctlut-

r/A,

retained*

Btill

tongue preswid against tlio

Unman

In the

/,

33, ^0 $ has a ntrongor or nioro hissing to

European

words "thy " HoinHimos wmndod

that the Anglo-riuxou

fiir/t

Arabs, viz, p ///% and

tlio

of most

/7

It


Boft th in llio

has to

/A

distinct characters corrcBpomling

been as well

qwin, nd

English.

uniformly rtijnx^ont

a ouriouH

Ji is

rfuliieieully

HOIIO

! / /

or the

ig[,

and in Turkey, Porsia,

like d,

n

not

enm

and more dental sound than our

Sanskrit

tlio

WTO

however,

thw,

In Egypt and Syria

or "ihino."

,

If

ad amiiBsmi congruit

sounded like our

12. J dh is

raetc^r

"

so prseparans, clicet

spuondum 11. A

AB

OF THE

like*

a hard

4

by

tongue against the upper tooth on, ono wdo of the month, generally the loft* Tn the Itoiaan diameter wo pressing

uso for 15,

it d.

^

cj and

Eoman

tlio

f

j,

The

and

fe

PcTOian^, ota, SOTIIK!

&

Tlioso letters aro woundcsd

or vory nearly

character etc*

it like 1 &.

by

t

and ^

BO,

Wo

Hom<what

roproflont

tlii^in

like

in the

r

Tlio consonant

has

UM

miru*

wktion

to

OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS.

the strong aspirate \

?

a spiritus

is

c

,

lenis

that or

has to

\

weak

a

that

;

aspirate

is,

9

the

like the

^

but the makhraj] or

;

down in the muscles of With this distinction, its

place of utterance, of the c is lower

the throat than that of the sound,

we may

if

alif.

use the expression, depends as in the case

on the accompanying vowel, as c-^c 'ab y i_~^ $, u-^c ^# which, in the mouth of an Arab, are different from c-jj ab, LJ\ ib, and Lj\ ub. In the Eoman character the of the letter ?

1

,

?

?

At

the same

time, it is impossible to explain in writing the true

sound of

be represented by the spiritws

'ain will

).

not to be found in any European language,

we know.

The student who has not the advantage

;

as

of a competent teacher,

may treat

the

he has the opportunity of learning from the mouth of a native. a.

?

it is

this letter

so far as

lenis (

c

its

as

he does the

true sound

by

\,

until

the ear,

ISome grammarians have favoured us with descriptions, most

MemnsM says that amusingly absurd, of this indescribable Tetter, " the sound of it is instar vocis vituli niatrem vocantis," Yriemoet, a Dutch savant, in his Arabic Grammar published at Tranequer, 1733, " calls it an adspiratio forfcissima/' and represents it by hhh 111 which I suppose. means h to the third power. Most grammarians tell us that is

it is

the

same

as the

Hebrew y ain; but then

a very disputed point, even

one of the sounds given to

it

among

by

the Jews

the latter, viz.

;

the

Hebrew ain

itself

and most assuredly

nyf

is

not that of *

$&

'

' i

Arabs.

has a sound somewhat like

"

sagen"

g

in the

Ctenaa word

About the banks of the Tweed, $ie natives sound

what they fancy

to

be the

letter

r v&ry like the Eastern i ?

a peculiarity well kaowft as the j^ot&umbrian lurr, or

?

OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LE1TBRH.

ID

the EomaB. character

jk

18.

"

when

r of the French

We

grass&j'e."

shall represent

in

it

by j$.

bears some resemblance to our c hard, in the words

that the j in uttered "calm," "cup;" with this diftorouco, In the "Roman chafrom the lower muscles of the tliroat racter it will

19,

u

be represented by This letter

n.

1st

cumstances.

that

consonant,

IB

or

C/

?

words letter

it

followed

by

c? ^,

ia,

c^ e^ 7

1,

2nd.

When

ontrcz,"

Greek;

?

o, 3 j,

^5

5

or

,

^,

^

followed

^

^j

?

it

and "reudre."

3rd-

it

KoimdiHl

i

of

by any

<>? ^> ^

naturally bocontcB m, as

for example, the

is

worcl^

written *
Wluui the

'antHtr,

m

cir-

or a guttural

by a vowel

followtul

CJUHC^

tlio

*-*

o^

has a naaal sound like that of the French n

"

v

variouBly Rounded according to

When

exactly aw in EngliBlu fifteen letters,

L

in tlio

the

by

in Lntin and in

pro-

^

^^*

"amlM^r,"

imiiml of u^-w

nounced UB if toW a from tho liouso," they Bay mm-Mli*

4tlu

When

3

the letter

w

n

followed

is

by any

of

tlio

coukwo

or ^ w, tho two IctttTH ^ m, a min-rMl f froin and Greek: thus H??Jj

J

four liquid*

j

r,

us in Lntin

?,

^

.

^

notmced mirrMi /

BO

x

5J **

^

er?

my

lonl,"

mm^mkti

^

in

pro

^

*M cr*^

^"

,c

in ^ fi IB followed &0I/4 ote, Lastly, wlum a word ending or ^ /A tlio wound of f hn ^ n by a word beginning with ^ w is scarcely perceptible, Init tlic s and g? aro doubled, tiiun

4/^5 so

crJ nin-wtitidly

ll^

"from

^ M~y&^c(t(Idma

howowr, ^ w

in tho

my

father,"

becomes

middle of a word

in

folk wed

by

tin*

OF THE SHOBT VOWELS.

w

11

^

y it retains its natural sound; words ^\j& Mnwanu and \JJ dunya.

sonants ^

20.

i*

or

The

#.

letter * A, at the

marked with two dots above exactly like the letter c^> letter,

and

it,

S

'i

which case

what

is

is

frequently

we

called a servile

gender of

shall see hereafter.

a peculiar form of lam and alify

la,

sounded

it is

chiefly used to denote the feminine

is

or

in

It is then

t.

substantives and adjectives as 21.

end of a word,

as in the

in

is

many

grammars stuck in at the end of the table of letters, with a view apparently to puzzle the student.

shew that the

Its purport,

I be-

a or letter of prolongation (see 27) but then any other consonant followed by alif, such as b 55, \J ta, etc., would have answered the purpose lieve, is to

alif is a long

3

equally well

mode

;

or it

may be

of combining the

intended to exhibit the ordinary

J and

\

in writing and printing.

*>

-

9

the Primitive or

Of 22.

The Primitive Vowels

are three in number,

The

simple notation. tetijatfyt, it

and

belongs.

in the word

the jjj,

Short Vowels

first

is

Its

"

first

briefly noticed in

2,

of the primitive vowels is called

(~) over the consonant

that of a short a ? such as

is

to

which

we h$v

calamus/' which is of Eastern origin, and of wjtjioi.

two syllables or

Dr.

we

SS^S

c^l^Jl,

which are indicated by the following

writen thus,

sound

as

S

root,

Lmm&den aud

calam or

M0% are

several eminent

^

have considered the fatka as equivalent to Aort u in " words SUB" aad "rammer," "Wt Im&Mioj^ howev% Jwwe^otf

in saying thai (in the Ara&fe

ta$A$e

especially) our

12

01?

THE SHORT VOWELS.

In pronot generally a true representation of fathn. nouncing the short it of sun^ the mouth is mow shut than in

u

is

and calendar ; and pronouncing the a in the words calamus so happens, moreover, that the very signification of the

it

term as

" fai/ia

we may

unmarked and "

In such Arabic words,

open,"

is^

is

calendar.

tinder the

is

called

/rwm

^f

consonant to which

generally that of our nhort

i

It

erf

a in "ealaimw" or

,

and

has a sound like our short

limn

IB

((

^ and

written

Bound

IB

" and " Bin iin,"

^j.

the words

e in

(~)

Tin

belongs

in tho wordn

which in Arabic would be written it

a

5*

The second

23,

tlio

understood always to represent the vowel yW/w,

have no other Bound than that

to

thcivforo,

Roman clwwtors,

have occasion to write in

OcouHioiially

"lxd" and

5)

which words would bo most nearly represented iu In gcaiowl, liow(^ver the Icmm has the Arabic as AJ and aJ. "fed,

?

X

sound of out whorl i: the tmimirkod of this

work

in

understood to

and ^fin,""!!!

tlioroforc^ in

(lie,

t'ourwo

nonnd of

iu

"MU"

lave*, tljo

worcln writfeu

Oriental

all

,

i

in the,

character,

24,

Tho

ASU 9 whicli

third is called

written over

its

consonant* "

short u in tho words

Ite

bull" and

sotmd

?

busli/

tlnw (-^)

like that of our

in

a

in

which

in Arabic

would bo written jl and jjfij wo have ite sound ulo in tlio a words "foot" and hood," which would bo writton c^J and :

43^.

jsotrnd

SomolimcH in the

modem

Arabia

the*

lim a

approaching our short o in tho word "wolomn;"

example tho word

t

jXi "labour*" IB

for in-

OF TANWIN OB NOTATION,

We shall,

stead of shughL

however, in this work uniformly

damma by the "unmarked

represent the

Oriental words in the

13

Eoman

which, in

u^

have

character, is understood to

the sound of u in "bull" and

"bush;" but never "

our u in such words as "usage" and

all

that of

perfume/', or such as

"sun" and "fun."

our u in

Of Tanwm

Nunation

or

Sometimes the preceding short vowels are, in a peculiar manner, employed for a particular purpose on the last letter 25.

of a word,

which process

called t&nwin or nunation, that

is

the use or application of the letter in Arabic

grammar

^

mark the

serves to

The

n.

is,

tanwin, which

inflexions of a noun,

formed by doubling the vowel-point of the last letter, which indicates at once its presence and its sound ; the last is

*

m

syllable thus

becoming u%

t

in,

The

labun, <_>U labin, tfb Voban.

fatha, requires the letter

the sound of

he

,

which does

final syllable.

liiL. hi/cmatan ; or (in

\

As a case

;

when

which case the

\

the

only

The

word is

words

last form, that of the

noun ends with a ham&a or the

the

by

1

or an y as in the

\

vowel

not, however, prolong

not iequired

is

letter

as

if,

2^ $hai~an,

pfonounced), as j

~

In words ending in

without the tmwin

when

ends in J^ ya^ surmounted

denotes the general rule the termination the Genitive, Dative, or Ablative ; and !^

the Accusative.

c-^b

^

3

^,

surmotinted

or

I

by

1,

or nunatwn, the alif i& sotuxded like the

alif of prolongation,

Of thi0, however, we

27, a$ shsil

^SU

hate more

i$e$i,

(

\^i

*ukla, etc,

to &ay further on*

OF THE JAZM,

14

a.

to be a nasal

nJ

This

is

by

26,

When

^

Koman

final

(Bee

19),

as the latter under

character

we

shall represent

n*

the

Of

when

same modifications

In the

similar circumstances.

nun

said

IB

The tonnlH

simply misleading the learner.

is subject to exactly the

the nUnation

recently printed the tanwln

the sound of the letter

lias precisely

and

Grammars

In some Arabic

+-

Symbol

Jftsm^

or

a consonant Is accompanied "by one of the three *ssp

it is

primitive vowels,

said to bo

cl^su muMmrri/^ that

i^

Arabian gratnnuuiaus moving or moveabk by that vowel. consider a Byllablo as a step or mow in the formation of u

word or sentence a word

;

and, in their language the

letter of

always accompanied,, or movoablo, by a vowel

Is

;

but

with regard to the remaining letters of the word then* in no certain rule, "When, in the middle or end of a word, a ** 1

consonant

^L I*JSH

not accompanied by a vowel, it in " or "inert;" and the mark resting

is

" mldn^

jam, which

" amputation,"

signifies

consonant to shew a*

*

when

is

fluid iu

(-

)

be

to

called

placed over

this is the case*

For example lotus take the word *xc

"

&at&6tumt

you wrote,"

**

you have written," the letters k&fm(( t& ara moveablc by jfatfa ; the letter b& is sSMn or inert; tlion tho following tit m movoablo or

by damma, and a

lottor

the final fottcr

mlm

is inert.

not followed by a Towel

is

In most Arable

called

t/wmmi: now,

object to the latter term, as it is apt to mislead

befag already applied in English sounded*

wo

for instance, tho loiter

oaanot; howofer^

my

that

m

$

Grammar is

is tjuiescenf in

in hi

tlie

It

of

tfao lite

word

the siuno

I

virordi

mt ;

though

OF THE TASHBID.

we may say

that

it is inert.

mind, then, that in followed

work a

this

by a vowel

sounded at

The student

when we

;

15

will "be pleased to bear in

be inert when

letter is said to

we mean

call it quiescent,

that

it is

not

it is

not

all.

O-GJOX

Of

When

27.

which

word

Symbol Tashdid

the

a letter

is

doubled, the

mark

(

signifies corrolboration, is placed over

where the

c^I-a> shid-datj

and the next begins with

mode

jjjuuLsJU

*j

d,

called tashdid,

)

Thus, in the

it.

syllable ends with

first

*>

d

instead of following the natural

cjj<x, the two dais are united, and the indicates this union. Hence, whenever we see a

of writing, as,

mark

by the same one, we may rest assured that vowel between them thus the word c^>jU with the

letter followed

there

is

a

;

on the dal

tashd'id

sounded maddat, but the word

is

<j>li

is

pronounced madad, In certain instances the symbol tashdld is employed for the sake

a.

of euphony,

when an

inert letter is followed

having a cognate sound, or 'one which the former, thtis

c^JjU

is

s s

and written c^>iX the tashdld to US

shew that

it

o x

u^iJ

c->

In like manner the

J1, "the," coalesces with the

following

when

it is

what

be noticed hereafter when already pointed out

n

final

u

article

^

capable of coalescing with

(

inert is subject,

(See I 25).

J

is

marked with

has coalesced with the preceding j d; so

labitta for labit&ta.

*"

different letter

pronounced, not madadtu, but madattu,

which case the

in

is

by a

is

J

initial letter

I

of the definite

of the substantive

technically called a solcvr lettet, as will

we come

to treat of tto A^t^oh.

19) the changes in

a$d the saw

In some instances the

Ms final

wmA applies

n&n

is

We

have

to which the final

the

n&natum

changed

into that

to

10

OF THE LKTTER8 OF PROLONGATION.

which

^y

follows, as

It is needless to

mim~mm

say that this

is

for

win-man

; 11

ilia for in-la, etc,

a general rule in the composition of

words in Latin and Greek* P 9

<wXtr*O

the Letters

Of The

28.

of ProUngatim-$j&\ uJ^p-

and ^, when ew^, servo

letters 1,^,

the preceding vowel^ as follows

a letter moYcable

:

when

in Arable might be written

we may

ciple,

also

and

m

JW

preceded by alif tog< .tlior form a k

which

in "haul,"

()u a wmilar prin-

.

consider the unanpirated h as a letter of pro-

longation in the

may

J\j

to prolong

inert in

\

l)j faiha, tfofalha and

long sound like our a in "war," or

*

German words "wahr" and

consider

tho

second

as

inert

a

^ahi n

in

the

W(\

"aaclien" and "waal."

When

29,

tho letter 3 in&rt

is

ptecc^iKl

by a connouuut

by tho vowc l (fammd, tho dtmmtt and ^ johtctt toour o
v

?

w in

"

5

rule/ which

tlie

Arabs would writo J^J.

If the latter j

be preceded by a consonant movoaWo by fallt^ tho ///// and j " united will form a diphthong, nearly like our ou in Hound,"

m

o^ in "town " but more exactly like in tho Gorman word "kaum," which in Arabic might bo written ^L If or

?

tho j be preceded

and tho

by the vowel tor

3

no

union, takow plaec%

sound as a consonant, as ia In English, tho ^ is a lottor of pro-

^ prewerves its natural

tho word 1^ siwa. longation in

many

words, as "draw," "crow," etc.;

contributes to tho formation of a diphthong,

"gown,"

etc.

m

in

it also

OF THE LETTERS OF PROLONGATION.

When

^

1

preceded by a consonant moveable by kasra, the kasra and the <_$ unite, and form a 30.

the letter

long vowel, like our written jli

"

or,

;

ee in

which

inert is

"feel," which in Arabic might be

the same thing,

is

machine," which wonld be written

^

letter

is

the

letter

as in the

y

a

is

say" and "key;"

a diphthong in the

be written a,

The

of

letter it

but which, in

reality,

preceded by damma^ no retains its usual sound as

^ ^

word

written j$* " size," wise,"

is

"

in

i

to call a vowel,

When

a diphthong.

a consonant,

own

really that of our

union takes place, and the


"When the

^&*.

german word Kaiser, which in Arabic

which we are pleased

the

is

^^

In English in the words

muyassar.

prolongation

also contributes to the formation of

word "buy," which in Arabic might

.

^J>

three letters of prolongation

],

j

and

9

are occasionally

^,

liable to certain deviations from the rules above laid 'down.

subject will be

more

present that the letters of prolongation

Suffice it for

M

damma

1,

\ 9

when

This

to treat

us to say at

are said to pos-

fatfya

is

placed

over thai which

^; when

that which, precedes

^

and j>

homogeneous or natural vowels,

the consonant that precedes

kasra

when we come

fully elplained hereafter

of the permutation of the infirm letters.

sess their

in

preceded by a consonant, moveable by fatha^ and the ^ unite, and form a diphthong, like ai

This sound

is

i

inert is

the faffia in the

like our

is j&ot

tdiis

vowels and

letters of prolongation are said to

dissimilar.

When

be

he^Qff^&>^

or

Atp letters, the %Whog %,^ J|t^ J^ shown, thus,

a fc$terog/

vowel pr@cf$H 1

"

*r

s

i

j

w

4

^

two together either fowl a Ss Ox SbS

JJ

lattun,

j*^

s

t

f

'

jauharun> o^ fte last

i

r

/

f

Mw may

remain

silent,

a^

OF THK LETTERS

18

^j

rama

and.

PttOf,ON*.\TlON.

Ol*

in which hvo AJL* sal&t;

lust

^

word? the

and

^

arc really quiescent or not sounded*

what

31. It appears thru, from

preceding paragraphs, eight in number,

and

3.

ii.

;

two diphthongB, as may bo HOHI I,

L

throe short

/w?/

HIIORT,

**i.

the mine three long;

in th<* following table: 1,

l.OM**

fc4 f^f

fail

foot

Jin

in tho six

wounds in Arabic are

tho voual

thai.

viz., 1.

have Htatfd

we*

fmi

f*k

JU s.

>

/

>/

////

Here tho upper

line

comtnoti oo-CTirroiHio,

Bout thoso of

(1) oojilainH

1

tli
Houndn
wonln

Kn^Iish

tngfif

tuiifonnly

Hy,s(ii!i

for

of

of w}tif*h fairly rcprcv

c*uc*li

Anibi* words umi<*rm*ath.

lowcnt line (8) exhibitH tbo

wwk

yfr/y

The

1


in the oourso of lhi

///

///

r<*|in\si*!iliiig

uliiw
to

Arabic, wcmls in

tho lloman character. 82*

Wo

Jiavo now,

\n!

tnis< t

vowclw aro to bo repreHented eonsoiiant ? mieh

words.

In

monemg

a word,

an

tli

orclcr to

havo merely

it

whc*ii

Idler uJ

rc^rri^cmt

tlici

/

in

effected.

vowels an

withdraw

though not

in

Thk

a/ymranM.

into thcur Iujad

liaro

which

in, i!Al!

in

flie

aw audible

in llu* foregoing lint of

eom*

initial or

io lite Htudont that tin* letter

tho above wordrt, having cwrrything olne iw the object

Iiow

<*xplin**(l

flify fulluw

omir

will at once

to annihilate or

fully

it

prcciwly what

/

tJ

we

from

Minuet^ ami

wo

do

in i

The Arabian

a tnont nubtln crotohot

w word w m/l/M^ em

oti thi tt

OF THE LEOTE&S OF PROLONGATION,

we

Therefore, to represent wliat

a vowel

is,

letter

commencing a word or

1

We

have already stated

as a very

1

initial

weak

syllable,

6) that they consider

(

hence

aspirate or spiritus lenis ;

presence supports the above theory, at least to the eye,

preceding paragraph as

or very nearly

so,

we

initial,

the letter uJ /, substitute

not

\

must, after taking

in its place,

which

\

away

being nothing,

the process amounts in reality to the with-

^

drawal of the letter

be considered as next 1.

if

its

In order, then, to exhibit the vowels in the

to the ear.

1.

tliat

vowel,

they employ the alif (otherwise called Jum&a) as a fulcrum for the

vowel.

the

an

call

19

/,

and the substitution of what may thus

to nothing^

SHORT.

2.

LONG.

im

in

obt

all

eel

an

in

ut

al

ll

DIPHTHONG.

3

661

aisle

owl

Ul

ail

aul

*

3,

# 33.

If,

instead of

we

1.

in the above series,

wo

substitute the

have virtually the same sounds, only that they must be tittered from the lower muscles of the throat? letter c

thus

,

shall

-

SHORT.

1.

an

in

2.

ut

&l

a. It appears, then, that

with what

w&

LONG*

when

il

3,

*ai

*<&l

in Arabic a

consider to be a vowel, suck

word 6r

letter

we hare

occasion to write mich worete in the

or

^

to start with.

syllable begins

word or

have the

1

DIPHTHONG.

Tteot^hout

syllable

this

Boman

must

work, when

character, the

O? THK LETTERS OF HlOLONii VTloX.

20

corresponding place of sjnntus fails the

flic

thna, J-LJ* \isal

;

same from JJS /m/, AjT

lat.

ing lights,

(

In

)

consider thorn

m

such

Gwk

a^

wor
to

erjuivalotit

honour/'

mere pegs whereupon

to

and the

y

and

st.rictet fttteution, a^

Pruotioally Hpiakiii|/

^

ihuy

hiidttf,

rontributo in

all

He*

flic

may

thorn as 4

to the

n*fjuiHifi '

and

c

i

//^/

?///# 7^

vaiw* na

{^niflld,*r

Hum,

t

tltiw follow-

Kn^liVh words

flw vovvols

hang

In other

JJiiilly,

(h<

Ho may

Lastly,

or

in

/*

fllwftngulsh

tnt<1.

tV, r(<.

loiter

tlu*

oic*.

fix

fonnatiou of the nyllnble, initial,

f

1

a

"hour/' "herb,"

jb

or

ujin.stroplH* or

to

may view iho anil & In any of th* Ho may consider thorn of the unmo

y

splfitws lenh

/W

Ja

abtfl,

ait

A*J /WV/

Y?///W t

J^b

t

respecltf tlio reador

be indicated by

will

.

n*<jinn

nwt

i*ut*.h

M> tin* f^rniaiion

of several vocal i.

In concluding our account of the

Arabic consonants and vowelB

down

rules laid

as the language

with the

we

are nioi'oly (tpproirt/Mih*,

Muhammadan

rellgioi^

terns quite aunt a UudibuH

ovr

higher classes,

it

it

forum

it

w

ri4%^///\

Iwliu,

prmdjiifl braucli If

Aururum/ othir

atid

and

The

;

from whom, hownvor,

m

ilwy

f:ciinbifiiijiriu

l%,

rtili*s

givi% in

iiiiticniH

mnUkf

prevail at

followed in general by Europoon ato such as have* bocn laid clown

iu

^iliimlmi of tbo

\\\*\

i

tiircnigh

r.ouiifflim

u ccm^itl^mMc tlMHgrc^niont

should eoiwciu^iitly

modes of pronunciation which Constantiuo[>lc, Ispahan, and Delhi

those

ronsitont in ov*n*y point,

(Uiinibtm in

n*jri^iiH l

thoir rospectivo ionguos, te particular l(ttow

Scholiasts

nlong

**

many

(iiiiigi,*ii

can bo no wonder

Yammi

(lum\^mA

tribi'h, IIIH!
should bo found iu the prommoiaUon which Hiw*

that an Arab of

tlini the

1

UBCJIHI

Mauritania^ Egypt, Turkey, IVram* the East, where

licit

of the dialoctn of vurioim

IB

irununciutifn of the

gi'iuntil

are bound to a<*knovdfro

f

;

or

barbfiroui

its

(jnir

r

which Imvo iiuil

by old A minim it

is

diffitr

not lit

to fonii

nmny

and ft

from

one

OF MADBA.

21

another, and often give several opposite pronunciations to the

word, owing to the reasons we have just stated.

same time,

the

many

It

must he

same

confessed, at

and grammarians have laid down and added much perplexity to a

that both the scholiasts

a puerile and tedious rule,

language, not naturally easy, by enlarging on the minute, intricate,

and unsatisfactory theory of the moveable powers of Avowel points,

making

trifles

serious,

embarrassing the learner's mind, and con-

suming, in pursuit of objects comparatively uninteresting, that time which might be more usefully employed in smoothing the way to the essential difficulties of the study. Out of this mass of pedantry

and confusion however Silvestre de

it

but fair to state that the

is

elicited all the light

and clearness that the student can

Of

the tii/mbol

Madda

34. Instead of writing *

two

word, to exprosss the long

5, as

at the

alifs

in

i>\\

alif^

desire.

i"

beginning of a

o^

in Dictionaries), to write one

eminent

Book of Ms Grammaire Arabe

Sacy has, in the First

ad, it is usual, (except

and according

to

some

grammarians to lay the other curved over the former; thus, u Jf This symbol ( ) is called *2U madda, extension," and .

denotes that the alifis sounded long, like our a in "water,' 7

M. ^

Sacy considers the mark madda as simply the letter mlm, (the initial of the word),* in a recumbent postered cle

Either theory

is

plausible,

The

no great importance.

and

after all the matter

mad^

c6nfined to the beginning of a

howerer,as

word ;

it

two difs would come together, * s s ^ s ?t~*ss

\\f>-

and

Uw

-/

for

fs

s

tfe|

%$v4^

iWli

'

of

p^e^Sirily

occurs both

middle and end of words in those rojsta&oes

M

&0fc

,$s

in the

otherwise wjwe V *o^ '

-

fo#

lUJt

/

;

,

*U~ for

22

OP HAM&V.

The symbol madda

a.

also Inscribed over arithmetical

is

and

i#rw,

likewise over certain abbreviations, said to bo i*x{fiusrdve of Home

A

mystery,

/bdi "mst

single :"

if

* *"

word

represented by the

is

final

""^

^

of the second are used,

"

**

JL*M

for

and the " I

am

the initial of the

the most wise God,"

y

a inMial of

iirttt,

Arabian

Among

9

\, 1,

uo

arc

for

wliicili

J^V

yauianu.

I

^^1

km:M

/y/W to bi) u radical

wo

it

^

and

^


1,

an

?

^1

it

i,

11*)

In tho following pages

wo

only in those instances wliero woxild be improper.

jjjj

an ^

Whim

for lira

put for

i,

>^i

te> for jjlU

intend to employ tho

it is

Bacli IB tho plan adopted

profomid and oxcelkut wort*

*U

for

^

for J^tt t#mt/,

4^, an f

t*Mi, ^

J

denotes that tlu^ms Id torn but*

^

"'*

^^^

written over j or

supplies tho

',

or m5<^ $}wia 9 *^ sua 9 uwt<wl of ^^ji

movoable

1

*"* *

uhrayH

flnin

it filiown

the caul of u

#

in

T

and

\,

In the Bilddlo, after an inort lotte.r's an y^ or following another \, a^ j3Jl

a.

and

aftoi tho lottery of prolong^itiou H*

>*

Ut

wliieli

1

X-

ma

At

id!!

the conHouanf. alif

attcjiulrt

u^JSf ulhatu; without a vowoi

place of

-V**

Jjs!

of.

employed,

over or under the latter, an

letter, a&

nocoud,

Hevonil word**, their

t

and

flu*

ft,*

hm^

\

Peace be

But wlion thoro ar

more commonly known by the numo cif a a n In bookB |rancturo. pressure" or accompanies the vowol

first

*M

grumimiriatiH

vowc^l-poinls

for

generally tak
most commonly made

whoro the

"

*

final of the third lire

initials are

35,

if three,

*"

tuls,

i

upon him;"

^

iw

there are two wortln, the initial loiter of the A*.^

and the

firwl letter;

or

by

}t

l)r,

In

Mi

23

OF WASLA, S^s

the

Of

Symbol Wasla

JO

J*y or

Wasla (~) implies conjunction, and

36.

O

'

Ly

.

only inscribed

is

beginning of certain words to denote that such word is united with the preceding one. being then silent, as Sx^'O 9 Ox u the holy house;" in which ^jJUll L^-J laitu-l-muJcaddaS) over

1

at the

\

expression the initial alif of the second word or

we may

say,

is

not sounded,

sound of the

practically, that it adopts the

yowel terminating the preceding word. a.

The wasla,

as a matter of course, does not occur at the beginning

of a sentence or after a pause.

In other respects it t^x

is

the following instances, viz.

With

"the"

1.

the article Jl

1

always used in 46),

(see

With the imperative of the primitive form of the verb. 3. In the preterite active, imperative, and infinitive of derived forms of the 2.

verb of the second and third class. 4. In the following ten nouns, " " " " a man ; \j*\ imra, '^\ imr&t, a woman ; ^\ iln or Jjl ibnam, " "a son;" LJ\ i&nat, " a daughter ;" ^^ ithn&n, two "(masculine); X X O

^U

olSl itknat&n, "two" (feminine); X ?**S

"buttocks;"

^^\

when beginning a

aimun,

^1X

1

"

ism,

a

name;"

cuJl!

"an oath;"

in all

which

ist,

X

1

\

cases, unless

sentence, or following the article,, the initial

is

}

not pronounced, the subsequent letter being always inert, and united: in pronunciation to the vowel with XO-^3

which the preceding word ends, as *

,PX

*\~\ oa" yad-umratin, "the hand of a

^

& x

even altogether omitted, as x*Uj&

9

O

woman;" x ^

/

*-

^ ej;Wl

bnu Ilammaminj "Harith the son of

1

being sometimes

t6

e->*x>* J$&ddatha4fy$ritfou*

HaminEm

related."

dropped wlien the subsequent letter has a vowel, a&

"extend thou." precedes ^

1

,

If afty word,

such letter

XXX

oj^

is

whose *^
The

a*

iStoO

fer'a^t

naturally inert,

then pronotmced .geEWaQy witt kasra,' a& *^

dambat) "she whipped;"

mother whipped,"

final letter is

tt

affixed

x*XX?

^l/t^-o^

(^rabati-l'+ummu,

"the

pro&0tm$ If and li, also the verbal

2

THK LKTriMrs

(JLASSIFTOATION OF

J

terminations

and

\j

take

damma*

The

4i

premonition

from/*

1, j, and o^ (fTOuitatmg* the proAny ceding word, does not prevent the union, and ho nfirwlion IH rarely

of the letters

takes fatfia*

I

The

pronounced when wasla follows*

<f

of union naturally takes

kasra when beginning a sentence, or after the uHido; excepting IB the imperative, which sometimes takes (/MW/I, ami iu flu* urticle "*

9\^

imm

which assumes fatba, an does the single

u

^A

outli."

\\\\

Olmsifimiion of t/w 87. Arabian grairmiariaiin

following

licacln

or classon, vix.- L

are called gultuml^

^; four

^

\,

puhlkh)

,

j, vK,

\\

itrra-ngcs

^ ^ ^;

l*rmiuiciitlfan.~~$\\ Iit'

four

*;

oight

and Ungwtfo ate oull
denials

2.

4

Strength.~ nw tlm^o letters r

ooni(lorc(l an

?^/^ being

receive from the

t,

^,

^,

liaving no HOUIK!

accompanying

Hltori

vowdn

themselves or the preceding lottom

/;w

or rolusL

3,

aiv culh^l ////w or

Affinity.

hut

what,

ctit'hnr

All otluw

loltow

Soriu*

itnt

they

utt(nding jr<

ntyled

/wtwttfablt,

aw fonmul hy tho O^UIM, as ^ but particularly ^ ^ w }|i mv ^ m

being such in gmoral a

with

^

j with cj,

Rubstitutocl ^

f

one for another.

othorK

^m&.

^ C C ?

i

?

Thoy

?

J?

1

0/^Bmm an*

The

^U?j^ tP^U

aro twoutjMmit in )

W^^J^'g;

are so called, bcoauHo thoy awi

ecptiiig k the rootn

ft li

?

^J ^, C/, J, f

*wr

or primitive faring of

remaining ovoa arc called ^>w//m IMHSUUW* 5

ii'ii!ii1wr f

<x*

The tln-y UPC

25

CLASSIFICATION OF THE LETTERS.

and various

in forming the derivatives

from the

The

roots.

',

the radicals are never used as

serviles^

which are sometimes substituted

for

excepting t and j 5.

CL>.

Association.

which may follow one another in the or primitive word. The others cannot, and are

are compatible,

same radical

These consist of the gutturals to sometimes subjoined to

therefore called incompatible.

V

however, are often em-

servile letters,

particularly in the imperfect verbs; but

ployed as radicals

Some

inflections resulting

*

C> t?

->

(though

is

*

which add the following, *^> 0*5 u? u*> k, and k

^);

with uJ and *

<-->

viz.,

^ with

;

,

;

^ with

j, and C/; ^ with b, t, and fe; j with J ;

^

and u/; o with 3; 3 with ^o, and ^o ^1 with with u^ and 1? j with L with fe and C/; with jjo, t, and ]o with t and with i and j ; c with j and u/; j with cl/; J with ^OxXx' X " " he manifested." no and except J by means," jf,

^

,

^

;

j

^

^

;

^ ^ ;

;

]

;

^

a.

The infirm

letters

\

,

^

,

and

each other, especially in verbs as

^

,

fe

^

are often liable to be used for

;

these permutations being considered

an infirmity or imperfection.

In the beginning of ja word, how-

ever, they usually retain

except when,

by

their

original sounds

already described,

the influence of certain prefixed inseparable particles,

they virtually cease to be fully discuss hereafter

j

initial.

This, however,

we

shall

more

most grammarians progress would be altogether

to treat of the subject, as

do, at this early stage of the student's

out of place. #.

The

viz., \,

servile letters

c^,

(jw, f,

properly so called, are really seven in number,

&i

39

m&

k$

these letters aaad none else are

employed in the inflections of nouns and j and \s are substituted for CA They

wb^ except that occasionally afre all

included in the word

OP THE VAIUOttS AIUBK* HANWV IUTINUH,

20

lw

"they

literally

that the final

is

I

and of

preterite

We

fatten."

nrny

hw

observe, In

not sounded in tho third jimon

tlio

neither

aoript;

in

it

Tlie lour Id few

person plural of the imperative. O P

J, included in the word ujClb though scryiles, are

merely

adclod (o simply a supplementary iKfer

or S

is

to indicate such

rule is

mere

In fact the

S in

equivalent (n

and

words

;

and

MM! of words

lint

c^

{ctn
into \\iiich

it

frequently changed,

The


servile letters alluded

included as incoinpatiblos only of

<JLf,

?

words to be of the feminine #(nd<*r, and as u

derivatives.

peroTid

granmmrifiiiB as

inseparable particles preiixeil to other

the

*

the

wj, uJ

wkoned hy

of tho

pliinil

^minli'd in

for ^

any word;

any

as

letter,

when acting

iow "in

where the

In the pwwilifig pnnifcnspliH aro

con^ituf** |iri of

may

an H
silver;"

These observations

incnt*"

if)

whon they

may

111*1*

iwt

be joined with in

C53y^ "aefonling ho of HOIUO

flu*

in

thy

niate-

WHiiuwripta,

diacritical points arc either n(*f?lfct(d, or irrrgulitrly jlac
;

ambiguous moamngB; and in dhilu^imMn^ pure from such as arc cither corrupted or d
as also in fixing

Arabic woards sources*

For example, the oceurronco of the

\M^m

*

J

Hint

panying each other in the word Jj$ (Lanrlti Mihlka) suspect that Iho term is not of Arabian origin,

Of

the

Various*

AwJhw

XPI,

Int,

the Kiiflo, though

wo

ancient diaractcr, called the Ilimyaric*

about

tlio

wMoh cian,

to

which M o uro

ut

roact of

f

u

C(*titurio9

from the

was apparently derived from tho the source of tho Greek alphabet of CadmuK* iteolf

niill inoro

Tho Kuflc

time of Muljtemunud and dining Homo lour

It in evidently dorivod

after*

tig

Ifan/dwriiiMyx*

83. Tlic oldoBt Arabic handwriting with all familiar

aceoia*

Ilicini""

2nd. In

OP THE VARIOUS ARABIC HANDWRITINGS.

the second or third centuries after

Muhammad,

27 the Kufic

alphabet was simplified and rounded into the Nasldu^ the

At

form in which

we now have

maintained

ground in the inscriptions on coins,

its

it.

1281, in 'which

a

still

all

it

Hakim

Sanayi, written in A.D.

the headings are in the finest Earfic.

more recent work in his

long

and in the

For instance, the author

headings of literary compositions. possesses a unique copy of

the same time

possession, the

In

Dlwani Katibi

transcribed in A.D. I486, the titles or headings of the various poetical pieces are all in the Kufic character.

the various

we may

used in the East, however, handwritings Ox-

^^ NasJdn

Of

say that

which our extract in the larger type, 43, of the present work, is a fair imitation), is that in which most Arabic manuscripts, and particularly those of the Kuran, are the

(of

round and compact form it is generally used in Europe for printing books in the Arabic, Persian, The TdWt <j^? * s Turkish, and Hindustani languages.

written.

Owing

to its

also a beautiful hand,

used chiefly by the Persians in dis-

seminating copies of their more esteemed authors., sionally

hand a.

meet with some

There are several other hands more or

less used,

such as the

99

Thulthl or cl^iS Thulutk, adopted in the titles of boots, royal

edicts, diplomas, or letters of great

much

Arabic MSS. written in this

chiefly transcribed in Persia.

*P

ijAj

fine

"We occa-

the

same purpose

men

as capitals

in illuminated manuscripts.

hand, employed like the

;

answering among those nations

amongst

The

us, or the flotrrfahed letters

Tu($ir
another ornamental

is

Thulthl in expressing ife titles of their

princes in ceremonial letters &nd solemn d$eds.

add the

jx*

Mactferibi

or Mauritanic, which

is

To

these

we may

used by the

OF THE NUMERICAL VALTHK OF THE LETTERS.

28

of North-western Africa,

band

differs

the Klfic

in

many

who

are descendant** of Hie Arabians,

respects from those above* mentioned, resembling

more than any of the

or broken hand, which

and unadaptod

is

Lastly, Urn

others.

used in correspondence.

Wdlm&to

&Lb

t

It is quite irregular,

but not inelegant in appearance when

for printing;

For a more ample account of

properly written.

This

thin

subject, see

the Appendix

"Essai de Calligraphic Orientalo," Horbin'a " la de 4lo. dcs Laitgiw Anihe," Prlneipes Paris, D6vcloppements u Orannaaini Aralm," 2 vole, 1808. Also the 1st volume of do Sacy'a in

to

works Hjimnu'na of

8vo., Paris, 1881, in both of which

ilia

various

hands arc given* b.

The term SAMctsta

in

generally appliwl to

fins

inirwc: or running

hand used by the people of Persia and Ilinduntjiu also

have their own $Mka&t(t> as well as

eastward, as the student will

find

to

;

Inil

the Arabs

ilicir co-religicnuHtH to the

his cost wlie^i

he COIUCB

to

on clocyphor ordinary letters

Vdw

Of ih 39.

"Wo jaay

IICTC

mention

tliat

of the tlm tw(*n
the Arabic language uro alno nncid for tho purjumc^ of

computation*

Tho Numorical order of

tlui

Nummeal

I^uttiw, how<*vr,

IE this case differs from that given in the Alphuln't In fact,

the

SamaritaB,

identical

of the

via*, to

the letter c^j 400*

tmli

grouped into eight unmeaning technics*

letter;

to

far

thdtr

'JTlio

ib! lowing

the order of the Numerical Alphabet with tho

ing number placed above

being,

JlicBiilcslnii,

the Syriao 7 and the Hebrew, so

alphabets extend, is

amngemont

;

tlm

word**, to norvu OH

u

OP THE NUMERICAL VALUE OF THE LETTERS.

III

Wliere

fill

III

1

denotes one,

c_>

two,

^

three, a four, etc.

The Arabs of Mauritania arrange

a.

they have

slight differences, viz., x

instead of

29

f>

?

u^^i

;

"

j^\

their

^^>

instead of "

?

and JL&, instead of jJi^

the two schemes agree.

About or soon

the Arabs received from the

with the following

In

.

after the

^4^; u^lf >

all

other respects

time of

Muhammad

Hindus the decimal

scale of numeration, which in time they imported into The ten Europe, figures or cyphers are written from left to right and applied exactly like our own;

thus

U

r,

r,

P,

c,

i,

v,

A,

^

r,

\\,

ir,

r.

1,

2,

3,

4,

5,

6,

7,

8,

9,

10,

11,

12,

13.

is

IAI r

For example the Christian year 1862

;

the last half of which

corresponds with the Muslim year 1279 ja "

b.

The dssH

is

used chiefly as a "memoria technica" for recording

the dates of historical events, or the decease of illustrious personages, etc. The plan is to compose a brief sentence or verse of such a

nature that the

Hijra in

sum

of

all

amount

the letters shall

which the event took place.

Jn

to the

year of the

Europe, during the middle

ages, when Latin was the language of literature, such m0m0|isl verses were common. The Latin, however, laboured n&4er this

disadvantage, that

its

alphabet contained only seven Euiaerical letters,

V, X, L, 0, D, and

M

; whereas every one of the letters in Arabic counts for something. A curious coincidence of this kind is to be found in a line from Ovid, written more than fifteen centuries

viz., I,

before the event to

which

it to

applied, vte,-*

OF THE ACCENT.

30

"FILI "Tho

son prematurely makes

amount

put to

to

treason

and

Mud

with which

The

40.

"

on the

**

fa tin T,

I),

JM,

uwnl.

if }>oth

on<

if

Co Hun

the

By

a long nylkblo

wu

of prolongation,

letter

If

iho

otlicmvise

aeconi,

tiic^

,,

language)

long

if

long,

wlii^h,

it,

<>utaiiw

or

inort,

vowel followed by two mmMttut^ of wliich

iaken

tukim

syllable

^

the

?

In worcla

a<*<'
phntiH 1^

or

to

and thi other

nlu^rt

anfcvpontilt

I,

Ambus

nhort or Imfli bcs

coiu-

ihu lnf^'4 of

in

/.

for

[].,

in

Lafin unit Orook,


hero wu*au ono *'.&,

Philip

1

alwvo

of Kjsaiu wan

arAIu iiLm% paX

I-

in 1ho

long? the long syllable nul'umlly iak<s ilm of three or more HyliublcH,

tlu*

L, mid X amount

wn apply

but

;

:

aeijutdnled

HyllublcH, flnst

f hurley

of our Heeoiif! ('Jhnrh

ihoso.

of

Thu following pfluwta

where 0,

;

Baine a

In words of two is

am

1

his Bfeni

IIJH la

Idfw

immorical

which Prince

niloH ri^jK^tinf? the

much the

accent

the,

rebellion,

rexl oration

rogua sorcnat ot agros

are

inquiry into the years of

in

year

mmos."

patrlos, InqVlrfi In

by the comimiwl of

deatli ;

plotting

tlio

15C8,

momoration of the the

DIcM

ante

bo found that the sum of

It will

line

Ys

(ho

it

a

rfiort

firnt

fe

inert.

a.

The greater part of iho wordH

short vowiil, except bafore a yau*c

show;

lioiico

last eyllablo

as

of a

6&0fi other like

OB the in tho

tt

Ambte

(41)

grfii^rally iint in a

we

it

goncnil rule the

wowi

a siring of

laat ay liable/*

first

in

Moul

a0Bcrtion

vowjo of the Kuran, a

fillip

on the

griitriHiiirkiw, tiff iiw^iifly

rfioep, tall

The

Miitill

I

iw that !*

tiio

too

have oftmi

for JicMinl it

fullowlag

mr

4I

my falls

xwiplo,

rail hy

llio

OF THE PAUSE.

the accent of the last

word ralnmis most assuredly on the

The pause

LjifiJ,

last syllable,

Pause.

the

Of 41.

31

which takes place

after a word, being

makes

the last of a period, of a phrase, or of a proposition,

manner of reading

in the

alterations necessary to occurs, the

vowel or nunation of the **

-^ffM

*~'

>-ox

Ju

tt

^slsr

nouncing in the

'Abd ul Hamid has come the nunation of example XO-.O

first

"al Hamid." ^

<3

^ f

If, /'X

~*^

1

??

Z&id has struck me,

.&** ^"'-^

second the final Kasrah of A-^st^l

last letter is suppressed

;

XX-*

iTO/-

xc-o

In general, when a pause

be noticed.

thus, instead of saying jjj

some

or pronouncing that word,

,

to me,

juj Cx-

we say only jjj

pro-

and in the

,

"

7>

Zaid,

however, the nunation

and

33

is

T

and

as in

*-r-

We have not seen Muhammad," example Ij^si^ \j J the ^ of the nunation is only dropped, and the fatha followed this

by

\

is

preserved, thus

Analogous to the preceding rule "there are certain forms of the Aorist and Imperative of verbs, which, under the influence of certain a.

particles, terminate in is

^

inert, in

which case the

^

before the pause

withdrawn in pronunciation, and the word is pronounced as if, the ^ were followed by its homogeneous

vowel immediately preceding the

x ^<>x

Cx'^t'X

letter of prolongation, thus l-oij for ^-suij; O^C.-"

for

^;

however,

L^l

we

for

shall treat

^?0^

more

bpjtb?

x

1

.^^

^; ^ for.^; ^1 OxPCv^

X-CO/

9<*

O

?(Jp

for

ft*

C-

for

^Vx*

x

^j-&&; ^j^y, ^V^

^t

*

.

Of

this,

fully hereafter, as the Discussion at the

present stage of the student's progress would be altogether premature.

42,

Marks

or symbols coirroapOEdiiig to

our

full

stops,

KXKKCISK IX RKAOLW*

found in any manuscript, u nfhor ICirnin In and low the books, wliero they excepting Sj

etc.,

are seldom to bo

by marks

arc expressed

$

Hunilur fo

*

v

.*.

;

d* Poetic quotations are generally disfinfcutehwi "5

**

prefixed, as Ja3

O

Ua3

*

didielu" c L*^ ^*

"stroph(/' otc v Hie yoiwH being clo^ad

lit

Iy

publications*

employed

hi

nty

The ctmwia and mwwfatt

small daIi, thus, -*;

I**ivimt

will

IIH

Ik curvo

Is

bo utlopfod

mul

IIjtuliiHtiinl

ri*fn\4ot!li*d

paruso wlwit

be Been from fb

wo have

howovor,

tlio

text,

said

on the

Article!

tlie

;

by

mul

unt*

fko

in the

Following extract hiiu?ttr.

*itud<*iil

in

a

to

H<jforo

rcnjausted to

4(5,

The following Fablo from

43, ?

will sorvo l>oth a

Illustration of

MTO

may

f

subjoined n transcript in tho iloiniin

trying to docyplier

linns

will

full stop by ti t*iar fliun, and admiration by UIWP wit symbols of interrogation

which

1

h^iuiHlich/

*

tlin

European languages, as

certain

"

/<,

In the present work a ayntem of ptHidmtfioti

sucli as 1 adrantagofHiBly

He.

by Iiaving

*t

**

"pooiry/ ci^u

resembling inverted cominurt, i.

s

*

1

words 5

Cv

;;

:

ait

om mode of puwottuitiou

adopted for roprosoating

letters.

Lu]<man, tfi oxoreio lit rtitiliiig und UH an

It will

at tko

tlio

alno of th'

Arabia charnatrr

tliao

principles of orthography 'already

;

ox<*mt>lify

^inn lit

we

Homan of the

EXERCISE

Iff

33

HEADING O O-*O

>>

Al-insdnu wa-l-Khinzlru.

Insanun marratan hamala Jtf&mzlrun;

*ala

bah rtma>tin kabskan

wa tama/yaka ila-l madlnati

wa-l-anzu fa-lam yafcUnft yadrib&ni yhinziru fa-innahu hand la-ku~l-insanu, ya

li-labaniha ;

wa

li-yabl* a-*l~jam%a* y

ala~l~b&hlmati ;

yu'amdu daiman, wa

la

'anzan

wa

Fa-l-kabshu

wa amma-l-

yahda*

asharra-l-wuhnshi ! Iima-dha4-kabsh

ktitun? la yadribani, la~ku~l~Mii%,zlru,

wa

wa

anta la tahdfc rod

la,

ana a'lamu anna~l~kabsha yutlabu ana-sh-shafylyu la silfa

ll

tastafyirru. li-sufi/d,

n>& la labana.

wa-l-anzu

Ana

'inda

wusull ila-l-madlnati ^trsalu ila-l-maslaJrfd, la mafyalata*

THE MAN AND THE HOG, A man

once upon a time was conveying on his quadruped a

a she-goat, and a hog ; and he was proceeding towards the city with a

Now the lamb

and the she-goat molested not the quadruped ; but the pig constantly resisted, a#d would not be quiet. (f Then the man said to him, How you most vicious o? beasts

view

to sell the lot,

!

EXERCISE TH BEADTNf*.

34

comes it that the lamb and the goat arc quiet

They gi vo no annoyance

?

Tlio pi^

but you neither keep qniet nor take repose,"

know

that the

milk; but

I,

lamb

is

sought after for

The

wool, and

tht

wretched, have neither wool nor milk.

In the city I shall undoubtedly be a.

its

sent to

ai
f

o him,

;

" 1

goal for her

On my

arrival

tho

learner is particularly request eci

More

io

he

nindy fl> furfhor.

A

of ilw lnn#iwfr<s which thorough knowledge of the olwwmtB here, it is to be hoped, fully and cloarly explaiuc*
arc

Section with the utmost attention

to advance boldly through the rest of fho

and with

profit,

pmmdrf

work

liotii

with

Iiim

SECTION

II.

OF THE ABTICLE, THE SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES,

44. According to the

AND

Grammarians of Arabia, as well as those

of ancient Greece, there are only Three Parts of Speech .$<> x <*

ISToun


*J Ism, the Yerb J*3 Ffl^ and the Particle

the

l,

uJ/>~ Ifarf*

Under the term Noun, they include Substantives, Adjectives, Pronouns, to which I think we may add the Numerals, Parand

Their Verb agrees in

its OX

nature

their Particle includes the Article J1

the/*

Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections.

They

ticiples,

with ours

;

Infinitives*

and

consider the

Verb

as the first part of speech,

and the third

person singular masculine of the preterite tense* as the root or origin from which the other parts of speech are derived*

There appears, however, to be no impropriety in following the

mode generally

practised in teaching the Greek, Iafet%

and other European languages, which I have therefore here adopted. a.

We

stall hereafter see the propriety of

Noun and Pronoun, Verb.

especially the lalter, before

Certainly the verb has no claim in

leading part of speech.

1

Jwiftg discussed the

mtur

we come

to the

to rank as the

The yocaM&iy of very young

children,

OF TKK ARTICLE.

30

who

of savages,

are

entirely of iiotins

eluo than in

all alwimlliy of flawing 5i

Instance of glaring in tho

worshipped or adored"!

I

"

11

(tod,

\

As

!

if

of iwture, consists


ft

mm

particles in tho Orionlul

and probably a few

The

of tho terms.

littles

mnnw from

w

v*rl>

most

nuhl to lw dfrivml from 41 "ho

tho

numo

of <Jod

di
not

oxist


before the vorb

to

The raits

45.

worship."

of Speech in

nine in nuinbor,

tho Pronoun,

Adjective,

tliu

Oonjunction, and

tion, tlie

46, Thic Arabw, like

Article

tho

viz.,

liable to

Wrb,

tin*

however,

tho sound of tho

article

written in

form*

J lion ite own

with J, tho alteration,

m

J in

of

initial

and tho

own

t

J^

j^

to

j,

***-bo light,"

llwwi

in

bo the*

noun

with

it

Urn night;" and

in

18m of Iho nuun

ji,

If

hstfpr of tho noun,

u

tho wordn UJJI

initial

Greek,

it

^tnw*^

of iho

in

cu, cj, j

tho article*

J

m

Definite

pn*fix*rl liappoiis

Of #

latter ease tho

omittod,

is

But

altered Its

tills

nut,

thc^

or wimbor.

vias. f

not

although the

ia

w

then inarkcni wltti iMhiid; thus,

proiHHincied

tho

Ailvt-rh, th<*

(JnokH, havt* only

th
solar lottcw, begin 'any ono of tho

is

Siilmlmitivv,

cm account of

any

KtigHfth, arc

lli

tho wulmtantivo to which the article

which,

in

i!u

Articles

4 "tlic,"

j^

Amhic, an

iniirkiHl

%

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE.

The

a.

J

of the article

the relative pronoun

same

.jJl

of c5lii

,

etc.,

J

ought

and in order is

always omitted in the masculine singular of

is

^^ "the (man) who

;"

the feminine singular of the

and the plural masculine ^JA!\ being so written in the place

,

the particle definite,

37

but never in the Dual of the is

prefixed to

to

have the

to avoid the

same pronoun. When

a noun beginning with

article

,

"to or

ejaculation,

be praise and glory." with

J

,

the

which,

meeting of three lams, the lam of the

for the night," so,

&*d\ ^\* S

,

S

ai!

for


by

when

article

tashd&d, as

JJJ

as in the following

,

Li4lahi~l-hamdu wa-l-wiinnatu,

But,

whe&

the alif of the latter disappears,

;

dispensed with, or, in other words, represented

for JJi!

J

"To God

prefixed to nouns $ot beginning

alif ajone is dropped, as ^*Jii!

" li-l-kamari,

to

the

moon." b.

In the modern

dialecljf

of

Egypt and Syria the

retains its natural

sound before

thus they say

al~nUr,

The

j^\

"the

all letters,

J

of the article

whether solar or lunar ,

light," ^/**4vaJt al-$kams9

"the sun."

fanciful classification of the letters of the alphabet into fourteen

solar and as

many

lunar, arose perhaps from the accidental circum-

JJl "the sun," begins with one of th<3 former class, " of the latter. Of course the captious and^iJ the moon," with one valid find ci5tic might a thousand equally reasons for calling them

stance that

by any other terms, such "black,"

as

"

gold "^ and "silver/' "blue*'

etc.

Of

the

47. Arabic Substantives

have only two

(^tenders

the Masoixline j^j^JS, and the F0$ciiiiiE6 i^-^t^lalso several

words of the common geader ^^1^\ t

.

There are

They have

TOBM8 AND MBASUEBS OF

38

.

Numbers

three

olju&l,

They have generally

Plural ju**U

tlic

the Singular *yH, the Dual

and

^^1,

cJU

throe tksen

In the singular, and in aomo of the irregular plurals,

viz.,

the

^

9 X*0x-

*

'***

Nominative jJ^ the Genitive (which also HCTVCH for the Dative and Ablative of the Lai in by tho addition of the ?

particles O

J>

*

There

u-*^aJU

two

k

IIOUIIH

many

only two caso

(<

i

liavo

tliat

rininalioim in

only

thn nln-

which wo muy Hpocify us tho Kowinafivo and

Tho Dual,

Oblique.

wo

liow< vc^r ?

arc,

cascBj or rather

giilar?

as

"from") and tho Accusative

"to," and ^*,

tj,

O,,*

an in (Jroofc,

neo w1u*n

sliall

Tocativo caso

wo

is

come* fo

Iw oitluT tlio Baino

invariably a Diptoto,

I)*H
flic*

{ho Noitiinativi^ or

JIB

Iho

The tin

tho

Aecusative.

ttnd

48*

The

consiwt of

and a

nulical

lhno

still

wowln of

Io((<*rK;

a

(lu*

fcnv

Arabic laiignii^* gonorally uro ooiisiHting of four,

t1ic*rc^

mnallor innnbor of llvo

Tlio greater

Iott*rM.

portion of tho trilitonil roots an- V
or AdjootivoH.

but none of

mode adopted

Thoro oro a fow vorbal rooin of four fiTOj

the latter Ixnog

for tho

Arabic language

tli(5

development in

The

all c?f

Iho

trilitfinl itucl

highly ingenious

consign not only in adding ?

but also in expanding

either prciflxcnl or inwrtod

and end of a word,

HO

m

it liy

roots of

plulonophio*

to tho

of certain

somcwhoro

(o

lottoify

produce certain

\\m

/wn^

general a definite reiutiou to fho original root;

bouriiig

cincl

ill

fur that

39

FORMS AND MEASURES OP NOUNS. reason they are called servile

letters.

The

ployed are seven in number.

These

are, as

stated,

1,

technical

c^

(or

word

*),

^^"

and ^,

^5 ^

\J^J

9

literally,

letters

thus em-

we have

all

already

contained in the

35 they fatten.

The

serviles

and LU may occur either at the beginning, or in the interior, of a word (S being always found at the or, lastly at the end

\

end), the

^ and ^,

either in the interior or at the end; the

employed in the interior of a word ; and the (j always as the second letter of a word, For and followed by and it is preceded either by or * always at the

beginning

the ^

;

is

&

\

p, root us take the let verbal example,

JJ, which

.

signifies

"

alone, accepting;" we thence, by means of the servile Then the various deduce the forms JLsl Jjli* JU and *L3 & O^O / & s* ^700 & POx ^ -"X forms J-j-^y, Jj***> (j^M? Ss^J^'j JV-^^? an(i J^^? e:s> hibit a few of the other serviles in their mode of application, 1

.

,

<js

of

which more a.

,

,

"$

4T

hereafter.

It is evident, then, as

Arabic word of ff

its servile letters, & *>S? s **

in the words JUA31,

&^*>

j^, and

roots are Jje,

a general

rule, that if

we

at once & XO

come

and jUfa-d, we see

We

J-c respectively.

tested

letters,

" (as

gold in the

and only one

fire),

that the root

is

is

of the form

^

POX

just as that of

however, will enable the learner to at the

same time had

it

observe,

thus,

c*

9

8eptfQfo

Now, out

uJ*

We

&e,

off

however,

we

infer

^

Jj^ gefc

how-

may be employed Cf tried/* &f**

JU^u, already cited; hence p

f

:

dnce that the

contains no fewer than fotor

letter strictly radical, viz., 5*

word

at

Tlyis the word

these four serviles, two must belong to the root* that the

to the root

must

ever, that the seven serviles, conjointly or severally,

"

every

strip

<->

as radical letters of the trilateral root.

or

we

*s

over

Jf*

-^

^*^ e

difficulties

practice,

of this sort

;

been possible for the Arabs, when maau-

40

POEMH ANI> OTASriJKH

Nol'IS'S.

ol-

factoring their Tory artificial language, to Jmvc letters altogether

from the primitive

tiilltenil

exdinkd

flic

servile

rooU, Arabic would

hayo been the most perfect of human

49 With a view denote of so

tlie

to precwion, 1 adopt

flic*

Inm

fnnti to

mere outward uppoaraiwo of a word as eonyistiuo

many

of

indopondnit

consonants,

flu*

nliort

vowols

by which such consonants may hwjmu* movoublo. various modifications or changes whifh

by

tho application of

m&WHrw

/##?#; 1 call ilio

primitive

y&m JJ

according as

ilio

lmrf,

of

For

uiulcrgo

\volw

<*x?unj>l(*j

tho

clilli'roii

tho tltrco nhort vow^ln nml

Supposing thon the Btudont moct first

1

may

io^othor with the

vowc'lH,

of wich /wv//.

IH HUHcopii1>lo

wo apply

//v//

The

tin*

with tho root J*i

timo, IE a book without vowel -points, ho

IIIIH

tin*

for tho

comfort

word may bo pmn
4

i!ho

9

using tlio/a^m on tho middle loiter; or following nfno

with

/$0

moaroroa

on the

for tho first

first

vowel;

with rktmna on

or,

It

tiinyllablc ;

alno

lastly, it

tlio flrnt letter,

,

may

ho any of the

vk^ JJ, Jj,

J^, JJ,

J-o, with

may ho J*^ jJ

We

may

al

jij,

the

f ?

or jli ?

wiinit

timo

f

observe that tho measures

jli

a matter of ^mr// for they

clo

?

and

^J

nns lurr>

not occur in

flie

as

of

tho language. 50,

Tho Semitic Oraromarkn^ both

and J*iw% have

adopted, $* $ tpeeial fovourit^ the frilitomi root Jiii, with

41

OF GENDER.

exemplify the various forms and measures of their This root, however, is not the best adapted for words. Europeans, not one in a thousand of whom ever can realize

view

to

the true sound of the letter c as the middle consonant.

notwithstanding retain

when

my

as

it

I

model, generally speaking,

merely to exemplify the form or measure of a word to the eye; but not when the word is the object intended

is

intended to be pronounced to the ear, as in the rules of Prosody,

etc.

be found in

Another cogent reason for retaining it will But the 94 a. when we come to the Verb.

student must not suppose that J*j or any other root in the

language furnishes us with about to

detail.

Some

all

the forms and measures

roots furnish us

we

are

with a certain number

and measures which must be determined merely by prescription; others may give out different forms and measures, to be determined in like manner; but no single of forms

root in the language has ever furnished all the forms

by the Grammarians

measttres assigned

to the root J*3.

and

A

Greek Grammar, in the case where we are treated to some hundred

similar instance occurs intb.e

of the verb different

TVTTTO>,

moods

and

tenses,

etc.,

whilst

it

is

perfectly

understood that no single Greek verb ever exhibited the whole of them,

Of 61.

In the Arabic there

are, as

we taw& atoedy

stated,

only two genders, the masculine anA^e^toifiine; together

with some words that ate

*tf

&e

^patedb, gender, Buok

m

42

OF

names of the

letter**

alplialx*!,

hy

vix.,

Hhoulclcax"

aro to be

u 1;

flnily

tho

and

4>ji*

niniply the good

Kwto foimw'um quod

hand/

NumoM

Nouns

womon

of

in

doublo

2wHy~Tlm

^S] "tho ear,"

"the

Jla3?

This

wlueli

a mother,"

*\

l{

Grammar,

sola repoBeal"

an

hotly,

"Mary,"

loves her hiwbaud."

old rule of the Latin

lemma

Nam OH

14

a

female appellatives, as iTp*

woman who

adjectives

(signification or formination*

are feminine Tby signification,

a

Thcw

Infer that a jiouii Is feminine*

distinguished either

"

and some

There nro certain cliaradcristics by

of a certain form.

wo may

of the

1

momlww

of the

^1U ''(he

<^y<^

of <*un
and winds, iwJJU "Egj^t^ ^j> "(Jypnw,^ U^ a a a tho <Mit wind," cl^^r the nouth wind." f

Such nouns

52,

the following

tira

heads: *l

"

cxcoptcHl,

Those ending

in

oxoopt5^jl^

To

neither

many

tliCBO

by

may

Horvilo,

IIH

old man."

like

"firnt;"

adopted by a*

1

^,

and pronounced 7/5,

in

Ml

i',

under

aiB

lli^

"^ pptrdnn," *ufe darkn<*H," a very which wo Bktll mamdhMy noiice. Sndly u

J/l

Those ending *!*!*# "

1st

X

m

4^r

inagniliceiicc,"

few

#*

tmmhmlkm

foniinmo hy

!,

Jji'

tb^lf

3rdly

^^

as

^prido,"

In

/tt/M

"lon^wt;"

fata,

thin toniiinutiaii

is

comparatives and bo added somo eighty

signification

nor by termination,

U o

#<

that sneli a

^fife/^ a bucket,"

ftia

feminine

J/jl "the earth," bitting fl,

w

JC,

OF THE POBMATION OF FEMININE NOUNS.

43

o 1

"a

Jo "a shoe/'

staff/

Jjtf

<J*v*w&

"the sun/' together with

practice

cup/'

and observation.

(See

^

"the wind," which are

th.e rest

Da

Sacy,

JJ5 "the soul/'

Tome

i.,

be learnt by

to

p. 347.)

53. All substantives and adjectives not comprised under

the foregoing heads are understood to be masculine

"the moon/ uLlo "a house," 3

There

words having the feminine termination

"a

masculine gender, as ILU, adjectives to

which

5 is

intensive

"

learned;" &U-*

5

which

S,

s,


54.

^

axe of the

Ehalif;" also some verbal

added; so that they become of more signification,

such

as

&

"

habituated to laugh;"

x-


"very

relating from

^ & ^ ss

Verbal adjectives of the forms
memory." .sr^-P .TXXO

as

are, however, a few

avfl

emphatic or

;

^TX-X

jrx-^--

3

f

?

though ending in

both genders.

5, are of

There are some forty-five words which are of the

common gender

;

amongst the number are jfy

"

a veil or any-

& thing that covers nakedness;" JUL "state, condition;" a a knife" (Gaelic sdan)\ "awing;" J-j-J "a path;" ^^C /

o

"Si

"a weapon," "armour;" 1L "peace;" IL "a ladder;" X / * ?U^ "heaven;" "peace;" jj^S? "a path or way;" f.L?

7C.

r-

"an eagle;" J^i "a horse;"

4^

"night ;"

Of

the

4

"

salt?" eto -

( See

De

J^jjT

"a bow;"

$

8ac7? P- 349

Formation of Feminine from Masculine Nouns.

55- Feminines are formed from masculines transposition,

or

changing

of letters

;

by the

addition,

but chiefly by the

OP THE I'ORHATIOX OF FEMININE XOVNS.

4i addition of

"a

^

queen,"

young man /'changes

** **

do many other nouns of

A

before

I

a

a

Jtf ./#&,

a

**

"ayuuitg womun,"as

Some

this form.

x

**

St*

i',

**

i^.

"great,"

x

^ to

"

"u woman," ui;

a man," **

&U

king,"

u

J-

as

S,

5V

when

iuljoctivoH,

in

gcrthe positiye degree, follow the second termination (in the initial I to the yilo) in forming the feminine, transposing \

end

&>

as

?

[^

from

comparatito and suporlativo degree^

changed to

^

J^

J^i aimih,

in

adjectircs alno forni their f
" whilst some oliaugo

ail

<

3

one/

A

has a,

first

jj J^

"intoxicated;"

mate

^

into

in ^1^.1 "

r

^UOA

t

the*

wrvil*

t

?

fomhibo

;

like

I

l ?

Homo

is

as

othor

^^

^JL,

,

"another;" u irrlttited,"

5f^ kit

iho

initial

4

^, ^1

;

^ m

tho

prononuK****!

^

In

ndi
"longMt*"

"longer,*'

ITdtt,

fc

tl<

liow<*V4*r,


final,

u

^Svliito" or

" *#*\j

i'j

NximborB of adjcciivcB are unod both an '*

1

my

without

"rasli,"

"

as

alteration,

^^

slain" (which,

"sho that

is

jp*

"patlimt/

"poor" (making aio

when used

slain"};

Norms implying anything

1

with

in tlie

ftuUtanlivoly,

many

divisible

ullusrH

into

1

odorifcnma/

jUai^ fi

in

4

i!iiiiiii

wriltifu

of tho

fo3pm, tia

part** r

t) t

feminine gender to oxprcfls such

from C^vi&J ''gold." adjectives

oi

1

As

**

partis,

as *u43

u

k

pi(

co

1

cif

gold/

tho Arabs have no uimier goiulor, noutial

such as arc coinniou

to

oithor gc^Mlor!

wliciti *'

indefinitely us substantives, ate

by

the*

fominijw* ts

f<

C/jjisI b.

On

oiaa is

wanting

to

you."

this itil)jot the reader

*'

IB

referred fo the exo^ll^nl

^

I*%

OF NUMBERS. Arabe

"

M. De

of

45

Sacy, page 343-352 of the

Sacy's account at

first

The

volume.

work do not permit us

assigned to us in the present

limits

to translate

De

full length.

Of Numbers. In Arabic the nouns

56.

liave three

numbers

we have

(as

already stated), viz., the Singular, the Dual, and the Plural. The Dual is invariably a diptote, i.e., consisting of two cases,

and

generally formed

is

singular,

and adding

oblique cases

" of, to,

When

a.

tlrasjlj or in

,

dual to

"

two

two

the singular

cities."

and J&-

for the

for the nominative^

a house," dual

houses.'

noun ends in

if

the latter

(or

\

city;"

call moveabte, receiving

some (t

If

'asan, 1

"a

^Sfatan staff;"

remains, as

unless,

9

a youth

^ye*

jm,un,

when under

or c^, in which case

j, as iTjj rid&,un,

them,) are

final,

" ;

u \Zfatayani,

*aan>ani,

"&

"two

"

two youths;"

staffs"

(or

it

hcm%&

*,

ft

^

,j

jm tu^pte;&e

either discretionary reniai&s? o* is

a garment;"

staves).

changed to j as *Tpu

part;" yfc

the form of

"

and

become what grammarians

afrawam, "two yellow objects;" b^tif

\jp~

^ two garments,"

changed in the

alteration, either in the final letter or

servile terminates the singular, it is

"yellow;" ^\^/^ it

is

^tujj^i madmat&nt,

officiating for

quiescent, after fatTia in the singular, they

U

houses,'

^

Where ^ and ^,

vowel-points, as

1

U tjl3 "two

5

&$** madinatun, "a

as

c->,

of the

u l~ "

;

by suppressing the nunation

place of j

changed to

46

OP IBBEGUJLAB OK BKOKBN PLUIULS.

The regular masculine

57.

tie nunation of the singular, and adding tive

and ^j~

"

y

^U;

for the oblique CUSCH

^J

fathers/'

"of,

regular feminine plural

IB

;

for

^-u

thus

^

"a

flit

1

nomina-

a falhor," j^jJJJ

JJJ^

by fathers;" J^U

^>;

"glad,"

& I

or

to,

by m

plural is formed

'SissiHting,"

^.

prophet,"

TJio

formed by suppressing Iho

final

t

of the singular, and substituting c^l

and cp\

the oblique; tlm

for

"of,

"meiherfl," cptoUjJ

-

lor the

*oi^

;"

woman," cili-y "cheorful women,"

cheerful

iwmiinativo,

**u jmrfher," ciitdJJj

by mothers

or

to,

:

lL^ "a

so

"a

*Clj

pro-

phetess," cbtjlJ*

a* If

thrown

^Plf;

a masculltto noun, tenninato away,, whilo if in

^

torn

itfkes

is

^

in

inwt

cliangod to
futfca

it

algo

i

lifter

m

^^ //^

flfoppcHl,

diphthong with j, as ^J&uo* MmtM/ti^ ^^laiHi, substantives

(that

not derived from

is,

simple, or augmented

only

change in tic plural ilmjazm as

J^s>-

Jummn "a 9

karate) "a saueer/ wliose

first

or change

1

by

(*')

to th

woaian's name/*

radical takes

a#w

juclge/^

foriiiing

middle

vorb,*)

a

w!iit!iar

rtuli<*ul

cjf^I^ saucers

i

S

/wm/^tf ff

;

UIOHO, however,

or

tlie

ja

It

Of iM Imffut&r

or

68* Besides the regular |>hmil

and

ft

vow<;l of (ho flmt

"

c^liiaf

it is

f

**

Perfict f
tmporfki

S, wltoBc

X^mr

14^

the Arabs luivo

oxomplifiod in th adopttul

Mcvc^rul

words of

OF IRREGULAR OR BROKEN" PLURALS.

forming

as they call them, broken plurals ^

or,

artificial^

which, the following are a few specimens:

a plural

triliteral root

may be formed

by means of two "orders;" so " additional )US;

I

,

so O^rJ

"a

a man,"

"

>JLft

sage,"

with or without the

plural of the measure

is


triliteral root

may be formed on 4th

jto^.

another plural,

the measure

^JJ ;

"kings;" so pic "science,"

d(jU

plural

mountains;"

)&>-

Another broken

formed on the measure

*C&. "sages;"

so J^l

"a

plural,

*O

;

of

thus,

poet," plural

This form of plural arises from singular

"poets."

nouns of the measure

^Jj\3

or

/

modes of forming broken tailed

)USl,

"

sciences."

frequent occurrence,

"a

triliteral root,

3^y "men;"

c
of the measure

mountain," plural

of frequent occurrence,

plural

"l&C.

3rd -From the

dispositions."

thus

From the

a

may be formed a broken

thus, tJ-^f

u

1st

of

an order," plural ^\Lf alifs, " t^U property," plural C/iW " goods" or thus

2nd From a

chattels."

47

hereafter^

plurals,

when we

There are several other

^J. ^

which

come

to

shall

be fully de-

our Section

on the

Derivation and Formation of Nouns.

a.

De Sacy enumerates

aereral of these,

In the meanwhile

thirty-one forms of broker! plu3eaMj

especially the last seren, ara

we

ll(

lrftt

of rare ^ectednce.

subjoin a useful table of twenty^fcttf Forms of

4 broken plurals with examples of such singulars ss usually produce

them*

48

OP IRREGULAR OK BHOKKN PLURALS, POEM OF

HO, KLTTJUt,,

PLtRA

1

milk


2

_>lsi" '/

HO.

14

pail,

4

a fragment,

6

a necklace,

a frying pan,

jjj

17

MJ

the loft hand,

J3U&

jUi

s

9

Jj>-j

a

man,

* x

!

18

a

a hoy,

f^UU

8

x^

*>

u a roof,

ii-~j a house,

Ji

a

j

.jjj

country,

SO

10

^U* a pod,

'aKadrf

21

'

(

**a^

ii

22

18

> wounded,

23

a deort,

t

13

frioml,

for]

an ape,

x

Jt

>-j

the face^

84

J. It

may bo observed hew, at the same time, that some nouns ban various forms of plural,-sometimes a regular plural, and besides thai one or moro of tho broken tiras

^ ^ ^ ^ ^' Tcevand ;

from

an d

tho eyo," ;

"a

slave,"

SC

JJJf

.

,

^

,

&

from

forms;

formed the plural

from ,

ft

jii .

"the

^,5

^'

and

ftlgo

from

-j

^^

Uj and

a &ult

fromj^ "awalV'J^, J,J^ .

soul," are

boy," plu,

from

;

?

^,UL

JU5 J-jl^ perfect,

*

,

10 7

Jjjji

^

1C

rod,

5 JUi

" <"

*'

,

..

A Jib

C s

3

A

u

..

a book,

ftom ,

8ea/

w

^

^

(

OF IRREGULAR OR BROKEN PLURALS. from

t;

student all

is

l&U "a

admit Jwljb Ju$

,

^jJ^ub

,

The

ij^fc.

not to infer, however, that a singular employs indifferently

the plurals of which

S Ju

witness/' Jcfc^,

,49

,

4.*JJ

,

etc.

<waj

,

,

form

^^^>

;

is susceptible

is

jU~j

,

thus <JjJu does not

;

nor does J^c adopt the plurals itit"

Sometimes one only

man," the only plural

makes onlyjj^

its

formed, as from

is

"

and J^l

an

affair,"

These, however, are "best learnt

.

by

"

^4y

a

"a command/' "When

practice.

a singular, having several meanings, admits several plurals, it will be

generally found that certain plurals are peculiarly, or exclusively at-

tached to certain specific meanings of the singular ; for example,

j^c

"the eye," "a fountain/* "the substance or essence of a " a person of rank." In the plural it has & , thing," and #ct and signifies

The two

.

j^Ucl

first

of these forms answer to the two

first

meanings

of the singular respectively, and the third only to the two last.

The

regular plurals, and those of the twelfth, thirteenth, fourteenth, and #

?

p

<3j

f

>^r

t

fifteenth

are

forms,

to

contradistinction

called

the

?

"

of paucity,"

plurals

other forms, which are called

in,

%*>"

j^

This observation applies, however, only to nouns having several forms of plural when the plural of one of

"plurals of multitude."

;

these four forms

is its

only one,

it is

employed indiscriminately

like

those of the other forms.

c.

With regard

many

to*the quadriliteral noums, all the simple ones,

of those which are augmented, together with their

form their plurals by inserting

\

after the ?

fatfya

t

"

second letter $

and the third kasra), as cl^l/ from

happens to be the

*****

final letter of the singular, it is f xx xxOx

the plural, as
preceded by

1 ,

j and

"

a dunghill," J-!j*

*

"

w-^

a

femMnes,

(thefirtfc foirdiig

$ter/*

When

$

drbpped in forming

"WMi

the last radical i$

^ without a vowel, ^ remains

in the plural, 7

m

50

OP IEEEGULAR OR BEOKBN PLUEAIS,

"a

^t3cJ?

candle/' Jj^llf

but

;

L-^JV^

some words,

;

as

^ISaU

same

at the

XX

O?

.-

of the preceding tern),

o

end, as jLJjl ^ !

^n d

'>

*^^

ox

"

;

^ and xox

tlio

heel/'

taking S at the

\f

"a

uJUL*! xx

f

**

shoemaker/' xx*

f

a disciple/' j-^l)* and i'j^fc

*V^"

:

"*

/


the devil/' (j^-Jbl and "^ ,v

"

tlySy?

;

time, not only follow this rule, but

xv

f

xx

*, x-

GJJ!

t^w^j

"

^

,

^tlL

,

have another plural formed by dropping tho > " (

^ (on account

and j arc changed to

1

A

,

o

'*

*

o

other words form also their plurala in this inunner, us uJJLjl xx

^

IwLU

comprehended under

them

in the

JUfel,

2nd

rf.

4<

g

xx

x r,

cJSUl and

bishop/'

few

*'

Some

form

this

plurals of fHHtoral words

;

same manner, as J*fe "the

plural jlJlb]

Nouns

;

^^j

unil of tho linger/' 1st plural

**au artery/" Int plural

consisting of live or

maybe

another plural being formed from

more

letters

and

(i*

J^s

U

^

Jind plural

,

i

not being numbered as such) follow tho same mode, throwing away at the

same time

cither tho lant radical or Uiopoimlt, us J4"jA^

u^-4^ "a

pomegranate," ^J\A^; T

an ^ )]/ <Jjl/

of bread," "cruinl>/

Ji^i "a

spider/' civile.; -

^^

l

P CIUI

^

J

B

"a

piece

w ^f for^

^

ing a diphthong after/af//#, both the last letter and the penult remain, " j being changed to 4^ on account of tho preceding /iasra f ^j&g a

m

crocodile/'

cepting

/%

x

^\^

*

(

when ^

"

Augmented wortU throw away

servile

along with

'

*'i

a leader/' e.

Some words form

"a mother/*

as

fi .<4jX

^

XX

^

or u*-*^ as

"**

rj^

"loosed/*

*

their plural in a Biannor exceedingly irregular, ftf

the moufch/' Sgf\ A **'' *^ 4T*'** *.

woman/

xx

^^

l

c^l^if ; JU

If/

"*,,

sad ^Uy; ^ys X

x

the servilcs^ ex-

tflij,,

J&

; ""*

C

1

"water/ Slpt &

*

j**

C

^wJ and^l^uJ; ^UMJ* *"

gwlil for J^ljl, the final 4^ being c*at off on account of the

use

made

of this word*

//

*

man/

OF THE DECLENSION OP NOUNS.

Of

51

Woum*

the Declension of

Some grammarians diyide the Arabic nouns into two, if not moro, declensions, I think it much better to view them under one declension, reducible to five heads or classes 59.

according as they consist in the singular or plural, or "both, of dip-totes, i.e., two oases, or of trip lotos, i.o., three cases*

The dual

always a dip tote, so that

is

we need

only to direct

our attention to the singular and plural CLASS 60.

Under

1*

thin class I include all substantirea, masculine

and feminine, which form their plurals in

57.

Thoy

all

aro, u

may

singular and dip totes in Urn plural

Norn. iJVj a father*

Gen. Ace.

jJlJ

of a father, Ij

iSlJ a father,

As an example "

!j

two

;

reffularly, as described

bo seen, thus

ityj

trip tote* in

"a

fathers,

father,"

y^tj

of two fathers,

two

ij^

fathers.

of a regular feminine

the

fathers,

of fathers* fathew*

noun wo subjoin

a mother*"

Nom.i'jJlj a mothoi**

Gen.

JjJ^ofamotLei

t

i

two mothers*

mothers* l^lj .^

of two mothers*

liiC of mothers, X"^

'

Acc

$l&\ 9

a no other.

two mothow.

t

Jilj

mothers*

a. Under this class are included 1st. All participles, both active and passiro, masculino and fbminino, derived from tegular yerf

(which are generally employed as

52

OF THE .DECLENSION OF NO*UNS.

or "assistant;"

"

nouns form their &

7

assisted/

J^ax*

feminities

changing their final

by

and arc declined like SlHj.

etc.,

%

measures ^Jul and ^53 as 1JU

^-1*

3rd.

etc,

,

Nouns ending

in

r

'a

man

"a mannikiu" To

these

specific

"

or

iiislgulficaut

we might add

heads

;

.several

and must bo

left

little

in

^ouns of

tills

class,

"a

urr which

carpenter;"

arc

"a man

generally

of Bagdad,"

hypochondriac;"

man;"

plural

othera which cannot

]tf

as

plural

tl^j

^Ju>.j,

etc,

reduced under

cmiirely to practice!,

OLA$B 61.

5

nouns of the meusitro 0-xi,

4th, Diminutive

etc,

^j^jtdwb,

"a

1

giren to melancholy/

Fcrans of the

J3n
mariner/' Jlac

patronymic or possessive adjectives, as ^jtlxb

*^jlop

into

ftf

S^U,

plaral

All such

Mnation

i

S^

as

man's name.

also a

II

like the preceding, are

triptotet

singular and

di^ioles in tho plural, witli thin diffcronco, that tho plural Is broken or Irm/ular; ilniB, "a mosque." llio

i^

IHTAI,*

1

a mosque, of, to,

two

:

mosques.

or in

of mosques,

a mosque, mosqties*

62.

Nouns

of this class arc

botli in the singular

and plural; thus,

N*i G* A.

two houses, |

etc.

ahouse.

house*

of two houses*

two

Iiou0c0*

cy^

houses,

of

OF THE DECLENSION OF NOUNS,

Of Classes

a.

II.

and

III.

we may say

53

in general that they include

such substantives as have not been already specified under Class but it is very difficult, if not impossible, to them to subject

The student must be guided by practice

specific rules.

CLASS

I.

;

any

alone.

IV.

This class consists of such adjective nouns (not being or as are diptotes In the comparatives superlatives) singular " and triptoUs in the plural; thus, red." 'J*>>\ 63.

SINGULAR*

Nom

-

& Aec.

Gen.

j^

y]^-1

J^U

JjX4 x

J^Nom.

.

J.

Gen.

">

\^

*

1^*^. Acc,

CLASS

V,

This class consists of a few substantives and snch

64,

adjectives (comparatives in the singular

and superlatives) as are " thus

and plural;

SlNOULAIt,

'j>\

DtJAL,

^cUt Nom,

&

Ace.

j a,

a.

both

less."

Norn.

Gen.

diptotea

& Ace,

Classes IV. and V. consist

chiefly of adjectives ; those of the former being in the positive degree though tinder the form of comparatives and superlatives; Class V. consists of fa* fib cm,-.

paratives

65.

Whoa the r

?,l',

and superlatives,

?'

alS

last letter of

preceded

a noun

^ &%*>

is

^ preceded fcy/rt&o,

and

^^

short

dfa

>jj^
^

OF THE DECLENSION OF

in this case the

Thus

P^ of

and

^j

tlio first class,

in

J$

clasfl,

In

i^luj

"a

mill," for

or tiiptoto&

X s

/

tlio

^13 "a KHd!" or

*^l*^ "donorte,"

for

selves,

iu tho genitive

"a

when

tLl

vk,

fatht^r-in-Iaw/'

"a

jjJJ

Noim ^^s

**poHs<'ss(l of,"

*

J

J ^J

tho

JUiii

faUior of

JkM

mouth of 1

affixed

a brother,"

"tho mouth,"

oadowort with," which

the jwouth of 'Umar,

ottdowcd with

..

.

^

hroilior,

liis

of

hi**

Ills

brother*

brothor

thy

of Urn raoutlt of 'Uwmr,

*u^J j J

a

thcan-

;

bl tho father of

^A U

Ace,

tltci

noun or an ^,1

i

x j ,j1 of

it

**u thing," 1* or ^1

^A

the fatluT of Jaj ^!

^

class

in the nominative

father,"

"

declined an follown

Qeiu

lant

ami accusative, im^gular quad-

in eon8tru
and jJ "having,"

Aec.

3

plural of the wwoncl claas.

posHOSsivo pronoun,

Oeii.

tlui

Six words linvo a variation of rase peculiar to

CO,

Nom.

judge'

nominativo, and

of

jW^

'

arc

cc

of tho same

^U,

in th<

^J!/

for

Cj which

J^.j, ^i/J,

mid accusative

goautlvo

mitten

staff," IB

*

and i^U** rilit
now**," for

"good

or diptotes.

ar<s

^J^ "a

nominative and genitive for ^Jl* and

tlio

^.

not "bearing cither tlammn or

in tho three cases

\%

?

^

J

of thy

fiitl

tlij

coiri|iagilorL

tiling*

of thy ttiiag*

thy

OF THE DECLENSION OP NOUNS.

When

a. first

my

55

these words, however, are prefixed to the pronoun of the

person there father,"

is

no change of

When

etc.

your mouth," LlXiJ

^j]

cl^J

$

your mouth." 9

my

^f "of

father,"

by an affixed pronoun, it " " of your mouth," dXJ

li is followed

varies only in the vowel-points, as

"

"

case, as

has sometimes a peculiar

idiom, similar in sense to j j as in the following epithet, which the

^UT

in the fable gives to the fox,

you not

Ul

U

father of the stronghold?"

enter,

UUl "Why do

3

'jjLZj

lion,

"

thou endowed

i.e.

with strength."

The accusative

b.

is

substituted for the nominative $

j?As&tc.es6t<

participles

go

before, as ^\ "indeed,"

^4

"as

if,"

*jA>

Jl^J^l "indeed a

king

is

If I "but,"

a

^ *s

"would

man

"certainly," J\ "that/'

to

will stand

God," ;"JjtXj

man

its case,

^

^

" as

perhaps;"

tl^Uit

^

"but the

as *&rj j\<&\ <** \^ "certainly there

The word

in the house."

^

immediately preceding any appellative, accusative termination, as
"in

certain

powerful;" no other word must intervene, however, except-

ing a preposition with is

when

^

it").

gives

it,

in

when

general,

the

there is no doubt of it" (or

In this case the accusative loses the nnnatkm, but the

noun must not be appellative

"

signifying "is not,"

limited

definite,

by the

either article

as

"a

noun proper, or as an

Jt, or by a word whloh

it

governs.

67*

The vocative

is

expressed

by the nominative without

nunation, with U prefixed,

% ^Uu

"0

followed

prince !" except

whew

l,

"Q

'Uttxman

?? !

j^.t

by a genitive, where

%

OF THE DECLENSION OF

56

m employed

accusative

"

NOTOfcJ.

In place of tho nominative^ as


JUB t

servant of God."

a,

The nominative thus employed Hence

rapidity*

is

it

that the affixed pronoun ^-7-

people !" cl/J

naturally pronounced with

n filiation

the

that

is

is

sometimes cut

is

always dropped, and " an

off,

lj

my

X

"

my

Lord

"

Some

!

words, chiefly proper names

frequent use, throw off a whole syllable at the end, as ~,l* (f

^~U Marvun

!

On

b

O mj toz&**

"

friend!" $

J^

^ "0

MansClr!"

\Z

for

"0

tf

>

h

etc,

the other hand,

when placed

end of a sentence, and

at the

pronounced more strongly, the vowel is prolonged, and receives a a O my boy!* Sometimes this kind of aspirate, as
appears as

final

When pronoun

life

%

the

as

UlS

name

or a/^ as

l

between the name and the particle

.

In calling for help^

-LaS

V

X-

\i

"help,

\J

or 4^1c for

^1^*

invoked, however, hoars the article

or one of these words,

,

^Clx

3 ^

lj

,

\&$

\^ji, Ijwl,

as (jwlS

ft^

Salaclinl"

9

l^jf

prefixed

the

always comes

^ 1

)1,

\j

men

" t

to the genitive, as

and somotiinos

>1

is

added

for

f

the same purpose, as *Ub*x* b ^lielp,

sometimes used for ,j] **Q

my father P

friend!"

ui-Jl is howevae

and uLJ$ for ^Ji^ **Qmy

mother/* 03*

The dual and the

tkat letter

when

followed

perfect masctiliEC pltirak in

by

a nouu in

the affixed pronouus, as ^Jjl

tlio

^

drop

genitive ease? or by

"two fawn%

OF THE NUMERALS.

two fawns of Joseph;" ^UjJ "two

57

"

"

Musulmans," jJJ ^IllX the town," ^JJ "sons," j4 "kis sons."

feet

When

a.

the

!

\Jy*\^*

;

a noun

is

rendered definite

which appears

nttnation,

afc

the Musulmans of

prefixing the article ^Jl

by

the end

>UoJ "his two

feet,"

"

of some of the cases,

dropped and the simple short vowel retained; thus, Worn.

Gen.

father;"

tty$\

"

jj$

"the mother;"

of the father ;" Acc

&$\

"

4$

-

" Sty$\

;

the

the mother."

when one noun governs a

aoun following in the genitive; thus, j^^*^S

" !

Commander

J^*^

Faithful;" ^SlT^jlJft ''Prosperity of the State/'

the

d$\

is

the father;" so

"

of the mother

In like manner, the nunation is rejected

"

"

The

of

article

jhanges the substantives singular, and irregular plurals, which are ^^^^^

f ^-L.^^O

Ice.

3.

opSl;

Nona,

triptotes, as

liptotes, into

so

is affected

he above circumstances,

a ~^~, as

black;"

in the

same manner

It is also rejected

by

all

be observed with regard to

^

as

when under

those nouns called

and

which form their nominative in

may

Gen. ^*-31;

Nom. ^li^ "the white;" Gen*U2i;

The nUnation

nvaridble,

o^Sl "the

/5if4^L

A otner cases the plurals of the 2nd and l

th classes of nouns.

Of 69,

the

Numerals

$&A\

The Arabic Numerals hold &

sort

etween the Substantives and Adjectives

;

of middle rank

consequently this

the proper place wherein to introduce them.

i

lem, as

we

shall see hereafter, are lorn fide

.hers adjectives.

ich as f

Our

Several of substantives,

object here is simply to exhibit

them

they are; the application and use of them belong

the Syntax,

The following

axe

THE CAKDI2UL NUMBERS* THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. FEMININE, if

t,

MASCULINE,

MAttCTJLINE,

x

5 or

6

(&**>

I

V

7

r

8 9

lUAMj

r

10

a.

Prom

tlireo to

of the feminine

ten inclusive/ the termination

gender,

here

anarks

the

5

?

llio

inaBoiilino.

usual sign All

these

numbers

arc triptotes, except ancl ^\xj\x , both of which are ^1151 ,> ^^ awl ^^^^^ for (lie genitiye diptotos, having for their inflexions u ""

'

^t

ami accusative,

numbers

arc

first case, it

employed

and case

;

if

****

x

^>-j

we might say

*$&

"

?

rale, I 65, for

and

*F(X

in the

employed as subfltantiven, tlioy govern the and then of coarse lose their

jCu

genitive,

From

"

^

men/

men/

1

literally,

When ^UJ

three of men,"

;

eight/' loses

.J ill

tlio

num*ber ten,

the maiOEline isJAi ? and in the feminine smaller aumber being always put first, tkis~

its

to the

in the nomina-

eleven to ninoteon incluflivo, the

bars axo oomposod of uaits, and of

or

*'

which had disappeared according

^.Q we then write ^US in the accusative,

is for

and

u

1

three

a trio of

ntlnation, it recovers the

tive

;

of the thing numbered,

Minaticm, as

m

three to ten, the cardinal

cither as acljeetlves or sulmtantivcs

they arc placed after the thing numbered, and agree with

in gender

genitive

From

like alt the duals.

Enm-

wMeh id JJ&J, tte

THE CARDINAL NTJMBEES.

59 MASC.

16

11

17

IV

SjjfL^ j_-**

xx O x

18

xx

xxO X X

19

G

XX O X

n

j

i^Ac J_uJ

r

s

13

i>* ^US

X XOX

14 15

Decades from twenty upwards

are,

200.

80.

50.

20.

1000.

90.

60.

30.

2000.

100.

70.

40.

71. Tlie

Ulf

a.

In the numbers composed of decades and of

numbers

the smallest

;

c4/^j *^J

as

5.

iU

The numbers

^bU

100;

^

500; it.

.<#

iU c.

*llj-

for

first,

and both are

accusative

declined,

^/fc^jtSall.

the hundreds are of both genders;

^U cJ

600; it, *

1^ *>-

300;

700;

^

JU ^U ^Q * ' :r

for the thousands are as follows

L/3T Sii 3,000; O

jLc.

put

thus

400;

&U ^U^

u

VjUi 800;

or #

'

.

900.

thousand. Ox

is

^ve ^y^j ^';

200;

The numbers

2,000;

U11

S en

number

from twenty between the two

xinits

to ninety-nine inclusive, the conjunction j is inserted

\2i\

&Jj 4,000; and

Beyond ten thousand they 12,000; and so

that they are

300,000, etc.

^T

Ub]

u

on.

:

up

100,000;

are, iSl

ulall

so

1,000

on up

^Ulf

to

ten

Clc j^l 11 7 000; ^

to ninety7nine thousand.

ui{

;

l^L, 800,000;

After

uJJ ^UiJj

60

THE OEDINAL NUMBERS, ORDINAL NUMBEHS. 72.

tlio

The

ordinal

numbers up

exception of the

and iLlj

first)

to ton inclusive,

the measure

^ll

have (with

for the masculine

The compound numbers the 19th inclusive arc made up of the

for the feminine.

the llth to

from cor-

responding ordinals of their units with the addition of yLi for the masculine, and When these S^AA for the feminine. nine compounds arc indeterminate, they both end in a fath and are not subject to declension* If, however, they have the article prefixed, the units arc regularly declined like a

noun of the

Nom.

first

and the deeado& remain

elasB,

unaltered;

yu

thus, eJW!; Gen, Jli shp(; Aeo. J&& JLj&i; and the same ^ rule is observed with regard to the fominino;

thus, Sj&c, &!>Jt,

and BO

on. I'KM.

llth

U 18ft

J}

\

yii

2nd

cLltf

3rd

I4tli

>

XXXX XX O X XX

1st

4th

1 fftll

U-

Sth

16th

jC

eth

XT

X

7th

lS

38iU

8th

10th

9th

SOth

10th

^ t?

DISTRIBUTIVE NUMBERS.

The

73.

pressed

by

are formed

twentieth,

and

61

the decades above,

all

the cardinal numbers

are ex-

and the intermediate ones

;

prefixing the ordinals of the units with the

by

conjunction ^ between, thus PEM.

MASC.

or ,.,.-&

or

_

<.i

21st.

FRACTIONAL NUMBERS. 7,4.

In Arabic fractional numbers from one-third to one-

tenth inclusive are expressed the corresponding radical, f


third," JjfJ

sixth," jLJi fi

JA^

"a

"a

seventh,"

a tenth."

number;

^5

:

twentieths" they say

"an

"a

eighth,"

fraction

tfjjt,

thus,

J.U

fourth,"

Beyond the

a kind of periphrasis

certain words modified from

by

fifth,"

^

JJJ "a

recourse

-rV

"a

\*j>

Ac

^

fJ

^

SJ

iTj^l

"a

ninth,"

is

thus, to express the fraction

half,"

had

to

u fteeeliterally,

"three parts out of twenty parts*" BISTEIBUTIVE NUMBERS, 75.

Distributive

numbers are expressed

either

by twice " the ordinal one by one," repeating number, as \*^.\j tl^j or (from one to tori)

by words

of the meastare

derived from the radical number. or

by repetition

by one,"

so

;

These

thus, i\*4 or %(L\

gj

or

numerals are diptotes.

JJJ^

^

5lL^

may or

jU* ar

O^X

be^ttsed singly

"

2^J !k^X

^ four by four,"

one

All such

OF PEIUOJHC

(52

IUSLATIVE NUMERALS.

76* These embrace such adjectives as denote

or "consisting of" aneli or such a 9 9

thus ^513

*

u

number from one

to ten;

>*

x

ft

"

?

containing two," J^SU "containing tliree/ J^bJ

"

^^

5

containing four/

"

jectives from one

ten

to

;

those present no

remarked, however, that from

which, the singular, if

the relative adjective the singular

^1

In

containing five/* etc.

manner from the cardinal numbers are formed

must be

?)

relating to

^uh

liie

relative adIt

difficulty.

"two," a dual

would be ^1

it

could have

i

formed by recurring to the form

and <^p, like

otic,

^^\

Prom

*

of

for yj; of

eleven to nine-

compoaed of two indeclinable words, form their relative adjectives from the iirat word only, wholly

teen, the numoxutivoH

it follown that these adsuppressing the second ; whence those derived from numerativos jectives exactly resemble 1

,

o

*

from one

to niao;

Him XO

^p

is

the relative adjc>ctivo of ^131 "*

ft

,*

"two," and of JAc Wl "twelve;" j^Jii is tkit of Juui. From l\. "one iX5- "fifteen." "five" and of

^

**"

hundred/* O/. formed the relative adjective " and from CJ! a thousand/ is

?

^JU *V X

or

3

FEEIODIC KTTMEEALB,

77*

Numerativo wordH denoting a periodical return,

of the measure

or without

m ?

motttte, oto,)/ ?

etc)/

When

j*j.

article,

They arc put in the accusative a as \**Jty\ or hB ov0ry throe

so l&fl or

j^l "every

are with.

eight (day%

for the sake of precision the day9 ) oto.

must

,

NUMERAL ADVERBS.

63

be specified they express the same in the following manner dyL> "he drinks wine once every three :

years," a.

"

Numerative words denoting "simple" or "single," "double,"

are triple," etc.,

U&&\

S3&

"

JyU

expressed thus,

" triple,"

c-Jl^i

single,"

"

2$

quadruple,"

Cc^li*

" double/'

etc.

NUMERAL ADYEBBS. "Words

78.

"thrice,"

"time"

etc.,

or

are generally expressed

"turn" in the accusative "once"

requisite numeral, thus

"twice" by 79.

dates

before

our

to

corresponding

^^

" ;

is

"once,"

case preceded

expressed

thrice"

"twice,"

by a word denoting

by cpf^

by

SjZ

by the

or

S^lj

or

<*jM, etc.

The Arabs haye a curious idiom in expressing their and other large numbers, placing, generally, the units the tens,

the tens before the

hundreds,

and the

This rule obtains strictly when the number consists of only two figures, decades and

hundreds before the thousands.

units;

but

thousands

if

may

thousands and hundreds are employed, the optionally

come

first,

then the hundreds, then

the decades, and lastly the units, though the former

Thus

mode

words the year 1862 they say "two and sixty and eight hundred and one This idiom is probably owing to the circumthousand."

is

the more common.

in expressing in

stance that the numerical cyphers of the Arabs,

which they

borrowed or adopted from the Hindus, read contrariwise to their alphabetic characters, ie.

from right to

left

;

so that

W

04

when for

an,

THE

Arab, in reading, comes

from right

naturally doeyphora the group

lie

example,

such a number as 1862

to

to left, for the reasons

we have just JH-Xw

Of

of figures

stated.

OX

ike A$ectiv&-Jti^\

*

The Adjective has two genders and generally three numbers like the substantive, but the explanation of its 80.

concord with the latter belongs more appropriately to our

At present we

Section on Syntax.

Khali confine ourselves to

the mode of forming the Comparative and Superlative Degrees of Comparison* 81,

fixing

The comparative 1

?

iiBJU*.

^ "than,"

to exprosfl the

Elnawiiliig

"good,"

than the i>asi"

'j#L\

bettor,"

tlie

punitive

and

tolcofl

in general

tlioti

art greater

Ikal is-Jl

"

Sometimes the mere ponilivo with

by

^

IB

pro-

used

comparative, an in tho following lino from

^%

^g^\

;

formed from "

thiWc^O^T^

tiftorit;

than the king,"

is

"

^^j

tho present clay

arid TIio particle ^e? howtvor,

is better

some

others

often follow tho comparative in placo of '^5 BO as to express ** ; 4>*r*tf&' C ^ or superlative degree according to circum* oithor a .

stances;

m

f^f

c-jycM

^J ^Al "more or mont intrepid

In the feminiae of the eomparativo is

added in place of

(masCt),

\

quioBocmt after

prefixed, as '^J> "groat," JJ?^

u

<$

^

" greater

(fern.).

The

in

particle

^

"

!>

greater

does not

always immediately follow tho comparative ; as ia tho follow" to mo than the ing example Jcf Dearer ^pA $$ :

apple of mine oyc,"

^ ^^

OE THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

Without

82.

^ the form

when

by a genitive as (jwQl ^/^^ "the best of also where the substantive

'jj\

followed ?

w^"

expresses the superlative degree,

men."

It

65

becomes superlative

as S&\ ^<\*^> precedes the adjective, It has likewise a superlative sense

u

O

--

Sa'di

when

X

most wise. 35

is

placed absolutely

with a substantive or pronoun in construction, as ^

-&~

s

^

"they two are the most upright;" ^wuM

^^\

&J

s
*?

'?

^j&$\ &> " Of the they are the most excellent among human beings." comparative and superlative we shall treat more fully in our Section on Syntax. ^.o^

Of

the

Pronomj~^\.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 83. These consist of Affixed.

The

two

classes, viz., the Isolated

Isolated are the following, viz.

1st Pers. Sing, b'f

"I."

(No Dual).

"you

two."

Plur. Masc.

"they both," a.

We may here

its first

by

Fern. *ff\,

3rd Pers. Sing. Masc. j

"he," Fern.

Plur. Masc. jii,

^&

"we."

Dual comm. UxH

^j\ "you." "she."

Fem,*^

vowel damma, and the third feminine

Dual comm.

H

"they."

its

tera, when preceded

and uJ, which both denote "and;"

thus, instead of y>J, they say jjij; so for also

Jr

observe that the third person masculine y& loses

either of the conjunctions^

may

:

1st Pers. Plur.

2nd Pers. Sing. Masc. cUl, Fern. L^Jl "thoxu"

and the

^j^ they say ^j.

"We

observe that the Personal, Demonstrative, and Eelative

Pronouns have the same variation of gender and number as nouns,

OF TEE I'KRSOXAl I'HONCK NS.

00

T

but they have no difference of case, with the exception of Hie duals the Demonstratives and Relatives, which follow the

we

duals, as

the

common

84,

Wo

shall

The

sec.

immediately

first

mode is

person

of

of

oilier

naturally of

gender, and wants the dual number.

now como

to the Affixed Pronouns,

which

occur

and arc always annexed to a verb,. a When added to verbs they arc noun, or a proposition. almost in every lino,

generally in tho accusative CUKO, though often in the especially

when another

When joined affixed to

a

relative^

immediately

mme*

The* Affixed Pronouns are the following: or

^

U "of

"

^

of

mo"

l4

or

JM>."

(No Dual),

w

u

or "ufl."

Muse,

"

CX

"

of lain

*

"of them

liore

Fern.

or

,

"of Huso" or "thce."

is

added;

affixes also

thiw,

U

JI5

"

P3im Mane,

Item.

'j;

all

lliufi,

of Imr

U

;

'f

Dual

*J "of

"

or

Dual

her."

Kcm.

to illnatntto tho

iiscj

A "of them

of the

affixed

nouns the mlnution disappears when ff

1

n ;

luin ;"

add a fbw examples

tho affixed j^T

remains

"

both/' etc.

pronouns, premising* that in

Tho other

Pern

d,c.

you 3rd Pow. Bing.

"Wo

1st

H

(cowm.) t2 "of yon both/* etc/ Plur.

ez.

after.

nouns they are possessive, or relative. "When a preposition ihey have a personsil and sometimes

find Pors. Sing.

UJ&

dative,

to

1st Pors. fling.

rinr.

uceuHailve

ftoinow

4->l^*

a book;


book,"

displace tho nnmtion$ but tho simple vowol

n house

f

" sj\3

his hoiwo,"

Wo

must

also

notice a few changes of modifications which take place both in tho tenoaination of the

words

to

which tho pronoun

the Initial syllable of the affixes themselves.

Is affixed;

aad

also to

OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS,

The

b.

affixes #,

torn when

when following The pronoun

or "it."

kasra preceding

ending with "

it,

my sins ;" ^Sli "my staff;" *]J "an or

when another

my

vocative

my

^bl

fathers/'

from

"in

as,
of

any word

to

iJli^L "sins,"

as,

"

l^

a

5

staff/

After kasra ^s

archer."

"

case

hamza

"

^

as,
when annexed

it,

"my

archer," ^*\j

the

;

person- ^j in the case

first

faithful (people) ;"

^5 (officiating for


friends;"

of

omitted in

frequently

of the

without vowels;

^, "

precedes

of the * into

^~ of prolongation;

the

takes fatha above

j, or

1,

damma

and J^, turn the

9

torn immediately

another

his master/' or

him"

U&, +&

67

as,

;

CJj

my

lord

is

" !

^ *)

precedes

For the verbal

;

affix

as,

my ^ is

^U*-!

,J, only

(<

sometimes used

;

as,

assist

^^j^\

me,"

for

,

Not only the nunation vowels, as we have already stated, but also the <j in the duals and in the perfect masculine plurals, are dropped " two books/' ^c^ when followed by the affixed pronouns as, c.

^^

;

"his two books,"etc.

CJ

latter into

When affixed to words ending in ^ they change the "an

as,
;

aunt,"

uLSc^ "thy aunt"

In the 3rd

2nd

person plural masculine of the preterites of verbs, also in the

person plural masculine of the imperatives, the quiescent alif after ^ is " " they assisted us ;" and rejected ; as, \j^aS they assisted," l^j/^ after the verbal

termination 15 they add

"

$y&J& in

you

^ quiescent

him/'

assisted

after fai^a,

"he threw," t^j or and

" ausj

s-

;

as,

vowel points are used

singular to distinguish

<(

#l^$

you

assisted/'

following verbs or nouns ending

final S

^

is

Mm."

he threw

^**

is

it

15J*J

changed to

^&

"a

;

as,

bt>y,"

x&

!

forms a diphilxong with the

"to," aJt "to him/'

Jt

Sr x

^

" as,

;

^ either remains, or

In particles

his boy/'

preceding fatfaa

When

^

x

sometimes added

from the ma$culi$i

to the ;

In bpoks where no

2nd person feminine

thus,

,/

for

d/,

68

OF THE DEMONSTBAI1YE PRONOUNS,

d*

The

affix

in place of u?r~,

^J

also to particles ending in

j^xH

"that

^^

I ;"

for

w

^^

however^ always coalesce, as particle

J

&(/Q

such as

^1,

J,l,

^

?

^,

"from me;" the two w##s of

^^

The

.

etc,;

the

affixed pronouns,

cst,

till est, ilfl c$t, etc.,

as

^J

in

as,

latter,

when

the to

this phrase

^ ^ J dj^

48, where the pig says,

fable,

miser,

used when joined to verbs, and

have often a possessive signification similar

is prefixed,

the Latin idiom, mihi

from our "

,

is

8

^^sllf Ui

fi

non

cst lanti wihl, ncque,

Utof

wretched have

1

neither

wool nor milk."

ti*

Two

person

is

affixes

always placed before '

third

;

bo annexed 1o one word, wlioit that of the

may

as,

^

*U\kc1

or can suffice

"

the*

second, and tho second before " " ^

first

the

"*

*

he gave

it to

thee against

mo

them/"

lie

^Li5u

"will

',&,

or

it will,

or may,

protect thee from

thorn."

j\ These pronouns

may

alno be put scparatcily after verbs to denote

the accusative COHC, but with the particle

U

"he C/U^ cly?

be placed before the verb

in tho

beat

m

same

you;" or they in

may

prefixed to them

as

the following pasBitgo from the JjCur&n:

uj-^uJ cJbjj 4\-oJ cJt] "Thoo wo adore, ami thco wo call to our In like manner the other affixes, as, aid/' "me;" Ubl "us;"

^W

"theo"

(fern,);

Ulb] "you

"

you"(finOj "

*Cl

lf

"Lim;

i/ tlusm" (inaso.)

;

^blw U^

two;"

Ub! "horj" x

"thorn"

^bj "you"

(mase.);

UWv "thorn" *

^bj

(two); IjKl

v

(fern.).

THE DIWONSTIUTIVB HiONOUHS. 85 Tlio Domoiistrativo pronoiui, implying an object near

OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

09

X

is

at hand,

follows

expressed

U

"this"

(hie),

and

is

declined as

:

PLURAL.

or

J/\

Masc.

1J

tf

15

"

\

.

The remote demonstrative, "that"

Pern.

formed from the

is

above by adding c/. PLtlEAL.

SINGXILAR.

Masc. /

J

often inserted before

is

l

(for tiSJb', etc.) 1

is

d/

?

as d53lJ or C$3 J

;

Pern.

clJ3b*

or cU3j ?

frequently prefixed to 1J and L!/!O

;

the

being generally dropped, and represented in pointed books *~

by

or a perpendicular fatfya PLURAL.

thus

;

DUAL,

SINGULAR.

jj&

Masc, Pern.

tii

u

<<:

this ?

thou ?? or

??

sometimes used for the personal pronoun

is

"

you

?

?>

though

contempt or detestation^ as

then in general expressive of ^ tf

it is

Ui

tibtou."

OF THE JRELXT1VK PJiOXOUNS*

TUB RELATIVE PHONOUXS. 80,

Tho Eclatlvc "who," "which," "that,"

of the article J! and ^SJ, the

J

article (

initial

J

of the

ttwfufid) as formerly ol served under the

It is declined us follows

4C) a).

compounded

of tho article being omitted

in the singular ami masculines plural, and the

pronoun marked hy

Is

;

0,-

..rtJJt

Masc,

'till

Fern.

ThiB relative does not admit of any of tho Horvile

Mug

obflorvod,

we

oas<w

often coiiHtruod with tho

for

i(

^T ^

W)m
or,

"(the land,

Tho rrotiotmB

ever/' and

U

and

;

w^Idom

j, which, OH

^i,

tm<jd,

^!

^3Jb

"whom

I

it

^jj!

wiw,"

word intervening, whioh he wtinborn."

with

a

is

to the

^

;

we

particles

and

pronomiH ann(xod

in whioli," for

otc^) in

^

ar<%

aflixcni

fltibsoquont worc1 ? an u ^iSI

"from which,"

7

consider to bo inseparable

Tho oblique

not sorviloa.

87.

J

prefixed, excepting uJ, c/,

have already

letters

for

as

"lie who," "thono who," "who-

"that which," or " whatever," "whatever,"

are also roktlveB Including tho antecedent, tho former referring to rational boingn and tho hitter to brutes or lifislcns objects,

as In tho prcvorb

:

^^

^T cl^^T

^/LiTT

^

"

Ho who

commits (has committed) to tho care of tho wolf (the pasturing of) tho sheep, certainly does (luiH dono) an iigusticc."

OP THE INTEKEOGATIVE PBONOUNS.

71

"

Whereupon Al Damiri in his History of Animals," shrewdly observed that there was a greater injustice done to the wolf " than to the sheep because, says he, they employed him to ;

do that a.

which was not in

^ employed

his nature."

the genders, numbers, interrogatively, also receives

For but nothing must then be added after this word. " Some one is come," or I example, should a person say to another, if the other should simply ask "Who?" or have seen and cases

;

'

somebody;"

"

Whom ?"

the proper

word

in Arabic is

^

,

etc.

INTEEEOGATIVE PROKOUNS.

88.

Ji feminine Tl

what kind ?"

etc.,

is

a

who?

JJ

u

u

which? 3J

what? ?? "of

generally use4 interrogatively, govern"4 1*

as ing the substantive in the genitive,

<^&

L/\

"what book?"

all When it is employed alone, without a substantive, it receives * J * *s s&s &<-

the numbers and cases; thus dual, ^UJ? fem fern.

y

.

as triptotes.

"whoever;"

The It

*

uW>

plural

^1,

the plural, are declined singular, as well as is often

joined with

"whosoever;"

CiJ

^

and U, as

"whatever;"

^$

"whatso-

OF THE UEUIJ'HOCAL

over " und sometimes plurally, of tiiom?" dualU^f,

muse.

^\

;

^\

fern.

etc.

RECIPKOOAL I'KOXOITXS. 89.

Reciprocal actions are

"wonl," "nclf," wllh the

expressed by the

^Ju JL-^4 "I

aifixen, UB

despotic influence

which Baitina, the famous chief

a^suHBins, so celebrated in the lunfory of t1u

u

of

follower**.

of

tlio

k

Orusjides by tlio Old man of Iho Mouniain," had over Ms When this cbic^ftain had become po\v(Tiul and-

ihn

tho

to

terrible

pleased

or in the following* remarkable anecdote of the

myself;"

namo

2101111

surroumlinf? princes,

lu

drew

at

last

the

who sending an amhe ilnin ax^c^ived Mm;

attention of the Sultan Jalhi-d-duula,

baHHador to require Inn wibminftion,

H

\Vlutn iho umbuKMidor ai>p<ared in liw pr<^(u?(5, ho

Ixiforc

him some

of

hi

called

and giving the nignal to aid to him, ^S(ab youwelf/ and

pcopl(4

;

a young man among them, ho did HO he* ordered tlwm anotlur to precipitate himself from the eatlo, which ho did, and WUB danlicd to pieces, ;

Thonliowaid to tUp Sultan'n ambaasador, *<)f Hubj(^cts such as llicfio, flovonty thousand are thun obnervaiit of me let this :

bo the auHwor. n>

The wordB

in the original arc as follows: s ss jli

a*

In

tlio

Lowland Scotch

ffcqticntly heari the expression

dialect

of the Ariglo*Saxon 1

u

"

1

tlie

sel

o't/* f*^,

the self of

instead of "Itself/* which last is probably a eon traction of "its

The expressions "tdmsolf" and "thomBolvos"

liave it/'

self,"

are npparently icor-

OF THE RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS.

rect, for

the

amendment of which

successfully to substitute

73

the late Dr. Gilchrist laboured un-

"his self* and

"

their selves/' so as to con-

"orm with the Arabic idiom.

(5,

Pronouns are seldom used in the plural

to

express anything

but the feminine singular is substituted in the place of it ; ; ' ff^a is the proper expression for "these books/' and not L~*sJl ius, jf*>Jb

rrational /

?

? f

<~>~a

_xxLll

'

f>

tyj\*

This obseryation applies also to nouns, as will be more

in the Syntax, ully detailed

E

8

T

tie

Of The theme

SKX root,'*

ju

f'trA

in

named

all

fin*

it,

tlio

ollior

infloxioitn

lottos whirh compose* flo tlio ^(n"(n

li is

li^ttcTO

on

tin?

from them

?'#

tlio /r;/^,

I

hold

root; then tlio

tlio

of

UK

9L Tho

clcirivativo

vctlw

arc^

Ju^

Antliif.

vf*rh t

The

" radicals

n ;

to

(Irammftr, when

perplex

formation am! nwanin# of

It

to bo

l.hoiii

by

tlio

learner

tlio rarious

ctmjMjtttwn*) which may

In tlu

root.

wapect

I

differ

far the bottar plan, in

a ninglo paradigm of a perfect

Biwloul will bo enabled, with

purport of the


the word \yJILlS ("they "w rvihH n or "letters of

writ'w on

priiniiivo val

first plnc
48.

fc

\*

fc

clerivativoH, or as lluy foolislily call

onianato from

*

in

jj^j

conitnoncung their dcHcrijtlion (liHCiiBBion

an^ (idled

(*oin|)ris(*d

wlili inoftt

ciwfomary

with along

1omg* formed

alroady inonf ion<

roof,

are dmioininadHl

fattoii"),

the

prefixing, inj4orfin#, or witling rmn or more

l>y tlio

**

a

"the

ilir siinp1os( ? consisting

IMTSOHH

tlio BOtvilo l(4f(TH \\n\ hav**

and

$

wliidi in tho thin! person singular inasculhw of

only of radical lotion*;

of

TIT,

of the Arabic vorl>

Pivtcrito touso, as of

from

X

F

tlio

primitiye

to tsomprdhend

formations.

oith
or Quftdrilitflcul ;

the

OF THE VE&B.

first

75

3^ "he

consisting of three radical letters, as

the other of four, as

divided into consonants,

as

quiet.

he turned

3 '

"

jjJ

he spoke the truth;

peculiarity of ^* (for

called a

Surd verb, consists merely in the

radical

is

three

of

7

are also

They

the root consisting

Perfect,

The only

77

u

^y=^

made;'

strong

"he was

7 '

Js

j^) which

is

also

fact that the third

the same letter as the second, (both coalescing -=-).

The Perfect and Surd

verbs are also called firm or robust.

All other verbs which

on certain occasions, by tashdld

have one or more of the infirm letters

and

^

for their

radicals, are called irregular, infirm, or imperfect,

as

JU

3^ "h

went,"

said?" etc.,

\

9

j,

"

he

which will be detailed in our next

Section.

IE

a.

triliterals

the

the second .*

^*

*

the

^.

letter is called

first

'ain,

and the

Jii ("he made")? as we

verb

third

have

the the

li

fa

of the root,

*$ lam,

already

because the

stated,

taken as the paradigm of the regular triliteral verb. *

literal roots, 9

second ain

t

the model being

the the

JUs

,

the

first letter is

ts

quadri-

named fa,

the

the third lam the fast, and the fourth lam the second*

The Arabic Verb has only one Conjugation and like noun it has throe numbers, the Singular, the Dual, and Plural They have also two genders, the Masculine and ;

Feminine.

three the

usually

In

.-ux

92,

the

is

;

Their Persons, as in other languages, are but the third, being the root, precedes the second, and

second the

first.

The

First Person has

singular and plural are of

titc

common

no Dual and both gender.

All this

OF THE ACTIVE VOICE,

will appear sufficiently obvious from the

under 03*

04 3

into five parts;

arrange, their

moods

and

from tho

tciiBCS differently

;

below

etc*

The Arabian grammarian**

Iinporativo

paradigm given

TStiropcuiiH, dividing their paradigm 1st, tho Frotorito; 2nd, tho Aorwt; 3rd, the

4th,

the

Partifnplo

and

;

tho

r>tli ?

Infinitive,

Those, luwovcr, do not exactly wnvspond to cmr moods and t

oiiacB of

heinp;

thoflu

deiiominutiouH

frequently

parlioular

<%xpr<ss tho Present, while

io

lined

tlm Vn^cTitn in

;

the

Imih the Pn'S(nt and tho Future^ as well Aorist .prf^*iil UH tho Conditional and other foiwos, as will lus explained r(

more

04*

k

at 1ar#o afl.er fho conjugiition of tho 'Pi'rfoct or Hegilar

Wo

now proceed

Regular Arabic VerB, tho root Jxi

to exhibit

Initli

punuligm of u Perfect uctivoand paKIve adopting as u dld n or "uotixl." it

m

?

"h made/

1

t

AOTIVK V iBt rait

Tho PEETKEITE

Ul

**

he did" or "made,"

I'l'K.

MAM

1

.

x

*"

Jii

3rd

2nd

1st

2nd Part

Tho AOKIHT

l tf

^\

tf

ho

make,"

mak("

or

or

"

will or

OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. DTTAL. MASC.

FEM.

FEM.

SINGULAE. MASC.

3rd

2nd

1st

" The IMPERATIVE make" ^$\

3rd Part

"

or

do thou/ 3

etc.

2nd TIio PARTICIPLE ^uUlf " tlie

4th Part

maker

J?

or

u

he who

makes." PLUllAL. FEM. i

or

cj%U

5th Part

V J*j

KM.

8ING1ILAJR. MASC,

PEM.

MASC.

^

The LSTIHITIVE

i

?

DUAL.

MASC.

J*i, or

fa

U

U;

VEEBAL

or

the act of

making"

or

"doing."

PASSIVE VOICE 95.

The Passive Voice has only three

Preterite,

the Aorist,

and the

Participle.

parts,

It

viz.,

the

wants the

imperative and infinitive; but the want of the imperative may be supplied by a modification of the aorist -with fhe particle

J

prefixed, as

^3

him be

"let

assisted."

The

passive preterite differs from the active only in the vowels of the first and second radical letters the first ;

damma, and the second torn.

having always

In the Aorist the incre-

mental or servile letters included in the technical word at the beginning

always hat

Samna

for their vowel,

^\ and

or

that of

tlic

Til

PASSIVE VOIfK.

10

second radical

In the following paradigm

always fatha^ as

is

may be

scon

;

-The PEKTEHITE,

1st Part ir -\L. 1

!

MAM

M,

.

3rd

2nd

1st

2nd rail

TIu* AOUIHT,

Ord ***


t

t

t

p

2nd 1st

Srd

Tlu

'V

00*

Such

IB

student

is

memory

Ixjforo

the Arabic vorb

^pur

particularly requested

ho procccdn a

thin the more effectually ho

the two followftig" verbs,

separated^

The

The second

diffora.in

iirnt

ntc

i

p

may

to

fc

c

Hirnplc^" "which

t

commit

lkrflu

i

write out

in

lu\ b'rolco

g&

procwly

life
D^

tin

n

i(

V'M.,

carefully

In order

r,

;

tlio

au

to

to do

exercise

andjy

"lie

hi ovory respect*

one Binglo imtatkco, vi^, the towel of the middle radical of the oorittt active and eoiiseciuoitly of the imperative throughout

i

kmm^

not

yi*%

;

thus jjfat

not jjyJ

etc.,

,

as will

OF THE PRETERITE.

79

bo more fully explained hereafter.

In

the Passive Voice all verbs have precisely the same measure, as in J*5, thus etc.

g*

jj>,

9

Observations on the

of the Regular Triliteml Verb.

Tenses,

THE PBETEBITE

The reader may have observed that the persons of the Preterite Tense are formed by adding some sort of termina97.

tion after the radicals.

According to the Arabian gram-

marians these terminations are the personal pronouns in a

more or

less perfect

and that

cither expressed or understood;

state,

a good reason

is

mastered the pronouns

why

before

the learner should have

coming

to

The

the verb.

middle radical of tho preterite of several verbs takes Aasra, and sometimes $amma, in place of fatha* Those that take

may be * either transitive, as 1U "he knew.' ^ transitive, as ty "he was glad," ^j^ "he was sad." Jcasra

7

or in-

'

verbs as take are always of

" ugly," ^Li. a.

There

for the

is

damma

Such

for the middle radical of the preterite

an intransitive or

nexxter sense, as -*J

"

he was

he was handsome."

this difference in

meaning between neuters with kasra

middle radical, and those that have

damma^

viz.,

the former

denotes an accidental state or condition, and the latter a state that is

constant or hatural X,)V

cause of the

;

^3 first

"

;

thus ^jZ~ *>

he was deformed

"

he was sad" from some accidental

"

naturally*

In

all

verbs the vowels

and third radicals of the Preterite are always fatha*

80

OF THE

There are some verbs that have two, or even

b.

^

middle radical of the Preterite

for the

of difference In the signification; thus, juu

^

"ho

"lie was contented ;" jus,

^jJ

" it

was cultivated

When

c

"

"

or

built;"

"ho hogged humbly" J^i "ho lived long'"

inhabited."

ihird radical of the rroteritc

flic

;

the three

all

but each with a shade

to he

happens

cj

and the appended termination begins with c^% the two wimilar naturally coalesce by x

JB IB

cu

It

docs not

1

c^w

and

own form

it

*3

3,

,

The

Baino

t, or

^j

which havo an

fe,

Unia, c^Ju-i for c^d-o:.

tashdld with !Jrd

tlio

^

of

If thn

ilia

when

In I)e Hacy'rf

Jinl

fh<

Urn

third

tt

Int.

^\

**

(jnuniauiro Aralw/'

in

either

to tlw* letter

third radical bo

(<Tininulion of

person sinmilar ^ radical

Round

affinity in

person plural fomiuino, an T^l for

d.

In

*

applies

the third radical

c-? of the termination, but the Cj

ulJ mnkra

;

rule

waimw* when

In like

<*fc.

^ O X

c^iJ

(him uu*J in the lind person singular

by tmhdld with tho

unites allot

letters

<*

uLj

written

ttt&Jidld,

inert

^

il

o

*

coalesces by

plural and the

pwoti

<\IH.

1

wu

are, at

thk stage

of the

work, treated with fifty or sixty pagcm Hvo, on the various idiomatic uses of

the

altojffithcr

and Aoriat ToimoH.

Praterite

prcpoftloroiw

;

as

thd

subjoct

Syntax, to which wo accordingly potpown

THK

Such a

ovidonily

discussion

belongs

to

10

the

It*

ACJEffiT.

08. Tlui AoiiHf gonoraHy corropoiute to our prosont

and frequently

to

our future.

olMiorvcd in thn paradigm,

It

w

fonnod,

as

may

from the preterite by prefixing

the different porflotw, one or other of the latter*

and by adding one or moro of

tlus

name

I

,

cy

,

^

or

bo to

^,

a* terminations

OF THE AORIST.

The in

the

of

the

have

serviles

prefixed

2nd and

1st,

3rd

quadriliterals,

Aorist

fatha,

excepting

derivative

formations

verb,

hut

;

"

excepting I*J

"he

the

and the primitive form of the where they take damma. If the second

trilateral

the

constantly of

radical of the preterite has

in

81

it

kasra

if

it

damma,

is

it

remains also damma to

changed

fatha,

was pleasant," L!^>- "ke thought/' JJj "

despaired/' Jl*J

^Uj "he excelled/

7

it

dried/

3

kJ

3'

7

and (j "he appeared; which may he with fatfra or Jcasra and even sometimes pronounced either ox f ^^^ ox fst"' y fus ? p /ox

"he

despaired/

"

^

/>

with damma^

But

if

as *x>

,

**^>

or

,

**ej

:

so J*ojb

,

J^ij

?

or

second radical takes fatha in the preterite it is

the

changed in the Aorist to damma, as

d^

"he

wrote/' L^^iu

:

cly? "he struck/' cl>/^i J unless the second or third radical is a guttural letter, in which case, though it is or to kasra, as

barked," ^

X

jiL"

;

^

;

XX*

^

^

by the

XOX

"he presented/' **& and in the same manner with;

out a guttural fused,"

"

sometimes remains fatka, as ^j he ; Ji,S 'ho entered, ^oi; J^i "he occupied/ it

frequently changed,

^U

'^J>j

The

serviles

1,

"he

leant upon,"

last radical

U3

sometimes dropped.

^,

or

The

^7, and

has damma, but

^

it is

^"1

when

"he

re-

followed

sometimes changed, and

Aorist, however,

when preceded by

certain particles, admits of several variations in the termina-

which are classed under the grammatical Apocope, Antithesis, and Paragoge,

tion,

a.

The rules applicable

to

heads of

the middle vowel of the Aorist, and

DJ consequence of the imperative, are neatly expressed in the following

nemorial couplet

:

11

OF THE AOK1ST. "

(on the

medial of the may be freely rendered 1 Fatlm lw*m (as ihe medial of tlio aorW); 2, /< a^ preterite) may give 4, /itfsrn 1)0 botli /
which

,

7

;

give*

fatha

8.

;

&*M

struck."

*

ull(1

G

-

oxampW;

I'UIT.

IM'tV.

!

"

&

in the six following

damma,;" us

"He

w*y

!'**'>

'Ml'.

'

,

AOIHST.

I'Hia.

!

lie assisted." I

" IJc^

Uii

oponccL"

t

t*

$\\

r/^i

"lloknow." s

"

IIo coimtod." j

"Ho

was generous."

^i

1

90. Apocope^ wlii^lt)

a pant

sigjiilloutiou,

mdiciul

Bpcuikiii^ givcnn tlie Aorist

gonmlly

not only ecmvorlH iho ///iw/^ of

infoyww,

Init

(juiw

off tho iinul

Tho

>tms in lh<^ IVminiiu* plural Hiou

tliiB

apocope are

r-?i

u

u

J

no1/ ui

^

(WTywhcre^

i>rlu*UH which

occa5

iu>t y
the

"no, not/

and

'^1

J wlion pr^fixcnl i,o iho Aorint in an imiwrutive "ho did not uHHiBf/* may answer u a jpnural oxumplo. HUIIHO:

RtNOULA.tt*

r^.

3

f

^

J /o*'

fe*

J*^ J /""

W

f

4 '

r

ep f

jeti f

2

OF THE AOKIST.

To the above

a.

^

and

UK

U

"whoever;"

t^rl

may

particles

UK

"all that,"

83

be added the following

"whatever;" along with

"every time that;"

"wherever;" ^J\ "howsoever;" Uj

UuL,

JZ

and

its

" :

^\

" if;

compounds

^,

and

"however;"

'

"as

' s

T

x-

^^ and

often as;" Utal,
poetry

when

131

"

" ;

x-^

x

^\A "when," "whenever;" and

in

provided, however, another verb in the retributive

sense (as

whatever you will do,

sentence.

If both verbs are of a future signification, they conform

to this rule

alone

1

only the

if

j-^a3

"

L

subjoined in the same

is

either this, or the

general rule;

thus,

whatever you will do, I will do ;" t^Jc^ *J^u I* ' ^ ' t"* ' ? '<"? ^Ox-X.X -TIT T 1. 1

,

whatever you will do,

"whatever you

do")

that does the same, but if the last

first

future, it follows

'is

<^*a\ ((

;

I will

I

did,

1

did

U

'*

J

\

%^\ ui^^^

;

or %-**\ L^^CX?

This rule holds good also

will do."

an imperative precedes, to which the future

is

responsive;

U

when thus,

" assist

S^ul C 5i/^

100. Antithesis, cuts off the final

damma

me,

by M3 ^

the influence of another set of particles,

same m^nngr, and changes the *

in the

ft*

of the third radical to fatha.

means, not at all;" J, order

I will assist thee."

" to,

because;"

C

until."

Also

t^J

31,

^^^

$,

iJ,

lest not, so as

u

when

^JllT cJ^LJ ^

14,

not

SLfl

u

assist

byno

that, in

u ;" ^\

or;"^

me, and I will

assist

a preyou;" 3'

it

JLSUJT

as implies "and at the same time, " do not eat fish, and at the same S

J$ X

time drink milk ;" and also /

are ^1

prefixed to a future, referring to

ceding word, tL5^?3U ij*v\ likewise ^

Q^^t^U^ u

^ These

ox

s

^\ Wr

.,

or Ut j,

u

well! do so! come

OF THE AORIST. X f

on! ?J

etc,:

**/

V

X

u

^j ^

he

-will

by no means

assist/' is here put

for a general example*

tf

J

2

1

10L Paragoge

adds to tho Aorist Jy or ^~ (but this last is added only in the singular, and in the plural masculine and " u it when donotos common}* communding/' wiHlung," in1

treating/' or "awking aliout futurity/ in the

manner

following,

For example, when preceded by the particle jl, which has BO equivalent in English, Intt corn^poudw to tlus Latin an? or num? it will be as follows ^J^ JA u will ho assist?" :

>JX AMPLE,

IW4L*

BlMGtlJUft,

jJ^W Jto

The

^^^J

^

to

tlio

where the

X/W

/

^

5

would to God/ of c., requires to be ingular of the AoriHt and to tlia plural masculine
common;

$

i*Jt*0*J iJ^

Jfe

particle w-^S

added ancl

>

as

single

X ?***

*

<*

X

^/w ^W ^ merely

mdioal ehangod int

is

a

would

to Clod lie

added, and tho

would

1

assist/

of the

last

OP THE IMPEKATIVE.

5

EXAMPLE. SINGULAR MA8C

.

.

3 2 1

mode may be

After this tf

x/Ox x 8

assist;" uj^^'

inflected

Ox /Ox

cc

and ^^atf $ x

JC

^s

and

liJ "

''

x St

t>x

let

'

Mm

do not assist;" orwlien pre-

'C5-O--'

ceded by an oath as ^/^j
(

y&

102.

The Aorist

preceded

by the negative

^ him who

withal, as \L

jj%\&

S

7

ox-

$ x

"When these

at all," together

which

^ '^ji

however, takes

is

when

with the

also often the case

^

"for

we

will not

moyed for'him who weeps." place only when neither of the

x

negative particles J, UJ ? or before.

(JL;

laments, nor be

This effect of

a future signification

"not

^

ili^l, and

particles tli^,

pity

is restricted to

U

7

have occurred in the phrase

rules do not

operate, or

when

the

U

indefinite is preceded by it beaomes a , present tense : Ox X O XX O^X^X-O,? X X t/xCX Ox " btj^ t^33 he who ^hall do that l;b
& X

<**

Jw

maliciously and turjustly,

we

will punish him,

by

fire/'

OF THE IMPEBATlVE, 103*

The Imperative, which

is

used only in the second

person, corresponds with our Imperative in affirmative com-

-

80

OP THE PAKTWII'LK A<TIVM.

rnands and exhortations.

Like the Aorist It sometimes adds " do thou assist 7? etc Faragogical nun annexed, as ^aj

tlie

\

This mood

is

tlie

3

*o

and written a sentence

formed by prefixing called when another word precedes. !

1

*

?

WJicu beginning

"know thou;"

has always /wra, as ^Ul

it


cL.I|

"strike thou;" unless the vowel of the penult radical, which "

/)**
is 1

always the same with that of

last

as

takes tjamma^

also

radicals

^\

being

or

uro

^

Juiuiv, be
"aaslnt

Tho

inert

dropped when cJ

the*

thou;" tho

initial

in

alff

of tho gondorw and nuinlxtrs, iho final smiles

^

wo have

used, as

ftfafed,

sometimes

In tho formation

jm .fixcd fc

are employed as in tho Aorist.

and

first

1,

^j

^,

The Imperative

only in tho Nee.ond

and

"being

ptjrnou, tho other

ly the Aorist; J with a frnmt being u as lot us assist; J4x3 "let him asmttt;" J^4

porsons are Biipplied prefixed,

which

35

HomctimoB the easo wtlh
-

itself

being oven then Homof imon omitted.

singular of tho Impc^nttivo of

thc^

The second

primitive verb

roproontod by an indcoli nuble word of tho form " thus 3^ or JJJ alightrtliou." OF THE FAKTICIPLE AOTIVB 104,

Tho

(ill

in

person

sometimes

Jl*i or

jQ;

NOUN OF AOBNCY.

participle of tho primitive

tniitml v
in the

*

active voice

IB

form Jytt*,

Tlu^n ^

partioitlctrly

of the form Jail 1

***

J^i and

;

and in

tlio

passive of the

however many other forms; and

are 4

^J/j

?

whirh ure

hotli active

and

OF THE INFINITIVE OR VERBAL NOUN.

It has

to these participles that

been objected

they are merely

verbal adjectives, conveying no idea of time.

however, that they are rather of context,

"God

is

in

the following

would seem,

It

times, according to the

all

s

as

87

?

-ox

s \AJ

^jjU^

instance,

^a*

f&^a ^
1

^

what they do," where Jl^J evidently

seeing (sees)

time. expresses present

OF THE INFINITIVE OK VERBAL NOUN,

The

105.

Infinitive, in Arabic, differs

somewhat from the

same part of the verb in most European languages

;

inasmuch

always a verbal noun, and generally declinable in the It is used often adverbially in the singular as a triptote. as it is

accusative case, and,

by

a peculiar idiom,

with

its

own

in construction

to the expression,

striking/' ie.,

"he

Mr. Richardson,, "

a.

thus

is

verb, to give a greater energy 2 literally,

l

struck

joined sometimes

"he

struck

him

Mm severely,"

in las Arabic

Grammar, and of course Ms mere

that the Infinitive (in Arabic) differs greatly from those " of all other languages This is too sweeping an assertion, and copyists, say

!

besides, it contains three bits of

or illogical; 2nd, it is untrue; to speak in this style of

and

"

all

nonsense

and 3rd,

1st, it is

it is

ungrammatical

absurd in any one

other languages,"

man

In Greek, German,

employed as a verbal notra

Italian, the Infinitive is frequently

just as it is in Arabic*

5.

The

Infinitives

of the primitive transitive verbs are formed

regularly, as 3**> etc., in the are irregular, tions.

and reducible

Grammarians make

;

but those of the intransitivea

rule,

without innumerable excep-

paradigm to

no

in all thirfy-aix different forms, as under;

OF

<j.

The

TifJ'J

DERIVATIVE FORMATIONS.

Infinitive of the derivative intranwUvf'H are formed in a

similar manner,

the general

iimorthig fho charof winf Je Mrviloa, and observing

by

rules,

IIH

hi

the?

otlnsr InllecJicmH*

They

arc, however,

subject to various irreguluriiieH, fir attaining a kriowlinlge of which, a

dictionary

is

the simplest mode,

and indeed tlw only proper

guide.

OF TUB DBRJYATJVB FOEMAT10NH, 100. Thero

atro

from thn primitives in fall

;

or

and tho

Imn

Iwolvo

cliBlinot

triliteral

formalioim of

The

lagfc


vorl)

wo havo jut

which

)>oar

Homo

dorired' detailed affinity

close to the primitive, aro dividtul into three

according as they aro augmented by one, two, or three of the Berrila letters.

The verb Jxf

ho mado,"

is still re-

OF THE DERIVATIVE FORMATIONS,

89,

It is well adapted to serve as

tained as a general paradigm.

a model, as its three radical letters are so clearly perceptible to the eye.

The Derivative Formations are

107.

inflected precisely

the same principles as the primitive form the same relation to the leading

It will

paradigms have

s ss

to J*3

tense, as those x

x-Ox

?

J*i and

t

J

9 s<*?

J*i> etc.

be only requisite, therefore, in place of swelling the

grammar unnecessarily paradigms, to give the it

the persons having

word in each

^

in the foregoing

;

on

to the learner,

with, a great

first

number

word alone

of every tense, leaving

of exercise, to

by way

which he may find

of whole length

fill

up the other

be a considerable help to his memory, as tending to make a more lasting impression than

persons,

several cursory readings.

to

Of the

Derivatives, the 3rd, 4th,

and 9th formations in general appear to occur most frequently, and therefore ought to have the greatest attention 6th, 7th,

bestowed upon them. formations last,

are

;

ISText to these are the 1st, 2nd,

and 5th

whilst the other four, but more especially the two

more confined in their

lowing formations ;hat letter in

which take

use.

The

servile

\

3rd, 6th,

and the

fol-

in the beginning, drop

the aorist and participle, as

may be

observed in

he paradigms; and the 4th and 5th, where the initial is ;, requently omit the latter in those persons of the aorist whose Characteristic is

able of

^all

cj, as Js^j

formal

We

have subjoined a

the formations of the Derivative Verbs, in which

he student will see at one view the third person singular of he preterite and aorist of ea$i f

;

the second person singular

the imperative as well as the participles and infinitives, 12

OF THE DERIVATIVE FORMATIONS.

PRIMITIVE FORM. tSttS.

,

IMP.

I'AHT.

I

MUUST.

I

PKBT,

DERIVATIVE FORMATIONS,

f

E

II,

w

m.

lv

iv.

V

.

s

J*lj

ta.

i-

Jxbb,,

I

V. V!

JsU?

J,^\

ui

Jl

VT

V

vii.

y>

!

VIII.

^

**

D JIM

ix. I

X.

II.

^

m

OF THE DERIVATIVE VERB.

General Significations

of

the

to

the Primitive.

108. It remains for us

Derivative

now to

91

Verb

with reference

describe briefly the nature and

peculiarities of the Derivative Formations of the

Verb which

may be deduced from the primitive triliteral root. These are generally reckoned to be twelve in number, or, according to some Grammarians, fourteen.

They have

all

the same termi-

nations or inflections as the primitive verb.

Grammarians

very improperly call them conjugations ; but this term is apt to mislead the student, whose ideas of a conjugation are already formed according to the general usage of the Latin

and French grammars, etc. then, when he hears of the language, for there to

Let not the student be alarmed, fifteen conjugations of the Arabic

is in reality

our notions of the term.

but one conjugation, according

Instead of conjugations, then, I

have here throughout made use of the term Formations. a.

Upon

the various significations of the different derived forma-

tions of the verb,

but,

some grammarians have entered

these inquiries need not long occupy the especially at the present

here

made

will not be

into long details

;

curious investigator,

although well worth the notice of the

attention of the student,

The

stage

of his studies.

found

without use, but

it

brief remajta is

only

'"by

reading and consulting the dictionary, that a knowlodg^ cm fte gained of the true significations of the various formations. /However

minute might be the observations made upon the of the derivatives,

we should

only be learned by use ticular formations, in

;

still

find

many

exceptions,

and the same must be

wMeh

my $$m wb

different

is

meanings which can

said as to the par-

to

be fowd.

Some

92

OF THE IRRITATIVE VEUB.

met with

roots are to be

none in

in only one formation,

most

all,

The

101),

teuso of

source, or third person singular, of the preterite

tltc

their vowel

fathufw

consists, as

primary verb,

of throe consonants, the

when

general rulo,

lust of

and the middle

;

tlie

and

first

verb

Is

we have

**

letter

IK).

The,

derivative

first

m

lrauttitiv<* 7

in

the preceding

(lie

wrote/* "becHmtes in the

lirsi

was

to

wri<e/

csr

tivo; thus, ^y*

voxcd.'

A

;

lew

vorbrt

v

of thin

object,

tlnift,

;

fromyi" "

which

^Ignlfidi

comofi

4^Ai5

tlie

firnt

formation

in transi5

he maddened/ or "he fommtion are derived from

prod wo whaiovcr

k

formed

pecmllurity of

-L

flic

"ho

noun

made

formation

thifl

infidolily,"

comcn the

infinitive *

ndllii^ one 101 infidol;" BO from

"iieciisliig

is

of the primitive root to a given / j-^J,

Oj^" lying,"

one of iUI^Jiood," or "giving

Tartu in tho fink formation

aw

t.

*"

the lie" a,

"lie

*

u

is

FJU!," u ji-

ciimo #

d^

thtw,

;

u

Anchor

tho ascribing of the

primitive root

root

thn, from JJA "liread,"

broad, or baked."

three

Again, whon the

noiin, and signify to form or significss;

fc

"lie

^tmiRlit wrlling."

ho was

"he

formation c-^K whic'h nuanfl

a neuter or infrauHitivi* verb,

u

thus,
;

doubles the middle

wntHtd

?

f*4iiiHecl

either

roat."

If tlu

is

and

;

asa

7

vowels are ahvayn

Itn

tallies

fornuition

fn\st

lie

formation

and

letter of the primitive roof, fafhttx,

Ct

1

always

has/%

trunsitivo or active

was sad" Jju

lie

"before stated

which have

or dfiMMu vvhon neuter or intransitive

IB

are in several

frequently, however,

one

OP THE DERIVATIVE VERB.

synonyms of the primitive,

or only distinguished

as a species of intensives

as

"he separated"

its

"

or

J^

and*

"

by being understood

he broke,"

Jl^

jj

and

jy

dispersed/' etc.

The second formation inserts

111.

and

;

93

alif after the first radical,

vowels are always three fathas, as in the

table.

It is

generally transitive, and often denotes a reciprocal action f J><J

:

"

4^

Paul heat Peter/' implying, at the same time, that "Peter beat Paul in retnrn;" and, in an

thus, {juja*

Jj!

intransitive sense, as JJ^j &&\5 (juj&

tl^

Paul;"

"he wrote to"

"

Peter sat down with "

or

corresponded

with'

3

(another person).

The second formation has frequently the

a,

signification

of the

primitive, with this difference, however, that the indirect complement

which in the'original form demanded the intervention of a preposition, becomes here a direct complement and of the primitive triliteral root,

meets the verb immediately ; thus,

form the preposition i^x

verb; as if

X

HL,x

^\

^^O tlsXil

I

s x

L^

before the indirect 9

x"

]\

x

Ox /

and 3^j have in the original

complement of the preceding

'

''

"

c^-^

I

Now

wrote a letter to the king."

we here employ the second formation, the person

to

whom we

write

becomes the direct complement, and dispenses with the preposition

J\ ^1

thus,

;

c
sent to the Vazir/'

"he

sat

;

form

as

for its

x

* *o

^ILLJI

this

112.

"

yJ^T

So with

down," in the third form x

one

and

-^

cLlll;

I

wrote

to the

king,"

intransitive verbs al$o; >a( j^ signifies, to sit

down

x x

sat down ^U-xO*"he x ^o xO

near the Sultan*'

1

llfcifhe first '

x/"

would be

The

third formation prefixes

vowels three fatho

9

alif,

and

as in the table.

it

has always

Like the

first

04

OI

it

formation, tivo

a

given a causal or adive signification to the "ho taught writing," or " Jto dictated

cl^

thus,

;

THE DERIVATIVE VERB,

1

made another

\vrilo;" HO, from

"ho

*!&

wa.s

?J

or

gwit," comes

{

Mi<jdwm<
eauwiLs of

Thi fourth fonwdiou, whleh profixostlio

1 111

4

fo tlio

&ftt//tt()

sul)iui,xsivo

taught ,!

*

priiuilivo frilittTal rooL

tli

n ;

formal iou

linst

soimo of s

iUf

"lio

run

llto

was

gouorally of

IH

T

thus,

I

;

tjiughl," or

*b

a lic

v

loiter ci? 3 wltli flio

pussivo or

know;"

Icniniod"

lic^

Bo,' from

i

*

lli^lie

4C

u

n n or u c^o! ^nuuincTs,' iiionil^ poliio ]iiora(itn^ comes the H infinitivo of t!io first iormafiun w^^jV foaohhig nuumors" u 1

,

<

formation w^JU

liionoo

unrl

clia{iHoiiiont;"

u


HubmiHin# format ion

TIu* fifth


of

infinitives

tho fourth

faii;iit tiiu

pn*fix<s cj, with a /r//w- to the ?

ft

cloiiofoH

gf*nc*nillj

*'

;

k

^Llf

thus,

layiitg <jah oilier

n


;

;

i

Ur*

;itnig*

ourh

9

DjUu

otlu r;" i

u i!ghtiug

eta

togi*ili
*

So

*

w^fUj

*ho <*<>m*Hpondtl Cby writing);

with" (HOIUO onoj* (i

"" '

fc

aHHocuttiou

u

nc-i]>ro(5ity, t'o-jwrtiuTHhip, or

'/,**"'

w

Lastly,

il

may

of thn primitive; 1lius T Ji;UJ

a

1 '

u^Hy

lw

k

played

u
prc^tomimjj," the

u lio

or?

fignc>cl ^

at

wi

<mitH

Tho

tfc

?

h5 Hlmum?(l Abram;" HO from 1 u

J^W

prittcitclirtg

igtiorunoo."

sixth formation prefixes the nyllablo

motj which

is

o/

Jf>-

^

them pr<moimrl with thiw

to the

OF THE DERIVATIVE VERB.

it

whatever

may have

95 This formation

Originally been.

is

it always of a passive signification; hence, strictly speaking, in the passive form; thus, J12 "he broke;" is never used

'^i\

LJLu\

"it was broken ;" so the infinitives,

u

j&\

changed,"

"being

being broken," are altogether passive in

signification.

11G.

The seventh formation

(sometimes

j or k) between the

may be

as

triliteral,

prefixes

first

and

^,

and second radical

seen in the table.

cj

inserts

of the

Generally speaking,

or reflexive senso of the primitive it denotes the passive "it went to "he divided;" triliteral root; thus,

jpl

j>y

pieces;" cl^J

"ho beat;" hence the

etc-);

agitation,

"he

JJa%\

beat himself" (in

infinitive iJ\)&*\

"perplexity."

Sometimes it denotes reciprocity, etc., like the fifth formation; thus,

lllsJU "mutual contention;" Q*$*r\ "collecting

together."

a.

by "

<3

whenever the

in the root

first letter

o, j, or j

is

" he was repelled,"

written ^jl

is

where the radical J

comes J >

"*" ^ or ,^^31

,

(f

it

changed into

is

^

was dyed/'

,

for

Jo t , or ,

when the

first

]*

,

radical

and is

]S> ,

3&\

^>

thus, for \j>&

j>\, where

is

supplied

the J be-, A

first letter

of fto

changed into t -"

it

f

was ptinted/'

for

,

it is

first

by tmhdld.

as

^x

j4^l

ia which instance the t

joined to the

cx>, Jt or

or

cu

the

;

is

<J,

;

is

was recorded"^,

"When the

,1^" a L^l ^W

he was unjustly treated/' for

changed into

it

forJ&Jrt

;

where both remain.

root is one of these,

also

cy

In this seventh formation the place of the servile

;

is

Lastly,

changed into cu, and tto

OF THE DERIVATIVE VERB*

9t5

"

two CL/S mute by tasAdld, as cLwl

The

for uLCsyl,

s sJ\ for *

and tenth formal ions 'designate colours " the tonth with more intensity; tJiun yQ it was yollov " Those* fonnjttions are also JlC\ "it was very yollow." 117.

eiglith

?

used

for

expressing deformity, us <

,"

"

or

^\

ho was ^1^1 he had a distorted face ;" Xp\ "it was crooked."

118, Tlie ninth formation prrfixc^ ei^J to the primitive fin gc^iK^ral roof, as }i(\ni iu the table, IB property asking winhingj CM* doman
primitlvo;

thus,

^

pardon*"

This

formation

3)omd< ri*))

"

I

ruti vo V(rl>H, <

i

such as

vrah

I"

^wr//>,

bail

my

u

ho

"he

pardoned;" y&cD agrees

nearly

with

the

begged Latin

formed from the Hoooud Kiipine by adding a f desire to eat,," from em; HO cmaturio,

nupper," from wrrwtu.

For u

full account

of the YurloiiH HiwdoH of inouning peculiar to the dorivatire formutionH of the Verb, the reader

Oj

may commit

Dr. Lnmsden's

and Ambic (Jmmmar^uK well as Do Saoy' Grammaire whore the Hubjoet in nbHohitc^ly

1 10. "The*,

but Heldom,

eleventh and twelfth formations, which occur

only employed to heighten the cmorgy of the " primitive, an we do by adding exceedingly,** "very," or 0me Hucli Hynonyinou word thus, from ^ct " it was harsh/ " Is formwl ^jL^\ It WHB vory harrfi from iaL "ho adhered/ are,

?

;

**

^

***/***

^Ut

ho adhorcui firmly"

hcmon^ figurntivoly,

n taking.

f

7

(to the

"ho rtwmotwly

nock of his eamel):

prosecuted

Ms

under-

OP THE DERIVATIVE VERB.

120.

"We now come to the Passive Voice of the Derivative

Yerbs, and for the sake of variety

" the verb^aJ after

he assisted."

we

will adopt as our

now lead

It cannot

we have fully detailed the model Jil

in only to bear

mind that the three

taken the place of uJ

?

g,

letters

.

to

model

any mistake,

The student has

^ ^ and j, have

and J respectively.

PASSIVE VOICE. PEBTEBITE,

PAETICIPLE, Six'?

FORMATION* I.

I ft

II.

III.

LfJ^t*^

IV.

V.

Mtd

'VI.

VII.

0^0-

IX.

XL XII.

student /he

VIII, and

sive

Voice*

may

observe that

we have in

X* formations, which, from

the above table omitted

their nature, have

no Pas-

OF THE ur.UMILlTKIUL VKRiL

98

On

Qna/lrllltenil

Verls.

121. Of these there are only three different formations

from the primitive which of the trilitorals

the

;

first

itself

corresponds with the

primitive

(iuadrilitowl formation agrees

-with

the fourth trilitoral;

tho Bocoud with tho sixth;/ and

third with tho eighth.

They

formation jSalJ;

derivative ^klu

Tho primitive

tMrdJkls'L cals, us

first

u

^j^A

fonnution

in

formed as follows

tire

;

:

primitive

second jLtlil; and

consists simply of tho four

ho turned, or ivvolvwi;"

augineirfml l>y ou<

fc


the

tlio

an

radi-

font doriyod

Tj>^jj

"it vas

" ; turned;" and the H0<'ond and third by (wo, us lx p.1 it was U n "Inn !M> was horror-stnusk tmnultuotiH ;" iJSol hair stood ,

-*

y,

on end"

a. Tliin npocicH of vcrhn, howovifr, bonra

tho trflitral, occurring but wlflow. fore to detain

Mm

ilia

a

Th
Jennet lunger upon Iho

v^try Btuall proportion

will bo

1

Hiilyaii

no occasion

than junt

with the leading word** of ouch totMc, UH In

triliterals; tho other jiersonH

priuciploH,

by

tho,

addition

being ioileclnd from

tho

JPOKM.

tliere-

to present dcriyative

oa

of tho servile characteristics,

described*

to

the same already

ME

OF

QUADRIIOTERAL VEEB*

99

DERIVATIVE FORMATIONS. PARTICIPLE

INFINITIVE

IMPERATIVE, t-x

O

AOKIST.

PEET,

FORMATION,

XXOxx

/-x

I.

II.

>*St Passive

III.

Voice.

PRIMITIVE FORM. PAETICIPLE,

AOKIHT,

/x

w?

PRETEEITE,

DERIVATIVE FORMATIONS, I.

II.

III.

t>.

sties

5nd,

The observation made, !

and

108, frith regard to the initial character-

e->, in the deriyatire yerbs, answers likewise to the 1st,

and 3rd of the above formations*

122. In concluding Terfy

I

must

offer

my

descriptions! the Perfect Arabia

a few observations on

those poi&fe in

have differed from preceding -vmtera. In the first >lace I have deviated from them entirely in the arrangement nd jnode of treatment of the subject ; secondly, I have disrhich. I ?

arded the term Future Tense from the paradigm, and instead bereof?

hav

tiled the

word Aorist

as the

more appropriate

;

1

00

OF THK QrADHiLITKIlAL YLIM5.

and

haw

1

lastly,

dLHmisscd from

the term Con-

the HOHSO hitlurlo employed in Arabic

hi

jugation, which,

my work

grammar** mid lexicons,

downright absurdity aud to be tolerated only hwinso writers on the su1>j
Hlittll

a,

;

most probably be lold by

that these,

innovations of inin<

poriiHiiig tho

of

in

is

adopt an innovation of any in

if

I

ato in

IIH

GoluiH,

rt *

HH(\

nnd partly from

"ho WHS

iJ

IV,

miluto
"

II

L

" lie*

'*

lit*

roiy,

aeffjitini

**ln

**

conj,

or plurJ

(diiii!

"liti {oiicbfd

of

Mwa/*

Owy

H{>/'

Now

wifii!

imifli* jiciicw

if

I

to

eiiiitpilft

froylng^H edition

II* <*tnj,

**

h*

WUH on

of

:

luatte secure

frl^iidHltip

with

lu^mutH* u

Hiwlim,"

;

unotlier,"

a MuHlim-"

nuult*

X w

"h

T. VI,

with uuothor." VIlLconj,

or

itdii

an Arable ^

4J

lcxicoE

/

would Htuwl nn iolkiwn: vw. A%a (Aor. i.) " hn wiw af**, HOtmdp" cite. I. a Ini^ki'i/* {r*,

nrtwJ
(sn-oallod) conjugations

with hbf imnti or lips th<* **awt bliiek staiiu in the temple " X* **mj. lift wiinnitie4 luinw,*!!* to tlt jow<*r of another;"

"hu gavo UiwwlF ^*

its

inmh* |H'JUP or

or r<*(M'ivod;"

to

that

IwHiH, for drawing water;"

ho ^ulmufttnl or tl*vMl;*'

<jcmj.

CQj

foii^fruflfil a

Hnf<% f'oua*!, or unbifini,*'hr
" lit*

lit*

edition

ecmvmeml

fool

SttlwlrihV V
**

(Fuk

JU*M

coniiiBion in

H Frcyta^H

I

from

sHjjhfly uliriflgocl

tape

us for trample* take the

I^ot

following vorlml root with wtich of

lo

mtt llio v<*ry last person

sorl tut!< M %s

u niiioiuil iinprovf^nout.

u of the red

hi a iHonuait that their

flii'in

trrntniflli'S,^

uflorly

k

loud

will

lexicons, stidi

ran jr<>v' to

1

cti<%

(jcilin,^

objcdlon

lu*st AraJiln

pnthim

;

^

?

the

*

"kfi

OF THE SUED VERB. "

made

he

J~j

tion,

made

saluted."

II.

x^i

IV.

JuuJ

f.

III,

etc. x x

"he

submitted V.

etc.

accepted,"

f.

'

obeyed/'

JUj

(dual or plur.) XXX" O

'

peace "they mutually made XX X C.

IX.

etc.

touched,"

or

xx x x

"he

power of another/'

or

friendship."

^J[X "he

f.

>

"he

surrendered himself into

Here the reader

etc.

VII.

C,

Ja^xJ,

f.

he

>

*U

f.

"

JL

f.

xxt.,-

peace/*

etc.

"he

secure/'

r

101

the

what

will observe that

Freytag and others call the Second Conjugation, I call the First

and so on with the

Formation

Roman Numerals

from Freytag's hare

my numeral which

versd, if

I

if

denotes the Derivative Formation ; and, wee

numerals, you will have the good old

to

my

you think

it

of any advantage to you.

if

you drop a unit

denoting the Conjugation, you will

you add a unit

conjugation,

c.

In short,

rest.

cannot help drawing the reader's "attention to a very serious

omission on the part of Freytag in his otherwise invaluable Lexicon.

The work abounds in certain Latin abbreviations, such as struitur etc, etc.

cum

accusativo;" ccga, "construitur

;

together with some

complain of

is,

quarto volumes-

my

con-

cum gemino accusative,"

thirty or forty others.

at least in

that

"

cca.

Now

what

I

copy of Freytag's Lexicon, in four

the learned Professor has nowhere condescended to

the abbreviations aforesaid. give one scrap of information respecting

Whether he has been more his abridged edition I

am

attentive to the learner's convenience in

not able to say, as I have not got the work %

at hand.

Of n

the

123.

Surd Verb

<(

The term Surd is applied to

and

for

S*

doubled."

such, triliteral verbs as

the second and third radicals the sama; thus, JS for^/

"

f>

**SH, also catted cJ^U*lt, ie,

he extended/' axe

called Surds.

"

he

In

hare

fled,"

all

the

IOH

OF THIS SUltB

VJBiti;.

Arabic grammars that 1 have yet BOOH (and 1 have seen

several)

is, T think, very Improperly placed among Now tho seeming irregularity is

thin class of verbs

the irregulars. nic

and

IB

really eupho-

reducible to a few tdmplo rulos, as follows.

the lulled IOBB where, according to

tlic

porfoct irililiTal verb, thn last radical radical coalesces with

the penult

has /#;#, the

for

latter,

fleet

is tlioii

tlio

last

In

conjugation of the

movable the penult by tanhtfid) and the vowel of in

Huppimswl, unless the

letter

preceding

then tho vowel of tho penult radical

whioli would otherwise havey/cw.

in

In

^^^

son singular and nwse.ulino of the preterite,

tense

in

the

all

in-

jam

u

ho

lovod/'

but the neeond person singular of tho same

;

regular; UH u^v-^ OF cu**>.

fn

to

conjugated regularly; thus in tho third per-

are,

become** L^>>

it

given

ions where, on the contrary, the last radical lias

thoHo verhn

all

tho third

pwHou of

*"

r<

tho niiigulur

thou

liant

nMMuHn

loved."

of the

aorist

?

w

contracted into

to tho

firnf.;

tho <}ttmiu(t of tho B**ond radical

u^x!*

in phtoo of Its jttttn*

If tim

sorM

follows a J?

particlo precluding

tho

jfer//f,

rmlicttl

litttt

or an uporope,

having

jfi,:w,

In vorlw of

Ing^Wj Jw for^yb. 4fefii4ki

toHo

bc'nrn

.

j,

&*

<*ont

tfiiifi,


s

iijt(*iid of

or oven %uJ

t

the*

motion lakes Xv//*m.

may

O

/

^^xr* place,

be given

in thin oH
to the last radical in lion of jVu/M;

last;

no

lnffiin
tho mfluoiuso of tlicwe purlicltj^y^ /////. or

:

,

if

which

(lie

Htuno vowol

f**s

Jjuj wu tnuy write

necoud radical Jnthoia-

may nko

*t with tlj

b

given

to

tlie

^/

,

contraction

J^;

*

Tht Impdmtivo pr(*wrvc

Ste

regular form.

Aeeording

to the

OF THE .SURD VERB. Surd Verb we should write ^s\

rule of the

the rule

why

reason

by a

always followed

not here followed,

is

letter bearing

9

\/\,

and

\^i\

but the

9

that the alifof union is

is,

jazm.

103

Beside the regular form,

which the insertion of the second radical

the imperative has another, in

in the third does take place, except in the plural feminine. the imperative is omitted here, according to the rule,

Alif of

by which

it is

never prefixed to a letter bearing a vowel. I'LXTHAL. MAfiC.

F1.M.

8INOULAJI

DUAL, *KK

COlttM.

MASC.

j or

c.

Surd Verbs follow in the passive voice the same rules as in the

active;

is

thus,y

forj^l,

kasra being dropped, because the preceding Ps<^?

tJi.-'.P

already bears a vowel

letter

in the third

in the aorist

it

is

^h

t

for

the preceding letter which before had

to

being given

;

person plural feminine without contraction

derivative formations of

jazm;

^fi

it.

*

but

The

All the peculiarities above

mentioned are fully illustrated in the following paradigm of extended," and

fatfia

,

Surd Verbs follow a similar rule of contrac-

forms which admit

tions in those

^b

" jJ

he

y "lie fled." Active

Voice.

PEETEEITE.

PEM. S

\f

MAHC,

S S

FBESOfr.

"$n*

3rd & &

s *

k-i

2nd f*

1st

104

K

M

Till:

int

VKiili,

AoltJS'I.

MNM L.UU l*i\f,

y

/

-

3rd

2nd 1st

IMPKUATIVK. 2nd

INnNITlVK,

(L

Tliij

foIlnwH

"

tint *aiiu*

h

niflieiil

ihtmttM

Uiou hu^l

liiivi*

of

1

jii'^tiiiti

,

nili*

ihir*

<,laK,

willi

with

thontj

of

/w,w

cir

Iftiiplif^t/*

j\tthn or IwMtt tm

h<

J^^

And

i*fi*.

fh

Jjj

li^

will

fli't*/*

|il!f lilii" hi;i( raliciil 4<

f

Ilif

H.S

{fiiill,

iritsiilmflttitofl

(jturflnM* 11

H

ifoiw

not

f>rjr?j^

;

or

if

points,

p^rii^l varhg whose middle

<(iiii*Jn*il/*

J^M^; uuLu^

for

" If

*

iikf^Vi^//^ n

itfkmH not fMimti

fho vowel

uorist fom*ponili! wiik such

M tun!

flus

lo

"

us

f

nganl

pn

ftncl

s

Jwi^

rf 4 i|i*<|

thimtiWi wlieii th

J

J*

will

liif*o f

for

or

(afcc placo,

c!

J*

yai^

he J*J

will not bite;"

as OAJ J

|*onult fttkifn

/Vwtif i'UKTKIUTK. *

l!

or

'*

xieiid/*

i

as

,^0

Innmmm regular, as 5ouJ

lli n'mSniffioii

fur/i^ ///n

"

iiy fli
he whoht

t

* li f

/

3rd

Ijw*

f*

*

1st

105

OF THE SUED VERB.

AOE1ST. DUAL,

PLUEA.L. FEM.

MAHC,

PEK*

SINGKTLAR. MASC.

MASC*

r.

3rd

2nd 1st

PARTICIPLE.

Tho Imperative^

124* ,

regularly ? thougli it the initial

1

is

\

vowel (see

125,

may

"be

o"bserYcd ?

m

?

take another fore like

j

have to theirs

;

and other derived forma*

having already one characteristic tmhdid^ cannot

upon the same

letter,

and are conjugated there-

the corresponding verbs of the regular system; thus,

for Siifi^ f

a

derivative formations have the same affinity to

in the preterite active

C"X

lias

y

excepting, however^ the 1st, 4th,

wMch

inflected

sometimes coutraotod, in wMch. case

the primitives as those of the perfect forms

tions,

is

dropped, "because the following letter

36, a*)

The

i

it

In

.

xOx

lor 43X4AJ

1^! for iaXl;

*u^

for

like manner in the aorist active * * ^^^ n fcXuwj lor J

1^

for *

THE

0*'

FEET, OF 4tH FOUMATIOX.

VKKB.

HfJKf)

PKKT, OF UT FORM.'

3rd

2nd

1st

And

,

Ilnl

on

in

Tiif Mii

iiil

HO

of

lath format i<mj< of th

may

if

lnpi* r^murkf^i,

In?

for einiiifile;

;

from

flj^ v**rb

AOH1ST. '"^

l

for

th

nr n

k

'ojti(cuU;d

j^

w*

Terl^wi

radical flonbled

fast,

m

tliis class

liiin^

11IKTKIUTE. .

<*

V

^

JI^LJ*

Ii'llcr

Tho

tbHi*

-

i*|)araf oly^

;

pirfi*ff tnliferal

an

,

X*

ji^

12U*

willi ronjK^ct to the ott

quatlrilitiTiih, wliirh lmy<

llif

t<M/uff*/<

Twmwr

wwio

tin*

*f

tti^ ttt*h
iw c->

juziiiatisil

and Imp4$nitivo may <^utractiou

(th

r

AfMUHT, *^

or

a

cither

1

j^! c

uorint

oniriietf!cl

they

f

/

AA

ot*

taking

<

OF THE SURD YBEB,

107

IMPERATIVE. or

a.

or

122

In further illustration of

formations

the derived

observe that in primitive,

the

to

of the verb

derivative

the contraction

may

124 we subjoin two tables of

"he

Jj

"We

fled,"

formations in Table

be preserved in the

may

also

I,,

as in the

aorist,

and in the

whenever the third radical ought by the influence of a

imperative,

particle preceding,

to

bear the symbol

jazm;

thus,

Derivative Formations bearing contraction. IMPERATIVE.

FQBMATION.

J

j

ili

for

II.

'j\

for

III.

u

for

V.

j

for

1

,

VI.

,jy

s

.xsl

VII.

for

O,

:,;

XL b^ The derivative formations to which in which the

2nd and 3rd

tas&cfoct natixrdlly

radicals are s^plmiei

by

belongs, or

servile letters, are

not susceptible of contention, as to those which follow.

OF THE Will) VERB.

108

Derivatives that do not contract. IMPERATIVE,

A.OKIHT.

FORMATION* I.

IV.

VIII.

X. XII.

TorbB

*

tashflid in tlioso

c(

tliou

Ll*

Is

wort Hilont,"

Jj

?

jji,

with

c->

;

oluiractoriHticfl

tion^

arc

of

tlio

through/ etc.,

0* also

Io

urJb)

uL,LC

these, th<*y

Oth,

u
\Vlu*u iho 3rd

Tho penult of

lmsm which f

a vowel.

nor

m

eoalesoe

radical

'words

with

it

tashifid,

beginning

the

initial

and other derivative

forma-

IrngiilurH; /*

i^-Jot, *

it

was dug

'at

und^^,

it

pc^rftuct

wan

XXxO

n<*gociuted,"

vorlw,

the aorist of tho 8th

drops in

ihn


a #

;

those letters ly

although retained in writing,

being in ovciy ronpoofc

letter lias

for

4th,

considered for

*Svo

^5 wh
{f

9

lifj

i^j

neither

Init

or

^

name CUHO with cy, which

coalesces in tlie

as c^fc)li

an

t, or

or

%vlu)so final (tluirncloristio fiorviles are

ponwmH

cj or cu

tCBpoctivoly

CD

eiicling in

and 10th formations

takes

tho contraction, because the antecedent

109

SECTION Of

the

IV.

Infirm or Imperfect Verbs,

etc.

128. "With regard to these, their irregularities arise entirely

from the mutable nature of the infirm letters

remain

;

j

?

and

^

which are either changed from one to dropped altogether, or deemed quiescent, when they having, in general, no sound, according to Arabian

when used another,

I,

as radicate,

grammarians, but what they derive from the vowel of the pre-

These deviations, however, are subject to certain and principles with which it is necessary for the learner

ceding letter. rules

make himself acquainted

to

of those

who may wish

for

For the

satisfaction, therefore,

a minute investigation of the

causes of these interchangeable powers, the following observations are

De

from Erpenius, with corrections from

translated

Sacy, etc.

This section the former of these grammarians

not inaptly styles vere aurea ;

and

it is

every

way

deserving

of the student's strictest attention,

a.

The use of the term "quiescent," or "silent," ia the above

paragraph

is

the

trm

" one,

meaning

same time the aptness of what the

not sounded

I stated

" ;

and

it

on the subject in

shews at the 26, a.

Q-rammars by Eichardson and Stew&rt the term quiescent

plied to

an inert

letter as well

m to one wt

is

In ap-

I'KllMlTATiON

llulw

MI

The

letters

stituted for one another,

dentil ute of

(|

rctl

IH),

a

n

freiieli

(o

t

;

ly

iiro;

^U for^y n J*

^

;

wo

*

aw MJ*-

Tho

#.

to

a day/*

1

tor

an

?

'-

lt

hiticw

j for

^

for

an a long

//

The lettom

fsr

him

?

\

,

^

}

BtitJici/

If

wifli

liowwer (nee |

j*^i *Sfi)

;

IB

j*J not

^

^j to

for as

1

said time or

JU^t

f*

nftwfotfw.

Ihu pr <Mling i

they bu

t

,

Hiibj(ict<*d

to

this case,

/fr^; asin^ tire

pronounced

f

** ;

i'^ji

an

UHsault."

and followed by ujozmated

li him dmid,"

1H him ^o,"

ill

;

** i

al.M

if," like

%

inert liny

itoi

^ whon <|iii<^
for

u well; u

n

c'enaiii.

Fiiineljiijf'rt reiiiiiin

are omittii } iw wjii:; 5

EB

?

-,

he threw

and

tlioyare

u h<st(%rogeneous

roaring of u lion ;"

^

an *Wtj

$/

When

for

^

**

j?k?m, in

^u

3U r t (lie

^j

u ni^lii;" but

JJ

preceded by

flunked io u

is

of a

r*nd
c*as<^

u

form a (liphtiioag 4|

if

,

HIM!

^

^

JIK

reiidcmig

^'*

\

an ^-,

!

J,

reciprocally sub-

ncbungc
in thtit

thus,

^* 7

//

**

L!

if iu
are often

?

Ike

,

vowls, pn^eedcMl by

;

to

LKITKKS.

but never at the beginning

ihey are

rt?,),

to ilie precunling vowel

plaee

g?

OHO they aiwuyH remain

ieh

i^U

##r/ ^5

,

j

,

nor in the middle or end,

word;

a

\

and

,

I,

INFIittI

Nature and J*m)mtaliun of

Mr?

Letters

120.

TOE

01*

lor ulili.;;

Tho

for^n Ihw

*2/ "let

/r/// of union,

rule, tw lajli "therefore

i** f

thou ;"

*M*J

^

for

*^U

4#

in tho naitiu of/'

to

IM JMfar

\

AKf* m

180* Tlio loiter ^///? in iho middle of u word,

by

m

into^

;

wh
by ^;^

into

whon movable

HI

PERMUTATION OF THE INFIRM LETTERS.

" ceded by a vowel or jazmated letter; thus, d?^ for cl?U pastures

??

O*^ f

;

r

3^

a similar rule holds,

"his or

changed into j

is

"


studies;"

letter alif, if

preceded

thus,yo

if

by kasra, of

by damma,

W

f ?x>

for

;

"a body

for i'U

*/'

4^;

Jj"U for J*"G

the middle of a word, movable

a. Alif, in

damma,

ho was asked." u as

So after a long a?z/

aU

75

saying;

for J*"l*

??

waters.

its

"

men/' is

if

preceded by

into <_, as cl>t<S for cl^<$

At the end of a word the

changed into

was vile;" ^J?^

^

if

;

*

x

* it

by fatJia,

by

kasra, into

x

lt^ "he

for

sinned or

erred."

131. is

Ham&a

or

when

alif^

changeable into

\,

^

or

middle of a word,

inert, in the

^

agreeably to the vowel

inert,

the symbol of the Jvw&a being wholly suppressed ; " 77 the head " so for thus, JwlJ for (JJjTj "misfortune; preceding

;

J^

;

^f

and L!*J 3 for t^LSJ ^a wolf. 77 ^*

The symbol hamza, preceded by j or ^5

inert, acting

changeable after j into j, and after

servile letters, is

^

into

as

^,

uniting with the preceding letter by tashdld, and suppressing the x

/

Jiamza altogether

4.

;

thus, i".yu for

In the middle of a word,

inert letter, other than

if

^^iU

;

-Lk^

hamza should

or ,e, the

hamxa

itiay

for

^-.k^

;

and

be preceded

by an

be suppressed, and *'

the vowel belonging to it transferred to the preceding ktter, as A *o x n^i x ^j? ^t^^ri ^S ox and Jo*a lor tor 3juAw* ; ^vt tor }

<

^

132,

The

letfcte

1

?

at the

end of > word preceded by fatfa,

112

PERMUTATION OF THE INFIRM LETTERS,

when movable

^

into

as

5

damma, is changed into ^ -when "by u " ?? *1Z> for III of J35 for \i5 thou shalt desist S ^ "by

;

;

the leaves of senna.

??

It is not incorrect, however, to write

AUf-hamza^ at the end of a word, if preceded "by hut the vowel may be transwritten as hamsa only

or *\SM.

1:25

is

jasm,

;

ferred to the jazmated letter,

and ham&a then "becomes oxG-o

according to the vowel preceding for

yJt

;

thus,

;

xxO-O

0x0 ,O

and

^\

\,

j,

or

^j, xt,-o

(js<-t~a

for

for

\jJ\

Should two alif-liamzas meet together in the same word, and the first be moved by a vowel, and the second be inert, the latter loses a.

hamza, and becomes merely an alif of prolongation changed,

its

:&

need

The is

^

be, into j or

^^1

thus,

;

alif of prolongation, preceded

sometimes dropped

which

is

"

;

^ ^

or

^o-

for

J^T

by another

this is pointed out

merciful

"

iLs

:

for i^llS

"

^U

he believed.'

position of fh^fatJia^

madda

thus,

;

XXc->,

uJ

are used at the beginning of words, 9

letter of the word,

cJ5 & s

"

is

still

3

to the father ;" llf r

for

^>~j X

J, J and j which ?

nothing in the considered to be tho initial alter

may be

though those particles a

3

the resurrection."

133. The inseparable particles

nature of the alif which

if

alif movable "bjfailia,

by the

then written perpendicularly, or by

f

like the

mother

]&

?? : 7

prefixed, as

and not

_2 or #*

x

"^

w"J

!;.

^

Some

particles,

however, must be excepted, in which 4*

-Six

custom has established the change, as U " ?? for fl whether if. and

1XS

for

M

"lost that;'

1

\

.

134, "When the interrogative particle followed

by

atif-hamsta, if

the second bo

\

(Lat. aw? or

^ww

?) is

moved by fatha, one of

PERMUTATION OF THE INFIRM LETTERS. them with

its

dropped, or a kamza

is

vowel,

and then an alif with madda ^jjlil or

jM

for

*vj^*

f r

^-{;^

^/becomes

^,

only retained

:

as

.jjl

for

U^

;

suppressed and

waw

of

4j^word and the pi.

into

a.

hamza The

preceded

;

^

Waw*

the letter $

to

thus,

letter

"clothes,"

'

^^

for

f>

os

.

pL of

ww^

J^$

thus, 1

;

at the it

fol-

for x^

x*

*JB*\)

be movable by damma,

;

X

for

^^1

^\^

beginning of a may be changed

J^ for

^ in the middle of a word, movable

by kasra, "

when

changed into

is

meeting of two waws '

there be two

first

Finally, if

in the beginning of a word,

^y

;

hamza

its

X

alif-fiamm^ to avoid the ' 5X ^ / xx f

Lj^

^*

changed into

is

lowed by another waw, movable by a vowel,

J^\^ pL of

or

;

for 1J\U

>

letter

first,

for its vowel, the

have Jmsm, the (&/

Rules peculiar

The

is

\

damma

^

>

thus, Jijjl or ^XLi^l, for ^Jo-JlU

^U X

^^

135.

cJ^ or u^* ^or o^'

?

or the second

the second hamzta should

^;

placed

thus, u^Jl or ui^3\* for i^Jll

:

If the second himza have

.

is

113

sometimes changed

is

garments/'

When

.

to

^

;

as

in the middle of a

by

and

fatlia,

u^^i ^or ^!^i word is followed ^

**

^

"*

is often thrown out, as by another j quiescent, the latter " " " " a peacock ; for chiefs." heads," ,VjjJ _j

^j

136.

The

letter j

jecting its vowel, to it

when

final,

and preceded by fatka^

and throwing the ntmation,

if

re-

there happens

inert if be any, on the preceding fat^ is changed to be the third letter of the word, or t6 g? if it be the fourth, 1

15

W

VEHMUTAT10X

114 eta

\j

for

^gjSJ

^ "he

The

INP11O1 LKTTEHtiL

for^l "ho assaulted

as

;

THE

will be assaulted

damnw,

letter ^ final, after

but throwing them away Incomes 1

"perishing;' bat ceding

letter,

When ^

in

aud^

final Is

tliw*

if

Is

The

letter

sons of the vor)>

a When in

firsfc *

fi*i.

^

***** o

for

5^^

,

<2y^

the

A

1

for

I

first

*

^WM i

^

v

i*

, *

is

tMs rale

But

*

/

.*.

^Jl and

tew

it is

changed

pre-

^

"buckets,"

^Sjl

^

to

.ij

as,

;

^J from

1

d),

7

in

t

'

H

fi*nowod

lir4

/tttiuztt,,

by

certain persilent

1;

as

not

iiinrf, if tint

ih

end of

at tlm

H'viI<*

in

//ve/^5,

the

first

movable

letter preceding the

first is

doubled by toMl^the

not.

pm-tiTving tho

figure)

of

jj

thus,

<*'*'

It

*

;

may

bo observed

that

thin occurs particularly */ & 4 I x *,!,.'

prcolo(i by n king ^l!f: thu,

^b

for

^b

;

^lt

If

thoy meet only in conoMqacmco of a

contoactioa,

not obsemci

is

The

^

totter

in

111^

and proowied by a

^j

Do

Y5*

in

Sacy, this

4/ in the

^

middle of a word, movable by

a tltrow/

^UJ

for

to

The

thrown upon the

for

to

as

for

-

y**^ff

338-

>

In iliw fam* J^y sometime dropped

S;*y for

;

oae of the two

when

and

cluuigwl into

Is often

p

^ Sj or

nf a word Ihore are two

tho second

neither inert nor niUtnt,

^j

Jj\

ilic itnal

ilia miclille

by damma*} and

nor

quioftceut, as

an,

37

gven*"

damma

.

wlu^i

(s<so

whcnj

aj

^

staff;"

"

takes neither

%

he was pleased OP content/

137*

"a

^W

for

^aL*

;

it is

?

^

lli for

M

a nflnation,

dropped;

preceded by

?? ;

1

"a

tojj

" shot," ii

w

darting ;

H

of rare oocttrwawe.

of a word, followed

%

another

^

PERMUTATION OF THE INFIRM LETTERS. inert, often

expels the latter

115

" as JLjJ for a governor," JL-SJ

;

"

"chief;" but this takes place only when the of the two ur yas has taken the place of a hamzated alif. prefect,"

two

other cases the

all

The

139.

^

yas unite

by

first

In

tashdld.

^

letter

final, preceded by fatka, cannot be movable made by any short vowel, but rejecting its own on vowel, and throwing back the nunation, if there is *"

fatha, it

Jj\

Jl it is

becomes quiescent like first;"

jj

"the

"of a youth;"

^

"a

"of the

changed

to

\

\

;

as

first

;

^\

*'

for

"^

**

^

^1

"the

for "&$

If another

youth,"

as $oj& for J^llfc

;

any,

^

"

" gifts

"a

first;"

youth;"

^ precedes,

(excepting a few

proper names),

140.

The

letter

^

final,

preceded by tera, takes neither

damma nor tora, but throwing them away is silent ; as ^iUL and for in this instance, if iiiere "barefoot;" and, ^jUL ^Ul be a nunation denoting the nominative or genitive case, thrown back on the preceding letter, and the is as

*\j

for

l^j

and

*'

14L The Tcasra,

.jj\

letter

remaining

for ^IAJ\ s

venes; as

itself

for

The

;

^ final,

preceded by damma, changes it to as unaltered JZ& for ^t^*" a wish;" ;

"hands;" and

&

dropped

a shooter," "a darter."

^VJ

J^i

peculiar to

142.

^

"

it is

letters j

and

this rule holds also

whan

.

inter*

"thrown,^ "shot/* or "hurled."

Waw

^r

and Ya

p#ecd0d

movabte^ follcSwed l^y

m

t>y ^

E short vowel, and r

^

raerfc^

are

11G

THE INFIRM LETTJBR&

l'EttMrT\TIOX OF

tircly

dropped, rejecting tho vowel,

which

it

forms a diphthong),

u

for

fh<

Ul^

fc

y threw;" ^jii for a

thoy will throw." IHI

If,

l<jf<(rs

to ih(

is

it .

wlii^h

i

The

^U

^

inovulih*, [r'(rd(Ml

h<*

fiii^J

two

fiuino

been dropped'

IIUH

ibr^U

^Jli

f

Htoocl ;"

this case, the vowel t

by a tnovubb I!!*i% urf ol'tcn rhunp^l hilo " M " ho

for

siipj)ns st}il 5 and replaced

^

or

assail (lion ;"

and

^

In

however,

^ ^

;


as ^jil for ^.j^

Tim

^^"thou^wfltbe

assailants

or /v^vv/,

ifiwunti

by tho vowol belonging

a.

<>r,

;JU fw^JjU

assaulted;" u

promling

Jhtlm precedes

if '/x/w/w or

tern, throwing in place of tho vovrel of the foregoing letter* as

them back,

^j

if

wl

\v
!n\////^/, and followed in<*rt

1

Unm,

;

A\! for

first lias

4 VJ

no vowol, clmnpfo

^

'Mays:"

tor

143. Tin* t,

to

^

^^

^,

Wlum,

*'

ldtr

are cdiangccl to

til: for JCLi

^%

both coaltwiinpf hy

*

and

//(////;;//,;

liity

vowol^

tliuu,

X* b

letter tlict

in

j

hun,

marked by

by a

k

]>n*(ic*d< (l

^b^ "a

ruI(H, flw l^ttcrM

tui

in

!

^,

nuppowd

and

5 x,J

for

^U

servile

cloak;"

j<>

^ arc said

{IB

,

iwrt \M^\\ or

taMul

to

immediate,

of prolongation nor whon jnxm

inter-

cou
always coutaitw a

latent jazm-}

nnnio as

oouHtdoml na iudml when followed by tho

not 00

^U

sky/

Hiich vowc*l

i

ii

i

7

1<*ff,i?r

jiOHCM, oilhor (*xpn HHi*d ov<*r

fur

final, \vh<'i

as *J^ or *b; for !!

fbn^oiu^

not in conibhuitioij with u

&/;

^

u hcitvcm,"

be ptxwlfd by

t
u caufcry/'

^

in tlio

'2

forth/'

rh u nutniuT that tho

inocfin^ in

Iclf^rrf

"assailants^

j

or

^

;

fin

vCi, *jl*

riot

^I'U "its water ;

affixed pro-

w

*ti, ^5^

PEEMUTATIOK OP THE INFIRM LETTERS,

not shot

c.

that

"

/I*

of

him;" Uc,

Where it

water

its

*]}&

a letter

"

not

is

^j

;

tl

"

<sj^ not *\*j nor

,

he threw or

^T,

he assaulted him."

b^yL

called movable in the foregoing rules,

when

carries a short vowel, in opposition to inert,

language of grammar,

where, in the

117

cannot be rendered movable,

it is

said

^

denotes

it

has none

final after

implies simply that

it

it

^

;

fa$&

9

in that case

cannot have a short vowel.

When

144.

^

the ^ and

in the middle of a

by/#0w and followed by a letter bearing to the letter they often transfer their own vowel f ?s ??<*'

vowel, are preceded

a vowel also,

?

having jwsm, and become inert;

oj^

will lengthen,"

thus,

Jjk>

for

^ changes into

1

it

J^k>

In

set forth." forJ*IJ "lie will

the vowel isftitha, the^ or

case, if

word bear a

;

if

this

ter#

?

thej changes into ^5, according to the second general rule;

cJUr

thus,

"

cJ^k; "he will be afraid;"

for

<~1>1&

for

cl4&

he will dread." a. If after alif ipert,

damma

dropped, and

Damma, when

c^!^, and

<*

for

uLJo

*>

<j

damma,

;

as

is

caJlk

for

is

taken by

alif,

would bear damma

s

,

of -which the regular form would be

jUilS, regularly cLJV^,

inert is in the place of ^5 or of

instead of

bearing jazrn, .follow, the alif

or kasra substituted for the fatfya preceding,

^?

u^U?

so

letter

the ^ whose place *

f

or fatfya, as

a

j

,

moved

Wlxeii

by ha$r^ the

c^j for jLsl^, reg.ul^p

;

the.o^ tef& is ued

uL^ for

*>

reg,

#,

^ in the middle of a word are tnoved by kasra, and by alif inert, they are replaced by ^ with a hamxa; thus,

When and

preceded

HAMMTED

OF THE

118

XX

"a

for

jj\j

YBBB*

^

"one who says;"

speaker/*

for

X

^

clined," etc,

llammled Verb~~jj*.

the

Of

145* This .species of verb lias allf or

hamza

as a radical >

xxTL

a

ho chose or selected;" in the beginning, asyl * / xx t* ho uskod ;" or at the OIK!, a Uj^ u he cooked" miAdlc, as JL " or ho ,soaono(l (

---

tlio * *

simply

dropping

1

in sonie INTHOIIS^ f

oili(*rs,

agn*(ul)l} fo

ruliu

A

and nuKsf ifuiing

UK* prineiplos laid

paradigm of (ho

hwlmg

[i^rscuis

roquiBite in 1ho cowjuppition of the

when the

first radical

fimm^

i

<"*

The

Proterito,

^

to

Jtawtra for

ractoristical

\

the characteristic of the ImpiTiitiva

lias

/// is

clHtiigti!

to

ill "ho reccwcrl;^

1

a

;

$

will find <*

fixed;

"

J^tj

^

;

Jjfl

as

"he

the

^\

regular*

damm>

the

" hope ihou,"

did cat;"

kamsa> hut

3

-

jyU

*'

as

*"',

the pr<*coding ntlc^; ,Par
V

or

regularly; Aorist

l>y

hut

J

In like inaioier in

the* 'Fri'i^rHo, J1 in (tonjugatf*d

or radical

regular;

131); Participle,

,

&\\;

J\

"

not only commanded/* throw away * f

you

Aorit,

*.

When

0*

thus,

*

*

J5T for^U; Infinifivo, yi regular.

l*

preceding

that will be

all

i

in

IWwnms as follows;

foiijtigatcnl regularly;

'

I'^/rt*.-

in Iho

it

/ 1,^

in

*

,M

^ for

/fauwtfwl Vorbs;

the /tr^W

IrnpcraiivOjj&jl% fbryil ^ * (nc^ording *

d)wn

^

and

also

^1

"he

the

oh**

*'

'

^

(X^, JS", s

*

j*

;

mitnolimoB, however, though rarely,

<*P';*

and^jl;

or with tlm oopnlativoH j and

u3

ancl^U;

pre**

4

tho linjieratlvt

I

being dropped^ aid

tie

OF THE HAMZATED VEEB.

In the 1st derivative formation, both active and passive, Aorist

b.

5*>

or y*j (for

Jb and ju);

Part.

In the 2nd formation, Aorist ^J^) or

Jly the

119

y V*

or^jj

(for^JIU and^SlU);

3rd formation Preterite

S

J^* or

(for^jlb

Infin.

J\ or^l

y

Jt<).

andylb);

Part.

(for

*/lj**

(for

and

Jt-*

(for

fjy*

11

Aorist

andyli);

& St

S<J

-A^d thus in the other formations, kamza, on

Infin, Ijlijl (for Ij^lD-

account of

damma, kasra,

or another hamza, being either changed or

to the rules mentioned above. dropped entirely, agreeably .er

In

iylU).

tenses are all regular

The

as are also the rest of the derivative

;

,tions.

only necessary to apply the same rules to

It is

Dative formations in order into j or <J% fifth x,

formation

followed

Thus,

litive verb,

alif inert,

jl may

Tlxose verbs

J^J may

is the passive

be written in the

whose middle or

interrogating/' for

Second

^U

J*AJ

.

hamza, preceded ;

thus,

from

formation

fifth

final radical is

as

;

is

J^

c<

he was

and ^JI "itbeaet)^; ^ * f

'

**

j?

*.

;"

that the

voice of

be changed into j

on the same principles "

when hamza

their root,

find

must be observed

it

by

to

the other

all

"benefiting/' for.ljU.

When &m@a

or

changed into

radical,

it

is

preferred

to according to the vowel "belonging

it,

or im-

OF THi: 1IAMX.VTKJU VERB,

120

mediately preceding l !

for

Jwjj

/wwm

though woMom, conjugated

which

mom

"

;

ore both tho

1

lug

17\

written 'fC

uiW

u

JQ

aorist

the,

munnT

radical

are

miwl the

in

sometimes,

uf the concave verbs, u

ihon qukwonf. as u ;

3^4 J^ ;

^k

JL

ho

of

asked,"

tliou," for

drop; tho nuiieal fiatiua, acconling

ti/ifs

?

Jlj.

for their inodhil

I!JO, <^tc*), th<^

(

Is

it

the

in

;

he will ask," for

Bearing

fdif

is

?

fawun bmwg

anon,

3C <3m

for

the preterite

*

passive voices

Verb* having

r/,.

in

tints,

L-^JU for c^U*

Jw*J;

cl>Cai in the,

it;

-

^)b;

to the pre-

rulos alroudy laid clown roBpoct-

learner will mee,l with no serious

formations diffieuliy in
of a jmrnitivo whose XS/

rninllal

lotitu*

hu\n&i: ftr <sxumple,

in

"lio consoliduteil/

5

l,t.

us take the verb

whos<5 Heooml, tliird, atjventh,

derivative fonuaLiotiH

ar<*

and

J

ninth

an

II.

III.

<>

f,i-

*

4^Al;i,^...

JttL

VII.

AJW*AMJ

IX.

* -a

f

148* 0?

When into

in

)

or

then

^

last radical^ it in

acoorcling

to tho

retained

preceding

OF THE HAMZA.TEB VERB.

(

130, etc.)

person

;

a

\

thus,

he recovered from

121

has the 3rd

illness,"

feminine of the preterite regularly JbVj

also the

;

singular

person

Again, from L& is

preterite

masculine and "

x

and

are u^JL&

fern.,

e^V.

pers. sing. fern, of the

<JLJu; and the 2nd persons sing, of the same, masc. "

and

feminine t>V^ and

he digested/' the 3rd

2nd o

t,

A

.

L^-JcJb

similar rule obtains in

%s

s

the passive voice and derivative formations ; thus, from Uu>" the mind was excited/' in the 1st formation the preterite is .

s

J

"I

and the

?-,

aorist

S P

^s? " '

The

difficulty

qnadriliteral verbs, such ;

X

tf

the 3rd formation the preterite O OX O

^

as

U-ls>-

^UW

;

or

;

1^,

present EO

xo ^ ^Ut -'O

thus from

^

{-

^UW

;

in the aorist -

X<>

stated,

new

comes in x-

jtyutu X

;

and in

by contraction ^^

Verbs that have hamxa for their second radical

we have already

and

and

\'^ss^^\

the rules are always the same

the imperative

'

^OxOX

SxOxO

and in the llth formation

a.

%*& '

*

so in the 4th formation Uucsr

;

sometimes conjugated

like

letter, are, as

concave verbs,

^

radical. This is paras coming from ^ or * " he asked," which is often written ticularly observable in the verb in

which alif

is inert,

JU

J Ul, aorist

^JC$ or

<[}lj

.

the alifs are dropped, the radical

020

"*

The imperative is

JJS for

hamza by

th,e last

radical is

<

or L*,

is,

wliera both

vowel

hamza> are often confounded

properly called defective, that

;

the general rule, and

the servile alif because the following letter bears a

which

JL1

also

Verbs, of

with verbs

such as have for their last radical

122

OF THE SIMILE VERB.

Of

the Simile

Verb.

149. The imperfect or Infirm verbs are divided into three

which are commonly

classes^

and the Defective. and

radical,

The Simile Verb has

named

is

called the Simile 3 the Concave^

"by

the Arabians

semblance, because in the preterite fect verb

;

and

it differs

it

j or

^ for the first

3^j

implying re-

quite resembles a per-

from the latter only by throwing away?

and in the

in general,, the quiescent radical in the aorist active, j

imperative of the primitive triliteral verb, and also in the

when

infinitive,

ju

Lhiil

When ^ jazmakd was rich,

of the form Jpu

"love them," for JL*^

*iU

;

quiescent is the radical, after

59

damma^ agreeable

"he

as /juJ

,

it is

to

will love," for

"to love,"

for ajty.

changed to ^ (when

which has in the aorist^*^ for^^w,

"lie

as JIJl

138);

liko j*av

j

and

In every other

in tho participle 'jJ^l fort*ul*, lite J.^1*.

respect (with sonic very rare exceptions) both species of Simile

Yorbs, whether active or passive, together with thoir derivative formations, arc regular, tlic 7th formation only substituting

tasMld in place of the istic

3 ;

??

richccl,

as
"he

JIcj

U

initial infirm radicals, ??

promised,

for &3j\

;

over

its

f*f\

"he was

character-

on-

Those however sometimes remain, be-

come homogeneous, or take tho sound of tho preceding ? '** 9 s*S n x f y*Xx-V, xOxXXxO, n \ui lor vowel j as yux)i jyjy lor ^^^i j^->y^ lor ^M-JU^ *,

5

j

-f>

J>

j

J?

for

&.

^*

"When tho second radical In the

aorist does not bear kosra, that tense

Otf

THE SIMILE YEEB.

regularly formed; as J^-jji from

is

123

and S J from J^I, X *.'*

When

the aorist

Jisrl

jjjj

,

regular, the imperative

is

radical, according to the rules of permutation

of Jj, ^

^

which

for

is

These verbs are

make

IkJ"

;

jLy "it was large;"

took leave;" tlJ&J

gjy"lie

in the aorist lk>

,

"

^

^

"

,

.

J ou imperative 1

he sowed or planted,"

he gave;" jL2J

coo, ul^^, j-^J, *-AJ, v, x is

he trod under foot,"

"it

*

fell

or occurred;"

"he placed;" which The verb JJT x v

t^iv>.

x-

only used in the aorist and imperative

;

as

andjJ.

j.5j

The


irregularity of all these verbs exists only in the active voice

of the primitive form.

In the passive voice of that form, and in

the derivative formations, they present

for

,,

it

fiigt

?

was dry, -j

that the radical

\/J^l 1>

;

"^^

^/M^>

makes

^

Verbs having

are not, properly speaking, irregular; as (J^J,

radical, ?,

Ss

s

9 '"bs

9j***i tj^zf*

is

s<$>

^

f

till

s?

must only be observed

**

^j^^j^^,

changed into ^ when

it is

quiescent after

damma

;

r

in the aorist of the third formation

the rule of permutation

150. Verbs whose

is

merely

J~?jtf,

to be observed.

fixst radical is ^

or

^ tare

instead of

,

tMs in com-

mon, that in the seventh, fonnation they change the radical into

all

no irregularity except indeed in

the seventh formation, as will be observed immediately.

^

&s>~*\

"^

that tense bears fatha.

H

as

substituted for

thus,

;

;

Several verbs lose j in the aorist though their second radical in

5.

"

is

he loved."

JJ.U

for

is

so likewise

is

In the last two examples, the

.

" 5, -^

d? "which then y

CD* peculiar to that

unites

formation

;

by taskdidynth the

hnc@

from

^

"

first

servile

he promised,"

OF CONCAVE

124 conien

Pret, i*5l for j*yl

tlxe

*

Ixfl for XJjl

like

Imper. ^Jl for

a.

^^j

Sometimes tho

^

'

'"

pluy< xl

^^

Part.

;

Jlil

j-ali

cu

into

In

in the

^Or

Tnfin,

;

Imper, f

oU$.

Aoiistj^IT

j

for

J*ii

for

; '

wo have

dic(,"

mwiiu unchanged

^

and

for

3Q

Infin,

;

k

lic^

Vrrt*

:

S^i

a

manner from ^LJ

seventh formation

for a*5 J '

*xcj

Aorist,

;

,*

Part, Ixu* for

;

VBBBft.

j^i5 for

jdol

and adapt

theniHolvcH to the procodinff vowel according fo the rules already

down

fliUH

;

viz*:

A^jjl iS\

PrH,

two

h(t

I

y

'

**

JucjJ

lor *xtly

Aorif>

;

;

lufiru

Aowwi,

;

J^\

^U for^xrf

J

*^xilj

for

For jUw'J

4

;

follows, *"*

t

iix)*^j

X

Juiper, ixcjj

for

o in like manner, Pret,

:

M*iy\

Intjx'r.

''*

**

M

*it

A

Im conjugated as

may

just Hp<*rifiod ^

*

Part, jwu^*

;

v**rbtt

%

laid

Part

;

Infin. j

Verbs,

Concave,

151* Budi

v<

k

rbs an Imvo j or

by Arabian ^mmmurtuiiB

^

(fulled

tor tlwdr

^J^\

iu this, irregularity ccMiHintH
as also in tho tliOHo

iiiidcilci

JJrd,

Lc n ^Cououve."

Iliul

Ilie

l)tt(*oiuo

I
1

I

h<*y arcs also called

ing thrco (lottorn);" Ixicauws

ones

the

an

iSJil

1

'*

seen

to?" is,

to

iiignlar of tho preterite,

and defective verbs have four

may be

!

^ %&

of thoir <jlmniclorifttics

have only throe 'hiUm in tlio first praoii tlw regular

inert ? orre-

HOUIK! of that which belongs >'***

r i

Their

in
aro author ilroppcnl^

main without a vowol nHHuniing to tho pr< co(liiig

radical are

7th, auth ck*rivallvc formations,

fith,

nwli
middle

letters in

by comparing JLXf "I

said

3*

OF CONCAVE VEBBS. "

with cLI*j (concave verb), of the

next

class,

number

their

is

I did."

125

These verbs, and those

depart most widely from the regular forms ;

very considerable, and

therefore essential

it is

be well acquainted with their conjugation.

to

In the third persons of the preterite (except the plural feminine),

a.

the letters^

and

^ are changed to T inert after /#$#

PLURAL,

BUAL.

MA8C.

FEM.

thus, instead of

SINGULAR, MASC. SS S

"iSS

;

FBM. V SSS

\

MASC. S 1-

3

s

2

they write

JU

andJJC,

etc., as

may

be seen in the two following para-

digms (& 158).

In the other persons those radicals are dropped altogether, throw-

5.

ing hack the vowel on the preceding letter (see paradigm next page)

but

that vowel is /atfya, as in

if

the concave j to

radical,

?

said/

and those in

The

152.

and

and ^H above,

in the concave

Concave Verbs in ^ have either

those persons first

damma, and

jy

^ to kasra damma

student

will

carefully*

so that in

or kasra on the

primitive forms of the yerbs Jlf for

JU

are

;

changed in

^ always kasm*

for

jX^

"he went,"

are conjugate*! at

length ia the two following paradigms. species

it is

;

of

frequent

do

well

As

occurrence in the to

study

their

Ml

verbs of this language, the

peculiarities

very

12G

OF CONCAVE VERBS.

CONJUGATION OF THE CGNCAYE Ac five Voice.

j

WAW.

8INQULA.E, MASC, x

1.

MA8C.

j

JK UJJ

3 2

1

tM>.

3

2

1

.,U\i

3

2

1

3

2

JUi

1

OF CONCAVE VERBS.

127

CONJUGATION OF THE CONCAVE Active

t/

YA.

Voice.

Preterite.

DUAL,

PLtJEAL, MASC. f

SIHOULA.B. MA1C

*'EM.

FEW. c x x

x

Ij^U

,

MASC. x x 1

\j^>

^> Aori&t* wwuU

-x Imperative* X I

J-M-0

Participle.

Infiniiiw

.

^-**s

Passive Votc& Preterite,

W

t^ y

^^ uj

OF CONCAVE VERBS.

General Remarks on 153.

In the active voice, is

preterite

fatha, it

fore quiescent J? is

penult

in place of jasm

;

^ are changed to and ^ are dropped

and,

when

the servile

fat/ia;

the last

^

and

be-

If the

if

damma,

to the first radical

vowel happens to be fatfyt, the ^ In the feminine plural the letters

\ .

on account of the subsequent jamn radical is ^ it coalesces,, by tasMld^ with ;

3rd person feminine plural of the prethe 3rd and 2nd plural feminine of tlie aorist, and

terite, tlio

tlie aorist

damma

aorist into

if that

and j

the penult vowel of the

throwing back the vowel

;

Verls.

to Jkasra before quiescent

becomes in

Icasra, it

remains so

it

if

changed in the

is

and

Concave

the

^

in

tlio

feminine plural of the imperative.

The j and are likewise thrown out if an every where, apocope takes place ; "

as

a

ho says not"

wo

(for

fear not/'

J^j

etc.;

^

" jj)

tlio

J^j

;

last

jj

she walks not

radical,

as

may

?? ;

be

The imperative lias observed, being then always jazmated. no alif of union, because tlio first radical bears a vowel, as in J> and

y^

;

and all/of union can only come before a

letter

bearing jazm* a.

The concave

radical letters are also

dropped in the singular

masculine* and plural feminine of the imperative

;

the servile initial alif

being also omitted in every person (see paradigms,, pp. 126 and 187). " But they return when the paragogical ^ takes place ; as ^ly say "fear thou." *hou;" "go tliou;"

^

i.

Tho

inert aKf,

^l^

radical alif in the participle, following the characteristical

ought

to

have a vowel, as two Inert

letters

cannot meet, but

or roxoAVE VKRB& movable all/

Actmza or

changed to J;

is

Is

substituted for

which (by

It,

and that

jSU for <)Us,

thus,

129

for

130, etc*)

^ll; so^SUfor

!lll and that again for ylS* j

^

i

o.

for

Verbs having j

XX

X

when the

aorist,

preterite is either of the form

X x

which

is

the

in

-*

-

of JlS, which

the aorist

for

J^l

but

;

aorist

of tliUL

second

radical,

,

if

the

for

as

is

torn

"

9

***

in

" J^w

the aorist,

/a^a

for

^

JL&

vowol

t^pk?:, for their

because they

9

*^ ^

as

;

?

aorist of '

There are some, however, of the form

these take

which

(Jj^,

take

for its

Verbs ha^dng

^

is J&, which ^ XC/X

aorist J*i>

wUi,

in the aorist, as c-^l^ for *-***&, aorist of

cl^lte

for

In the preterite ^siTe, the rowel middle radical, is thrown b&ok to the first, whose oim 154.

is

then lost

thus,

;

for

^j-J is

3y

aad^? for^^. The

J

/

and 2nd persons of the ooEeaTe sire as

^ are the same

1st

in the pas-

the aetiYe, and ire only to he distingttished by the

sense of the passage* a,

3^

and

^

andJUuJ being for

preterite

and

radical is

j

i.

of the middle radical

In the aorist passive, thejfe$

upon- the fort, j

,

In the

$

$$l

ehang^ aaadjl^*

to

1

mart

Th^ra

-

(moi

is

aoriit of tha*pa^iiire toiee, betveto

or

no .'AtS^ace in tie

^rfewose

second

$&m hayfaf ^ tor ftf &&

pauaiiNw

p^ipte,

t i

JV

* +* of JlL,

aorist

u!?lr

as

^

as

;

^

^

takes fatfya,

are of the form J*i, aorist for

j

and Jjk?

in the

J>y

J*i or Jju

kmra

generally *

X

the second radical have

aorist

which

-x

J^S;

^*-

preterite,

xx^-***.

for

is

damma

second radical, take

thoir

gW^'^f

lie second radical being 17

;

,

130

OF CONCAVE YEEBS,

remoyed

to the

ftrsfc,

the original j

but in concave

^ damma

is

thrown out

is

also

tlnw, ^jj^u for

;

changed to

torn

as

;

J,*^

In approved authors, however, particularly among the of these participles are regularly formed,

many

poets,

of concave

^

155. Concave verbs whose last radical

is

"guarded;" but

especially those

tlie

measured/*

J<^&*

;

same by

taslwttd,

"sewn

lb^li*

tense; thus, from

comes in the

?

c^

incorporate

3

cbU

a

first

he

is

person singular of fhe stums

dead," or

"maiod"

(in choas),

person singular cU4, and in the Bc^oond por-

j6trt

L^^

etc*

with the cj forming the second pernons

of the preterite^ and the

sons c^v^j

as

"

"

together

9

!,1L^

a.s

lIL*.

In concave

verl)B whosc^ last radical

/*

Is is

^,5

a similar rule obtains, whenever this

followed

^)

"

by ^

he carefully preserved,"

made

is

plural feminine of the pretorito?

^ being jaBmalod,

Tims from

forming the person,

^U

and in tho second f

plural feminine of tho imperative

^;

(for

in tho third pc*rwn

in the

first

pomm person

plural of the preterite txJ; and in the third person plural

feminine of the aorist ^j&. These observations equally apply to the derivative verbs ? and are of in importance finding (he root

by

those

who

arc reading Arabic works written without

vowel-points or orthographical signs* Derivative Formations

156.

Wo

from Concave

ttootx*

have already observed that amongst derivative

from concave are irregular.

the third, sixth, seventh, and ninth only In those derivatives no difference be-

roots,

tween those whose second radical

is

j

and those where

it

i

OF CONCAVE VEBBS.

^.

131

It will therefore quite suffice to give as a paradigm of

these forms, the

paradigms

first

word of each

tense, as in the following

:

Active INFINITIVE,

IMPERA.TIVE.

Voice,

PBErmim

AOBIST.

POEMATION.

III.

VI.

3L^

Jfil

Jlxiu

VII.

HGeul

i)

J Tho learner

a,

caves

ittj

and

will perceive that in the above formations the con-

^ are conjugated

alike;

and that the active

participles

of the 0th and 7th formations are exactly the same with the passives, the difference in sense being only discoverable from the tenor of the subject,

In the

infinitives of the

3rd and^9th formations, j and

throwing 1fafajfa$a back upon the preceding

would be jagmafyd, are changed

letter,

to att~ inert;

^

which ofeerwise

and the

sertile final

alif (employed in forming the infinitives of the regular v&rbs \j\^\

and

j^Ucu&-j1)

is

being for

dropped, $\js\

$

being substituted in

and St^&^U

Tie middle

of the 6th and 7th formations, as

may

its

room,

il$ and

radicals of the in-

be observed in the

132

OE CONCAVE VERBS.

paradigms, are regularly movable

however being changed

to

^

(i.e.

have vowels)

;

the concave j

,

Passive Voice.

xx xx

-tf

xo

Also 157"*

,

Some verbs

^AJ^

of this species however

form are conjugated regularly

Aor,J^y

;

Imp,

etc., etc.

;

tlius ?

u 5^&

he was one-eyed ; J?

Parijjlc; so also dl^

*jf\\ ^*

m tho primitive a

lie

***

htuatod;"

*i

Aor. JutfJ; Imp* ILl; Part jjU. tions the 3rd, Gth ? Tfli,

and

Juil,

ou^Jl,

la

llie

derivative forma-

and 8th aroj^l, j^t, jpl,

Jukll ? jip^l respectively-

A

J^t,

few verbs

ttougL. imperfect in the primitive form are sometimes regular,

sometimes irregular in tho third formation;

as

J> "ho

THE STOSTANTIYE

OJ?

x

rested/' which

lias

X

xx03

and

^J\

formation

"ho

is

'

X

.X

"he answered/

?

on account of the

it is

,

"he

damma

and not *j3.

must bo kept

thus from

If the second radical

distinct;

thus from

have in tho second formation active

^

changed

jvjs)

is

^$ which

^,

J2)

(for

into

j

by tasMld with

"he

(for jl

JxU and

radical is j, that is

preceding, does not unite

it,

how-

to be observed,

second formation

whose second

of concave verbs,

the radical j that follows

makes *j^

-

<

*

the alif characteristic of these forms, and which

^

In the 9th

^

and fo>\

<^J(L\

derivatives are regular;

3^

fifth,

J*J>

was

C

as 4-^ladJ and

;

ever, that in the passive voices of the

have

(the sky)

etc.

The other

of the

It

|%U

The concave

>u\ and *+&.

likewise often perfect

heard/'

approved/' a.

lias

"

so

;

SS
S <*

cloudy," "which

^

I S3

"VERB.

1

stood/

we

the ^ and the

"he

sold,"

we

in the passive voice

*

The Sulstantive Verb^&.

We

158,

"ho was;"

here Buhjoin the Substantive Yerb it

is

conjugated

as

3^

^

(for

3/) "^e

(f r

^/) 3

said/

with this difference only, that the last already described, tasMId with servile, in those persons coalesces

^

by

radical

where that letter forms the final characteristic agreeably to

97,

c.

a, This verb, unless to avoid

an ambiguity,

is

seldom used in the

for the most part underthen, as in present tense, being the^Latin,

stood;

"

as

1^ Jptj J^ ^

(mm)

*, veritas et vita,

and the life." The use and applicaway, and the truth, in the Syntax, verb will bo further explained

1 (am) the

tion of this

ego

134

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE VEBB. Active

Voice,

Preterite.

PLURAL. FEM.

DUAL. MASC.

SINGULA1L,

MASC

PEM.

PEM.

MASC

PEttSON.

3

3 2

1

V/

3

. '.SIS'

^

Passive

Voice,

Preterite.

Aorist.

PS? *3

x

P

'

s 9

i"

9

Participle*

*f

'!'

Of

THi: IlCTECTIVE VEIIB.

135

Verb-

f/ia

This class of imperfect verbs has " radical letter; us he assaulted;" Jj

K>0. last

They

are also called

iujST

J

^

or

^

^

for the

"lie threw."

or "possessed of four letters/'

because they have four letters in tho 1st person singular of tho preterite as cb^A wherein they differ from the concave ;

verhs which havu only three in the same person, radical undergoes chungoH rcsomhling second, rttdtcul

w

and Homeihnos

Itn

lottor, fiOjRotimes it

vowel

to the

last

those to which the

Huhjcot in concave verbs

changed into another

The

sometimes

;

it is

disappears altogether^ letter.

preceding

The

chief unomulicti of those verbs arc founded on tho rules of !

7

m will be soon in tho following paradigms:i#

*Actiw

Voice.

BIKOULAE,

r.

MAW,

3

2 1

3

2 1

OF THK

nBFKmVE

The Defective

VEHB.

^Active

Voice.

JPrderitt.

DUAL.

BINGTJLAJU MASC.

2

1

Aw

int.

3

2

1

Til

1(50,

and

J*j

Uoth

$

tlw inf
^

Is

changed

to inert

U

put fur f<*jy tli^ final ^ remaining quiescontj with fhoir vowolfl arc dropped entirely in the and IH

^

Urd person ftminino Aingiilar and dual, and in the masculine for ul)fttituttwl for flnw, c^ji IB plural o^j* and JL^J last In iltci 3rd plural masculine, the k^4^ ? 4!lf, :

;

with for

tion. l>ul

vowol diwappoar, and Ijje and ^j are conand ^J|, according to the rule of pernmat^ji iti

When when

il

the middle radical has fammfy }

hna firnm^ }

4/J

as

is

not changed,

^J "he

consented,"

OP THE DEFECTIVE

for 'y?j

u^^

or as

J

(^^^aj for

}

the 3rd person feminine singular

VEE.B.

c->^^j

?

^x^j

and dual the

Again

*

radical letter

d^

from^S "he was generous," we have c^*j and l^j- The plurals masculine

remains; thus,

and tiJi

so

l^; and

iii

are

"

t*

161. In the aorist the last radical throwing

remains

away d

If the penult of the preterite has

silent.

fatty*, it

here (as in the concaves) becomes damma^ with quiescent j

^

and Jcasra with quiescent

unless the middle radical

,

is

a guttural letter, when fatha inHhat ease remains, as in the a he pastured " or "fed/ perfect verbs; thus, ^JjJ ^J^; if ?

damma as

j^u

fatfa, j

is

the penult vowel of the preterite,

"

is

it

remains regular,

??

he travels by night ; but if tern, it is changed to u as J^ he will approve;" where ^ substituted for V

quiescent,

and

is inflected as follows

:

MARC,

X Ox Ox

S 2 1

a. In the plural

masc,

is made of the j and which remotes sll

plural; as

ad ia

^ whto

the Snd peiB*

fern.

/&. a

:

the

of Jp|n*fft

^JSf

singular aad

to be the

pltiml, wlutt

permit rowels, at

^ ,

162, ,

M

,.,,.

-

last

OF THE BEFKCJTIVE VKUU.

is

dropped, and

^

regularly thrown away, except in the

Is

fimihuuc plural, as PLUUAt.

MAM

i'iH,

WW.

1

,

MAHC.

we?" US;*''

^

Anil so witli roqwcfc to

;

100) go lxforo,

(

/////; us

0i

(whon the

^

^J;

^^

forWdn

il),

j^l,

etc,,

an

^-^

radicals take

milosB the penult ^J

7

etc,

k

108.

Tho

iwpttmtive, an in (ho wgularn,

when

the parugogicui

dropped

tffii crwyS ^*

is

nun

hikcm place

llw* lant nulical,

KM.

^ ie

^ II

!*!"$i

In the

/CMM

^

final

throwing u8

jU

for

after

tli

Hingular foniinino and pltwal

^jU

^

;

^j\\l

kwra cannot

but

^

then rotunu*;

in

tlio

<Meat!0

put

*

m

if tlio

grjWI an

tlie

oorisl

lj

for

x

letter, is

mutiatiou ii ft>r

for lil*

final ;

it rejects ify

nfimition on tho ;

which

nmwouline of the participle, ^

Kingitlfir

cluuigoil to

Is

but

the mngulur muKCtilim* aoriwt, returns, as

in

inusoulinu a contraction oocurw minilar
us

also

formed from

prefixing tho characteristic #?$*;

aoriHl juigmutcd,

after

is

^

after tfawMtt) but seldom.

Klk itt

ww

Jjj ^ BonK'timos, howromam. Wliea the

th(*Ho final loiters

over, tlioiigli raroly, partiolort

aiicl

p

grjWI* Ij;

by

The for

and and

dropped;

the

article,

role holds

yt;

and

as

OF THE DEFECTIVE VEBB.

^

after Jcasra refuses another kasra, j\l

final

used also in the genitive for ^jl

however, regular

is,

139

the rejected

^

as

;

CjU and

The

The

The

^Vj.

&.

returns, as not being final

contraction, as in the aorist

165.

and

and

f\j

accusative

In LjU and IL.U ;

and J^Jlc mates a

infinitive is

always regular.

passive voice follows the active on the

principle as in those verbs

are

same

which we have already exemplified,

regard being always had to the rales of permutation, Defective g?.

Defective j. SlNGtTLAE,

3 ^

c:

etc.

^^fj

2

etc.

1 Aorist.

3 xOxO* etc.

t

etc.

.

S

,.j]*j

1 PwrUcigle. etc*

^. to is

is

^JJB

wad

instead of

^ qtuesoeat^ like put for

t^Ji by 160,

g^; and ,J*^

the

^ame

W^ ,iuw

Iia

the

(

jJJ J^# ;

,

ObjfK

%

stands 'By oontraotioii for

^J^i

{

amd

/W/^

for

fi^resMd rtjle^^ tijfejoi*

whose middle tadioal

a .iw^^a, of ^

yerb

jfefectiv^

fa$$rfy sncli

as

^J

(for

340

OF THE DEEECTTVE Active

"VERB.

Voice.

Preterite.

PEM.

SINGULAK,

DUAL.

PLUBA.L,

MASC.

FEM.

MASC.

WMk*0

."OxOx

Aorist. XX OX

XX OX

X OX

OX

O x Ox

Ox ox

O X OX

X OX

O x Ox

Ox Ox

Aorist Antithetic. xx Ox

wtf

x"

OX

Apocopate. x ox

x ox

X X LX

OX Jf

OX OX

OX

T*^. XV Ox

OX OX

\M*wCP

J

if*:/'

*Aori$t Pedagogic. IM

M

XO X OX

*

X OX

**

XX OX

l

xOxOx

Imperative. OXO

OX

Participle*

Infinitive

^^j

iJJ

X X OX

t8

X X OX

t35

x Ox

-55

xx ox

OF THE DEfECTlVE VEKU.

107.

The

derivative formations have likewise the

affinity to their primitives,

in tht?

observing only, that the

protcrito of tho defective s

muina in the

ftrnt

is

^

,

substituted for

same

which,

^

re-

and second persons, forming a diphthong i.-b*

with /tf$; a

141

^s^ijf^t

f

t,*,.*

*A-iJf*S

,1*

s/*U

quite othero&ys, as

tho primitive, where } returns. Defective Derivative Ibrnwtwns. ACTIVE.

I'ASSIVK.

I.

*>*

II.

III.

I?,

11.

IX. I.

II.

Ill,

IT.

VII.

IX,

in.

OP THE DOUBLY IMPERFEC1 VCiHL

112

Of

HIM '*

w

)i

43"

tlic*

claH,sc H

1*

T!u

w^p)

JU;

rudical

Itrwt

twM**}

1>y

of thn

!iain^ut(*
lib*

yi

Mtm

infirm

doubly

int{M*rf<
4

f

ijapi*rfr

Hiinpli

riicliiiil^

ho rdunti'dj

tin*

1

and an*

lh(rn aro four riubdivisinut4

u (for

mode

sai
Imi dn,m f*(nnpnhonls th*

The*

wMck

any two of

lmv<*

position of fiioHc

k

of

&r

u

thoir radicals, uiv

follow tho

They it*

VT]W

Btieli

Verbs DoiAljj IwiwrfccL

anor
t

info

diviiiil

ami

iiatu^iird

two

inert,

:

wwnd

flu*,

in*r(

us ^

;

1

**

wliii!i

and with

IN

with n

<MiiijuKuttM!

!*>

r^jM*r-f

flit*

Ilkt*

st^ond)

iw

**

iJ.

Tim

IjiHt

mdieiil hauixatf-d, fft^ H^roiMl in
j|U) "lip mouniiHl;** and

lf

i>-

(for

L>)

H

*L

(fbr

Ine iimiif*^ i*f i

tho

of th of JC

Ur* and 3.

aiicl ixfe

;

ififl*'i?tiiijw

J\*

uiid

m ^J\

"

c*f

lu

thitH,

*u>*

The

tlm Imi 1

*l

'*

J\

^tj

tAI4TlCIII3LII*

;

:

,

In*

;

the*

or THI; i>oni.Y

143

VF.KB. /*

Tlu

I.

1

Immzatwl, the

niiilillw

liiat

inert; as

*

tiro*!," I*

which follows

A Hit U*H

JL

and

JtJ

;

^U

he re*

thua,

AOHtftY,

f

<

'I

109.

^j "ho

on awount of dn^pptnly

and

itn

it

often an the j is

tho Aorist

saw* 1 should bo regularly conjugated occuwneo,

frequent

the*

hmnmt^d

;

&lif is

vowel thrown upon tli^ prucoding ktter as In tho primitive form, therefore* ?

and ImporatiYa aro

as follow

:

Aoriitt: UXJAL,

S

$

Utt/

1

/jJi

,

when

the vorso roqniroft,

fotrnd In tho

or with tho

It in

^tgogienl

also formed

as

ete*

OF THR IMWBLY niPEHFECT In the

a.

out

:ircl

formation of this verb hamza

is

everywhere thrown

an

;

INFIX mvi;

IMPEIl.

mET

A.OEIST.

J,

lt

or

SMi'

or

*u

T!j other verbs of

ft.

tho '1th iui-HuUiou, in Ihe ^

/

P

^^

r*

^ /?.

Wh?u

Intmz*

;

i

IB

iw in

may

also

3-

throw away

manner of ^1, making

kamzaw

cither 1x4

&'

not jftsmatwl pntlorlto

in

Ijt

*^

r#*

fhf*

llj; ami uUo

this species

miprativo with

jf

*

i

tl

lint

^

It

,

w

tlie

paragogical

^

is

^f

t

conjugated regularly, retaining

in iho

participle ^\Jf in the infinitive

participlf* pussivc it is

^yi, although j

takes

Ja^r/i

170.

The

oIuKH of flui

BouHe

Imperfects, which are uch IIB have two of tho compri^ lottery and ^

culled Tnvolutw,

and uro of two kiilH, tho Separate and the Conjunct Tim H<*pamt arc whidi havc^ or ^ for tho first and last a "h guardod" or "took care; ?? an radi<jal he for radirulH,

^

;

Iwtd

u worn

llttctcd liki!

ltfiof

jc|

M>

and

i*A|1f

Tlwt ImjMjrnliw

In tk0

/^

(ajMtftking of

^j,

tlio

XMI'iiUAttVfi,

j

a liorso): the

"being in-

first

othor as Jj>^ and /UJ. AVIUHT*

in t!u> otlior poraons ronumos

^;

as

with the paragogical nfm

it

OF THE DOUBLY IMPERFECT VERB. 171. cals ^

145

The Involute Conjunct has the middle and final radior 4^; as ^jj* "he roasted;" "he was strong

^

or powerful;"

J^

"he

which, with regard to the

lived;"

middle radical, are conjugated perfectly; and in the imperfectly

;

^L

two that of

The

,

IMPERATIVE.

PAKTICIPLE,

Infiaitiye

bere for jja

mode of

^j and

the other

as

INFINITIVE.

a.

following the

final

li

put for 15^

is

AORIST.

and

,

^

the last ^ being changed to

?

^

PBETEEITE.

for

55

tS^ stands

;

avoiding thereby haying

the penult and last radicals the same, and becoming a surd or doubled

verb; whilst, on the contrary,/^ converting^ final to radicals similar, ;

and

is

frequently contracted by ta$h$ld

and, in the Aorist,

the adj^ctiTe infinitiye,

.^ is

throwing away

tjas?

[^ its

or

its

rejects

>-

or

The

^ in the

is changed to quiescent and ^5.

alif, ac-

vowel,

first

vowel back upon the preceding INFINITIVE.

as

radical

In the same manner are conjugated

sometimes the

;

both

Instead of the participle

^jxl*

most generally used.

cording to the rules respecting^ b.

^, makes

^

*the

Derivative verbs

;

only

in the 9th formation, throwing

letter

;

IMPBBATIVK.

as, AOUIST, o xt* s

19

146

OP THE OTGf-ATIVE VERB.

Of

A

172,

Verts Triply Imperfect.

very few verbs are Triply Imperfect,, and are

two

divided into

classes*

Class

of such as have

first consists

X

and the other twoj and ^$; as ^\ "he Ibetook himself to some place/ etc., or the middle " ham&ated and the first and last j and as he promised ; "

faxmea for the

first radical,

3

^ j

^

the

first

and

of ;

which

is inflected

likey^ and

g^A the ,

other as

as 3

INPIN1TIVE.

PARTICIPLE.

IMPERATIVE.

PEETEEITB,

or

There first,

no verb having all the consisting of ^ and t/. is

O/

radicals^

the Negative

or even the two

Verb,

173. The Negative Defective Verb

J? though conjugated

only in the preterite, is quite unlimited in point of time, u " a 3 5 it is not/' it was not/ or it will not be/ etc. signifying ,x

formed of the particle and is inflected as follows

It is apparently

or

"

exists

?7 ;

a

1J

$

not/' and JJl

"

is

?>

:

P1UBAL, F1.M.

x .

PEM.

MAflC.

9 ox


I

,jAUJ

fl-UJ*]

c-

MASC. x ox

x ox

LJ

3

2

UJ a.

SometimeB

cL)S is

employed instead of

u^

9

but without any

OF VERBS OP PRAISE AXD

Inflection.

Most Arabian grammarians

negative particle

augmented by the

S

147

CE1STSUEE.

consider cibS as merely

tlie

letter c->.

Verbs of Praise and Censure.

These verbs, which the Arabian grammarians de^ * '^"Z

174.

"$

nominate

^x

9

-"^-o

p&\j ^&A\ JUM,

admit only of very limited inflection. u times pronounced i*5, 1*5, and **3 it is

They may be regarded

bad."

with something of a verbal feminine termination

feminine nouns.

as

;

of L^C*-

They is

good/' and

of love."

\fc>,

and

They receive also a <JL-glJu when applied to

inflection.

cL^o

,

5

\*>

in the plural,

signifies

for

^li

u

;

The word \Z. it is

compounded u worthy

that is excellent," or

To these three verbs may

bad;" and J^sl

JJu "it

as a species of interjections

looked upon as a verb of this kind u

and

are 1*3, some-

are sometimes, but very rarely, writ-

They

ten U*J in the dual; and

may be

and censure,"

or "verbs of praise

it is

also

be added

*H

"itis

beautiful;" but these

last,

under other acceptations, are regularly conjugated.

Of

Verfa of Admiration^ or Surprise.

175. These are called

u^s?^

" \

^Jl*5\

verbs of admiration,"

Like the preceding, they are ratheV a kind of interjadional formulse than a particular species of verb. They W6 Diployed

in

two ways ; the

first

^\ U

?

the form of the third person

singular masculine of the preterite of the third derivative formation,

case.

preceded by the particle

The second mode

is

U, and to

followed by

anWusative

employ the second person

singular masculine of the imperative of the third formation,

148 O

YEKBS OF ADMIRATION, OR SURPRISE*

03?

CjP

J*ii, followed

by^ as

c^ prefixed;

As an

the Verb,

we

recommend lie

is

J*djl

U

O

or

t?

J-d-M

jjjj

"how

excellent is

This subject will be

very excellent."

examined in the Syntax,

fully

176.

(?

O

la/j

Zaid!" or "Zaid

more

the object admired haying the preposition

appropriate

Appendix

to our

two Sections on

here subjoin a series of useful tables which

we

and frequent perusal

till

to the student's careful

has committed them

all to

memory.

Table

I.,

page 149,

exhibits at one view the Preterite Active of the eleven species of

Verbs, which

we have

already explained

90 to

107.

The

upper line (No, l) shews the Eegular Verb 3%. No. 2 shows the inflection of a Surd Verb. Nos. 3, 4 and 5 exhibit the three species of Hamzated Verbs.

the Simile Verbs.

Nos. 6 and 7 exhibit

Fos. 8 and 9 3 the Concave Verbs.

Lastly,

Nos. 10 and 11 are examples of the Defective or Irregular Verbs* In like manner Table II. exhibits the Aorist Active of each of the foregoing species of Verbs in the same order.

Table

III.,

the Imperative, the Participle Active, the Infini-

and the Participle Passive, which is inserted here bocause there is more room than we could have in either of the

tive,

next two tables which exhibit the Preterite and Aorist Pas-

on the same plan as Tables I. and II. respectively. It has not been deemed necessary to insert in the Tables those verbs sive

which are called the Doubly and Triply Imperfect, described from 168 to as they arc not very 172, inclusive numerous, and their inflection is more irregular than that ;

of tho others.

OE THE ,*PREIERIIE A.CT1YE, T

j

4)

GO*' j

CO

5.

.

_

m j> H-l

EH

O }

,

D

{^

U H

3

-'

^

-

|

,\3

i

"3

t ^ li

5-^

N

s

5

CD

150

01'

THE AORIST ACTIVE

o

CO

gi.a

s

as: 4-

11

^

*j\

"

"^;

l> ^

^ B O

'

!*^

'

*J

~1

,

:j

: ;

^

:-i;

|

EH CQ IH

o v

<j

^5-1;^ 1

^ v

B

-i

sVi x

B

-S

.

^-s

>

V '

"J ;

I

;

,^

4

.!

7L

OF tJFK IMl'KIUTIVE AND PABTICIPLE ACTIVE, ETC.

Ct

SJ

jrf'V

a

-U

THE PRETERITE PASSIVE,

m B IH rt

w B H ^

3Q

jjff2;S5]|5"?;F;J

^jm>f]t^;$l^T| "'ftSSSHtti^^'i" 111111 1- i-nii'T ir

l

ninm>iiniiiip.imii...n.i

*"*

\*

jj

OF THE AOBIST PASSIVE.

** '

"}*

5"

>

n-

151

SECTION

V. f>

j?

Of

the Indeclinable Particles

9

<*'

U^\

(plural of

Arabian grammarians designate those parts of spoorvU which wo cll Proposition*, Adverbs, Conjxmotioiis, wul .

under the general appellation of Parlies!* **, an In treating of those wo whuli commoner 44. 1

Intorjootioiw,

we

stated,

with, the Imposition, tlran far differing

from tho arrangement

The PrqwHitioiiH, usually observed in European grammars, Adverbs, and Con] unctions are eaeli divided into two dhiHHefy the Ins(%paruble and directly

prefixed,

tlie

and

Separable

tlio

other,

;

tho

f!i't

being always though not joinod, in-

word which they govern. Oiu* or other of them may ocenr in ovory line, and are of nuidi

variably precocling

tlu*

consoquoneo to a proper tuiderHtaiidiug of

tin*

language^; Ihc

Inseparable PrepoBition, Advei*b% and Oonjunotionw together with tho Borvllo letters? are very apt <x> perjilox tho beginner In

vaiiotiB

wayn;

but

nioro

no purpose, tho lonvcn of a vocable** which he can never find, till ho lifii

patience" in turning over,

dictionary, for

loamod

to

epocia11y by fatiguing his

analyse and

to

separate those lotion* or pi4f|Mes

from the words to which thoy aro prefixed* requisite for Mtn, therefore, to

It will

pay very grout attention

too

to

OF pREPOsmoxs,

the observations

upon

in order that they

155

which wo are about

thorn,

may make

to offer,

a necessary impression on the

memory. a.

Most of

ilic

Particles, as

we

shall

see, are either

immediately

hence

substantives, adjectives, or verbs slightly modified;

happens thai the same word divisions of particles

preposition or an

;

may

it

often

belong to more than one of the sub-

just as in Latin

word ante

tlio

a

is either

adverb, according to its application. #

,*<*.

P

^

Of

178*

and^

?

tkcHO, live arc inseparable*, viz.,

all of

which govern the genitive

eiine

Tho Preposition

which, they are prefixed*

cbj

?

of the

c-j

in Badr."

It also denotes

gether with*/'

mj*&> jpL

u

"withy" "

verbs of

"

or of "taking*

as

away;"

witti tfe0 1

t*&

l^K^"

it

OxCu-O

b

^

OxO*o x

^j*S

I

^

O^S MiO

I

1

t-

^

i^y3b

y^J U y*M\

Art

" bringing,"

"ho came

*j4b

u^J tite

witit fee

a

h@ W6nt

light"

It

" retributioBj" equiva-

"OB tewumt of;" Mf0 for

?? ;

denotes "along with,"

"h0 took awsy

"

"in the

subjoined to

signification of

sometimes denofcei ^oompensatioE" or lent to our words "fesr,"

?

(when you were)

When

5

book," fa, "fee tonight the book;"

awiy

to

?

along with/' or "to-

pen,'

coming" and "going,"

and then the phrase conveys the

J,

noun

I ate bread with dates

uLiift

w^4^ "I wrote with a

Jju

c/

has ka$ra for

m a<^V

vowel, and signifies generally "in," " mosque ;" so ,jyj
S0j

c^

life,

as follows:

and an eye

for

wi

OF PJREP08ITIONS. M f

*-:i


^ cl%>-^ <^1^

"may God

Ai

on account of thy rclqwc from u

of

particle,

nflcii

!K

ft

wearing

an

;

i!^

It is sometimes

&}&*? "they swear by God."

put, Ix'foro thf! predicate of

a siMM-i.-s of cxph'tivts; as

.

Mam!"

destroy tneo

a nugativo, and be-

St U "God

JjU. ^ X

does not

KS

m-I
mane

ihn

to

M

J-"V

u

lo !'

indicating iho

man!"

"iM-lie.hl u ijj

s>

uluittf

f)

tiling

J

;

17!^

utuny

v*rlM; us

1

Tim

IVqwisittotw to

14

liy

*

IH

<{(! ! n :tn

cb ami

y

used

n<mr a

<'ip1oytl, (wlu^n

We nmy

pre

.

as

idiomatically

percei?cd the

man

(wlio was)

j are finploycd ohioflyin

^U "by

an

Lord of tJw Ki^btt!" it

IE

like

0od! ?? manner

u |>roposition) as

i

?


obwrvtn, liciwu?i% that J is generally It wometimos signifies

c<

jiluiig

wttli,'* M

wfioji,

in

fe

atotion;

v^Sb ^^^ "ho

u toujuiidin l<*noHiig **aud*"

*Srtl!i," or r

it,

cJ

^4

C^JHVHH Hwiwing;

Ilii!

iw-y **by

flif iarti<*li

*o

I puHs<*d

J^.^ c^^i

*?

1

!

of

ol>jc<;i

**

a fVw |i}rars tloil

"Bcliold !"

Lastly,

,

\vith

JU JJj

wit in m-glceting;"

in

1

in

iificl

UJi ***

flii!

io

that

^yJ

^

inclieittliig

a Himultanoaus cvont

it

"tlia

flic

accusative; as

with tho

is

<^

tin?

Amir

Pwpomtion iiiir

Ji/

"like*," or

(ho army.*'

" ***," and

*

cor-

the

157

OF PBBPOSITI0NS* as

genitive;

'

"

^

affixed,

though

;

me/

7

like

"

thns? Ul

tim ;" but

like

^

<^l

2

me;'

like

Tory rarely used with, the " like Saey quotes a few instances ; as it is

^

De

The word

etc.

It is prefixed also to

'*"'

the isolated pronouns;

" thee

man."

like a

J>^ *

composed of

\&

C/ and

of the demonstra-

**

tive UJ, is considered as a

noun, and

if

governed by a pre-

ceding word, the antecedent loses the nunatkm, as in the following example

;

of such a year."

s** ss \*$ &**

Of

Ss

O

^^ \&

C/,

O s

in such a

and the

this particle,

noua U, is formed the word Ul manner as." a. I consider

^^

relative pro-

a ?

month

signifying

ia the same

which, is generally called an adverb, to be as

geimine a preposition, as either

<>

or J.

My

reasons are

1st,

that it -uiiiformly governs the genitive case like the two last particles

Snd, that

it is

nrtually a preposition in English, as ia the phrases

where "like" governs the objective the same as any other preposition; 3rd, it is viewed as a

"like me/' "like him," case,

preposition

invariably

etc,,

by De Sacy (Gtrammaire Arabe,

p* 468),

Gaelic

Lastly,

it is

^^positox governing the dative or ablative case ia

it

the Gaelic language, whether Highland ox Irish.

Stewart in his

Grammar, Edinburgh, 1812, p. 126, gives mar, "like," So does O'Bonovan in his Irish

a preposition.

181.

Tha Preposition J, with

tlie

of the dative case aa "to," tke sign "^ . ,/OxO^ u '

^U

;

j^t

it foeara

praise be to

the vowel

Go4"

/^^;

W

M <#f "to iiee;"

U

(<

to

as

158

OF PBEPOSmONS.

etc. 3

with the exception of the affixed pronoun of the

^

person singular; as

"to me."

It also s

<^s

^

'

"for,"

signifies <"

9

first

s"&

5

on account of;" *ij&\u b\**A ^j/ f=rU grief was increased on account of what had happened to

my

because/

It sometimes expresses swearing

two eyes."

Ms

with a mixture

C3

of

as

surprise;

"by God!"


prefixed to a verb,

it

*<* '

"

in order that," or

" ssi*

"to the end that;" as
u^^\& "he

<**

When

fixed with faffa)

him be

by way

sought something

prefixed to the aorist

an imperative in the 1st and 3rd persons assist;" JJ^J, "let

when

a conjunction,

sometimes means P'?^'

that he might eat it."

As

;

as

it

"

%w3x

forms us

let

It is elegantly pre-

assisted."

of pleonasm, before that part of

the sentence which grammarians call the Predicate (or that

which

is

affirmed of

any person

or thing), especially

when

the person or thing of ^1* is placed before the subject (or

somewhat

Alexander

(is)

fixed with

fatM

is

affirmed)

powerful/' or it

"

as

;

.xxo^o

xv

,6

which

t3

^*&*]*

/jJO -"v

the powerful."

^J (

"for

When

pre-

gives to the Preterite the sonse of the

Optative, as more fully explained in the Syntax.

Sometimes

used idiomatically as a species of interjection expressive " Zaid !" When of "a cry for assistance;" as oplj help

It is

?

the particle

3

?

with a fafha, conies before the <*,-

s>

latter loses its

Mf\

as d50j '

o

^ '

-^

^s&

the truth coming from thy Lord."

In conditional prepositions "if;" or 5J "if not;" as

it

X
?$

article,

the

s

&\ % ^

Here

"verily that

is * 'V-

^ ^,<

j^

is for

j^eSL *

answers to the antecedent

ck^T ^Lr J

o^ jl

"if thou comest

159

OF PREPOSITIONS.

me, I will certainly honour thee," or more correctly, "hadst thou come to me, I would certainly have honoured th.ee."

to

182. It

I think, inaccurately asserted in most Arabic

is,

Grammars

that

^

and

are also inseparable prepositions;

*

whereas they are so only in appearance. the

initial

"from/' "out

^

the particles

of

letters

They

^

and

but then the second

of," etc.;

are merely

denoting

letter of the

changed by the rules of euphony " CU from that which/ for U ^; so

particle generally follows,

^lc

^ ^B. In manner tt U ^ and think would like

for

is for

I

;

d

it

volve us in a serious absurdity. is really

I

by the

puzzle the grammarians

it

the word to which

however, *

"out of that which,"

that in this last instance,

to persuade us,

and

3

19); as

into 1 (see

;

O

as

is

the prefix,

which would

prefixed,

in-

In some very rare instances,

employed instead of Gtfxk

t>^

article J\

is

*

^^ "from >

(

^

when

the two tribes/

followed 3

instead

of

183.

The Separable Prepositions

Like the Inseparable they

are not very numerous.

the genitive case.

We

of the Arabic language all

govern

here give them in their alphabetical

order.

preposition ^J\ indicates the,, tej^dgbSti$ of an U " .J! came to the until;" as 'ij^uH action, "to/ "' "* s *.,:'' ^e^ ^ "until the present time*" Jt also denotes city;" jjil ^J\ ' r

184.

The

*V

31

*

"accession" or

t-x^***

S>

"

addition:" a$ *$tff&* ^JV

added wisdom to (their)

'

M

^'"

^V

44^ *

Ualj

thej

OP PREPOSITIONS.

ICO

185. The prepositions ception ;"

thus,

except Zaid."

beyond," or

"

Se>-

and

?

ex-

all slain

were originally verbs signifying

Tliese

"

denote

ti&,

"^tey were

j44^ bM

tSc

aj

" being

being separated from."

uli. denotes "the termination"

186, The preposition

"

UUl,

or

like the Latin extremity" of a portion of time or space, S<s s O >s

mgue

as ;" thus, ad, or our phrase "as far

time

" it

as JIJL&JI

until;"

signifies

1

^^

jJlx^

When

dawn."

far as the place of rising of the

to

<^o

j^

it is

as

applied

i^Jik ^>. iJU

"they trayelled until the sun arose." xxOx" " as \^\j "even and to our words ;" yea"

L

^

^$UJ

"I

Had

the particle

haye eaten the

eyen

fish,

of

Jl been used here instead haye eaten the

fish

up

its

J^

head." it

and answers

subjunctive mood.

-3S

is

x

equiyalent

xx x

IB

^o

/ xoS

\*

c^l

would haye meant

"

I

(

to,

or as far as ?

its

preceding the aorist used as a future^ antithesis,

It

it

head*"

affects it

to the Latin donee followed

W>^ J^

"

tA^

march

When with

by the

until thou over-

takest them,"

187.

The

preposition

Ju

" "on,"

or time; periority as regards space

*& J^

*"

<
" or Ui:a

tlie

colorBe of

^**

w denotes su-

oxx

as *A&

Ms

upon him;" " time or

OXt*X

It sometimes denotes "against;" thus,

"

above,

XX X X

^j^

a Eon OE0e upon a time went forth against two bulls." X

sometimes signifies to custom*"

"

according to;" as Sjl*

It is idiomaticaEy

employed

^

It

"according

to express

"debt"

161

OF PREPOSITIONS. "

or

duty ;" as

"I owe

i.e.

dinars," "

you ought to

to

signify j*.

ellipsis for

1

jjj

"

.!& ^

uj5h jL>j> ** "'

upon me a thousand

literally,

In

do this."

S

Oxx

x

^ ^-^

clCU

this latter sense

is

used

"take;" as \^j CiU^ "take Zaid," an ^1; cCU " it is your duty to take Zaid."

^

It is a curious coincidence that the idiomatic

a.

/xOx

x-x

a thousand dinars;" \&& J*AJ

Le expressive of deht is L5

also

common

very

use of the Arabic

in the

Gaelic lan-

"

guage

Tha la faphairidk ay ad orm, I owe you a day " literally, you have a day in harvest upon me."

harvest,"

The

188.

preposition

"

^

shot the arrow from the bow."

"

sense of

without ;" as

rich enough without

"

or

^^W as

^j&T

^

from,"

*lpT ^L^^j "I

It is sometimes used in the 1

men."

leaving behind ;"

separation

signifies

"distance" or "transition;" as

is

in

thus,

;

^

"

J^

ail

}

It also denotes

oJj

^

"

cbU

God

yerily

^\

" passing

by

"

he died leaving

(behind him) a son." 189t

The

preposition

^ denotes "in;" with reference

X^o

u^\ ,A

time or place; as

^ Ox

u

JUli

the

money

(is) in

to

the

*

X"

It is used idiomatically to express multiplication in

purse."

x Ox

,5V xv

1

arithmetic; as
^

sometime^ answers

~tft

<#^^

"

Uli

f

*

O

^u^i

^j

xt

^y

15^5

three multiplied

the preposition

"

by

five,"

It

with ;" as follows

:

'

he departed with

fifty

tbo$&aa4 (men)."

d, jA,M, JA,^, and ^oJ generally " denote "to," "up to," "as far m, n nigh," etc. According 190.

The

prepositions

21

162 to

OF PREPOSITIONS.

De Sacy

these are all modifications of a substantive rather

than prepositions*

The

191.

commencement of an or

3^

3

or

?

still

^

x

1

"

^

?^9

? ?&%'"

k^

?

3j^

to

"

since;" as follows:

U

I have not seen

him

o ?

genitive;

since Friday.

3'

ft,?

is

not yet finished, &* or 3o^ governs the

x

Ox

xx

as

?

<"


"When the period

denote the

?

action with reference to time elapsed

passing^ and are equivalent

xoyo-o

d^J

d^

prepositions

U^A

tjub

X

^Otfx

O ^

U "I

3^ <j^uK

have not spoken

to

him

during this month."

^

192. The preposition -o x

as

jW x

j^x

1

^^,^1 x

xxx

as

dxuj>-

&

.

OxO

(^AJ $,

from/' "of," "than;" the

Amir

departed from

x

Sometimes

tho palace.*'

when

IMC

T ^L j/-

\

/

"

xo

^ ^

S^-,

denotes

it is

used to express composition;

S-SJXJ^PXC-S.

gp L^-S* *

xt/S-x

man

jjluJSl

xo

is

made up

of a soul and

j*

6li3x

a "body;" c-^UcI j J^ar

^

palm-trees and vines."

It is used in the sense of our

"than"

to express the

"a garden

te>-

(consisting) of

comparative degree (see

word In

81).

negative propositions, or interrogative propositions implying it

negation,

often happens that the subject, or object of the

verb, instead of appearing in

expressed ?

X

by tho

O

XX

J^j ^ rr* L^^T x Srx

its

^ governing

preposition

^*

"

no

man

proper case,

cai

'

#

^e

to

me;"

is idiomatically

the genitive fP<*<*

^c "^'*

d\ *#

J

as

;

0>x

X

^'^

U

<*

x

S

"you have no God but him." 193,

Tho

rest

of

the

prepositions -are

expressed

nouns substantive^ employed in the accusative

case,

by the

163

OP ADVERBS.

nunation being rejected.

The

"in front of;" fa\ "before,"

sort are the following, viz., j

"

^

"after;" "

principal prepositions of this

"

around round," " below ;"lj-, "beneath," "under," under

3jP-

;

"

u^oLt

^, or

after

^

"towards;" J*I "beyond;"

^k

"beneath," "

^J

;

3*

"besides,

SL "in

pos-

"near," "with" (Latin penes, apud; French " above;" Jy*, "instead of ;" Jlc "except;" jy

session

of,"

chez}]

J!o "before" (in regard to time);

^ ^

to place);

or

^jj

T

"with;"

"before" (in regard

"beyond," "behind;

7'

All these are themselves liable

klj "amidst," "among." to

"

;

o

"except;''

c^r

"between," "among;" "

be used in the genitive case when they are preceded by

a simple preposition, inseparable or separable;

as

^o ^*

"after," "in the sequel." Adverbs.

The Adverbs

194. that in

it

would be a

any Grammar.

ticiple,

and

thus, 5leU*>

"little;" ;''

useless labour to attempt detailing

Every

infinitive in the

"within;" .

\s>-j^

language

right hand";"

"without;"

\Slft "*

**"

2U

L^j "eagerly;"

"on

the

may be employed

accusative

"together with;"

\^S "by day;"

them

substantive, adjective, active par-

by being put in the

verbially

night

of the Arabic language are so numerous,

C

case absolutely;

\^

"miich;" LlS

"one day;"

U

iLJ "on "by chance;" *

left

haad;"

G^L "willingly;"

ad-

l*j/>

U^ "with

"by the

"quickly;" aversion^"

164

OF ADYEEBS.

"eternally,"

nomis of

or

These are

etc.

action, "which,

all

substantives, adjectives,

being put in the accusative case

become adverbs. a.

According

to

De Sacy

noiins thus put in the accusative case,

?

are often found in elliptical expressions, where they depend upon

a verb understood; as i^lL \JXi ^

"

am

I

ing

ready to obey you

God water 7

Ci^

land;" &lsa^ "by

These are

praised/

"I

this

;"

"by

hearing and obeying," mean-

"

"

by watering," meaning his praise,"

expressions for

elliptical

"may

i,e.

c\W usJil j *

Ix

<SGx

f-Q^

hoard by hearing and obeyed with obedience;" LJL ?s x

"may God



Pf

f

water thce by watering!" <&Wi^

<*IH

*,s1t

"I

fas&s\

praise

s

^

s s

Cjo

"may you

perish!"

1^ J Ca^

"you

^X

welcome," "all

at

is

him

These modes of speaking are very common

with his due praise." in Arabic; as di3

may he be

XX

^

are
"at your ease and convenience;"
,x

<#

*<$>

*#

which Is a double ellipsis for i\ negatively,
^ U>- 3 "no See De Sacy's

Grammaire Arabo, Tome

rendered "une

^

51

1, p.

50S, where the phrase

is

cruche et tin eouvorcle."

195.

The

following

common

comprises the most

list

adverbs

of the Arabic language, independent of those already referred to (

104).

It is

a translation partly from

whoso Grammar

partly from Eosonmullcr ?

abridgment of 1 5

this is

Do

Saey's

an inseparable

the Latin an ?

num ?

or

is

Be

Sacy, and

a very

tisefal

more extensive work, like particle denoting interrogation,

numquid? thus, cL?Q u a

"yes," "even so/'

assuredly/'

"

is

he

verily."

deacl

?"

Rosen-

165

OP ADVEBBS. *

from "

miiller says that it differs

stronger affirmation than

p"

2 in this respect, fe\

we

had said

stronger than if he

adverbs

junctive jl

"seeing that,"

time." V\

UUl

are

con-

it

expresses the also

signifies

and \& signify

J1

or
trt*l

j

it

also,

"then," "at that

pf$4 "verily," "rest assured;" thus, from the voyage

of Sindbad, ^(L*!

had

say, "will

"well done!"

or fa

*J*\

events

provided that."

"behold."

we

assent.

\A\,

or rather

the present,

"

if

is

employed with a future sense,

occurrence of two

simultaneous

"then,"

more emphatic

usually

limited to

is

Again,

j*3.

U^, and UU\ "when."

UJ1,

dl,

expresses the

ISo

you go?"

say to a person

he say j-\ "yes," the affirmation

if

a

yes," if the sentence which

if precedes be not interrogative; thus,

"go away," and

is

it

\

\&&

^

u^U

^

^

UJt

C^-j

^

^

snd

not been (for) thy arrival amongst us, test assured

that thou wouldst have perished in this place." l\


(from^ andS) "if HI

SjS

S

^

Jj-

5

not,"

"there

is

nisi,

"si non,"

"except."

no power and no strength

except in God."

J

"whether?" (Latin num? m?} TMs fe properly a " e^ else. * of d0ubt, and ihe& ^ignift^ coBJioictioja ^xpre^sive 7

* *

05 (from

and

U

"

not ")

"

is it not ?

'*

160

OF ADVERBS.

When

\.

as

"not;" God.

?J


this

JLJ

!H

followed

particle is

^

1

"there

Sometimes when the word

expresses negation

;

as J3 isi

may be

not whether this

by

"assuredly,"

no judgment but with

511

does not follow,


^^ ^

" j

verily,"

thus,

my

reward

is

only with God,"

from God, and from no one a

J1 Zf\

J^U cLoU

It or

"


^

as

<5j!

^Ic ^p-l Cwl

"only;"

"since,"

so."

j^l

3

"

and I know

"even

"indeed,"

Hundred Governing Words;" God is forgiving," "unless/

it still

a trial to you."

governs the accusative case, being one of the "

Ci3l

signifies

is

u l

it

Jl

" i.e.

I expect

assuredly

my

reward

else,"

how?" "wherefore?" "whence?"

"yes," "verily," "even so,"

It is nearly equivalent

used only when a form of oath follows; thus, pu but a d^ ti\ \Jj j Z/\ verily, by the Lord it is the truth." It

to

I

fa

eqtuvalent to the interjection 0, used in calling. s

<&%

^bl and

j.

3

^y

"

"

when,"

"where?"

t,*

3^

whensoever."

"

whence

?

??

"whither?" ^J J1 ^*^ ^

"wheresoever?"

^,

^1

3

^

an adverb of admiration, " bravo!"

"well

done!" JB^" enough," "stop."

^

>us* ^

l^J or \t>tb

an adverb expressive of calling equivalent

to

167

ADVERBS. It is used before a

our interjection 0.

by the

article

JJ&TlJJ or

as,

;

noun that

used as a preposition

and appears

clinable,

ye people

phrase

^

preposition

hereafter."

ceases to be inde-

it

^

I"

as

,

xw

,

or in the

^

.

The

commonly employed after the prefaces of books, in order to announce the commencement of the

1^1 is

or in letters,

main

^"

either in the accusative A*J

by the

genitive, if preceded

defined

"

^uT Q\ U

" *J " after," afterwards," "behind;" **

When this word is

is

author or writer subject, after the

has expressed the

and the eulogy of the Prophet, or the usual

praises of God,

formula of politeness, in epistolary correspondence.

^" ?

is

afterwards," ''thereafter,"

employed with a negative, and

"y et ;"

in this last sense

" signifies

it

not yet," nondum.

^

the diminutive of the preceding, signifies "a little after."

JJ

"yes,"

"

3'

"

certainly,

it is

" so,"

in reality."

This par-

used after an interrogative or negative proposition,

ticle is

and then

it

affirms the contrary of

what may be

asserted in

such proposition. "JZ

"between;"

" separation,"

lj

this is

merely the noun

s

* "difference/'

in the accusative case.

"whilst," "meanwhile;"

it

sometimes denotes "be-

tween," like the preceding. -C

"

uL^

"in the mean time,"

whilst,"

"

5

below,'

"

"

u under,"

during

"

dxiring this."

(when applied to time)

1G8 as f

OF ADVERBS.

(*

<*U o X

^^sc

"by

night"

^ " from below "

9

C"* ^

u^-^sr

;" >

U/x-

"under the night");

(literally 9

"

a

little

lower."

in this

place." Jf" here/ " " t$ and LLJj then," afterwards

generally viewed as a

;"

conjunction. -

^ and^

u

a

u yes,"

,

"of a verily."

J^li liUl and Cl^pears with the niination

"

may it

?

?

it

?

not

Tbe.

??

"When this word

"becomes an adverb

;

its

ap-

we have already

<xll use as a preposition. Jil^ or " ?? far be it from thee ! forbid
described

^1J.

it is so-"

assuredly

God

" certainly ?


"

lil>-

may

!

^

or ii

l/~

"

C^p- "where/ a

hallo 3

u

?>

"

!

come

wheresoever "

whither;"

UiX

a !

?? ;

como hither P

O^i-

^

?

"

wheresoever;"

whence;" it

is

also

written C-4^*

J^o as a preposition "except," "under," "besides." As an advorb it is used idiomatically in the sense of "seke" " "seize upon Zaid!" jjy CJ or stop;" as \^j ?

t

u

d^^

do what thou wishest"

The

particle cl/^ (also written cS) 3

uLJJ,

cslvj,

"perhaps,"

^g^ifies

c!43)

"many," "much,"

It takes idiomatically

"often,"

an affixed pronoun;

as

J*

men; CJ5^

and

U

9

"often," "sometimes," This is compounded of <-Jj " " " often," aad sigudfieB sometimes," occasionally^"

169

OF ADVEItBS.

C-uj and Uijj "until," usque dum.

^,

ili^, jp,

J-j,

These when preceding the

fclii.

aorist give it a positive future signification.

Ul?, ULs, Ulrf

^

and

SI,

^

SL&

is also

"

the affixed pronouns

;

perhaps thou ;" JLd

J^

and

J^;

or poetice

by chance."

perhaps,"

J*S

" all,"

as

L5

^

)

^J^,

^z ail(^

is

This

or

"change" thus, Jl

1

$tf?Ox-

L& "only,"

and

"difference;"

,

^LJ^

3

jf^j

is

,

it

is

used

also

and

"not otherwise;" etc.

^ Lij "far from/' " much

"above.'

This word

less," etc.

is liable

we made respecting &u

and 3?* "before," "prior

preceding,

the accusative case of

"solely;" compounded of uJ andkii (^.).

remarks as those >

d*j

It is equivalent to

?S*Ox

Lai, ^\ Li?,

jy and

is

signifying

then indeclinable, like ^OS

This adverb receives u " C&*J perhaps I ;

u=^" This adverb and is only employed

also Jisjc, cAj^?

"except," "besides."

adverbially;

"from

perhaps you."

always accompanied by a negation ; with a verb having a future signification. " our word never."

the noun JI1

^ ^

"

is

Jl

principally."

used,

" Jc.

above

^

"over," "above;"

above ;"

"

"

1*1*) X

to."

subject to similar rules.

in front of one's

eyes,"

0^

to the

same

(q*v.}>

This word, like the

L3 "before," "right

diminutive of

^o

"

a

little

before." 22

OF ADVERBS,

170

"

5

jj,

jo3

jjS,

"certainly/

?

sometimes."

This word

IB

Before the aorist it indicates a usually prefixed to verbs. or event ; sometimes It Is equivapresent or future action lent to U|J (q&*\

OX^lXwXO^^^

any time." This particle is used a negation, and with a verb In the only In company with U literally "I saw Mm not at any preterite; as LS S^VJ

y, y,

kS, kS,

" time/*

i.e.

J^

of,

or

at

laS,

If a future time

1 never saw him."

TOJ!

is

spoken

must be used.

'

"as If" (comp. of cjT and "thus," "so" ). "as if," "according to" l^ and (from cKand Ul <3i3ix

U

x

(comp. of

^ *^

tj>>*

K

"

UK "

U

or

^ and

U). ^

"

how

much. ?" (comp. of

o

5

u/ and J1 .)

assuredly not" (In reply to a question).

"

every time that," n "

.

wherefore

"

7

as often as/

"

how often

soever."

how many ?"

how much ? "

3

u/and

?

"

"

how V n

"

U12

any how."

This prefix, as an adverb, has "been already described

under the preposition J 3

?

,

"no/ "not/ "not

It is a negation

not"

at all," "is

"

applied to a future action or event.

3$

necessarily;"

y>8

" undoubtedly."

J "no," "not;" to

the

aorist ?

to

the preterite texwo.

It

applied absolutely.

wMoh UJ,

It

and

then 2,

gives

"why?

the

Is

prefixed

souse

7*

(comp,

of

of

the

OF ADVBKBS.

U

J and U.)

prep.

denotes

it

conjunction

(from

JJ

"when,"

As a

and U) "not yet."

"after," or "after that,"

posteaquam.

"

" no,"

ji

" or

ij>

it shall

and

U

if,"

and the negative

&U ^1

This admits the affixed pronouns

present."

;

wish (or would to God) I had been a

"I

asj^ <J man."

U,

know

as

It also denotes "whilst,"

not."

Ci. eLJio

U

explained

its

pronominal application.

^

as long as I

"when?"

U J^

^ " C "with," ""

p, 'fi

"as long as;"

as often as," t

fa

or

^

used, in confirming

statement

bravo!"

be

thus,

"We have already

alive."

"whenever." "

together with,"

or

U^i

remain

U "I

^M

an adverb, denotes "no," "not;" as "

"

particles

wish" (Latin utmam), "would to God that!" "I wish (or would to God) that Mu-

hammad were

free

"

.

3 "I $j\.

and ^1 ,

$

Both of these adverbs are com-

"unless."

Ujf

and

not be that."

pounded of the conjunction ^ i

It is a comp. of

a future signification.

restricts it to literally

It is always prefixed to the aorist,

not."

along with."

as long as."

"

"

"

very well,"

yes,"

what another person has

aifirmative

"well done!"

even so

It is

whether the

said,

also

denotes

It is placed before the

nomina-

or

negative.

It

OF ADVEUBS.

172

noun has the

tlvo case if the

when

the accusative

?J

well done

It is properly

!

f

i^ "ho alone ;"

^ and L^OJ. li

an

"

and approbation,

bravo !"

interjection (q.v.).

This word always requires an affixed pronoun;

&Lj. thus,

and before

not so restricted.

it is

admiration particle denoting

^a "

article prefixed,

l&l^ "she

alone."

Adverbs of admiration

"behold!" "souse

!"

"

or reproach.

This, with the affixed

catch!"

^ o

the signification of pronoun of the second person, has

"

take."

The

affixed

JumsM*, as *\,

pronoun changes, however, then

p^ ^^5

Cy\i,

frli,

?

u

!

ullfe

(fern.);

into

according to the variation

of gender and number, for d/lai "take thou" (maso.);

"take thou"

?>

tako,

you two/'


etc.

(See

Eosenmuller.) iifli

a

maso.

HOC hero!

55

"bdholdl"

jiJli fern, nearly

"there he equivalent to our expressions,

is 3

??

and

eccola. is;" or the Italian eccofo and " whether ?" An interrogative adverb, an

^

X

k and L

" x

whether x

and _d

and

&

??

**

&/<<"

JJA

?

;

or

9'

**

is it

^ yx

^^

not ?

??

a

,,

a

?

there she

num ?

well done !"

,*

"come on!"

"hero," "in tMs place."

//

T

t

approaoli!"

From

this adverb

in the same manner other demonstrative adverbs arc formed, as demonstrative pronouns;

as

dAii, uJ3&> "

there,

in

at a distance; ^l speaking of things hero,"^ in^speaking "from this place;" of things at hand,

& ^

173

OF CONJUNCTIONS.

Uy& and

" \jyJ

\&>

see there

!

" " behold !"

uH^j ^-^^j <-i^ and

Iji,

cLolk

?

;

these adverbs are em-

ployed in invocation and speaking to ; they are more properly interjections used when calling to a person; as "hallo!" " " " hark

come hither

you

1

This particle

l.

!

strictly speaking,

is,

an

interjection used

signify warning, encouraging or admiration.

to

\j

{fj\

same import.

are nearly of the

indifferently to

what

remote or near

is

;

They

(&]

are

\j

and

applied

and are followed by

the nominative case. Conjunctions.

with conjunctions as with adverbs, they are to be best learned by the Dictionary ; but a few of the most 196. It

is

common may be here enumerated. H.

This

is

compounded of the conjunction "

and the negative adverb

J

it is

;

N

8

"

written thus,

5U1

"if not;" (Latin)

that

nisi,

$

"that,"

not ;" with the prefixed particle

may

it

not."

(French) "si non."

s *\

an interrogative

in the second

member $

tion beginning this, or

with

an

particle

?

num

? necne ?

It is

used

of an interrogative sentence or proposi-

\;

^

thus,

Jt

OS

X'

/ 0/2

*MAa> c^lsl

hast thou said

not?"

U1 a particle used at the commencement of a clause or " " " " notwithsentence nevertheless," however," but," ;

standing.^

174

OP CONJUNCTIONS.

a U). "

followed

i

"

either Zaid or 5

that/

<^> u* *

as

*st

u-^i

by

&j

*

^

Amru

|

" ?

;

%J

know

(I

& ^;*U

and

there came to

.

not which,).

used both with the aorist and the preterite ; Oxx s * Oxx' T i it -r i*'" ?? I wish that I may write .

k^

;

that

^

(comp. of

are equivalent to our expressions

i

^;i

"1 wonder

?

"but"

"if,"

or ;" thus,

either,"

me

&J

"or," "or else;"

^

thou hast written."

immediately followed by a noun. the affixed pronoun I]

is

t

\

^^

used when

It is often written with

the purpose of which addition

is

remoye the influence of the conjunction^ which would

to

otherwise require the accusative case after

it

as it is one of

the hundred gorcming words.

^

"if indeed/'

"

if at

and by contraction

J\t

any time." This conjunction comes before

^U

when

the subject of a preposition,

that subject

is

placed

before the yerb ? and adds energy to the expression.

It is

also written 2l, as is

done with

from the inseparable particle are formed the words ^ll and

Li.

This

speaking

it

may also be -etc*

is

?

and

for the

same reason

;

joined to this conjunction,

?

" fti,

signifying

and indeed."

one of tho inseparable conjunctions-

corresponds to out conjunction occasionally translated

Generally

a

??

and;

but

it

"now," "for," "so then,"

It is often redundant^ particularly at the beginning^ of

aenteneeSj as

Holy

jjj

SJl

is

Soripturop,

mry

often the

cae

in our rersion of the

It is also frequently prefixed to the im-

175

OF CONJUNCTIONS.

in tliat instance perative and

it

generally marks the passage

with a peculiar emphasis.

^"or," "or "

LyJ? ^{/^

else," "unless," "until;" thus,

beat thee, unless thou wilt repent." verily, I will

*$ "as

if,"

"even

as," "just as."

J$. // "in order that;" S' with the negative adverb as

used in the same sense and S<"S S<"S " becomes L and *L&^ lest, "so is

S, it

not"

The form J&

^3 and ^f "but."

is

used only before

nouns and pronouns. "

"

j It

"if,"

occasionally

not?" Cjlff

"if not," "unless,"

although;"

The

especially in the

signifies,

affixed pronouns

U uJ^

c^Jil^

"

were

may

W, "sinon."

"

Kur,an,

be joined to

also

why

it;

as

not for thee the world had

it

not been created." *,

His

IB also

to our conaiective

closely akin to

an inseparable conjunction, corresponding

"a#d;" sometimes

to

means "but."

It is


The general

used instead of the other.

them seems

it

be as follows

to connect words; as

\^r

j

:

\j>

distinction

the conjunction J

"by

is

between

employed

land and by sea."

It is

used also in connecting the various clauses of a sentence to the Same nominative provided each elaiise ha& referenof case.

If a

new nominative appears

seen in the following stat

fafele

:

tli

w

used, as

may be

OF

170

INTBttJECTIONfcJ.

9s,*

s ss

ox

p

,J

AJJ

l

^

l

"

A negro on

And

(fa)

L^^CJ'

a certain day took off

And

?

And

and (wa) he self

tL5Cwxa3

he

(fa)

said,

came by a

(fa) there

^ -

ljj&

^1

JU

3

garments and (wa)

it

certain

such a one

said to him?

snow; but (wa)

the

XS !

may become man of sense>

peradventure I

for (fa) truly it is possible that

;

Ms

S

?

with snow whito.

-

take up snow, and (wa) to rub his body with it. it was said to him why do yon rub yonr body

to

began

L JUi ? ^1V X^Ox Ox OO^ OO^x

!

torment not your-

yonr body

may

will not (thereby) lose

blacken

its

(own)

blackness*"

Interjections.

197.

^

our words 4^i\,

and

A an

interjection expressive of pain, etc., like

"ah!" "oh!" "alas!" "pish!" "tush!"

ujlj clit,

t-Jl

?

tliij

and

U1

;

all

these words are ex-

such as out pressive of aversion or disgust

"foh!" "fie!"

"away!" ft,

a*,

also *T ?

and

All these are expressive of " ah !" like our (neafly the same as ^), *7 or

$.

paia and sorrow, etc, " " alas I" woe unto me I" " \l

ah I"

"

alas !"

This exclamation

may be

followed

by

177

OF INTERJECTIONS.

nominative case

tlie

instead the syllable

*1

When two

1

Sfljj'S

or,

;

,

omitting the nunation or simply

\

SSj

,

\j,

it

or

may

\j

take ,

or

nouns in constrnction follow, the syllable x "*

^JL

added to the

is

last;

as

*ll>J

*lc.

"alas the boy or

Ij

slave of Zaid!"

" ^Jjj

as

aj

"

alas !"

x ox

This

is

sometimes used disjunctively ; x ^^ -^

"

Jjj

"

woe

to

^, d^,

"

\7

him !"

to

woe

rj^

woe !"

me !" quick!"

u

or conjoined, clSljj

^

or

cL^

woe

u ooipe

to thee !"

on!" "this

way!" corresponds to our interjection

lj

dressing.

It is

used before the nominative case of proper names

and nouns without the " Jdjj (jSt

t

lj

is

used in calling or ad-

Wazir

!"

employed

article; thus, Juj U

Zaid !"

(

67.)

Before nouns having the article prefixed " U" man " as Js^J 1

;

"

^

!

T

S E

On 198.

more

1

In this Section

extensive*'

u i\fl

employ the term Noun in

1

and

thai which

is

Participles.

is

^

A

S O f\

noun (jpx^j

derivative

^ "a

"floflh;" f

?

primitive noun,

not derived from any other word

or verb, such as

a horses"

A

its

Snbstantives

comprehending

sigiiificailon

Adjectives, Tnfiuitives,

whether noun

I.

Derivation
llw

2ul4~ "solid/'

N V

I

?

lion;"

.

is

that which

is

derived from another word (verb or nonn) by means of one ?

or

more of the

^i "ho opened ;" "

190.

We

^L

Horvilo letter^ wuoh as

a

Jix-sU

"a

1

have already stated

arc Be ven in number,

viz. ? \,

CJ

is

uwl

(or

The

.

3

u? J3 and

^5,

all

servile alifin tlio

beginning and likewise in u "ho greater/' from

at the

?

Immm

a horse. 55

^w, ^

J),

the interior of a word; as in 'J&'\ a was great;" ^j^ negligence/ from It IB also usod at the

u

48) that the servile letters

(

included in the technical word \^lcj formation of nouns

a key/' from

place abounding in lions/' from

horso/ from J^i

little

a

end of a word

?

^

^

"he

neglected."

and represented by

of prolongation; as in preeodexl by an aMf 57 c< "Ixo was great {}r flwuidour," from

^

r

^j

The

ON THE DERIVATION AND FORMATION OF NOUNS.

c^

servile

and

is

at the

employed

179

both, at the beginning, in the interior,

end of a word (in this SO-- u

latter case it is represented s

s 9s

prolongation," from JU? (for Jjt) "it " " he knew or confession," from ^J^ lengthened;" uJV^j,

byi);

J^k>

thus,

confessed," etc.

The It

letter <j^

peculiar only to verbal nouns and participles of the

is

and always preceded by

;

*-

and followed by c^ as in the words It^acut

^

took pity."

never serves alone in the formation of a nonn.

ninth derived formation

^ ^

"he

cu^j "mercy," from l^J

;

"

f

The "

u/JiJU

letter * is servile at the

"

a

extracting," and

sometimes, but rarely,

it

the same as

is

^j^ "he went

beginning of a word; as

Mameluke," from

L

is

both from root

extractor,"

a slave,"

J\ which

or *

s S S

^ykw* "an forth."

1

LjCLi

"

he possessed;"

added at the end of a word as " a son." The servile ^ is used ;

^

as the second letter of a derived noun, the first being in

that case either

\

or * as in the verbal

of verbs of the sixth formation;

"he

from ^x

word, as in letter j is

^$

cut short;"

it

noun and

participle

thus, cAka^ "severance,"

serves also at the end of a

"pardon," from Jjb "he forgave."

employed only in the interior of a word

"acceptance," from jll "he accepted."

The

;

as

letter

The

^5 ^

fet

used both in the interior and at the end of a word, as in " "a dog;" a little dog,"; from "solar,"

&

"the sun;" employed from j^J

at the

" it

beginning of a word

gushed out."

^JU

sometimes, but very rarely, J

as

"

c^y

it

is

a fountain,"

NOUN OF TIME AND WAGE,

180

NOUNS DERIVED FROM VERBAL BOOTS

Of

200.

those,

grammarians reckon eight

L

The Abstract Verbal 'Noun or

of

Agency

Infinitive.

or Present Participle Active.

3,

viz.:

classes,

The Noun

2,

The Noun ex-

pressive of tho Patient, that is the Participle Passive.

The 'Noun

Noun

of

Time and

of Unity.

Intensity

any further tho triliteral

Noun

7.

Of the

.

Place.

Noun

5.

of Specification.

we need

three classes

first

of Instrument,

Noun

8.

"Wo gave a table of the Infinitives 105 5 and the formation verbal root in ;

Adivo and

is

Puwsivo,

6.

of

not here take

notice.

the Participles,

4.

of of

abundantly obvious

from the various pumdigiiLS given in Sections III, and IV. of Time and Place

The noun expressive

201.

by

verb,

^

*^*9 L>? un( l *'?

which

it

(Jumna

bour

place? of

cj/ ^* 1

;

is

final

i';

tore

triliteral

severally prefixed to the persons of

unchanged

changed 3

labour/ "

of the aorisl be fafha, or

in the

into failm

from

jl&d

noun

;

thus,

"he

of time

and

3xvt>

place,

the time

labours" or "will

la-

or ptoco of boating," from cly^i "he beats" u " ? a school;" 4*-^ tlto P laco of ritin S/

^ mc)

or "will beat;"

we may

of the time and place of an

If tho penult vowel

kasrfy they remain

and

^UjH *^U

substituting * in place of the initial servile letters

that tense.

if

j

formed from tho aoriRt of the primitive

i

action,

^\LA\

w

iiirUwir observe that these nuunff of place take the

an

of burial," lj*& "place

"the piaeo of Him-rising; ??

fjlL*

"a

"a deep B."

cemetery ;" &j&*

place/'

"a

cavern;"

"a tower;"

hence,

NOUN OF TIME AND PLACE, a

181

In the quadriliteral or derivative formations the noun of time and place is exactly the same as the a minaret."

participle passive.

There are twelve nouns of place formed by converting the

a.

damma

of the aorist, not into fatfia, but into kasra,

place where camels are slaughtered
elbow rests

;"

O /

"

&js^

viz.,

"the

j^sz*

a place on which the "

mosque

;

S

(^

/

Li^*

"

"the place of residence/'

^,W^

"the place of

^A*

J^J-* '

;

the place of adoration, a

place where a thing falls;"

habitation;"

"

"

rising," '''the east;"

"a

jik* "the

"the place of

place of rising (of a heavenly body) ;" Cj>jC*

the

setting,"

"the west;" ^jyU "the place on the head where the hair divides;" s " " " the place of breathul^i^ the place where a plant grows ; jjku '

^

""

7

"the

&

^^

y

ing,"

<;"

(_Lu^ and^l^ "the '

nostril;'

place where a camel

<-

Of these

sacrificed."

and

C^*

twelve^ however^ Isr^^*,

indifferently take /#z$# or

may

and^rcu may, *

b.

Nouns

^^^> tor^

jlk*,

is

j^,

as the vowel of

s o/

the second syllable;

vowel of the

SOX

r~

initial

x

S

irregularly, take kasra as the ^

thus^u or^u

>,

"

the place of sacrifice."

of time and place derived from a simile verb, whose

first

kasra for the second radical, and the j is ^ have always " time preserved, even when dropped in the aorist ; thus, j^i " he promised ;" of which the aorist and place of promise/ from jij

radical

is

,

3

is

A^J; so from

^^

"he

deposited" (aorist j-^);

^fy* "place

and time of depositing." f.

The noun of time and place derived from concave verbs

whose second radical in the aorisihas either fatfya or damma,

by substituting an alifinwi in place of the second

radical,

(

is

151),

formed

and by carry-

NOtN OF

182

iisg

to tlic first radical llizfatka

from *U "ho stood"

which had belonged formed lljU

is

(aorist

ptfi),

second radical of the aorist has kasra for thus,

change;

"ho

JC

its

;

thus,

;

**.

for

If the

undergoes a

it

vowel,

ravelled" (aorist jf ^J)

i

second

to the

"the place

j,^

1

where one travels/ (L

Nouns of

and place sometimes assume the termination

iiixw

u as

i~;

J^*

"acoTDotury 1

?

*'.,

<.

Nouns of

o

"

-

1',

as tU)^t

toi'(itl*(r,

i'^A,*

,,

v'j

and place

Uin<j

they

differ in

nothing from the

from

place of revolution;'

u

isL

formed

returning;" BO from of prayer/*

ilorlvcul

etc,

from

"an

name

luLt,

IB

"luj returned/'

uly^

^^

"place " tlio

JL^

IwknMwnlr-^tSl

w/'

"hornet,"

or time of

time and place

are

arc-

of the forms

Ll,

U\*^, or

Ibnncui like tho nouns of time and place

(lifFnrtviLOti,

^>-

00

+*\.

of tlu* iiiHtruin^rii employed in tho

i-hat

tho noun of Instrument has

^^ "

opened;'

"the

^^l*

oratory/

for ite initial servile^ 1

by

1

of an action

Tluy

formed

aorist of ^Jcl< JMIMJVC

Nouns oxi>iwsiw

witli tluB

aorist passive,

of the patient, or the participle

^

porfomiaiico

f[uadrilitoral roots, or

formed Irom the

JLS "ho prayed/'

AV>?w/

202.

damma

ilo place of meeting/' "the confluence of two

from cX^Ji

rivers;"

the time and

'

"ft revolved,"

^r/^ 1

IB

"

for llio initial lucromciital letups of that tense, so that

lima from

passive;

',<' o

L< lor tej&~+,

?

from derivative forimilioua, are mil>Htiluthig ^

the cast;" i'U^.

Occasionally the middle radical takes

place of pasturing.' instead

;"

r

;

time,

"ahahuico," from

a kcy??? from

"ho woighod

t^ ?? ;

i

183

NOUN OP UNITY.

^ "he

"a broom," from ment employed the seeds,"

'

?(j

J^

in cleaning cotton," from

"he

extracted

etc.

There are a few nouns of this class of the forms <3xL> an d

a. 1

swept;" ,-ls^ "an iron instru-

' '

fi^f

?


;

as

Jjku "a

sieve/' from.

f

J^kr

instrument with which flax or cotton

sifted;"

beaten/' from

is

?

S>

"he

j<x*

jj*5

"an

"he

has

beaten, thumped, or pounded."

b.

Some nouns

*Uaj

as

"

of instrument are formed

means

the instrument or

^

pearls;"

LU^.

**

"a

^

o^

needle;"

of

"a

on the measure "

adorning/' awl."

saddler's

several other forms of rare occurrence mentioned

a string of

There are

by Dr. Lumsden,

p. 311. oJ^-O

Noun

f

O

*

of Unity

203. This species of nonn denotes one solitary action or GS

'

event, and it dispenses with the use of the adjective J*x&^j which might be otherwise reqnisite. It is formed from the 3

infinitive of the primitive triliteral verb,

the form
;

the

always of

f^J "one single victory;" <SjJJ "one In the derivative formations and quadri-

the nonn of unity

infinitive;

is

as

single beating." literals

and

is

formed by simply adding

"one

as 1>-\^J\

?

extraction/

to

S

and aisy-^j

"one revolution."

In the case of verbs of the second

derivative formation,

whose

the,

infinitive

itself

infinitives already

end in

S

,

numeral Sx^V5 by the S s <s s l^>^ IA&.J "one solitary

accompanied

**

forms the noun of unity; thus act of mercy."

The same

?

rule applies to all such infinitives

or INTENSITY,

jx'otrjsr

as

assume

for a termination;

i'

act of raising tip," from

as

l'& " one

i'l^lj

solitary

third formation of I is

^lil,

"he

stood up."

$/ Specification--*

$

*J\

\

,

204. This kind of noun servos to specify what of a person with regard to a particular act, as

"ho

excels in writing

??

.u

;

^~y>;

excels -in defending or conquering." '

form

so

It

xO

dlLti

UteralH

and in the

;

it

differs

in

ite

nature

adjective or Bubstnntivo.

person

who

may be

means "an

^Uu^ "very it

out-

used either as an

adjective

a substantive

it

is

equivalent

beautiful j" cIjU^

serves

to indicate a

follows as a trade or profcssion ? whatever action

or condition is expressed

a

hut

;

thuB, cfjal^ denotes simply

;

it

As an

to the miporlativo degree; as

As

just

It is

^j&.

noun of agency

uttorn H fUlsohood," but <~j\&>

"very liberal"

quaclri-

&

of the measure

in

given intensity to the expression

From

"he

of the

is

and in

?

*-

closoly akin to the present participle^ or

liar."

^

say

no wise from the noun of unity

206. This flpocios of noun

and-out

^

invariably

i

"ono who

asserted

when we

J^u

derivatives formations

of

it

is

by the

primitive root; thus jCc s ?

"

*z*

a baker," from

^L

*'*

"ho baked;"

jy

oarpontor;" tC
(

a tailor/'

ole.

in like

manncr

?

j\esr

^

a

185

NOUN OF SINGULARITY. NOUNS DERIVED FROM SUBSTANTIVES

are not nearly so

Nouns derived from substantives

206.

.

numerous in Arabic as those derived from verbs. be comprised under four 2.

Noun

tive

classes, viz., 1.

of Singularity,

Noun

3.

Noun

They may

of Abundance.

of Capacity.

Diminu-

4.

Nouns.

Noun of Abundance i^3 207.

Nouns

+J\

\

.

which things abound, nouns of time and place both in form and

indicating the place in

are nearly allied to

G ^^^

Sssiss

are of the measures i*jl and J*i* They .SVx-0 X " and ****** a place in which there are many

in signification. ixx

such as lions,"

O

i'juA*

.

both of which signify "a " a cucumber;" of cucumbers," from i\ft5

derived from 3Jl and

lion;" *bJU

&U* "a J^ax^

^

"a

field

^1

place where wolves abound," from <jLjj

"a

place

famed

for

many victories," fromjl^

o/ Singularity

^^ ^

\

*J\

"a wolf;" " victory."

.

This species of noun is formed from a primitive substantive by suppressing the nunation, and then adding 208.

the termination *~.

It denotes a single portion or a single

individual out of a whole genus

such portions;

thus from ff

-"

x

^J

single straw;" from u^JbJ

"

which

consists of several

"straw,"

is ,

gold," comes

formed x a

*u

"a



j

a grain or

"the genus pigeon," comes It is formed in an analogous

small bit of gold;" from j*U^ &


single pigeon."

to the

noun

necessarily on th<3

of unity, as to its termination, but not

same measure, 24

ADJECTIVES DELIIVET* FROM VERBAL ROOTS,

186

Noun of 209* 1 call

" tills

**a.

j

species

a

Noun

of Capacity," from

want

It denotes tlie vessel, case, or sheath, etc.,

of u better term,

"a in which things arc contained or collected; thus, u "a needle case," from milk;" milk-pail," from CJh**

JJ^

jU

Syt J

"a

be observed that this noun

It will

noodle."

of the

is

&

measure a the

They both

202,

by having

lirst

diiih*

fatwu an

flu*

Noun of Instrument, Noun of Time and Place

fonn of the

from the

vowel of tbe

initial servile

and

*,

fallui for UK*, iiwldlo radical. PU^ T

7 /w DimiuutiM JNoun

From

210.

putting

fjfffiwm

diphthong a

^-

noun bo

tho fonn

tluw,

a oort)iou,"

BO

;

If Iho pritnitiv
"

!

J

*

1

is

formed,

by

over the first radical and by inserting the botwocMri tho nooond and third; thus irom

a man,"

D4l;

^ '*<S

^1. x

uoxum the diminutive

J^j "a little maw " u a hillock" mountain," ^4"

^j or

trilitonii

"<*,*

jLaJI >

or

from u

t&r "a Mll

small mountain."

<|uacMlitoKil tho diminutive

4^*

" ll

If tho primitive

1^

??

Hoorpion," from

trilitcral is of A'

"

is

of

4/^

tho feminine

Li thuB diminutivo is of tho form gcuidor, a a little sun" or "a mock sun;" "Iho Rini," iilJ, *' u a a small tract of land," earth" or land," l^jl tluj

;

frmn V^rb^l

211 both of

?

Jiools*

In addition to tho Participles Active and Passive tlia

of primary verb, and

its

derivative formations,

ADJECTIVES DERIVED FROM VEKBAL ROOTS.

187

there are several other descriptions of verbal adjectives chiefly

derived from neuter verbs? the principal of which are the

lowing:!.

)

"

^1^-

as ulJl*

;

from ^1&-.

fair,"

"

3

from cLJt*.

difficult/ 3.

J*jj

asj^i

fol-

,US; as

2.

"cold," fromJ^sL.

These are chiefly derived from neuter verbs of the measure 3*3 (aorist

$y).

i>^>y^

.flrofx-

J^;

.

4.

as jyic

as

)tJ;

n


^-

Ix^*

x>x

8.

fs^'

^Jill

,x

^*

as '^il

;

expressive of colour are

a

""

as

J^3; U

*

from

?

crooked/

o

,ff

?^?

as

1)^5

1

jt

~

6.

fromyt.

forgiving/

"a martyr/' from x 7 x

"sacred," from

^V^l

n

qa?

brave

^.

5?

from

3

Adjectives

generally of this form;

as

^L\

f

5

The form j^\

to denote

also

"red/ fromJI^l. employed the comparative and superlative degrees, as we have already stated in 81 and 82. 9. ^Sil and ^fe; as ^U>jJ "re"

gretful," from. l(jj;

"

^b^c a,

is

^llc

careless/'

from

^Jil.

10.

5

naked/ from

Many

measures

verbal adjectives, or as

^*j

and

^j-*

an active or a passive

some

call

them

participles, of the

derived from active verbs

may

signification.

Adjectives of the following measures,

212.

have either

viz.,

sometimes of an energetic or intensive sigmAeatioa a very boastful/' etc.

;

thus?

j^

a.*

We

stated,

intensive verbal profession,

etc.

805, that the measure ^JU5 represents both an adjective

As an

and a substantive indicating trade adjective

it

sometimes

suppresses

or,

the

ADJECTIVES DERIVED PROM SUBSTANTIVES.

188

mlnation and adds the termination

*

,

even when applied to mas-

Ss"Gs

online nouns; as
increment adds

this

still

According to De Sacy

further to the intensity of the adjective,

Adjectives derived

Substantives,

from

we may

21 3, From nouns substantive are derived what in

terms

general

Eelative

call

3

"nation," "locality," "sect/

nunation or

etc., "by

rejecting the

vowel of the substantive and adding

u^L* "Egyptian," fromj^ orJlL* "Egypt;"

thus,

"of

final

3

"race/

of

expressive

Adjectives,

or relating to

"man,"

\

"

{j^\

Shiraz;"

"earthly," from

a. If the substantive

ends in

i

^

"earth."

ji

or

5

human," from

the relative adjective

is

formed

Sf

and substituting J^r; thus from ^ * " of or relating to Mecca;" formed ^C*

rejecting these terminations

by SJ-QS

&*

"the city of Mecca/' ?<-'o

S

from ak^L? "nature," comes

so

triliteral

the ff

is

>

'

^

"s

^^>

If the primitive

"natural."

as the vowel of its middle radical ,

changed into fatfya in the relative adjective ; thus from 5 x"* " " the liver/' is formed Jk^ hepatic." pertaining to the liver/*

same "

X-

noun should have kasra

<*>

is

**

If the

jSrst

vowels,

it is

X

*

and second radicals should each have kasra for their optional in the second radical to retain the kasra, or

change the same into fatfya

;

thus from

jM

"a

'

camel/'

is

formed

~

"Jjl

or /Ujl "relating to the camel/'

have kasra> and the second

If the

first

fatlia, for their vowels,

radical should

ihofatfya

may *' the

optionally remain, or be changed into Kasra; thus from cL-^ $ ^ ^ or "of or belonging to the grape/' are formed either

J^e

grape,"

^^

189

FORMATION OP THE BROKEN ^LTJBALS,

i.

Relative adjectives formed from substantives of the measures

and
^

the

change the kasra of the second radical into fatlia and reject " ai1 island," comes thus from that follows J^Jsr x'jj*?

;

"

if

insular;"

nouns of these measures however

surd verbs, no such modification takes place ^ <&LJi~l

was necessary," comes the substantive

"

thus from ^j^

;

x

formed from

"be

"

"

truth

;

it

and thence

S"

Belative adjectives formed from proper "truthful," & <"? s^s? of the measures J+x* and
,*&>* " X

thus from JfcSJI

"

"

Sr

name

of

an Arab

tribe/'

^^

comes & x

"

names word ;

a Kuraishite

"

r"

of the Kuraish tribe;" so from Jj*kto "the name of the & x^ " In a follower of Hudhail/ founder of a certain sect," comes J^A& or

a

man

?

some words, however, which makes

this modification is optional, as in the ease of

or

formed by adding the termination a so J^ ; as Ji^^r corporeal," from ^Uc^ the body;" ^.Ijy " "illumined (divinely)," light." Adjectives of this kind c.

Some

relative adjectives arc

^

fromjjjf

are said to be used only in a metaphorical, theological, or spiritual i*

words

sense, for in the ordinary sense of the

employed. irregular

some

Finally,

manner c<

;

relative adjectives are

thus from Z/j

"

s*

t*

and

^^^r

^9

formed in a very

the capital of Persian Irak,"

is

a native of Khai ;" such was the celebrated physician

formed

JkjVj

known

in mediaeval

Europe as Bhosis.

From ^la^k

"

the

name of a

i ^"

province in Persia,"

"

are

LJ^

is

formed the relative adjective 4,^^

the city and province of Herat," comes

^W^

"

a

man

;

so

from

f &

of Herat."

Formation of the Urofaen 214.

We wry

cursorily alluded to this important part of

FORMATION OE THE BROKEN PLURALS.

190

58 and

Arabic Grammar, IE

"We now proceed

59.

to fulfil

our promise there given of entering into a more minute detail of

the subject

when we should have

arrived at the proper

would have been utterly absurd to have embarrassed the student at an early period of his proIt

place for so doing.

gross,

with matters which he was no ways then qualified

The

understand.

following portion of this Section

translated from Koflonmiillor,

1$

to

chiefly

always subjected to additions

and improvements from the more copious works

De Sacy

of

and Lumsrton. *

*t

X-> ?

O

**

&xi and

i*i

measure

which are the

,

SxO

J*i\

thus,

;

',XO#

*,*{>

pi^;

groat,"

Ijy*

(for

present/*

4?)

210. 27#

.3ju

and u

*!**

as

;

3

as

J^

xLji

3

be formed

(for

1.

^J).

from singular

?

and whoso

triliteral root

It also applies to such measures

defective

?

?

having

#

pillar,"

pi olc

book"

t)l.

t

;

or g? for thoit last radical

"

J

2.

^ throne," pi

^

^1

;

;

thus,

**

"*

U a leaf of a $" S measures the of From nouns ?

f

L^r**

$

4^ iP L^ u a shlp

book/ pi if

^

formed

is

also

J^i provided they do not come from

?

roots, that is roots

Lk " a

Plurals of

A ^x

nouns of the measures JUi and JUi neither surd nor defective.

pi.

"very

a town or village,"

ajyi

tho board,"

MmwBt J x

j8if(jwc?

may

*^Ox

'*

Is

pi ^Jar;

a form or figure," pi Jr*.

*<S,

5

^

s*s?

9

tS?

5^Ox

from the measures

s

it

^c "a a

feminities of adjectives of the

9

occurrence, though of rare AX/

this Bpecias,

J)

formed from the singulars

IB

,

9

")
pi.

$

The First Meamre^ J*5

21 5.

??

pi

5

<^^

FOBMATION OF THE BBOKEN PLUBALS. a

and &*i; as^*j

^

"the

a leopard,"

pl.^

fruit of the date tree/' pl.^uj

;

]From verbal

?

"a monitor," pL

not a passive signification; as^JJ ^^^ pi. .-^

3.

,

^

lion," pi.

and Jj*5 provided they have

adjectives of the measures J*

"patient,"

"a

ju>\

;

191

^3J

;

.

217. The Third Measure, J^j t

is

,

applicable to masculine A-xOx

,*.

adjectives of the measure Jjul and to their feminines *iUi ? pro-

vided they be not of the comparative or superlative degree ; .ffO ^ X red " and A~-x-C,

<*>'

pi.

;

(mase.

218. The Fourth Measure, J*j, applies to singular nouns S3

/*<-

of the measure

1*3

;

S *

as SL*

X

^ ,x-0

?

a coin,' pL uJX^ ; Tx tfxO " a maxim," pL
^

temple or church," pL

^

;

"

a

x

'

219. 2%^ Fifth Measure, ^Ui, applies to singulars of the Q

<Js

5 o/

5-0

A

.svox

>>v

i^0^>

fft;

X

J, J, J, J ii, and IUi as js? "th.e sea," pi. Jli:; % an arrow," pi. ^lij ^j " a spear," S'^ & -i?x a man," pL Jl^yj ^oS a a dish or pl. ^U,; J^ saucer," a a note," pL I pi. U; ie/ "a short Sletter," 2. It ^* " measures

}

;

;

**

*

'

'

'

It

Is,. ">

SV^x-

applies to the measures J*i

and IUs, provided they ba not " derived from a surd or defective root ; thus a mounjl^ u ?

JUr; x

tain," pl.

ls^

the neck," pi **

to the adjectives of the

they

be JTx-

fern.

not x

^y

of

a

passive 5-

pl.

3

*

measures J**i and

" noble,"

44;^

x

signification;

r^

It applies

-

x

L*i, provided thus,

y

uJ^,

4*

It applies

t-jy*l, "^

to

such

FORMATION OF THE BROKEN PLUKALS*

192

xox

f

adjectives,

measures

the

have

as

Sss^s

fern.

^4*3,

ijJUi

or

;

x

S,

pL

&1U

fern-

^lUi 5

IljJ;

JoCL>.

5.

.

^^^

and-

(J*a<+~

it

Finally,

and

^u^

thus,

;

"loan (from

starvation)," pi.

**"

it

measure 4>U;

tlic

"penitent,"

many nouns of f agency or

applies to

if

verbal adjectives of


thus, y>-b*

"a mer-

to a camel), pi chant," pi/sr; JfcU 'thirsty" (applied only

$&$

2%0

220,

*t

Measure,

^"

"i

O?

*

t*

]3^ xx

applies to substantives of

5

V

',

Ji, Jxi and

the measures jii, Jxi,

X

Jjsi

?

;

of tuo rarely, to adjectives

5^j?SC

sea," pl*jy%

5

"

pL dp^; Ll "a

"a

lftl

"witnosBj"

;

^^

molar tooth/ pi

lion,"

pi

from Irregulars; thus

pL

"the IjS

as^^ "the

<^ a an army,"

r and

liver," pi. 1,2;

we may add

these

"weeping,"

"kneeling," pi

;

O x

1

^;

5^, To Ljftj

iff

measure J^U '*^^i>O^ 7

tt

u^r4

and sometimes, X

>S

though

jQ.

^j

pi,

and

a few

^

(for

tr for

221, 2%$ Seventh und Kiyhth Measures, J*3 and JUi apply ?

to verbal adjectives of tlio tneaBiiroH

x

(fern,)

from imporfiset roots

deprived provided tlioy be not * * ,

J^U and

***

.*'

)>

*

^

;

iicU, thus,

"

a writer," pi. Mid u--J^ judge," pi *&,&>-; * ** * " x ' ^ ^ " for L-JU a ; wmbatant," pi ilji (for t/jU) jU

^U- "a r

tf *

cljb^

;

,^

^

**

**

^4^ pL ul^i; " '" "a fomalo camel that *

4** j"

pi

Jfi*

According

to

masculine belongs exoluaively to &<"

222, The Ninth

Do

is

<

'

turned *

'

Sacy, tho measure JUi

mum,

f

iUi

,

in

applicable to such veibal

198

FORMATION OF THE BROKEN" PLURALS.

have the measure JgU when applied to rational

adjectives as

beings,

,

and not coming from a defective root; "

fect," pi.

112;

"

A few

innocent," pi. J^/.

somewhat irregular;

are

"

J^

per-

5

standing erect/

^SU

as

pi.

lyS; jb (forjjb)

words derived from infirm roots

or

more

" follow the rules of permutation SS" 5V x A*-J for <^b pl.

thus, ^Jb

;

they

strictly speaking,

one

who

sells,"

.

223- The Tenth Measure,
when

to verbal adjectives

of the measure

"a

applicable to rational beings,

JxU formed from a \\

warrior," pl.

"a Kadi

J&

|>);

(for

defective root

;

and

^

thus,

or judge,"

'* / *"'\ pl. *LaJ (for
fi

x

224.

The Eleventh Measure^ Uje

is

?

formed from sub-

s 0?

*

/

measure J*3 and also from a few *">' & P SO " a J> as and bear," pl. Lj$ ; Jx; having the measures J*i a J? jj"a husband or wife," conjux, pl. j/ ajug, pL stantives singular of the t?

?

L,S

;

^;

an 225. 2%^ Twelfth Measure, lie S O*

A Ox

5 xx

the measures J*s, J*i,

"

a bull," pL

aa branch,"

|j^f Jl

a

IJ

;

a boy,"

u

j(Ji

aa

pl.

^1^

J^;

brother," pl.

thus,

Uc;

^

^y

S^M

a gazelle or antelope,

a slave," pi ?xo

youth, boy, or lad,"

x

J^, JUi? Jbu, and

J? (for ji*)

Kli;

applies to substantives of

t

a pl.

,

xx

6

5'

pl.

a (

a

KM

KOKMATION OF THE BROKEN PLURALS,

4

J2(l

The Thirteenth Measure^ J*^, applies to substantives & xx

5 Ox

of Iho measure J*i

and sometimes to

;

,

measures J*i,

tlio

c*

J,

and

o x

or

is _j

^5

^

thus,

Jji (for

pi.

i^f **

"a

"the J^y ^

(for Jill);

pi.

-^

jI=H

hill," pi.

,S

j

jb "a

;

"

U*

;

bucket,"

a

S "a

J^-J;

foot," pi.

ox

staff," pi.

bolt (of a

S R,*

" door)

"the face,"

jlsj-

'jbi);

>

.&

""

whose medial letter

provided they come not from a root t "i

u

J,

It

pL JiSU

?

is

feminine sub-

also applicable to

and

atautives of four lottery not ending in S-^ s

of -which

6 ^

the penult

1,

^

or

"the arm/' pi

^jj

It IB further applicable^

nu^asures

several

to

proscription^

thxts,

^^U

pi

oath,"

^; ^^*-

"*

^AJ "an

sjtii;

by

an inert

is ^

*

01.

i

from those

different

above indieutod, and even to nliigulars corning from concave xx 9<J t,

a

roots;

^

PS

5.^.

"the cyo,"

*

"alum,"

"

'J\

pi.

;


*"

%

&

j>

^J(- ^

pi.

Jb

"the day,"

a UOUHC,"

xi llurlcmth Maestire, JUil,

pi.

pi.

J^.

is

applicable,

^\;

,

227. 27

and of

substantives of throo loiters

seldom totho moamiro j*i, or

^

" ruin," pi.

thus, )*.

;

tliS; pi.

tinlcss its

J?1

"a

jlCi

;

^U*; JJ.J "a

date," pi.

pi.

tbuH,

Cl;

when

.

8,

JJ "an pjj

"

its

2-

C>V-

"a

elephant," pi.

the shoulder,"

pi.

^

day,"

pi.

It is applied,

Ifc

J$

(for

though

;

J;

be

_,,

when

<JU

letter

^,

medial consonant

or diphthong (as already indicated), or _,;

middle

cl^

To

moasuros, though

camol,"pl. JUT (for jCi'f);

the iu(wuro jll,

is

all

1.

<
yc

"

is

aPPlicaWo to

is

a long vowel

its initial letter

JC

"

a sword,"

cL^' "time,"

rarely, to

tho

pi.

measure

EOEMATIOH OE THE BROKEN PLURALS. x

S

x

S* 3

;

pure/

thus^lt

,

-*

jl^M; also to verbal adjectives

pi.

x

S

of the measure J*

provided they be not of a passive sig-

X

t

195

>

*.

o

"

3

nificatlon; as cJ^-i

"noble/

pi. ,

f%0 Fifteenth Measure,
228*

nouns of four

"a

as jH3

letters,

*

and always

?

^

jx

,

pL

6

i o

or

j,

^

or defective root

XX

thus

;

?

,'*

(for rfU^U); S

U

"a

u

*\^\ *

_^

o.*

To

1.

inert ;

is an 5V

ah-

LSI " (for x

pi.

x

uJ-^ "a cake," "acracknell,"

Jj^cl;

nouns

X

whose measures are JUi and JUi Ss

,

It is especially applicable to singular

2.

iii,U

1

so pronounced,

6x OS

^);5> j^"apillar,"pL c$

is

"God," which

"ail

S"x

^x^S

applicable,

the penult of which

necklace," pi. sllst;

breviation of *^

is

if

?

derived from a surd

a priest or

Tmam

" ?

p

5x0?

short tunic or vest/' pi. LJ\.

229. ;J%0 Sixteenth Jkfoasure, S

of the measures

"

?

J^l^

x

5"

JcU and JxU

&' x

J$^ isx applicable to nouns " the sea shore/ pi thus, J^U x / 4ff

3

;

/

a signet-ring, ?? pL *$y^*

jfU.

;

x x

It is also applicable

'

St

to substantives x

**-x

and lcU

pL

x-

^rx

thus,

;

X

x

and adjectives feminine of the measures Xl&U ia^U

^xxjjxx ^1^ ,U

"

lightning accompanied with thunder/

"a female companion/

;

5

^^x'xx

3

pi.

"the hole of the jerboa/' pi Ji 230* 2%^ Seventeenth Measure^ jSUi ? X

is

upplicablo to sub-

Btantivos singular feminine, consisting of four consonants, of

which the third 1,

j ? or

vowel

(

is

one of the

letters

of prolongation, YUS.,

each preceded by its homogeneous short a the north wind/' pi 80, #,); thus, JUA

^,

inortj,

FORMATION OF THE BROKEN PLURALS,

190 y

f>

x

an old woman," pi jksP same rule applies

Tlio

SSloJ. x

SO x

S

**

S>

"

"

4^^

;

a species of poem," pi

to feminine substantives of tlie

ff

aamo measure, x x

*

"but 5> /

S^

adding S~ at the end; as

-"

pL u-Jls-S

ajjjs*

"an

old

""

wonder or rarity," pi

woman,"

pi.

x

9

;

x

*"

x

j?

x"

&U- " a cloud," ^xx^rx^L+& "a jSLs^

x-

^SsP-. x

231. The Eighteenth Measure^ ^^tj, belongs to substantiTes J

x?

A

xx

5x/

JUi, JUS, and Jx5; likewise

singular of the measures

5 o

ff

& o

x

some nouns of the immures J*i, J*s / ^

rivod from concave roots; an ^lc

^UU J^ "a ga^ellcj ;

pi ^C>.

"

tU

;

a

a crown,"

1>1.

and JcU, wlien do-

3

a youth,"

"a

slave,"

a

or antelope,"

to

x

5

pi Jtyi; ciyThis plural

Jjl?qe*

pL

a fish," is also

admit of other measures; applicable to a few Bitigulaw that *

as

*

Jft

^

*

*X ''i

1

(for jd.1)

brother," pi, ^jp-^5 <(

pl^llrfj

L.1

wall," pi.

ylk^

(for

iy9

a handmaid,"

of the moasiiros J*J, J*l, xo

5 xx

^

db "a

^liLoj ciiko,"

a region,,"

pi ^UlJ.

moaswe

^^

pi.

<
y unS

W W>

'b

!^

^^

aft

.

2S2. 2%
i*

^

(

"a

JUi

,

applies to substantives

and Jyjj; UB

uJJL.

a province/' pi

"a

^^

roof," pi. A

*x*VF ;

x

<-irfj

a

It also applies to a few wordn of the

when used

a concave root; as J^jU

siil)stantivoly ?

a

and not derived from

a horseman," pi ^uji.

28S, fie Twentieth Measure,

^

,

is

applied to adjectives

mawuline, of the measuro ^*3, not having a passive senso;

FORMATION OP THE BROKEN PLURALS.

and

few of the measure

to a

or defective root, &

and

j^ll

S

A-XX-P

"a

man/

poor

"a poet/ 5

9

pi. *]/i

" X ^^

*-xx^

a prince/ 3 pi

which admit of

x

4?

*^ x

;

j^U

a suc-

There are a few other

*uL^..

them derived even from a

singular nouns, some of root,

"

S-

*|^.

makes the plural

cessor/

5

^^

;

The masculine word &-U*

7

pi.

not derived from a concave

significant of a rational being; thus,

x jti

197

defective

kind of plural.

this

234. The Twenty-first Measure^ *LJl, applies to singulars

measure

of the

whose root thus,

pL

u

"

a friend/'

*-*>**+-

for ^ll^f);

*s

Pr*ne*P a-^y peculiar

^

"a

one "beloved/'

rich man/' pi.

derived from perfect roots

;

nouns of

&

Jcli,

Jji, and J^1

"

5

wounds/ x

f

x?j>C.^

^3, 5"xO$

S x

x

"

*

when they X O X

wounded,"

pi. xox

perishing/'

pi.

L5

this

measure ^x

,,^/r; ^

J[

also to

rarely,

are expressive of

pain,"

XO X

X

"slain," pi. .1*3;

Jrf^

V

The same

Jlfc.

**

?^

C3L

applies to adjectives

3,

general (of "body or mind);"

"injuries in

"

a friend/'

sincere," pi.

thus, j^ju>

and sometimes, though

?

(contracted

"

x

235. 5%^ Twenty-second Measure, of the measure

pi. *U>.\

*u2; 5^

5"

:

%

*.&

It occasionally applies to

*Ujl.

to those

a surd verb, or a concave, or a defective

is

x


^"^

)*?*>

plural applies

,&

as X

uJ3U

also

to

^ X OX

C-X

verbal adjectives of the measure ^Li; xox 9 x o x x Ox

thus,

.

pL jj^; 236,

^V^

2%

3

angry/ pi

Twenty-third Measure^

**

to substantives

This

^US.

<*.xtx

applicable

of the measures )U3, .^Ui, and S

singular^

is xOx

198

FOEMATIOH OF THE

BBOKEJST PLUEALS.

also to adjectives feminine of the measures *kj "-

X0

"

"a

thus, ^s-*

plain," or xx

virgin," pi. 4^! ie x XG

"a

desert," pi.

" grjai

;

"pregnant,"

to the

;

"the decision of a judge," Xx-

:

"a ^3^ xx pi.

^.to

;

**"*"

pi.

T%0 Twenty-fourth Measure,

first place,

1*3

^xo "

cyUr* X

y* c"''

J?

237*

and

x ^

same

^JUJ,

class of substantives *-,- <*

as the preceding; thus,

S

in

applies,

and adjectives s s^

a

a virgin," pi ^jos. y^Ox xOX " as

^is

the

2nd.

J?

ftl

To

adjectives of the measure

pi.

L^K^.

In

JL^;

^lyC

this case the first letter of the plural "^

take

damma

instead of faiha /

The

right. X

or

?

j3 t

adjective

x X

^JS"

thus,

^,iU

5

sin/

L^lLs are "both ^

x<_

JL

in the plural

?

pi

i^

x x

Uk^

.

few singulars of the measures 5

may

1

4^1C and

may have

Twenty-fifth Measure,

a

X X/

Lastly, it applies to feminines of the form ^^ x x a from a defective root ; as a gift," pL bl /

"

^t

;

xoy

XX

^JU^-

coming

x

5

intoxicated/

a slave,"

warrior,"

pi

239,

37A?

5^

jH/JUj,

pi 51i; jl^ "an

^

is

?

applicable to

and JcU

j^

ass," pi.

;

;

a

thus,

jU "a

ft

J7>t/

*/

Twenty$wth Measure^ U^u, is of very rare occurrence, and belongs to a few singulars of the measure Ox 5

J

,#0x

;

thus,

Jju i?xo/ /

5-xO^^

a husband/

47

?

pi.

ilyo *

^

Ic

;

u

a paternal

'

unclo," pi.

240, 2%
w

applicable to a

FOEMATION OF THE BROKEN PLTOALS. S *s

few singulars of the measures Sx x 5

stone/

&

thus,

;

x

*?

?x

pi J>1^ L^-^U "a companion./' to "be met with. ;

Is

6

*>

and J^U

J

190

pi.

x

.x

^^

u

a

x

iU=^

also

;

The Twenty-eighth Measure^ J*j, applies to a few .-xx jyxcx *rxc s s a a singulars of the measures 1*3, aLUi, and JxU ; thus, Ms*. 241,

x-

,5

pL jil

ring,"

;

pj "a

pL j

pulley,"

;

"

^Jjlt

one

who

5

seeks/ pL 242.

We

now

proceed to describe the "broken plurals of

words consisting of four or more consonants, which wo 58 c and d* They are diTided by cursorily mentioned in ?

grammarians into three

classes

of measures, which,

when

added to the preceding twenty-eight? furnish in all thirtyone species of broken plurals as formerly stated, 58 ? a. 243. XX

The Twenty -ninth Measure^ J3Ui (j*U\, J^Uj ? and X

The riliteral

first

plural of these measures applies to quad-

nouns, the consonants of which are

all

radical;

of

1

5"

course the servile final thus,

i*

The other

"a

5

frog/

pi.

does not here count as a letter

colL; ^Ls "a bridge/'

;

pL^Us.

three measures apply respectively to quadriliterals

formed from counting),

S

triliteral roots (the terminatioipi $

by

^xat^v*^ jjU; Ju^

prefixing

1

,

c^,' or ^

"experience,"

living/' "victuals,"

pi.

thus ^pl /xx|j?x^

;

c^l^r;

pi r

244. The Thirtieth

aa before not

a

xx

Memwe^ JJUi

x

JLi^

a finger," pL ^

moans of

FORMATION

200

THE BROKEN PLURALS.

01?

This measure applies to singular nouns of which the penult is a letter of consisting of five Ietters a a sultan or emperor/' pi. ^L>; as J^L prolongation; J*fiGb,

and jlc$.

3

3

S

"a

\Lj (forjG<j) 3

" pi.

"

JjjUS

Ip5

;

a buffalo/'

a source or fountain head/'

(s*#&r

pi.

245. 27^ Thirty-first is

disciple," pi.

HJj

a preceptor,"

L$ and

pi.

more

especially

%U; ^J "an

^

"a

or" Circassian,"

"

is

suppress'^

s'

S

x

l^ii'

;

a pMlosopher,"

not a letter of prolongation

U~>\

"

^

a bishop,"

1^-;

pi-

^

1,^;

^^

recommended

My object

pi.

"Georgian ;

"aSclavonian,^pl.S

a native or inhabitant of Bagdad,"

the learner is

pi.

""^

ujSU

Emperor, Cesar, Kaisor^or Czar;"

Mauritanian," pi.

/ ot?

and

;

whether substan-

to foreign words,

For a more detailed account of

Sacy.

by

i-jU and i'^U

11^"; uJ^i-i

tiyes or relative adjectives; thus

De

a

etc. (as above).

'^

a

*>

a.

"

and by adding the termina*

"

which the penult

applies **

S^U;

;

more This measure belongs also to nouns of four or

.

letters of

and

^ll.>

P oor >" PL I

Measure^\^^^\^\^

of prolongation,

thus, "jU

tionJ^-;

it

^

s'Vc.i

<+

pi.

S^

\

pi.

a modification of the preceding measure^

ing the penult

"a

"

pl*^j^'

picture/'

This

pl^JUa; JM:O "a lamp,"

dinar/' denarius,

pi.

this portion of

Arabic

to peruse the -works of

Grammar

Lnmsdon and

has been to observe a middle course botveen

and the mcagrenoss of Bichardthe profoseness of these great masters, son and Stewart.

201

THE PLUEAL OF THE PLUKAL*

The Plural of the Plural246.

An

additional plural is sometimes formed from the

broken plurals of

which

triliterals ?

S

$ bs

"a

<_*!

plural;" thus,

dog,"

90^

plural of the plural L-J^l; so

formed the from

Sj

pi. j{&>\

(for

;

o

from j\^

7

pi.

a finger nail,"

comes the a

of the

pi.

'$

pL j^U

It

.

?

IB *-

the pl.^Jiy

;

(for i^xft),

<x>j

ffs *

a bracelet/' s>

from that again the

and thence the

that, the pi, of

and from

x

;

the pi of the

?

^jJ) "the hand/

and thence ^obl

u

fromyte

'

'<;-$.

u

?<->".

c-J^i,

pi.

st

f

&

called

is

"

and pL 5^1, *

may be

observed

that the plurals of the plural agree in measure with those of quadriliteral

243, 244 and 245.

and quinquiliteral nouns,

?

Broken plurals sometimes form an additional regular plural S"x x " in cbl an epistle/' is formed the broken plural ; thus, from
jy

,

lection of letters;" so

the pi. of the plural

De

from

L^J "

t>l5^

"

t^j

a house," pi.

a cluster of houses."

Sacy, these plurals can be employed only

when

,

and thence

According

to

number

is

the

undetermined, and above nine.

b.

"

Sometimes a dual

is

formed from a broken plural

a principle," or "foundation" (of a science),

pi.

;

thus,

?%

ff

J^>\ x

;

and thence

formed (what we may call "the dual of the plural'O^^ which "

is

fit

signifies

the principles of the two sciences/' viz., Theology and Jurisprudence, r

247. "We stated briefly,

58

3

5,

that

have more than one species of plural

;

many Arabic nouns

the student must 5ZC

THE PLURAL OE THE

202

PLXTRAIi.

howoyer, conclude that they are all used indiscriminately. In this case he must be guided entirely by prescription or

For example, on examining carefully the preceding thirty-one measures of broken plurals, he will find that no

custom*

*

fewer than nine of them? 5*

5

x-oS

s

xcj?

>

^

5*

J^

viz.,

?

& 9?

Sss

Jj*i,

iUj

Ss

?

O

*?

yo

J**'?


?-?

and <0yts are applicable to singulars whose JUit, M^e? J*5 3 **'' "We may here further state that the plurals measure is J*i ?

,

of paucity/ 58

to in

viz., 2,

?

We

?

from three to

noticed in

The

irregularly.

number

are applied only to a

things, ranging a.

measures 12th 13th, 14th, and 15th, alluded

5

of persons or

ten, both inclusive.

08* e 9 a few words that formed their plural

fact

that

is

several

of these

irregular plurals .fji

If "a mother,"

are derived from singulars no longer in use; thus, i

has for pi.

its

43l

The word

JL*^\, apparently from 1^1

plural

?$t from fJ "

^<

il!i\

ii

;

f"Ci

"water/' 9

a

woman/

pi,

has for

;

p

"the mouth,"

^\^\ and SU^, as t't' 7^

its

plural J

UJ

,

if

S^i*3

,


all

or

of which

"

come from a

different root,

The word ^UJl ^ i,

a

human

1

has the pi. feeing in general/

<*

U*

from i

^ xo

a

man"

and "

t

^yj jy

x

JwUl and contracted yud

.

203

SECTION

VII.

SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE, SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, AND PRONOUNS. Analysis of Sentences, 248. In the preceding Sections syllables,

letters,

wo have

treated of the

Wo

and words of the Arabic language.

most important part of our work the construction of sentences,, or in other words ? the rules for speak-

now come

to the

?

ing and writing the language correctly*

taken for granted that the student ordinary terms of grammar, and various parts of speech another.

It is

(common

w

is

"Wo have

all

along

acquainted with the

able to distinguish the

to all languages)

probable, however, that lie

may

from

onto

not have

turned his attention to the analysis of sentences, which ought to

form a preliminary step to the Syntax of ovcay foreign

On

tongue.

this account^

we

request his attention to the

following general, or rather universal principles of

an acquaintance with which will enable

more a,~

fully

A

agent;

"Fire

Mm

to

comprehend some of the rules which wo are about to state*

simple sentence consists of three parts, viz* , s nominative or a verb; and an attribute, predicate, or complement; **

is

hot;"

Fire consumes

wood"

In the

first

Urns,

sentence*

Jiw

204 is

ANALYSIS OP SENTENCES.

the nominative, or subject of affirmation

that which

affirmed of the subject, fire

is

wood/ fire wood is the

is

is

the attribute, or

and the verb

Again, in the sentence

to express the affirmation. 1

;

hot

;

the nominative, or agent, consumes

" is

is

serves

Fire consumes

the verb, and

Frequently a simple sentence " as winds blow ;" "ships consists in appearance of only two words " " winds are blowing," which expressions arc equivalent to sail ; object or

complement.

;

"ships are

must

It

sailing."

appears, then, that the

shortest sentence

consist of three words, expressed or understood;

be found that the longest

is

Fur the sake of illustration

and HO more.

sentence from the Letters of Jraiius, offered to a great or

and

will*

it

always reducible to three distinct parts

good man

\

let us take the following

" viz,,

An

naturally excites

unmerited outrage 1

some emotions of

resentment even in hearts that have the least esteem for virtue." " In this sentence the verb is naturally excites ;" what precedes the verb,

/;.

is

the nominative

and what follows

;

Although every simple sentence

is

a general parts, yet it is riot easy to find

it, is

the complement,

reducible to three distinct

term that

will accurately

When

apply to each individual part with the exception of the verb. the sentence parts

may

attribute

by

;

is

expressed by means of

"

and complement

as

;

" object is

A

as

;

may

be called nominative, verb,

When

active or transitive, the parts are agent,

is

Zaid purchased a horse/*

Lastly,

when

means of a passive verb, the three parts " a liorse was purchased by Zaid." and agent as

expressed by

nominative, verb,


to be," the three

Zaid went from Mecca to Isfahan."

the verb of the sentence

sentence

"

be called the nominative or subject, the verb, and the " Zaid is diligent," When the sentence is expressed thus,

any other neuter verb, the parts

verb, and

the verb

compound

the are

;

sentence, or period, consists of two or

more simple

sentences connected by a conjunction, expressed or understood

;

thus,

ARRANGEMENT OF "WORDS IN A SENTENCE. " Knowledge to

the

mind with

entertaining views

a perpetual series of gratifications;

it

fills

fills

with complacency,

it

and administers

gives ease to solitude;

it

a public station with suitable abilities

;

205

and,

;

when

it is

adds lustre to such as are possessed of

mixed It

it."

will be a useful exercise for the student to analyze, by himself, the above compound sentence which consists of five simple sentences, in ;

all

of which, knowledge, or its substitute

it, is

the nominative.

The

two clauses make but one simple sentence, for they amount " Knowledge, mixed with complacency, adds lustre merely to this to such as are possessed of it." last

:

249.

The leading

principles of Arabic Syntax do not differ

upon the whole, from those that prevail European languages. with

As

in our

a general rule

own and

other

the verb agrees

nominative in number, gender, and person; the adjective agrees with its substantive in number, gender, and its

and the relative agrees in number and gender with antecedent. There are, however, in the Arabic case

;

its

language,

some exceptions to the preceding general principles, together with many idiomatic peculiarities which may startle the European student, whose notions of grammar are derived from the languages of ancient Greece and Borne. Arrangement of

250. "We have just shewn sists of

Words

the

(

in a Sentence,

248, a) that a

WEten*

con-*

three distinct parts; and the attentive ^tedent will

find on examination that there are

abfc

^ays of arranging

In Arabic prose compositions, the general rule thqse parts. is to put the verb first, then the nominative, and lastly the complement; thus,

pi

S?J

JJ* "Zaid struck

?

Amru, ?>

ARRANGEMENTS OP WORDS IN A SENTENCE.

206

So in the followmg sentences, -'

said to

Ms

35

son.

^

<1>^1

J).

^Ht

God

the beginning oljJo

>"

""*

viz. 5 x x

t3

*jj8 .^j ^ ^Q

41

cu^UJi

j

the

created

JlJ >"

jU.

1

^ x c*O

1xJt

Lnkman

^ a ln

heayens and the earth." to

one substantive governs another in the

genitive case the governing word comes

u

"

^Qi ^/ x

"Zaid came from Isfahan

*^r

*jj

When

Baghdad."

tiS rtO

o


love of the world;"

first;

as IjllT JLJ1 " *

o^o <:

U^

listening unto wisdom."

In like manner a substantive precedes the adjective which " serves to qualify it as *J& cSS a great book ;" j^ j^Jf j>^T ;

a

tho sincere friend," #,

in case tcriiiiriations^ such as the Sanskrit,

Languages abounding

the Latin, and the Greek, admit of

ment above alluded

to

;

any of the

thus the simple sentence,

Pompey," which we cannot arrange with way,

may

in Latin be expressed, JJ

Pompeium Caesar;"

Csar. is

l?

vicit ;

"

Osesar vanquished

perspicuity, except in one

Csesar vicit

Pompeium,"

or

Csesar vicit," or

Pompeium

Tho Arabic

"Anns an

first

is

more

restricted in its

arrangement ; and

infer,

toiseach chruthaich

least affinity with

1

Dia na neamhan agus an talamh," Tho reader is

consider the two languages to have the

one another,

certain striking resemblances I hold to

I

m THE ARTICLE, c-

The

merely point out occasionally

between the two, as to arrangement

be purely accidental.

SYNTAX 251,

;

it

for

word with the Arabic,

for

however, that

and idiom, which

it

verse of Genesis (above quoted) runs thus in Gaelic:

which corresponds word not to

Osesar

Pompeium "Pompcdum vicit

a curious coincidence that the Gaelic exactly agrees with

example, the

is

"vicit Csesar Poinpeium/' or "vicit

"

lastly,

"

modes of arrange-

six

-

definite article J! of the

Arabic generally cor-

207

SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. responds in

use and application with the

its

For example, when, a substantive

Greek.

the article, and at the

o,

"

c^Wi

same time qualified by an

any) takes the article

the faithful," Afipa&p 6

ham

prefixed to

S<^0

a (J[wj&!

It is

The

TTIO-TO^

a proper

is

"

?

(*$}i\

article is

thus,

sects;

Abra-

always

*^'

*

o^Jl

the

(L^\ "the Arabians;"

"the Christians;"

the Persians."

^^\

thus,

;

names of peoples and

J}^\

Jews;"

A/3Xo9

f)

definite in its nature), its qualifying y

adjective (if

adjective,

the great (or valuable) book,"

name (and consequently

by

the article;

In like manner when the substantive

% afya.

of the

restricted

is

the adjective as well as the substantive takes thus, *Js*sT

TO

r/,

used also before singular nouns

a whole species ; as in the following express collectively & S 9 -"/O-P s ^< example J^s) ^^p' The dromedary is preferable to

^ j^

'

:

the cameL"

to

The

a.

article is

sometimes employed, as in German and French,

nstead of an affixed possessive pronoun,

mistaken trouble

" ;

thus,

S

S

sb

we

employed

"the prophet,"

"t-Sjl

x

^o

me, and

f (^^^MO^

^y

XCX'O/'

in my x-^O

j*H

<-**

other languages,

in

is

see JJUll

1

departed," J|j J|jJjJ^

9 tsSbs

^here

the possessor cannot be

thine absence thou hast troubled

By

my reason has

when

for

^lic

The

.

per antonomasiam,

o Trpfajry}?,

for

as

artfcle is also

in the

MnhanoPDaad ; *

'

i/,

?

)ook/

y fyfihos, for the Kur,an,

Finally, iio

_

smxsU

Is

wfl

mm

German and French before nonns denotito^ aa abeteact idea in * '

general, in which instances we s XC^-O s -^o-O s 9 s"Q ^o f 13 S 9

b

it

4-jlyi

1

J^aagr;

j

employ *t> Oracle to English; thus, " J^! b by activity the reward is '

*

t

208

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES,

not by slothfulness;" regions, etc.

it is

as
;

"

"Irak;" fllM

used before names of sciences, arts

also

"wisdom;"

Syria/' or

"

?

(

Li^\

government ;'

Damascus."

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES. Of 252,

the

The nominative

Nominative Case. case

Is

often employed at the

"be-

ginning of a sentence in an absolute sense, independently of

any grammatical construction with what amploj the sentence

"To God

heavens and upon the earth/' "^^

y^

^ -0

<*

J*jl\ ^LB j God? ) to

cj\jHll ^J

Mm

(is)

the earth ;

is

9S

9*, *"

U

^

aiM

Ps

P

(is) *

thus expressed in Arabic, literally,

"God,

in the heavens

(or, as to

and upon

"*

so,

^^ ^j M

Le.

"the prophet of God

??

among you/'

$>?

"belongs whatever is in the

S

whatever

Oj* S<*

For ex-

follows.

use of the nominative absolute

"As

to God, his prophet is is

is called

such a mode of construction

among

??

yon.

This

the Inchoative case,

by no means rare In our modern Anglo-Saxon, both English and Scotch, as in the following couplet from the exquisite ballad of "Auld 1

|jo^Ji;

is

EobinGray:" "

My Mart

it

But tho wind

a.

We

said nay, for 1 look'd for Jamie back ; it "blow high, and the sMp it was a wrack/*

mentioned (158, a) that the verb "to bo/'

in the present tense except when. Its omission

is

seldom

tased

might occasion an r>

"*

/w X

"Zaid Is learned;" L^
ambiguity; thus, "

3

boulxtifixl;

verb

IB entirely

1

omitted, and both the subject and attribute put in the

nominative case in the order described,

250,

In

many

instances

209

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES,

it is

thus we or

make

optional to

say J*\

may

j^i* HlJ

"

the subject precede the attribute or vice versa;


or

"
Muhammad Of

(is)

God

(is)

very great;" U*J

Jo^sr"

our prophet."

Genitive Case.

the

253. "When In Arabic two substantives are so combined that the

which we

may

is

indefinite in its signification, is re-

second, such a construction is called SS&\,

by the

stricted

is

which

first,

translate

"

state of

termed uJl^il "the regent;

The

regimen."

Ox 75

CJ-o

governed;" as

is

-

called ^" ^\X uJl**J! sor x

^

"the f

?

The governing word has very j?/-C-x

t/&~"

effect of

is

*

x

the wisdom of God; ?? ^U^Ls c^?u^

"the book of Solomon." quently the

x 7 Cv

a


word

and the second, which X 9

case, always put in the genitive ^0

first

$

an adjective ; as

\

u

lj

fre-

abundance

a

of sleep/' i.e. much sleep;" c^Will Jj^k "length of ex" ie. "long experience." Such is uniformly the periences5 construction of the

our words

to

governed

^UT J^ a.

Like )

feminine

men?"

is

"

J

"

"the a

all ?

7

totality/

"

all

which answers tho word

according as

singular or plural; thus 3

#^

J^ "everything;"

men. ??

are also construed the interrogative

" denoting

what ?

]^1 il "what

similar a?ule applies to the

gation;" for example,

"

^

every" or

-&s"

I>1

noun

"

"

which ?

woman ?

>?

3js

n (jwlS

I

pronoun /cf and

^t "what or which

1$ "for what reason f " 7

wordjlc signifying

jJLt^Js

"incroate;'*

the Wazlrs and Kadis and others besides

difference/ hence

Ife^

its

i'laaj^

^Tij^

them came/' 27-

j

A

"ne\Jl4"

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.

210

L

TIio

of

stato

regimen frequently expresses superiority or ex"

cellence in a snpeiiatiTO sense "

as

;


"When the governing word

things

1

the best of created

j*cL

an adjective the

is

latter is

sometimes restricted in its signification by the word governed; as " c-jll^ quick at calculation," instead of t^Uu^ %&L . j -/-* ^

*"

^

X

"*

S

^

"possessed of readiness at calculation;"

S

u^UUM Jj^i

S

"

violent in

'

chastising/' instead of

c^UU

Of

Wo

Case.

104) that every noun In Arabic may converted Into an adverb by "being put in the accusative

254* "be

ike Accusative

stated

The

eaBO,

(

In this language is frequently

accusative cu&o

used adverbially IE instances where the Latin would employ tho ablative, or tlio accusative with a preposition ; a ho perished of hunger/' mortuus est thus, lij>~ cjU a

fame] SjjDU

Uljfl

\yty*

do ye

days,"

per cerium

diemm

ticiple

with

accusative

the

during certain specified

fast

An

spatium*

adjective or par-

termination

frequently

cor-

$

responds with tho Latin gerund in do] as C^\J 1^ "he " ^ oats standing," came riding/ venit oguiiando l!w\J 3^^t 9

;

+

<&9

tjws^

X

xf^^p

9

?

OJ?

c^Ul y^al

,

enter the gate in adoration."

sative Is sometimes equivalent to the Latin

as

a Ccujt?

^?J^

wudicndum*

l struck

him

gerund in dmi\

?

pnr

with

m to;

rfisnoct to his

reason of/

"by ^OX/xO^X

??

thus

?

Uii

ad

et simple^ expresses

in Arabic the sense of the Latin quoad, to," or

accu-

for (the sake of) instruction,"

Finally, the accusative

"with respect

The

J^\.

M^

mind, or disposition,"

3

Isaac

a ".
he

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES, well disposed;"

Is


s

-$>s

xx Tx

x-

-3.

J^uJ jj*l^ i^Urfl

;

The

a.

6rod

a31 ^

LS^

to)

(hearts) are like

sometimes put before the sub-

is

9?^"$.

great (as

to hardness."

?

predicate in the accusative

Is

^ese

tr

more intense (than stones) as

or

s

dJ1

s

??

power

a

Lias

l^Sj

211

& x o y

xoti3-o

>-

^ -o

t,

Uk^s^ tjflj Jscdlj [He it is "the palin-tree and the corn-crop of which

ject; thus in the Kur,an vi. 42;

who hath brought x

JS"

jxL 3

*x

"}

d\

uJUjs^ in

variety of food;"

Is a / 99

there

forth]

:

"

^^

IJ^ll

where

??(^i

& x o


Uksr

SlfcS

^1^ u

[They

^5

they

may

9

jbil

XJ^lJJ.

as above ; the

Is

equivalent to

it

admonition

unto sport, their hearts

^^

is

<3utoU

equivalent to

In connection with quotations from the

N.B.

Eonian numerals indicate the

So

various."

listen not to the

turn

being taken up with delight;" where X"

is

the food (resulting) from which

of their Lord except that]

S

?

sllrat or cliaptor 5

Kur an ?

?

and the

Arabian figures, the ayat or verse. 58 effect

The present participle put In the accusative lias sometimes the of what in Latin is called the subjunctive mood which in ?

Arabic

" 45*

expressed

by

the preterite preceded

although/* "even

if/'

as In the following verse

x

Is

x x

x

UU- ^K U

-05^3

*U1

^ xx*

*U3

&

vSxx

x-

X

xO"-0

J^ UU jU

1

x

the conjunction

by

oSx

^ J^U y

^

from the llamasa: "verily, I will

wash away dishonour from me, even if the decree of God should draw upon me whatever it may draw;" where Qlp- (when It first x

""

x-

c/x

occurs) is equivalent to c-^icf- j^ x x 03^ & x ^x ox ^ xx # &

xxx

L^>-

\

l^uS ^l^

U

USl^

xys? &\j&

coveteth anything, his avarice leadeth

So in the following sentence x a;j

x

JU

him on

x

xx

U^

^^

<^C

to

it,

:

o x

^

whatever

"whoso it

may

be, foul or fair."

c.

In Arabic the accusative

Is

very frequently employed where wo

SYNTAX OP SUBSTANTIVES.

212

should use the nominative, as in the following verses" from the '' 0*' ' J?OXOO S ' S s-&si><j S ^y^^O Uo- uJj^lb Kiir/an, ii, 242: cjUlk^l^ "and **

^

^^\

g^

to the divorced (wives is due) a reasonable provision (according to

the husband's means)

incumbent on the pious

this is

;

where we

;"

&

see

l&5>-

Si~o


c

^

in the accusative. xx *$ s tv~a

aL*j LJUbJ

1

^

s

So

also in iv. 15, "

^ ?^

?

l^

should be more (brothers or

f

in the third part (of the estate) (equal) sharers &

from God;" where we see


the following

c x

"

and

if

:

there

than these (two) they shall be

sisters)

-O

x

^^Uy ^ u ^

c_*3 3

^3

we have

'<*&

l

;

this is

^ ^a^S

an ordinance

& -O

xx

#* x-

xx

5"x

x

1

I

used for
in Apposition,

255,

way in

"When one substantive

subjoined to another by

two are said

of description or designation, the

"

19

as in the Kur,an, xiv.

;

jj (

^

s 9 s

xxiv.

35

:

* P

L^JJ KjU*

lighted with the rule holds

xx-

oil

when

xOX

9 s

S^

9

j^ d^

ate half the cake/' literally,

a

(the lamp)

is

The Bame

*'

*" ,*-

f

^"^

confimatkm"

a

or

I

I ate the cake, the half of

it."

:

thus, **U3 (^jL^J

corroboration

the soul" or "solf," and to

^

them the

to the first substantive*

XX

^^\

first

\

rule also applies to certain, words added

having subjoined

So

\*

the second substantive defines the manner,

?

of

it

ail(l

poison." /

1 1

(

9

"

is)

\jpl}

of a blessed tree, the olivet

measurc or quantity^ of the

The same

"

^

*U

there shall be drinking of water (which in

be

to

and must agree in gender, number, and

5

apposition/

ease,

is

??

^

(SuSy) ? such as JuiJ

"the eye ?? or affixed

by way

" essence,"

pronoun appropriate

They thus become equivalent to the

Latin imc* wsa. and imum.

Thcv a^ree in render, number,

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.

213

and case with the leading substantives, the forms used

for

both dual and plural being JJuT and ^^-t, as may be seen in u the following examples: Ii5j 5Jj *If Zaid himself came;" * -t"' d T * ' *' VT ? '*" ' ^_ rr T i i Ji i""* V x 5 <wj \joj cuo'j I saw Zaid himself; 77 1$^ v^cjj ci> l>(

4

**

/

I

i

"Zainab herself came;" Ujllft ^J^ySl cLvVj "I saw the two princes themselves. 35 The words JJu and ^^ may also be put in apposition

after the affixed

lytj "I saw ' \\ ' S^' L-5u\ L^CJli Of

pronouns

which may

thyself,"

;

also

~

for

example,

be expressed

"5,

**?? w-OJ

a.

*

**

In a manner similar to the foregoing are used the words

or "universality," jl*>- denoting "totality," in general;" as <*&

"

the

tribe

1

((

*$!

the whole

stances the words

H,

"people

"the whole army came," "

literally,

so

all


l$l

"I saw

"I passed by

army came."

as also
it ;"

*j&\ c^-ol;

*J b ei/fpi X X

XX

*\J=>~

the whole of

army came, came;"

(jL*s!\

J and

the

\

cp^ li-

the whole

the multitude, all of them;"

women;" 4x*U

(jfc-jJt

*t>-

In order to express duality in such

fem.

as in the following examples

UK :

or

UiK

in-

"both," are employed; " j^ij 30 -s\^- both Zaid and lsi,

'Amru came;" U^J^ J^c^ |^c. L^O]^ "I saw both 'Amru and

\^^\ ^^j Fatima." When the

'Umar;" t*^I3^ Ma\^j **

both Zainab and

I

gave unto him as wives X

words

K

XX

and l^K precede the

substantives which they qualify they become indeclinable; GXX^ ^ X/OXO^ x^ " " I saw both thy brothers ; ujC^l liij cu^Vj u30^^

K

"

I

^

thus, ^ CXX-

cj^

passed by both thy sisters," JT

5.

To

the

9

f x o ^

word 3^ thus used in apposition, the words +^s>\ fem.

214

SYNTAX OE THE NUMERALS,

a>-,

together with their plurals

*Ji>-

fern.

^y^>-!

may

bo sub-

number, and case with the leading word; -VC-0 s S s

joined, agreeing in gender, ^

9s

j&9

^f^\

thus,

f

<&35US

*$&

&?"*

\

The word f^r\ thus Applied

(<

and

all the

angels did worship/'

not used in the dual, either masculine

is

or feminine*

The word ^u>*\ applied

c.

or

may

be accompanied

by one

of the following words, which are of the same signification,

all

viz*:

as above

jjufj,

^La>f ?

and

*\MJ, and jUs^; and

^e);

fern.

^JL,

are all used at the

^\

9

whose feminines are respectively, i\xu,

^*2>U

and

ami

f ;

xo

XC2

9

^\

*a*\

"the whole of the army came;" which

The

and

?

j-^, ^S, Sometimes these three words same time in addition to Ji4-i in, the order ob-

served in the following example

verbatim.

^of

their plurals niasc,

last three

j?

-

X

^

x o* '*'

y Ox>0 '*

^\ <^>~\ & (J^

it is

\

""

sUf

impossible to translate

words are very rarely used either singly or .*

in combination, except

when preceded by

J

and

SYNTAX OF THE NUMEEALS. Of 256*

We

have

"the

soon. (

Cardinal Numbers.

GO) that the cardinal numbers from

8 to 10 inclusive have this anomaly^ that

when they

refer

to a masculine noun they assume the feminine termination

$~ to

;

whereas the feminine nouns require tho same numerals

"be

i^Ji&.

AVxx

of the masculine form; thus, $JU tLlij

a

five daughters.'

noun

5

As

^J

"throe sons;"

adjectives they are placed

which they belong, and agree with
to

?

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS.

215

S then govern in the genitive ease s

thus ?

;

9

1XL

Jjbl

As a

"five months."

9^

"

L

+\l\ U

six days ;"

general rule the noun thus

-*v

governed by the numerals 3 to 10 must be a broken plural. The number

a.

txiT and

3^^

feminine.

The

object

one, as

first

numbered

is

form of each

not expressed

also

"

^^^ ^

t/^1 "oae

The forms iL^j and tives; thus,

H^lJ

5

uf^\

and Sx>.]J for the

^?^r ^ "no

there

was no one

of the

1\^^ are

fj^ "one

thus,

JI^-JS!

adjectives,

gender with the nouns which they represent;

"each one of these gulphs

(or bays);"

each one of these cities."

of them/'

"one

still

^ g^\j Jg J^ ^

^ls^ x&&

^JMO! *Wb

Ifi^-tJ

are also used in the sense of

They

O.-O

J*3T

Uu$ ^

"the other fc

" thus, 1j^-lJ ljo-V^ ^JU-

sl^y

1

*.*j>

^1.

p

distribution $.

repeated

individuality;

then, with regard to the

cow*

they came one by one."

The number

" two/'

is sufficiently

represented

terminations of the objects numbered;

"two ],

When

half."

o^

and used adverbially, they imply

5.

?

or "the one "in contrast with "the other;" thus Ju^lJM uJ^oill

"the one-half;"

sellors,

degree."

agreeing in

?

"one"

the

and follow their substan-

5^^ ^j3

object;"

They

"one of

Oo-T

women;" ^ilil "one

They may, however, be employed by themselves,

"

one (masc.)

(fern.)/'

o

govern a genitive case;

men;" *LJ1

expressed by the words &

used as a substantive when the

is

as di~1

;

is

69,

and by

for the masculine,

came unto me;" ^j^-\

may

we shewed,

degrees/'

by

thus, tJk>>j

the

mere dual

"two men;"

Sometimes the numeral "two/'

fern. ^ISJ,, "*

or ^l^j are employed as adjectives after nouns in the dual,

In such instances the numeral

"

two

"

appears to be redundant tet

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS.

210

adds more emphasis

it

perhaps c"*

s

*

\&\

*

o

?

S

c

c^

(&&~3) \jr^ L

where the numeral ^Jul

s

for

expression;

example^

a pair of each species/'

create(i

apparently superfluous.

The numerals 11

257.

"^ c

cr*^

is

the

to

99

to

?

"both inclusive,

govern the

substantive to which they refer In the accusative singular S jf

s

-0

&^y&

as

"eleven stars;"

Jolt

5

^Ls^

their multiples, govern the

1

OGO

3

a

a

ejiS

together with

?

three hundred

a thousand dinars;" jlio

tJj3!!

*

JA^

"a hundred so

men;"

X 0x xx-x

^

f

J^ U

the genitive singular; thus,

itjX men;" j4y ***"**

ninety-

jllj

nouns denoting the objects num.* * s

"bored, IE

a

^^-^

The numerals 100 and

nine sheep."

:

(^ff

4^1

.liuj "*

"^

"eleven thousand

SS-1

Numerals made up of decades and units, when they exceed 20, place the unite first and then the tens; u *j^ eighty-throe years" (literally, threethus, l^l^ dinars*"

^^J

and-eighty

noun expressive

is

is

ti*a

X

;POXX

^ye-u*^

1,

xO*^

f.

numbered

the

classes,

put after the

is

governed by the concluding numeral,

/ O

X

^l^**^

fi;li

two-and-twenty

composed of several

according to the rales already stated; j*x-X

"

u^

^/ty)

of the objects

number, and

total

VJli j

;

number

If a

dinars."

XO X

years)

J^XX

i^T SSU

X

1

-Ji

*O

^U^yi

for example,

thus, x-

O,v"

^^


O-*O

t/?7

X OX

1

a

^rf

be-

and the Deluge (there elapsed) 3,974 years," In Instances of this kind, however, tho substantive may be

tween the

llijra

repeated after each class of the numerals; as follows, s

o*

x ^xo

/

5 /***

/-

^

cS

y^^j ^b jW,i? ^^ X^XXjCXXx"^" uJil

Uj9 ^yUJj

/3S.

x


^oft,

^i^J^^t? ^-^ ^^

Tho revenue

x^

^*

o x

ljlj*ar*

viz., Oxop^o

jf-0

I*J

Jill

X

of Gharblya (a province of

Egypt,) isrcckoEod at 2,144,080 military dinars."

OF THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.

In order to express any large number, consisting of millions

a.

(or upwards), together with, hundreds, decades, }

it is

and units of thousands;

<ss

usual to repeat the wordt^sH after each class of the numerals Ull

j^yUj x

*

x^ iujl literally,

a

sv^s: ^

a

&Ujl

"

j

the

(S'XX^X

UJlS!

-j

amount of

it

U-c!1 uJiil

(is)

this,

dXuJ

;

thus,

U-Xlt) 4W4T>~ X*

9,584,264 dinars,"

"nine hundred thousand of thousands, and

five

hundred of

thousands, and four-and-eighty thousand, and two hundred, and four-

and-sixty dinars."

In expressing a number of thousands, ranging from three io

b.

*r

' s>

U

uJST

Js>~j

^ is

used In

"three thousand men."

"^

***

from 11

A

to

tlio

genitive plural 4^J3J; and

numbered follow the same in the genitive singular; P"'

the objects 9

ox

both inclusive, uJ!l

ten,

When

thus,

the thousuiidri range

*"-

99 (both inclusive) 4jSI

is

used in the accusative singular,

and the objects numbered in the genitive singular, as just stated; thus,

j

dinars."

L^\

yL*


20,000 Ibs.;" j\L* L^\]

l^ ^\ "11,000

"When the number of the thousands consists of a hundred & <"

or

any

used in the genitive singular, and the

multiple thereof tJll

is

numbered in the same

case, as

x

objects

"

Ox

above; thus,juj<j c^oH

'

iU

f s+

ej!0

300,000 dmars.

258.

Not only the cardinal numbers from throo

Inclusive (

may

to ten,

256), but also those of a higher denomination

employed In apposition to the nouns denoting the objects numbered, as may bo seen in the following example s ^ss*s\,*% +s *, o o^o~0 x x^^o ^-x^x 5"Sxo/^ fiLAjj <.#**} &&> ^jU IjUS Ula^ oU^Sl "be

:

L^ ^

"and he drew the net fishes,

to the land;

lo, It

one hundred and three-and-fiffcy. ??

J1 was

M*^

full of large

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS,

218 259.

When

a unmoral

is

employed

to

denote a certain

of a collection, or class, or -whole genus,

number out

it

is

usual to express the relation "between the numeral and the "from" or "out of; ?? class by means of the preposition " ?5 nine (men) out of the family for example kijf " u three birds from among the three birds" i.e.

^

^

:

j>

;

JjT^t

to be observed that the numeral genus bird." It is further with the objects num.in such instances, agrees in gender -v 0^,0 is" " 35 <3iS three sheep; "bored; thus, in the expression

^

^1

the numeral so

culine;

feminine

?

is

uT

^

because

the gender

is

j

added immediately

is ?

masis

If an epithet indicating

feminine.

is

genus

where eJj

eJ5 "three ducks;"

after the numeral, the latter 'I

xVO"*C

such epithet agrees in gender with u

as a

!

masculine because

;

thus,

^

f&\

*^C-O ^

three females of the genus sheep ;" kJl

5>

s<"

e^W eJ3

P^ 9sss

^ j/3

three

<31$

males from among the ducks,"

a.

as in the science of arithmetic, are

Numerals need abstractedly,

?

53

masculine form always put- in the half of six."

and the same

When

nouns of

tiros,

;

&#

Sxxx

O

t*i<w

"

tliree as the

fiSJ

different sexes are included

provided

immediately following

it,

extending from HI* to "

ton,

*'

^XX'J O'SC/'Xx' il

(

to

mo

under one

with the noun numeral, the latter agrees in gender the numeral denotes a number both inclusive

;

as

$*U

^

**&\

L^ ^

and [eight] female servant*/' (belong) eight slaves

If

we

be as follows hero reverse the objects numbered, the expression will ^ e ht handmaids and {eight] to mc ^ bo lo:Q 4^* J (J :

^ \J$

slaves,"

If the objects

numeral must bo added

'

^ %

numbered be under to

six,

then the appropriate

each of the two species,

219

OF THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.

When

b.

compound numerals above

the

apply to rational

ten

beings, they always take the masculine form, as in the following if-S

."X

^1^

examples:

>?

OX

\<+&

XX

1

XXC X

.X

O

slaves and [fifteen] female slaves ;"

me

belong

fifteen

"


j&s.

\

to

me

fifteen

belong

Ju^ *ij^r j&* ^^>~

female and [fifteen] male slaves."

male

^^ "

to

If the numerals

apply to irrational beings they take the gender of the nearest subif -"X X X O XX G X X-" X "
stantive

thus, &l5^ iUs>-

;

j&& <w*>-

there are in

<j$&*&

my posses-

sion (chez moi,) fifteen male camels and [fifteen] she-camels ^x xx 4s x 'S o -" x O x O

" or,

;

by

1

transposition,

and

[fifteen]

L*^ SU ^Lc

he-camels.

If,

a qualifying word such as

"

I

^^^c^ t^^f

^-

ave fifteen she-camels

however, in the case of irrational objects

^j U,

etc.,

interposes immediately after

the numerals, the latter are of the feminine form XXX XXxOX XX." OX XOX O

J^>-

<SUj

^U

Xj&^>

" is,

and the same construction holds, as

we

partly male and partly female;" to the

numerals

if

in this last

transpose the last two words and read

"seven years;" because

^

u

a year,"

& "three

So cjClIi.

singular.

is

feminine in the

baths," for the singular

masculine; and this rule holds "whea tto 3aanae of

the objects numbered

is

suppressed

jj}j

^^ ^^^ U

creatures) that

walk on four

example; n

what

^^

singular

is

:

The numerals agree in gender with that of the number of the objects numbered; thus,

260.

jiUcH

I possess fifteen camels,

u^*^ <-?^

between males and females/' that

expression

thus for example

;

"

-.

feminine.

, ^ So also

"Yerily, I beheld seven fat

as

in the following ,

"and among them (are (feet)," l-j "a foot/ being

1JL/

7

S',,x'iroxl|i

u^U

;

$%&

"^ |x l

^

4

^

Mne which 3

xxx

x

Cx

^

sevjen lean

x?

L5

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS.

220

word "kino"

"being

numbered are of a vague or general

nature,

devoured/ where ^.^ 5

Is

feminine, the

understood.

a,

"When the

such as

may

objects

apply to either sex, the

numeral agrees with the same

according to the grammatical gender of such objects. For example, " denote a person" or "individual," the the words JAST& and

^s

former being masculine and the latter feminine S

9SS**

>as^\

$515

f O

^ ,

hence they say

;

**'*'

"three persons/' where

<8XJ is

used in the masculine form f G

9

s-

ss

cji5 whether the objects be male or female. In like manner " " whether to females or throe persons" or individuals/' applicable (

males.

^\

however, another noun or epithet be added to sucb phrases

If,

num-

as the foregoing serving to indicate the real sex of the objects

bered, tho numeral will agree in gender with the

Gx

7

s

9 P

*

?

**s

tS3-

t"

^

word

or words

s

*

9

^

s ss

S

annexed; i}m*,jax*j (j^y^ *$* <^\ &-* LS^?> " and 1 had for a shield against those whom I feared two (young) 9 *s/

^V^

Here we

maidens and a (marriageable) woman." 9

is

^UsK

aiulJ^wJo

word

numbered than

male sex

ytSA

"soul,"

JJftJ

tiiiij

the

is

to

is

by

the

applicable only to females,

had more

to tho signification of the

grammatical gender; thus the

their strict

feminine; bat

numeral agrees with

"ilirco souls"

is qualified

is

each of which

Sometimes, however, fegard objects

see that eJ.5 fein,

y

used with ^j^sr^ masc. because the latter word

epithets

u^

it

when

the applied to persons of

in the masculine gender; thus,

(meaning males), because

in this instance

the same signification as J^uJ has r

b

If the

name

of the objects numbered be suppressed and

supplied by an epithet descriptive of in render with -the

noun understood

its ;

its

place

quality, the numeral agrees

thus in the Kur,an,

vi.

160

:

OP THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.

^

*U-

"he who

221

hath done a good (deed)

Here

shall receive (as his reward) ten (times) the equivalent thereof."

the numeral ^uJs the latter

is

is

is

feminine, although \$&*\

considered as a

mere

masculine; because

epithet of cbl^li. (plural of dllJL)

understood.

The

261.

cardinal

numbers may be

according to the rules

numeral

is

laid

by the article 1. "When the

restricted

251.

down,

used substantively in an abstract sense


/'the (number) three

When the name

is

thus,

;

half of the (number)

of the objects

numbered

six."

2.

stood,

having been previously expressed,

is

under-

and hence

"well

yb ^*lwJ! -!>y "and the seventy (disciples) returned with joy." 3. When the numeral is employed in

known;

as

apposition as an adjective after a definite noun ; for example * ^ ' " s O -"V" ilX^) \ ^r)\ the five men." 4. When the numerals from :

3 to 10 (both inclusive) precede the objects state of regimen, ia

which case the s-

*

""

fixed only to the latter; as Jls^jH

"the

trio

of men."

JL^ilM 2U5

uJLJ\

name

in a

article is generally pre-

" &N 9


the three

Occasionally, however,

takes the article as well as the as

numbered

men"

or

the numeral

of the objects

numbered

;

"the seven fundamental precepte of

the law."

a.

name

When

the numerals from 11 to 19 (both inclusive) precede the

of the objects numbered,

govern the

same

and as we already remarked,

in the accusative smgttlax, the article #

fixed to the first

member only

or to both; thus,

xo

S57,

may sbe

ss s

pre-

XGX

U^oyks ^i\

or

SYNTAX OF THE NHMKltALS.

222

^J'

*r

i?0 to IHt ibutli

h-

!

!

"the eleven clirhams;"

L^l ^

<SU

elusive),

*

when

numeral

the

and

consists of a imtliiplo of

such multiple

if

M

x

^^O^> x

I'oJi^

With regard

i.

"

be combined F

*

thus, /LR^

both take the article;

*xx

From

bJlN "the twclvo she-camels."

the article;

the article either to

(lie

for

x

*?*

>

of*

is

CM*

II

I.H

fu
nanut of

ilii"

" fiirou lanifl

ilw,

^

;"

HO

^j

where

laai>

itl^nUjj wJI wJ!2

tlio d^nioiiHfnilivi*

ihe

Ordiiialrt

are oxprc^sed tlio

tiro

im^ro ucljtiCtiv^H,

By

"tlio an

m

may

first

tlife

all

In

i

*^A> ."iicfi

riiiji]tv*
ami

tlntt

I

CIIHI*

Htat*Hl,

ubow

iiji

|

Hint

hey are


not,

be,

rc^tmtod u

J^r^l!

plmw<,

fliey take

Ijy

7*1,

If tat

ruua1r,

ecw,>;iiler
Tint

the nriieln; UH

tlm ilmt

Uo

f}n

with th

gtnidor, as thoy aro iiicleeJinuhle.

year;"

last

Wc%

multiples of ten

tho ctmlinalH, HO

oommou

ordinals may, or

i;

1

f

j

pron<;u

in grander, nimibor, unit

"the twentieth," and

'ft

UU!

Ordinal Jtfwnbew.

substantives to which, they relate*

^1

!

prefixed to the wore! iinmudiaiely li)llwvii**r.

The

of

^<

>

ninotoeaflx they

"bo

!*;"

f<

ojifiuiin!

thr^c Ihoiiflflwl tlirhaum ;" w>

O/ 262*

titfy

1

a Imndrwl or a

this million (literally, ihoimand of ihou,-
the article

to

dia

'"'

"*

the two hundred thotisftnd dirlmwn

examples as the

ukiv

/-

example; ^UjoJI iSLylj

f>/>xx

"the ^bj$\ ^XTSSU

a

nuifs

t\v<*uiv

llin

^^A!^

oufiro niminrnl, <*t

xo,^0

wifh

f

iho s<jv<m
<

numbered;

it

only,

a

niimoruk connirtting

to

tu

,

together with their miilfiph^ and ucflcwori<M,

tff

SjS+s

XxxxC.*O xxO Ox

x

ss"*'

also <3 J

cliiimte/*

artidi^ Uiev

re

203

SECTION

VII.

SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE, SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, AND PRONOUNS, Analysis of Sentences, 248. In the preceding Sections

we have

treated of the

and words of the Arabic language. We now come* $ the most important part of our work the conletters,

syllables,

struction of sentences, or, in other words, the rules for speak-

We

have all along ing and writing the language correctly. taken for granted that the student i$ acquainted with the ordinary terms of grammar, and various parts of speech another.

It

is

(common

able to distinguish the

is

to all languages) from one

probable, however, that he

may

not have

turned his attention to the analysis of sentences, which ought to form a preliminary step to the Syntax of every foreign

On

tongue.

this account,

we

request his attention to the

following general, or rather universal principles of

an acquaintance with which will enable Mip. to $($ more fully some of the rules which we

m

a.*

A simple

agent ;

"Fire

a verb is

&

sentence consists of three jwta, vl&, & nominative or ;

and

art

J

attribute, predi
hot;" "Fire oonsiimeB wood."

'

<# complement ;

In the

first

thus,

sentence,

204

ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES.

the nominative, or subject of affirmation

is

that which

is

affirmed of the subject, fire

to express the affirmation.

wood," ^7*0

wood

is

hot

is

the attribute, or

and the verb

Again, in the sentence or agent, consumes

the nominative,,

the object or complement.

is

;

;

"

serves

is

Fire consumes

is

and

the verb,

Frequently a simple sentence

"

? consists in appearance of only two words ; as winds blow ;' "ships " " which expressions arc equivalent to sail ; winds are blowing,"

"

ships are sailing/'

must

It

appears, then, that the

shortest sentence

consist of three words, expressed or understood

be found that the longest

;

and

will

it

always reducible to three distinct parts For the sake of illustration let us take the following sentence from the Loiters of Junius, viz., "An unmerited outrage is

and no more*

good man

offered to a great or

|

naturally excites

1

some emotions of

resentment even in hearts that have the least esteem for virtue," In this sentence the verb verb,

h.

is

the nominative

" is

naturally excites

and what follows

;

Although every simple sentence

is

parts, yet it is not easy to find a general

it, is

" ;

what precedes the

the complement.

reducible to three distinct

term that will accurately

apply to each individual part with the exception of the verb. When " is expressed by means of the verb to be," the three 1

the sentence parts

may

attribute

by

;

be called the nominative or subject, the verb, and the " Zaid is diligent." When the sentence is expressed thus,

any other neuter verb, the parts

and complement

;

as

"

the verb of the sentence verb,

and

object

;

as

may

Zaid went from

be called nominative, verb,

Mecca

to

When

Isfahan."

active or transitive, the parts are agent,

is

Zaid purchased a horse/'

Lastly,

when the

expressed by moans of a passive verb, the three parts " as a horse was purchased by Zaid." nominative, verb, and agent sentence

is

are

;

m

0,

A

compound

sentence, or period, consists of two or more simple

sentences connected

by a conjunction, expressed or understood

;

thus,

ARKANGEMENT OF WOBDS IN A SENTENCE. "

Knowledge to

the niind with entertaining views

a perpetual series of gratifications

it

fills

fills

a public station with suitable

with complacency,

it

it

;

abilities

and administers

;

gives ease to solitude

and,

;

when

above compound sentence

two clauses to this

merely

:

The leading

simple sentences, in

The

the nominative.

amount lustre

it."

principles of Arabic Syntax do not differ

European languages. its

It

himself, the

sentence, for they

upon the whole, from those that prevail with

by

;

mixed

it."

Knowledge, mixed with complacency, adds

such as are possessed of

249.

five is

it,

make but one simple "

to

;

which consists of

of which, knowledge, or its substitute

last

it is

adds lustre to such as are possessed of

will be a useful exercise for the student to analyze,

all

205

As

in our

a general rule

own and

other

the verb agrees

nominative in number, gender, and person;

the

adjective agrees with its substantive in

number, gender, and case ; and the relative agrees in number and gender with its There are, however, in the Arabic language, antecedent.

some exceptions to the preceding general principles, together with many idiomatic peculiarities which may startle the European student, whose notions of grammar are derived from the languages of ancient Greece and Eome. Arrangement of 250. sists of

We

Words

the

have just shewn

(

in

a Sentence*

248, a] that & aetite;^, con-

three distinct parts; and the attentlvej'^tedlent will

find on examination that there are six

ifastfi

of arranging

In Arabic prose compogltjoim, the general rule put the verb first, then the nominative, and lastly

th$se parts. is

to

the complement

;

thus,

pi

" jyj

tlJJ*

Zaid struck

ARRANGEMENTS OP WORDS IN A SENTENCE.

20 G

cT

So in the following sentences, ' i&~o

said to

the

Ms

SOIL

beginning

otS*j

^

the a

created

"

ail!

^j(l

Lukman

^-x-xo-O

"In

iljJl ^J

jU,

heavens and the earth,"

Zald came from Isfahan to

*T>-

2J

When

Baghdad.

c^UJt

Jo^\ j

J^ ^1^1 5 '

**"

??

God

?

^J

^U^l '"xyt3^ ^. -0 x^x viz.,

one substantive governs another in the

cl^&l genitive case the governing word comes first; as CjlsT " O *H"?O ^ a "loyo of the world;" uls*' u- listening unto wisdom."

In like manner a Hubstantivo precedes the adjective which u serves to qualify it OH tJai cl^S a great "book;" J^l^T jjx2jf u ;

the sincere friend."

Languages abounding in case terminations^ Buch as the Sanskrit, Latin, and tho Crock, admit of any of the six modes of arrange"

a. tlio

ment

aT>ove alluded to

;

thus the simple sontorice

?

Osesar vanquished

Pompey/* wMch, we cannot arrange with perspicuity, except in one " " way, may in Latin be expressed, C^sar vicit Pompeium," or Csesar u

Pompoium

vicit ;"

vicit Caesar

i{

OfiBsar;" Csesar/' is

Csosar vicit," or

Pompoium

lastly,

The Arabic

more

is

Poinpoimn," or

" vicit

Pompeium

"Pompeium

restricted iu its arrangement

;

a curious coincidence that the Gaelic exactly agrees with

example, the

"Anns an

first

infer,

it

;

it

for

verse of Q-enesis (above quoted) runs thus in Gaelic: y

Dia na ncanxhan agus an talamh/ word with tlie Arabic* The reader is

toiseach chrathaich

which corresponds word not to

vicit

and

for

however, that

least affinity with

I

consider the two languages to have the

one another,

i

merely point out occasionally

certain striking resemblances between the two, as to arrangement

and idiom, which

I

hold to bo purely accidental,

SYNTAX OF TUB AETIOL& 251,

The drfhute

article

Jt*

of the Arable generally cor-

SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. responds in

207

use and application with the

its

For example, when a substantive

Greek.

the article, and at the same time qualified

%,

<$,

TO of the

restricted

is

by an

by

adjective,

the adjective as well as the substantive takes the article; P S OX SCst+O " the great (or valuable) book/ 7 % A/3^o? thus, *Ji*n c^l^li f>

f)

In like manner when the substantive

a&a.

name (and consequently

definite in its nature), its qualifying

adjective (if any) takes the article

ham

the faithful/

a proper

is

5

Afipaap

6

^^

thus,

;

The

mcrro^

" \

!*/].

article is

Abra-

always

9 ?/<sS

names of peoples and Jews;" cj^l^li, "the Christians ;"

prefixed to

used

sects; <4>/3t

o^Jl "the

thus,

"the Arabians;" nouns

Jw/n "the Persians."

It is

to express collectively a & S /O-P s

whole species ; as in the following 9 s^< " The dromedary is preferable &**&

-*

example

J^s)

:

^

'

j+

also before singular

to the camel."

The

a,

article is

sometimes employed, as in German and French,

instead of an affixed possessive pronoun,

mistaken trouble

" ;

thus,

the possessor cannot be

thine absence thou hast troubled s s -'OljJ o flsS^^s

By

my reason has

when

\

departed," Jlj

J|j-!jJ

f OXO/'

^ JA!

lj

me, and in

my

x^i^O

^G^G/-

L5^J ^r^V*

t^'

The

^here we see JJUll employed for ,J&z "

article is also used, !

as

other languages,

in

"the prophet,"

^-Sl book,"

f)

o

before

*

general, in

b

S J

Trp^r^,

^8*^X09, for the Kur,an.

German and French S ""O-O

per antonomasiam, for

s'-Q*^ 1

t-jrlyj

&S

;

t

Finally, the arficle is used as in

nouns denoting an ab&tract idea in

?

SS<^~G

J^aasr

J^ U

?

in the

Muhaamriad

which instances we employ no f

as

"by

article in

activity the

English

reward

is

;

thus,

obtained,

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.

208

ul?o used before

not by slotlifuhiess;" P

regioiiH, etc.

"'Iridt;"

as

;

it is OX

(

"

<us'i

J? X"

wisdom "

"Syria," or

fl&

j> J?

names of

OX

sciences, arts S

Ijs

government;" jl

*S|

9

"

;" LijlsH

Damascus."

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES, Of

Nominative Case,

the

The nominative

252.

case

often employed at the be-

is

ginning of a Hontcnco in an absolute senso, independently of For exuuy grammatical eoiislruclum with what follows. the son ton co

ample.,

hoavonft

J*$\

and upon the

Mm

(is) G

tho earth;

79

U

4

whatever XO

CC

//

x

^

A

"tho prophet of God

modem

a

mode

God, his prophet

to

i.e.

of tho nominative absolute

in our

U

(or, as to

?

in the heavens and upon

(IB)

^^^ ^^j

rntah

God

4]^ literally,

**

in the

is

thus expressed in Arabic, "

w>, 9

among you/

t

belongs whatever

oartli," is

J

cpt^ll

j

rjtf.

God,) to

"To God

is

IB called

of construction

among you,"

is

This

the inchoative case

is "by

?

no means rare

Anglo-Saxon, both English and Scotch, as in

the following couplet from the exquisite ballad of

"Auld

EoWnGray:" *<

My bwui

it

mid

Bufe tho wlnci

a.

Wo

it

nay,

ambiguity; thus, fi& * " bomtiful ;

^\^ ^\

is

I look'd for

Jamie back it wan a wrack," ;

fillip

mentioned (158, a) that tho vorb "to bo/'

in Iho prosont tcimo eieopt

verb

fr

blow high* and tho

eatirely omittod,

tiomteativo

CMC

when

""Mel **

its

is

is

seldom used

omission might occasion an

learned;" 1

thoa (art noblo)/

J^

Here we

and both tho subject and

in Uio order dcscribod, | 250*

4)1

"God

(is)

see that the

attribute put in the

In

mmj

instances

209

SYNTAX OP SUBSTANTIVES.

make

it is

optional to

thus

we may say^Sl "

the subject precede the attribute or vice versa ;

or


Muhammad

or jJLir* lllj

When

that the

by the

stricted

17

which we may

God

very great;" L*J

(is)

&*?*

our prophet."

Genitive Case.

in Arabic two substantives are so combined

which

first,

(is)

the

Of 253.

"
is

indefinite in its signification, is re-

second,' such a construction

is

called

&&\. ^

The

translate "state of regimen*"

first

word

*""*

is

termed ^J>\^\ "the regent;" and the second, which ' p

always put in the genitive case, 7

governed;'

as

*.

alii

is called

"the wisdom

<_JuuJ1 or

^\

of Grod;"

is

' ?*"

the

^^^ cl?l^

The governing word has very fre~a ?stss an adjective; as ^\ '^ "abundance

"the book of Solomon."

s-

quently the of sleep,"

effect of

"much

i.e.

i.e.

periences,"

noun j

"the

Such

is

totality,"

uniformly the

which answers

words "every" or "all," according as the word

our

"*

^ is

governed

J^

(jwUSl

"length of ex-

J^t

c-^lasSl

"long experience."

construction of the to

sleep;"

"

singular or plural; thus,

all

*

$^L J

"everything;"

men."

Like 3^ are also construed the interrogative pronoun ^T and its " " " " feminine
}

men?"

5U*1

^

>1

"what woman?"

similar *ule applies to the \

gation

"

;

for example,


iX

* s

s's

a for

wordjlc signifying

j^lir^i

difference,"

<,??<.'

s^s'tt increate;"

fy^

A

what reason?"

"

s^ Juiw *

the Wazlrs and Kadis and others besides them came."

^

hence "ne**~*

*

SYNTAX

HlO state of

Tlio

1).

01?

regimen frequently expresses superiority or "

cellence in a superlative sense

When

9

tilings/

;

as

'

i-ij**

IcL

the best of created

an adjective the

is

latter is

by the word governed;

its signification 5

instead of

x

"possessed of readiness at calculation;" 0*0

c^UU x xxi'zL

as

^

^-^ ^

ex-

s

quick at calculation/

'

\

TJ3

the governing word

sometimes restricted in "

c-^lU

8UBSTAMIVES.

,

t^UUH jj^i x

"

.

j

violent in

chastising," instead of c.^1%

Of

254

We

stated

(

Accusative Case.

the

194) that every noun In Arabic

may

bo converted Into an adverb by being put in the accusative Tlio accusative case

ease*

in this

is

language

frequently

used adverbially in instances whore the Latin would employ tiio aTblttiivo, or tlio accusative with a preposition; " ^ perished of hunger/ mortnm est thus, l^jpf*

^^

(

oJU 5

/ ticiple

5

Ccljft

\yy*

do yo fast during certain specified

An

per cerium diemm spalium. tho

with

accuBative

adjective or par-

termination

frequently

cor-

responds with the Latin gerund in do\ as \^\j *U>- "he a ^ ea^s standing," came ridlng " vcnit eguitmdo ; l&jVj

^^

?

+



7

x yc^o

9

$

^9

\^^ cjLH l^al sative) IB

(

enter the gato in adoration*"

The

accu-

sometimes equivalent to the Latin gerund in dum ; a for (the sake of) instruction," ad 1 slnick

as C? jtf iSjlJ ermliendimi*

Mm

Finally, tho accusative,,

pur

et simple^ expresses

guo^ "by

reason of,"

"with, respect to," or "as to;" thus, \L^ jU^J,

c^i "Isaac

in Arabic tho sense of the Latin

wif.li

Tftsnoet to

Ms

mind, or

" cliSDOsitioB,"

i.e.

he

SYNTAX OE SUBSTANTIVES.

power;"

The

Sj^

*j\??^

"God

^\

"and

^9

more intense (than

stones, or

a.

Lk

3

#yj? *xAl^

s

yw

jji

well disposed;'

211 is

great

5

'

sometimes put before the sub-

is

9?<J$

to)

these (hearts) are like

stones), as to hardness.

predicate in the accusative

(as

4 s o ?

s

^Gi o

O-GJ,^

42;
ject; thus in the Kur,an, vi.

there 5-

a variety of food

is

9? $

9

--

<~s

d\ ^^\

t^jiUs^ in xxi. 3

"

99&

* ' o


Ulxs^

the food (resulting) from

J^j <^

:

where

;"

u^i

they

may

turn

being taken up with delight;" where

&&

N.B.

"+&J&J.

which

is

equivalent to

So

various."

it

unto sport, their hearts

^^

is

%*$

equivalent to

In connection with quotations from the Kur,an,

Eoman numerals

as above, the

is

listen not to the admonitio^ f*j [They

"

of their Lord except that]

S>

indicate the surat or chapter, and the

Arabian figures, the ayat or verse,

The present participle put in the accusative has sometimes the effect of what in Latin is called the subjunctive mood, which in b.

Arabic

is

expressed

"although," "even &

./

UU-

s

"

-"

^

CS^o

U

^1

by the

preterite preceded

by the conjunction

if," as in the following verse from the s s ^cO f &/";>?ss oS<--

v

-Ui3

Jua UU-

^ J^iL

jU!l

^

Jfamasa:

"verily, I will

wash away dishonour from me, even if the decree of God should draw upon me whatever it may draw;" where \^[^ (when it first s

occurs) s

o^

iL*^~

ji

<s*

is .#

equivalent to c r s

U^Js

s s

s

^U

& U5l

s

"""

s

C^V

J^ 9s

y$

<*s

^0^

So in the following sentence

.

9

^s

^|yb

coveteth anything, his avarice leadeth

s s

u

JU

him on

&<*

s

L& to

it,

s-s

t^yb

:

o ^

^

whatever

"whoso it

may

be, foul or fair."

c.

In Arabic the accusative

is

very frequently employed where we

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.

212

should use the nominative, as in the following verses" from the

Kur,an ?

ii.

^- U^

842: ^^Jb^M

uJjyc^b gL* c^UUaAilj "and

(t

to the divorced (wives is due) a reasonable provision (according to

the husband's means)

So

see IA>- in the accusative.
^#

M^

<JUbJl

^y

incumbent on the pious

this is

;

^l^w*

should bo more (brothers or

also ia iv. 15,

*3 uJ33

we have

^^1

nee
the following

^ "and

lyl^

if

:

there

than these (two) they shall be

sisters)

the third part (of the estate) (equal) sharers in

from God;" where we

where we

;"

^ ^/

;

this is

used for
an ordinance

^

in Apposition.

255*

way in

u

case,

Wlicn OHO

Biibstantivo IB subjoined to

of description or designation, the two arc said to be apposition," and

must agree in gender, number, and

as in tlio ]Cur,axi, xiv. 19

;

oocxi

xxiv.

35

:

ijajj

lighted with the rule holds

oil

when

^C

S^c^

^

is)

a oJjJ

it

L/^^

and So

poison."

(the lamp)

is

The same

of a blc$8C3d tree, the olivet

the second substantive defines the manner, x

measure, or quantity, of the ate half the cake/

The same

a

^

>C

there shall be drinking of water (which

in

another by

first:

"

3

literally,

thus,

^

^^o

^Lu ^Ju&}\

"I

?? 1 ate the cake, the half of it

rule also applies to certain words added

a

a

^^

ciJ^\

by way

??

as Ji5 eorroboration confirmation^ or (Suf/), Buch a "the eye" or "ossenoo," "the souP or self, ?? and

of

^

?

haying subjoined

to

them the

to the first substantive.

t

affixed pronoun, appropriate

They thus become equivalent

Latin ipW) ipm^ and if sum.

to the

They agree in gender, number,

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.

md

213

case with the leading substantives, the forms used for

and plural being jjuf and ^^t, as may be seen in

both dual

]he following

examples: il*j juj *!> "Zaid himself came;" i'

fC-r

rr

i

i/

i

Zainab herself came;" \^Ju\

\^ju

and

put in apposition after the affixed pronouns

"I saw

\J

5.

which may

thyself,"

'*"

\

the

^e may

;

also

"

'

ci^li-

s-^J

$j "I saw

J**}\

The words Jj

o princes themselves."

f

c'^V'T

11

I saw Zaid himself ;"

l^

also

for example,

be expressed

'

or

In a manner simHar to tie foregoing are used the words J and " " L**i>denoting "totality," or uniyersality/' as also Z^Lc people ^" ^ * ' ^,

'

?$* as
n general;"

<-

t--

x

,

whole army came,"

^ttte

(jV?' *^r

S>S

<">*? '

the

came, the whole of

army

O^<5^

,ribe

came Xt*"10

w^

S

;"

t,

I

'the whole

army came," ^

the words

l$l

^

1

^^ " cps l>-

saw the multitude,

all

SS

both Zainab and

women;" <x*U

of them * CXO-<J

JM?

\

:

I passed

or

U^

To

<^V,J;

"I saw

t)th 'Amru and

uSij ^J "I g as^ e u^to ssMm as wives Fatima," When the words K and UK precede the <X::


'-^IJ "I saw fcth thy

by both thy

the

in-

;

5

brothers;'

clC^Xl

IsiG

thus, <->]/*

sisters."

99 5.

z\&~

S(j

mbstantives which they qualify they become indeclinable;

M ^

;"

^

"both," are employed; U>K $/&} $j *l>- " both Zaid and

lal^

Amra came;" C^J^ JXcJ ^Xc

Ue^ x

the

literally,

the whole

In order to express duality in Buck

fern,

^,

all

-^^ '

passed by

in the following examples

Umar;"

x-0>0

aiLJil

xx

cuJX "I

is

"

\

j^ *LJ b stances

O'Sr'

*$ c^Jj

+$ a

^

x-C/^0^0

so

it ;"

word 3^ thus

9

tised in apposition, the

words

x-

O

-*

^s>\

fern.

SYNTAX OF THE OTMEBALS.

214

c"> together with their plurals

&?

?<* -"VC-iO

<S35U!

The word

^ras

^Jisf-1

be sub-

\

applied

;

s-

'*

'^f^r\ * $i

thus,

may

*^u>-

number, and case with the leading word s ss

joined, agreeing in gender, ^

fern,

^y^>~\

*xs*"*

and

the angels did worship."

all

not used in the dual, either masculine

is

or feminine. f

The word

G

or

x*

C

**"

--*>- 1

applied as above

j2l,

tr^sfU

*Ud,

and

jiUs^;

f;

fern,

and

and


whose

their plurals

and

u, ju^ab,

are all used at the

same

femiriiQ.es are

masc.

serrod in the following example

:

xj2

9 xi?

The

last throe

in combination; except

J^iidijf,

and

j^*c>-|

%

9

P

in the order ob-

x o^

^^ t^W

it

is

^

P

x

C

"<* ^

"~

x

^f

impossible to translate

words are Yery rarely used either singly or

when preceded by j and

SYNTAX OF THE Of

ihe

256. "Wo hare soon

(

NTT ME HALS,

Cardinal Numbers*

69) that

tlio

8 to 10 inclusive haTO this anomaly^ to a masculine

and

^\ ^*&\
the whole of the array came;" which

verbatim.

respectively, *Uej,

^^1,

time in addition to "

;

by one

Sometimes these three words

s.

f

J

be accompanied

of the following words, which are of the same signification,

all

viz;,:

a

may

cardinal tliat

numborw from

when

tlioy refer

noim they assume the feminiao tcnnination

whereas the feminine nouns require the same numerals 6V xx

"

throe sons;" be of the masculine form; thus, <3i5 ^^4 " As adjocfcivos they are placed fiye daughters." tijlw after the noun to which they belong, and agree with "the

to

J^

same in gender and

case.

At the same time they may be

used as substantive^ and prefixed to their nouns which they ?

215

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS. 9^

^f

then govern in the genitive case $&\

J

<&*.

As

"five months."

thus,

;

^\

<EL "six days;"

noun thus

a general rule the

governed by the numerals 3 to 10 must be a broken plural. a.

The number

j^-T and

o^VT

feminine.

The

object

we shewed,

one, as

numbered

is

form of each

expressed

is

used as a substantive when the

came unto me;" k/***\

uz~3\

"there was no one S w*"^

may

also

govern a genitive case;

\^>\ "one

men;" *LJ^ The forms

j^J

tives; thus,

of the

and Slis^ are

3^\J

"

not expressed; as a>-1 LS^^" ^*

^

f^

a

thus,

Jls^JM

women;"

They

a*J "one

of the

U U^

gender with the nouns which they represent;

each one of these

(or bays);"

"one

'

^ ^

*&&

^.uM Sx&b

degree."

agreeing in

still

j^tj J^

x*t*\j

S

&

1

cities."

of them."

$

^i^-V^ i>-ji

They may, however, be employed by themselves,

"

"one

and follow their substan-

adjectives,

one object;"

no one (masc -) (fern.)." S

9

IfcJ^Lt

*j

"each one of these gulphs

the words

by

and by t^^j, and i^.\j for the

for the masculine, first

is

69,

are also used in the sense of

They

O*0

"one"

or

"the one "in contrast with "the other;" thus

"the one-half;" ^y^T

U^\ '

"the other

and used adverbially, they imply thus,

^^ Ij^J \jV

sellors,

b.

^VJJ^I

j

ft

When

half."

distribution

iX^-ljSl

or ^P

7

-Ox-

uJ^zJl

repeated

individuality

^ p "then, with regard

;

to the coun-

they came one by one."

The number "two,"

is sufficiently

represented

terminations of the objects numbered;

^1^5 ^ o

"two

degrees."

thus,

by the mere dual

^J-j "two o men;"

Sometimes the numeral "two/

1

^131,, fern.

as adjectives after nouns in the dual. ^IS], or ^l^j are employed " two" appears to be redundant but In such instances the numeral

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS.

216

perliaps

adds more emphasis io the expression;

it

0~0

~

^

j^

e^fjy ^ur^ where the numeral

257.

s

9

s

"

^ \& o^ ^\

is

for

example

^- e create
apparently superfluous.

(

The numerals 11

to

99,

"both,

govern the

inclusive,

substantive to which they refer in the accusative singular as

C^ y

lUt "eleven stars;"

nine sheep."

^

uj*^i>

The numerals 100 and

their multiples, govern the

nouns denoting the objects num*"% '

/>

s

LU

J^

a

^U

o>

a thousand dinars;"

"ninety-

1,000, together with

"bored, in the genitive singular; thns, * 9 r* % " 3? three hundred ^JJ men; J^-j X" ^ *

^

;

^u^

^

*

'*

men;

a

""

?J

a hundred

so

j&o "X

cjili

"*

uJSljA^ j^|

a

eleven thousand

Numerals made up of decades and units, when they exceed 20, place the units first and then the tens; dinars."

thus,

Ctlfi

and-oiglity

years); If a

dinars."

AJHJ

j^USj

a eighty-three years" (literally, three-

\j&$

number

&$*)

&W

"

two-and-twcnty

composed of several classes, the noun expressive of the objects numbered is put after the total number, and is governed by the concluding numeral, is

according to the rales already stated; thus, for example, s #fxx A xOx * $>*ss % ft* s c x ox i -*o x o^/> yso i^ ^yu^j J^jl) ^l^***^ uJ^T -315 ^U^aSI ^j.-jj ^r?; ^^
+rs

tween the Hljra and the Beluge (there elapsed) 3,974 years." In instances of this kind, however, the substantive may be repeated after each class of the numerals; as follows,

viz.,

X

yUJj ^Thc revenue of Gharblya (a province of Egypt,)

is

reckoned at 2,144,080 military dinars."

OF THE CABIOT AL KXJMBERS.

2 IT

In order to express any large number, consisting of millions

a.

(or upwards), together with hundreds, decades,

and units of thousands,

SO^

it is

usual to repeat the worduJl^ after each class of the numerals

X

X

VX~

^Lj literally,

;

thus,

/

u^

j "the

amount of

it

(is) this,

9,584,264 dinars/'

"nine hundred thousand of thousands, and

five

hundred of

thousands, and four-and-eighty thousand, and two hundred, and fourand-sixty dinars." b.

In expressing a number of thousands, ranging from three to

ten, both inclusive, t*J&\ is

the objects

numbered follow the same in

Jj^J uJST

from 11

and the

to

used in the genitive plural uJST; and

99 (both inclusive) u-aH

dinars."

or

uliil

^ Jig

When

the

20,000

number

any multiple thereof

;

thus,

the thousands range

used in the accusative singular,

numbered in the genitive

objects

JtJ

is

genitive singular

When

"three thousand men."

33

" thus,

th

Ibs. ;"

singular, as just stated)

^\

^%

"

*fa 1^]

11,000

of the thousands consists of a hundred

uJil is used in the genitive singular,

^

and the f.

? ss

^

objects

"

numbered in the same

thus,jujj cj^
300,000 dinars.

258.

Not only the

inclusive (

objects s

cardinal

numbers from three

in apposition to the nouns denoting the

numbered, as s

s

may be s

*

seen in the following example

:

.,-',."

and he drew the net to the land

fishes,

to ten,

256), but also those of a higher denomination

may be employed

"

case, as above;

;

lo ? it

one hundred and three-and-fifty."

was

full of large

SYNTAX OP THE NUMEXLLL8,

218

When

259.

number out

a numeral

is

denote a certain

to

employed

of a collection, or class, or whole genus,

it

is

usual to express the relation between the numeral and the class "by

for

means

example

Jail

^f*

:

kj&jiT

"

S!L

of the preposition "

^ &Z3

^

"from"

or

"out

3

of;'

nine (men) out of the family

93 ;

"three birds from among the further to be observed that the numeral

three birds"

i.e.

genus bird," It is in such instances, agrees in gender with the objects num.?/'" XXO^c,

bored; thus, in the expression the numeral so

culino;

is masculine *XO*0 ^ 9 '*

kJi

^

dl$

^1

^

<3ilS

"three sheep;"

because 11& as a genus,

is

'

three

?

ducks;"

where

mas-

^

LL?HS

is

~s

feminine, because

the gender

is

&

is

added immediately

an epithet indicating

If

feminine.

after the numeral, the latter XVC.-0

agrees in gender with such epithet

"

;

*xt-O ^

throe females of the genus sheep ;" kll

?

"S.

^

^

A&\

thus,

,S

^\j\ CD^J

?? j'xx^

^ j/j

Uj

"three

*

males from among the ducks," a.

Numerals used abstractedly, as in the science of U5

always put "la the masculine form half of six*"

When

;

thus,

ff

<*>

uJ*oJ

<&**?

-Sv^x <5515

arithmetic, are

"

three

is

the

"nouns of different sexes are included tinder one

and the satno numeral, the immediately following

it,

latter agrees in

gender with the noun

provided the numeral denotes a number

?^% 9s s s ^^ iJU) ^J as $U1 both to from nix inclusive; ton, % $e\ extending /-

&i

to

me

(belong) eight

lavs and

[eight] female servants/*

If

we

hero reverse the objects numbarod, the expression will be as follows x *** / " to mo (belong) eight handmaids and {eight] Ouft\ ^ ^J

:

-*

**

iW ^UJ

slaves/*

If the objects

unmoral must bo added

numbered be under to

six,

then the appropriate

each of the two species*

OF THE CARDINAL NUMBEBS.

When

b.

compound numerals above

the

219

ten

apply

to

rational

beings, they always take the masculine form, as in the following PS X X 4- Cx XX X O XX O X " to me belong fifteen male examples: Jjjl>-j 1jujjkc. ~ t/^^ ^ O x x xxO x & x x s*/ x " to slaves and [fifteen] female slaves ;"
^jV

!

me

female and [fifteen] male slaves."

fifteen

belong

If the numerals

apply to irrational beings they take the gender of the nearest sub&' 's

stantive

;

thus,

&Uj

**

sion (chez moi,) fifteen tf*X

[fifteen]

-&S

x

o

O

"


^.^LC

there are in

male camels and

[fifteen]

X XX OX

O

x

L*^ ^b ^L&

transposition,

and

XX

xx x xx

x x

L*s>-

he-camels.

If,

a qualifying word such as

O

s

" ^

^5^5^

(juu^i.

k ave

Xx

-

OX

X

X-'O

^U

<SUj J^.^-

X

XJ&.A

^j U,

X O X

etc.,

O

"

u^>. L.?^

between males and females," that

" is,

and the same construction holds, as

we

expression

singular

interposes immediately after ;

thus for example

I possess fifteen camels,

what

partly male and partly female; to the

numerals

:

3'

if in this last

;

So cpCCU-

singular.

is

feminine in the

"three baths,"

for the singular

i

<8ib

"

a year/'

masculine; and this rule holds

the objects numbered

example

she-camels

transpose the last two words and read

"seven years;" because

is

by

The numerals agree in gender with that of the number of the objects numbered thus, ^~> jll^

260.

*Ud

fifteen

or,

however, in the case of irrational objects

the numerals, the latter are of the feminine form X XX

my posses-

she-camels ;"

:

creatures) that n

feminine.

^j

j-Tjt

rv

is

suppressed;

^^ ^

wait on four I

" Xf^>

m

as

(feet)," Jjjfy ^

^^ ^^y

the joame of the following

and among them (&re

S'.i^^'ffC.xtf ?$%& 1^4^

So also t-jUsf

when

^JU^

"a

foot," 4^^ x Ox

^y^

being xf

t/^ ^; 5

4

^1

"Verily, I beheld seven f$t kine which Sevan lean (one$) ?

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS.

220 5

where

devoured/

j^

is

?? feminine, the word "kino being

understood.

a.

When

such as

numbered are of a vague or general

the objects

may

apply

to either sex, the

grammatical gender of such

according to the x"

the words J^s^*

and J^c denote

3

"a

person" or "individual," the

,

hence they say

;

Psss

V,xv

For example,

objects.

<

former being masculine and the latter feminine POX

1

"

asff&\ <SAj

t

&

three persons/' where

JjJU is

usod in the masculine form P

whether the

objects

"throe persons" or males,

nature,

numeral agrees with the same

l>e

"

male or female,

lu like manner

CI

O^

individuals," whether applicable to females or

num-

as the foregoing serving to indicate the real sex of the objects

agree in gender with the word or words

bered, the unmoral will p

"and

I

bf s

thus,^^

had

s

**

P $

^Ucl^

^^^

9

used with

Ox

s

?

s ss

s

^\ ^ ^ \J^ (^ <&$,

whom

for a wliicld against those

f

ss

ijii

1 foared

*.

two (young) oxx

Here we

maidens and a (marriageable) woman/* is

ss

djilo

however, another noun or epithet be added to such phrases

ff,

annexed;

?

^\

see that

c^U

fern.

9

^y^

inasc. because the latter

word

is qualified

by the

to females. andJUt* each of which is applicable only Sometimes, however, fegard is had more to the signification of the thus the objects immbnrod than to their strict grammatical gender;

epithets ^C^lS'

word JJaJ "soul," is feminine; but when applied to persons of the male sex the numeral agrees with it in the masculine gender; thus, /{

X"

u&\ ^ij b.

<'-

*>S

J3HS

"iliroe souls" (meaning males), because in this instance

has the same signification as Jj>"j

If the

name

of the objects

*

numbered bo suppressed and

its'place

the numeral agrees supplied by an epithet descriptive of itg quality, in irendor with 4hc noun understood; thus in the Kur,an, vi. 160:

OE THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. _

^

"he who

221

hath done a good (deed)

shall receive (as his reward) ten (times) the equivalent thereof."

the numeral the latter

^Lc

is

feminine, although

mere

considered as a

is

J\L1

is

Here

masculine; because

epithet of cblilrL (plural of

a^&-)

understood.

The

261.

cardinal

numbers may be

according to the rules

numeral

is

j&LM Jjuw

laid

restricted

251.

down,

used substantively in an abstract sense

M\ /'the (number) three is half of the When the name of the objects numbered

six."

2.

stood,

having been previously expressed, as

known;

by the article 1. "When the

yb ^j*$\

returned with joy."

"and

^frj*

3.

When

thus,

;

(number) under-

is

and hence well

the seventy (disciples)

the numeral

is

employed in

apposition as an adjective after a definite noun ; for example * s M' S O ^^C ? " <w*js) the flve men." 4. When the numerals from J^r)\ :

\

3 to 10 (both inclusive) precede the objects numbered in a state of regimen, in

which case the ,,

w

~&

article is generally pre?<""'

fixed only to the latter; as JU^JI &W>

"the

of

trio

men,"

Occasionally, however,

takes the article as well as the 35

as

?^

^.*+o

a^*Ul

or

the numeral

of the objects

numbered

;

s-

aiXll\ jwlfii

name

men"

the three

"the seven fundamental precepts of

the law."

a.

name

When

the numerals frora 11 to 19 (both inclusive) precede the

of the objects numbered, and as

same

we already remarked,

in the accusative singular, the article # so fixed to the first member only or to both; thus,

govern the

"may s

257,

be pre-

s

XEC-'

Ufc^^&x j^DH

or

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS,,

222 "$

s

"

'the eleven

"

i\A*H

U

(wJUl *

J

when

elusive),

the article

;

dirhams;" also

5.

and

^otS^o ^xc33

With regard

such multiple be combined

if

x*

"

thus,

1u


X

f O

*&^\ L^T

to numerals consisting of a

)

-*O

x-

P

it is

so

optional to prefix

name

of the objects

O

P**"***"

OX

$15 "the three thousand dirhams;" so *&j& X

last,

so also,

Of

word immediately

the

J?

nineteenth they agree in

tlie

all

C5tO*0

J

is

In such

employed,

following.

and up to the gender, ntimbor, and case with the adjectives,

substantives to which, they relate.

twentieth," and

Ox

Ordinal Numbers.

The OrdinalB arc mere

by

OX

xX

USUJ1

uJS! L^^l $&& jL>o V

where the demonstrative pronoun

the article is prefixed to the

are expressed

^

<*J&\

thousand of thousands) of dinars,"

this million (literally,

tlio

takes

a3UvK "the three hundred dinars;" example: jbjjJ! *

for

examples as the

a

it

hundred or a thousand,

xx

"the two hundred thousand dirhams;"

262,

in-

the twenty sheep;"

X

"

99 (both

the seventy-seven camels."

x

X

or


^/k*H

the article either to the entire numeral, or to the

X C w *o

to

ss O Ox

luiSI

with units they

OX

together with their multiples and accessories,

numbered;

.c

the numeral coasists of a multiple of tea only, ^ X 0>

/

ss o s

&U

From 20

the twelve she-camels."

both take the article; & s x

#s '

We

stated,

73, that

multiples of ten above that number,

cardinals, so that they are considered

The gender, as tliey are indeclinable. ordinals may, or may not, be restricted by the article; as o*^ * jptflaso-o

to bo of the

$

"(&

When,

common

"the

first

year;" J^l

"tho

first

climate."

j^iS!

as in this last pkraso, they take tho article, they aro

223

OF THE ORDINAL NUMBERS,

connected with

sequel of the sentence, not in a state of

tlie

by means

regimen, but

U 3

^

of the preposition

or

^3

A1 Hakim bi-Amr-Illahi was born on the month

night of Thursday, the three-and-twentieth of the ?

Babi n-l-awwal

by the

at the ninth hour."

?

When not

accompanied

the ordinals are usually put in a state of

article,

regimen with a noun or pronoun following thus X ~0 Ox O 0;5OXG- XX 0-0 X XxX OX X OX

for

;

^

W UU,^

thus,

;

^-X-fa

5J

^.U

was hailed Caliph

m\

tf.

#.j&\

*

&\A\

example

OXX X-

^

:

X

^ fa "He

the twentymid-day on xWednesday, O x-O x ? ps

after

x-

5 J&U1U ^j J <mA- ^Jj^ eighth of the month of Eamadan ;" xx^ xx TTx x x " On the twenty-third (day) of it, (YIZ., month), proclamation ,

*

**

""x-

was made in Cairo."

a.

An

ordinal

number, from the second found

clusive) is often

a state of regitnen with

in.

x

X 0-O

its

correspondirig

OX

x

^\ ^U c^ol

cardinal; thus,

to the tenth (both in-

"then

art a

second of the two/' that

(

X

"

^

"

j^

so thou art one of the two ; l^h^ " one of the ten/' tenth of the ten," i.e.

is,

or

(fern.)

j& S^U

"With regard to the

"

a

com-

pound numerals from 11

to

19 (both inclusive), the same xule holds,

with this difference, that

it is

optional either to use the two component

to suppress the second of parts of the ordinal, or

them ;

in which case

the remaining part becomes declinable, agreeing in gender with the

noun

which reference

to

or (fern.)

is

made;

xxOx

xC-0

LA^ j^3\ ^A^

j\5

{

We may

also say (omitting

x o

(fern,)

xx

x

,

ilL& iJ^^ 4^^

thus,

" (^\ "thou

the decades),

art

j&&

one of the twelve."

^\ ""

^IS c^>l

or

o

S^^*

Sometinaes the mere ordinal, inde-

22 J

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS,

clinable, bears a similar cons traction to the preceding; as

"

""

lie is

a thirteenth/'

There

/>.

regimen, not with latter

mode

another

is

own

its

of employing the ordinal in a state of cardinal, but with the one less than the

^\

thus,

by unity;

yL&LLJlS 1&

one of the thirteen."

i.e.

d-JU y*

{

''he (forms) a third to two."

This rule holds with regard to the ordinals from the third to the ninth (both inclusive); which in fact are viewed by grammarians as the present participles of the active verbs <JLJj

"ho made

(out of two) ;" ^.Sj as

may

thus,

hence they

;

nouns of agency govern the genitive as in the example

ISU

^LjVj

y&

"ho makes

the

compound

may

govern the accusative;

three into four/' literally,

three;" so in the feminine, U15
When

he made three

four (out of three)/' etc.

or as active participles they

above;

"

^

\IQ

"she makes three

from the eleventh

ordinals

{S

fourths

into four."

to the nineteenth

(both inclusive) are thus employed, the units only are declinable,

but not the Ion; thus, to

XX s

xG-Ox-X-X

y*#

^\ jJLz *

*

-*

ciJlj xxL

x?

"

y&

he adds a thirteenth

*-vO,*C ''X

X*

twelve;" so with the feminine, iyus ^^xJI

x

<5JJj

"

^

she," etc.

In a similar manner are employed the numerals composed of units

and decades, only that the decades are usually suppressed; x

xxv

^jUs.}

ajSj

c

x

twentioth."

f

*

sf

*j\j yb or

x

o

x

^y^

The multiples

^

xx-"x

of ten,

s

sf

j-^lj

j&

it

viz,,

"he makes a

20, 80, etc,,

considered as modifications of quadriliteral verbs

;

thus,

modification of j^j/^j the participle active of which

ployed as above;

lionce,

wo may

say,

yu

up

is

thus,

four-and-

to 90, are

^Mu$

is

a

^yux^, em-

Lj ^^-^

^

"he

tmntiftelh nineteen/' which in honest plain English signifies that he

" is

one out of twenty/*

203. la expressing

tlio

year of an

a^ra sucli as tho

Alex-

OF THE ORDINAL NUMBERS. andrine, the Hijra,

etc.,

225

.

the Arabs employ the cardinal

num-

bers as

we

state of

regimen with the following numerals, which agree

with

in gender;

^

The word

do.

"year"

(fern.)

put in a

is

^Vx-

it

with

article as

but in this case SL* does not take the

The numerals,

us.

as

we

are

79,

stated,

arranged in the following order, viz., first the units, then the tens, etc., all connected by means of the conjunction J as in the following example:

"

SUdljj <^-5*4 5 <-^> &**

i^Lij J

u " then commenced the year (of the Hijra) 396 literally

On

and ninety, and three hundred."

six,

the other hand, in

expressing the year of the age or reign of an individual the ordinal numbers, with the article, are ^

with us

thus,

;

x-uco

'-('x'

^L*^ ^J^i

\

--oo

<_U1

employed precisely as >->

o

?

^

<_
1

^ 3~^>^"-o
1

^

"in the sixth year of the reign of Al Malik Al Ashraf Sha'ban." application

u

The following example exhibits at one view the of both the ordinal and the cardinal numbers :

la the three-and-fortieth year of his reign, and that

(corresponds with) the year three hundred and nine of the eera of

Alexander. 53

264. In expressing the day of the month, the more recent

Arabian writers, like ourselves, employ the ordinal numbers, counting regularly from the first to the last day of the montlu

As they reckon by mences at sunset, as lieve, till lately,

lunar time, the is still

civil

the case with the Jews, *and I be-

with the Venetians. The month commences on f&fte

the evening

day naturally com-

when

the

new moon

(ljk\

f

s

O

or Ji^\) becomes visible

SYNTAX OF THE OTMERALS.

22G

from the tops of minarets,

etc.

lience the earlier

;

Arabian

writers reckoned, not by the day but by the night.

Thus,

?

S

the

first

^

or

c^^j <J

(viz.,

month Eajab,

of the

"

on the

JJ*!

that immediately following the x x

OXX

G

^

pressed,

blst.

aLU

_

In

like

the third day

"

-^

^^

up

The

night)

"

cjW

would be

cfjlaoJl, " *"


1

rule is to reckon, not tho

but of those that X X

expressed *_x>y nights of Eajab

still

**-**>-

j

^ ^^ JU

^

word

>?

?

;'

<3J

The

fifteenth

expressed

to the

is

is

expressed

day

is called

O

O-H

v^rj

of nights that have elapsed,

XOX

^A*

remaining;

From

seventh, both inclusive, tho pi

expressed,

is

X /"CX

XX O X

5'

is

this rule

remain; hence the "sixteenth day"

the nineteenth, inclusive.

twentieth day

and

in the singular,

X

is

ui^Jw (<EU)

still

e-?iil S S

"

X

i?x x

number

C x X

O

then,

;

After tho fifteenth of the month the

,vT X

X

ex-

is

55 ?? or "middle; denoting "half ^

the jfifteonth of Eajab"

"^*

expressed

From the eleventh

to the tenth, inclusive.

(3J) i^La ^do-3.

or 1^4-j

day ^

(pi, of JLJ) is tinder-

understood; thus, "tho eleventh clay of Eajab"

"

first

AVOX

word ^lU

fourteenth, both inclusive, the

thus,

JJ S s

three nights haying elapsed." xx

if supplie^l

or

is

nights having elapsed

xx

three of the nights of Eajab having elapsed

holds,

-QjJ

u.^ ^ &''"

??

this last expression the

which

s> jf

<5J

manner, the second day

"two x y

is

O

one night of Eajab

literally,

x

exr

*"

.

t^Jcd-

xx x

first

X

,f

<

haying elapsed,"xx

stood,

expressed

night of Eajab,"

first

x-^ x

thus, L^s^y

In

is

j-j^S, literally,

and

fourteen

this rule holds,

up

to

the twentieth to the twentyXX

JU

^

is

understood; thus the

OF THE ORDINAL NUMBERS.

"ten nights of Eajab X X

is

expressed

^^j

G

^

pressed,

c-^j ?

of Eajab

3>

^ ^

and

;

if

<3J &

remaining."

l~jb

^~L1! "two nights of Eajab

is

may be x x

o

^r^rj cr*

CXX X

^

x x

**

or

s x

*

i

*_

^

^-^

^

^

on

e l as*

^ ay

thus ex-

is

on the

last night

elapsed the day follow-

is

^-X.

x-

x

x

O

or finally, or ^^>-j ^JUJj! -^ C. x ^

""

"

"

^-

the last night .

".

w*^ f ^5

x

P

still

"one night

^f& -^

the thirtieth

Finally, 4w

expressed c^>^ -^ C ^

Ox

^

L^P-J

x-

ing

The twenty-eighth

still ^X X

left;" the twenty-ninth

of Eajab remaining." XX O XOX

227

'

0^- *^ e

*x

^a

^

twelye hours

of sunlight) of Eajab."

The Muhammadan or lunar months

a.

table

;

but in a period of thirty years,

calate the twelfth

month

instead of twenty-nine. all

are so arranged as to con-

of thirty and twenty-nine days alternately, as in the following

sist

Mnhammadan

final short

it is

found necessary to inter-

eleven times so as to be reckoned thirty days

The months

countries,

retain their Arabian

names

merely omitting the nUnation, or

[the

vowel.

TABLE OF THE ARABIAN MONTHS.

1.

.

30 days.

2.

29,

3.

30

4.

29 *

5.

30

6.

29

in

228

SYOTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES, add that

such months as consist of twentynine days, the nights and days remaining in the second half are less b.

It is needless to

by unity than those we ICth of Sha'btin **

is

detailed respecting Eajab,

expressed as follows

thirteen nights of Sha'ban

holds with every other

except the

last,

in

month

still

^ (^Jj

^Ux

remaining

JlSLc

cJb!

and the same rule

;"

that consists only of twenty-nine days,

we above

which, as

:

For example, the

stated, is liable to intercalation

eleven times in thirty years.

SYNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES, Concord of

AUjwHwM

with their Substantives,

250 and 251,

2G5, "Wo have already slated,

that, as a

general rule, tho substantive always precedes the adjective or epithet which

"

is

employed

estimable "book."

in

its

L&s

however, the substantive

If,

by being in a

signification

having the

to qualify it; as,

article prefixed or a

Ox

G-*O

"

by

0*0

lima, *Ai!

;

restricted

affixed, the adjective &

or epithet will also take tho article

"be

"an

of regimen, or

state

pronoun

ls

}

^^ LJc

the estimable book of Moses ;" **&\ <~>&M "the great (or u The same book. ?? estimable) book;" i-JoS &$*, his estimable \

rule holds with regaxd to proper names, which, of course, are

"Abraham **$\ We may further observe that when the substantive

definite in their

the faithful" is

own nature;

not restricted In

not take the article

thus,

its signification, ;

thus,

j^. *

^i\

as above, the epithet does

^^ ^ ^

o

JbtJI

"

I have read in

(somo) ancient book." 266*

Tho

case adjective, or epithet agrees in

with

its

sub-

229

CONCORD OF ADJECTIVES, ETC.

stantive;

as,

J^UM

*>j&\

J\*n

^p

<$

"I passed by

This agreement,

the prudent, the generous, the excellent."

not a matter of necessity

is

however,

when

Zaid,

the substantive

is

a proper name, consequently definite, and followed Tby several

preceding example for in such instances the epithets may be put in the nominative singular, the word " " who is," or which is," being understood thus we may y& epithets, as in the

;

;

say, <J^lS

\

L^3

\

J2$\

^ cj^.

we may employ word L5 J^ "I mean,"

or finally

;

the epithets in the accusative case, the or

"I signify" being

If the substantive is inde-

understood..

terminate, as a general rule the nearest epithet agrees with

in case, and the rest

it

either in the nominative or

may be put

in the accusative.

An

267.

adjective agrees in gender

and number with

its

substantive if the latter be in the singular or dual number,

however, the substantive be a broken plural and masculine, or a regular plural feminine, the qualifying adjective is usually put in the femi-

whether

it

be masculine or feminine.

If,

&

nine* singular, as in the following

" sons,"

i.e.

?S

^O-O f

:

-"

a^C*

S^ ty\ ^

"many

O-O*

a numerous offspring;" JLL^H J^Jsil "the provi-

sions arriving (in

"Men

examples

abundance);" thus in the Kur,an,

iii

12

:

are gratified with the love of pleasures ariang from

women, and

children,

and

silver,

In this last sentence the word

J^

ployed in a collective sense, and

an irregular or broken pluraL

and horses of great value."

is

?

though singular,

is

em-

consequently equivalent to

This mode of construction,

SYNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES.

230

applicable chiefly to irrational animals, and to things without life in general ; for when the substantive deis

however,

notes a rational being the adjective agrees with

it according substantive plural masculine^ not

?

A

to the general rule.

denoting rational beings, the feminine plural

cbl^U

thus,

;

ened swords The

we have

cl^ail XW

;

have the adjective in " ??

also

S^lj

destructive lions

f

JL>lyi tli^L "sharp-

t)^r "mountains firmly fixed u ?3

cblls?Vj

a.

may

?? days enumerated.

irregular concord of adjectives with their substantives, which

just detailed,

no means

A

rare*

is

the

more usual

;

but the regular mode

11

:

*Mx&

;


Ss&

is

by

substantive plural not unfrequently takes the

adjective in the plural, whether regular or broken Ixvi.

;

thus, Kur,an,

There

restriction, however, that the regular plural of Adjectives is

is this

employed

only with substantives denoting rational beings,

$

A

collective

noun

in the singular nsiially takes the adjective in xu*o

^

the plural; thus, Kur,an,

thou us against the unbelieving

^gg "much"

or

tribe*"

from the Kur

many

?

"many/ though under

an,

iii,

146

:

j^ ^J;

$

($\ ^J* ^>j&\ "Aid

In like manner the adjective

?

employed with a plural substantive,

^

"*3 t,

141; ^yjjWI

iii.

a singular form,

is

as in the following examples

^t

^3

J^J

^ ffl

of the prophets have been slain, and along with them

myriads

(of

men)?"

from these two

(viz,

and women*"

We

Also

Iv.

Adam and

1:

lUj

often

\^

il^

U^

(s

how

many

^5j "and

Eve) he hath disseminated many men

may, however,

in these expressions consider Jli

as employed in apposition, | 255 , with, the preceding substantives.

231

CONCORD OP ADJECTIVES, ETC. 268. If a substantive in the dual or plural, that stantive expressive of

by

is,

a sub-

more individuals than one, be followed

which has reference only to one of the each adjective must agree in gender and case with

adjectives, each of

individuals,

the noun to which

number;

thus, tte^j

it refers

but

;

must be in the singular

it

0^ u^^ (J u^ "" ^

a(^ *

wo companions,

a wise, and a foolish ;" Lli^J D^C? *>/ *Ub ^^ tlfj^ u^*? J& a a certain ting had three wazirs, (one) liberal, (one) stingy, ^

and

(one)

elliptical

extravagant."

mode

however,

This,

merely an

is

of expression; for instance, the first of the

above sentences,

if

expressed in

fall,

would be

as follows

*

"

companions, one of them wise, the other foolish ;" j\4- *4^^!J

or it

"

^^ ^r^^

i^A^r^ (J

panions, a wise companion^

and a

<1>^

foolish

I

might read

^d

com-

companion."

269. If the same adjective or attribute refers to two or

more singular nouns, all of which are in the same case and of the same gender, the attribute will be put in the dual or plural, according to the number of persons referred to ; and it

must agree with the

J$\&\

\**j <JLwl(j

$&

latter in

kLJik

gender and case

"I have

;

ttcus,

;

acoosted j\imro aad

I have written to Zaid, the two poets-"

Jf,

liowevar, the

substantives be not in the same caae, the predieafe will agree

with them only in gender

;

and

it is

optionally put either in

XI

the nominative or accusative,

cumstances ; thus

we may say,

dml

or plu#a|, according to cir-

S7OTAX Or NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES.

232 or

we may

t' L^

x

/

*

^^U-H X

J^ L^-,^

AJJ

understood, and tho sense

in the second, the verb

nr

<-M

u-^K.

In the

;

"

of these last expressions tho pronoun UJ*

first is

\t

say 3

"they

is,

^\

they both,"

are the two poets;"

"I mean"

"I

or

signify/' is

understood.

The verbal

270.

^U and

of the measures

adjectives

ill-xl^ are of

common

tho

gender, and some-

^

times assume the termination

which gives them a more

i ,

intensive signification; hence they apply alike to masculine Sx

f

9

or feminine nouns; thus, IS^U

"a most

^j

wearied man;"

a

U^

"a

a most wearied woman;" so, liliL ^J>y a a very cunning man." bravo man;" ^^5 ^>y i'^jl^

A

very

few of

these adjectives^ however, assume the usual generic terminau tiou; thus, Jijb "elegant," fern* S&Jb, credulous,"

^^

fern, ii'li^;

^X^ "

SjiS

;

^j

" poor? fom.

morcifuy fom*

lx>J

when

u

aj^;

-SL^-j

^

a

hostile," fern.

Adjectives of the measure

-

of a passive signification, follow a similar rule;

otherwise, they arc xmder the masculine form,

both genders, thus, Kur,an, ^for she

is

a

66

ii.

3?

unto

;

also

IxvL 8

God with

sure Ik&i

**@

iL^J %$ $\

sincere repentance."

when

****'

:

*5j)

,J\

\j>

(that

the

"turn yourselves

Adjectives of the mea<*

woman

till

x

of a passive or neuter signification, agree alike

with nouns masculine or feminine a

to

;

to the yoke, nor to

cow not accustomed $

ground

common

had boon)

by a wounded maiden."

;

If,

3

"

thus, LgS J*pi^ JL^VJ

53

slain;

-O

fpf*

^^ <^p

u

I saw

l passed

however, tho substantive be

CONCORD OF ADJECTIVES, ETC.

233

feminine, and not expressed but understood,

an adjective of

the foregoing

measure assumes the feminine termination;

-

-rr

J.T.

>;?

A

thus, Kurgan, v. 4

"it

fr

A'

*M!I
' 1*7?"

><$-

4*^^ f3

\?

'"'<-*n

<&~*J

i

>X"

AJua

"

'-

c^p-

forbidden to you (to eat an animal) that has died of

is

itself,

:

also blood, also (an animal) that

or (one that) has

been

(partially)

has been gored to death,

devoured by wild beasts;"

s^

^

which sentence the substantive
in

signification, it generally agrees alike in the

masculine form

with nouns of either gender; thus, in the Kur,an, LL 41 ^c-o ^ ~o ^ ^ j* ^ j. " IjuM rtfi *&lc l3ufl we have sent -against them a most de:

In a few instances, however, the feminine " added to the adjective thus, i'l^^ liJ^L a .S/

vastating wind."

termination

is

;

Sf

L*3 ii^i "a

praiseworthy quality," or

quality deserving

of censure." i

271. In Arabic the substantive

is

frequently omitted, and

then the adjective, if it refers to a living creature, is used in the masculine form and in the feminine, if it refers to an inani;

mate object; "

44^

thus,

*5lp "your

wonders" or

"

evils,"

wonderful things;;

good (works)" or "virtues."


;

as in the Eur,an, ii

59

:

3^ j

quently, or

5

Occasionally a masculine adjec-

tive is applied to a lifeless thing

IsAi

meaning "evil deeds;"

its,

"and he (who) hath done a good deed." Frewhen the substantive is thus omitted, the adjective,

equivalent, remains in a state of concord with the

former; thus, Kur,an,

Iv.

56: <-J^aH

u cjVj^l5

4

T#J

ia these

(garden) there will be (damsels) of modest mien;" where so

SYNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES.

234

r

*s

So yL2l

understood.

?

who

(of one

by the two hands

(arrows)

^\ ^ ^ {JL ^^

a

he shoots

the most expert

is)

archer of men.;" where the word JP-J is understood as the & " the hands." two complement of {j> by

A

272.

substantive instead of an adjective

quontly used as an epithet <

always in the singular, agreeing with

and retaining

its

"two J^j X

^Jl

"just men,"

JJj

thus,

asleep,"

just

men;"

*

The

when

sentence

own

gender; as

J^

where

&&*

&jj* "I

^^

also

the substantive

^

^ ^L

D4y

P a ^sed by a

l iavo

l^Sj

and

conciliating is better than alms

)j^ ^J^rj '

SS;

man

(who)

is

So

speech familiar

which

offence accom-

,

;

man;

??

"a

Hi 181 wo have

&j cSi^

accused thee of falsehood

a just

"sleeping,"

fi

J^vij ulsjy^ JjS

Again, Kur,fwi,

cJ^ ffi u3Xf ^

"

otherwise indeterminate;

is

4^0!

panied"

substantive in case,

be a verb or clause of a

equivalent to

is

noun remains

so in the plural,

may

epithet

its

not unfre-

jac "justice," for

example,

case the qualifying

in which

just;"

^jjlfi

for

;

is

another example

"

ufy^

y

:

If they have

verily the apostles before thee

have been falsely accused, (men who) came with proofs (of So in the following expression: their divine mission)*"

^^ for

jL^J e-^5

3

atll

firgt

tanplo (that) hath been

built

men*"

a.

In Arabic the relative pronoun

sentences as

tlio

foregoing;

is

never used as with, us in suet

for example,

where the noun,

is

inde-

t

235

CONCORD OF ADJECTIVES, ETC. because *yj <^jj

\

equivalent to

is

example:

Jdl*n cjXfll

"

^^ L/$\ cjO^

nominative of

When

251.

,

On

.

the king

the relative

who is just;"

thus,

;

equivalent to

the qualifying verb or participle has a

own, the same must be accompanied by the

its

when

the other hand,

we then employ

the substantive has the article for

JQ1

-"

>

f ?t

?

affixed

s

9

(sS

/

pronoun applicable to the noun qualified ; thus, *ju ty\ J^r^ & s ^^/* s " I have passed by a man whose father is asleep" (lit. "is sleeping"); " e+\* ic^ ^~^T}] I

"

whom 'Amru was

with

optionally suppressed

when

evident from the context

^ "

And

I

last

;

word \$*\

5, referring to

the meaning of the sentence

is

is

quite

thus

5-

be distance and length of time (that) have or the wealth (which) they have received." Here the

know not whether

estranged them

This affixed pronoun, however,

in love."

;

"

it

they have received

" (for *jj

W)

3^*> because the omission leads

omits the pronoun to

no ambiguity or

obscurity.

273.

When

an adjective

restricted in its signification

is

means of a substantive that follows

man etc.

;

first place,

the adjective (when

retains its nunation,

u

and the

there

came

to

me

it

restrictive

has not the article)

noun or complement iO^O ^

put in the nominative case *

a "

a youth fair of countenance, the Arabs have three modes of expressing the same.

learned in the law,"

In the

is

as in the phrases

it,

"

by "

.S.0X

*^x

as ^Ji\

j^*^ J*rj \J?^ a man the father of whom is handsome ;"

in which expression

;

?

we may "

also

I passed

say xjA

by a man

^>*.

Again,

of ugly visage ;"

NOUNS WITH

CTNTA.X OF

236

where wo might

may

Tbc

follows^ fair of

te~}\

ance ;

also say

Secondly^ the adjective

&-j ^J.

state of

put In a

'ADJECTIVES,

regimen with the complement,

te$\ ^1*. "j4j \J*^~ "there came

me

to

a

as

man

countenance;^ where we may also say a^J ^i. So " 1 passed by a man of fair countenj4>? dfj^

^^ ?)

where we may

also say *f>

Thirdly, the

<.)***

adiectlvo (in the absence of the article) retains

and the complement

its nunation^

put in the accusative case;

is

thus,

U

there came to me a man fair as to t)4y Lsl*"^r "* O C A x X n or with the article So in the countenance ; -Jn ^>-

U>4 *

\JH

*

*

^-

a

" following example

:

\#>-J

^^^

J>^j c^pi "

1 passed "by a

T

man In

fair as to

countenance;" or with the

mode

this third

fail to rceogiilHo

article

X O X"*

X X

*&$]

^^>

of expression the classical scholar will not

a well -known Greece construction, which the

"Os Latin poets have, not unfroq[uontly, imitated; thus, n "miloH fractus m,eml)ra >? etc. Of Iiumeresque d hailirt course the reader would consider a translation of these phrases ?

;

m an affront. 274* la the three kind** of censtruction just described, the adjective

may

or

preceding mil^tuntivc

ment rimy

U!HO

dcfluilo, 1

by

not liuve the

may l>o

in definite

definite

article,

according as

or indefinite*

or indefinite.

nieaiiB of the article

$

;

2

its

The compleIt is rendered

by an

additional

affixed pronoun; complement having that article; 8 by an and 4 by an additional complomont haying an affixed *,proof It follow* an a cotisccpoaco that we have a variety different eonstruetioiiH,

examples of which wo here subioin

COISTCOBD

from

OF ADJECTIVES, ETC.

237

De

Saey, Tome II. p. 199, differing from that writer in our only arrangement of the subject, by presenting to the reader in the first place the correct and classical modes of

expression such as are to be

met with more esteemed Arabian authors. 1st

Classical constructions

x x

S

in the writings of the

employed by the best authors.

9

A man

ma3a

Zaid

j

J

_

of fair countenance.

w^ ose

who

is

father is fair of countenance.

the fair of countenance.

SYNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES,

238

*1\ X

9 G

3

^*.^'

x

f

J

XGO

^

X

GW3 X

t

J

x o x

$.

AO<

^^W-WST

.

"^

/ x xg-o

Zaid wliose father

sox

is fair

of countenance.

&

^\ X

t>

j,Go

G x

X x'V'O

^

S"

tw"*'

^JJ SadConstructions not theless, are to

T 3t

^

I

Jo

/

of,

but which, never-

;

Zaid

fair

of countenance,

t*>

M^*>- J^TJ x

9 o

be approved

be met with*

to-. *AwJ J SjJ^^

cJl

to

A man wliose

father is fair of countenance*

X xV*o A Ox

ouj

Zaid whose father

is fair

of countenance,

barely admissible, and not of frequent occurrence* XO XGx> A

x x

t|

&^

*cf

9

S

9

"^^ jp_

Gx j>xx

x o x

b

A man

of fair conntenaBCe,

A man

whose father

vP'x"

x x 1

fif

IIJAWU>.

is

of fair countenance,

239

CONCORD OE ADJECTIVES, ETC. Constructions to be altogether eschewed.

4th

o x

9

^-

x

The

a.

X>

1

Zaid whose father

x

^

an

countenance.

fair of

\

adjective even

also receive

"

Zaid the

s xc-o 5-ox

,*xu^sr

affixed

when

pronoun

it

has the article prefixed to

as,

;

of countenance.

is fair

may

it

x^**^ \j (j^\}\ &i$J& \J&&\ !U-J3

the ugly of visage, the strong of head, and the small of it,"

"the small of head."

In

;

for

"

example "

:

&>^1

\

i.e.

form of construction, the adjective

this

must ohey the general rule respecting the use of the 251

\

^cl

l^-j

man

a

fair of

article, see

countenance

;"

Zaid the handsome of countenance."

b.

in the genitive case

it

must

itself

in gender, number, and case

passed

by a man

fair of

saw a woman to

me

fair of

two

thus, &>-p

countenance ;"

fair

\

te?'^

;"

&>-^l

\

teJL-

ing example

:

of countenance."

l^J

of countenance." tive^

maybe

^/^ If,

-ii/*

" l*j*\

c^yjj

x

\1^>.

\

c:

^1>^ J^r^

"

^>-j ^^^r

^

I

there

This concord of the

adjective with the preceding substantive, equally holds, restrictive substantive

governs

" ;

countenance

men

it

agree with the preceding substantive

(jt-Ct

came

which

If the adjective has a substantive following,

though the

in the accusative case; as in the fallow-

"

J^r^ ^jf*

^

P^s^d by a man handsome

however, the complement be put in the nomina-

the adjective then agrees with the preceding substantive in case,

but with the complement in gender and number 1

P 81686 ^ ky a

;

as for

man whose

example

:

face is hand-

SYNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES,

240 some ;" IJ^J handsome.'

1

examples

^^

:

woman whose face is

handsome

;"

hearts are hard

;

as in the following

"

&!**>

*

J^fy ^^ ^jj*

&

L>

^

"

faces

but woe be unto them whose

i^lSJ Jiy

j^jjls

men whose

passed by

& i>

c.

passed by a

If the following substantive be a broken plural, the

\

are

1

usually put in the feminine singular

is

adjective

"

^- jpy*b ^jj*

i

J! !

Before a substantive masculine in the plural number, the ad-

put in the masculine singular; as in the following

jective is usually O

example

*"

*^

a

& Ulg ud^ l>y ^^)j

;

saw a

1

man whose

slave-boys

adjective may, however, be put in the plural, either 9 <2s s**s *9 s f f.s? or broken or regular ; as ^rj

The

are sick."

,

^^y

\j*

Concord of the Attribute with the Subject.

When

275,

an adjective

sentence subject

first

(

is

24,8, l,\

employed as the

the general rule

and the attribute after

it,

is to

"my

a,

;

tlms,

father

subject, article,

as

is

*j*

sick;"

wo have

by an

^IkLiJl J^tr**

"the Sultan

affixed pronoun^ or

we

is sick;

when

observed in ??

J^ ^}

?? The "Joseph may be restricted by the

is

*~*~*ji

just soen ?

place the

the verb "to be,"

in the present tense 5 being entirely omitted, as

158,

attribute of a

by

its

own

sick

nature as being

a proper name; whereas the attribute is not necessarily so 251, restricted, as is the ease with a mere adjective,

When

it

so happens that the attribute has the article, the

third personal pronouns yd, etc. (equivalent to

"he

is," etc.)

come in between the subject and an ambiguity; for olJierwise the phrase might be mistaken

attribute in order to avoid

241

CONCO&D OF ADJECTIVES, ETC.

mere concord of an adjective with

for a

$f "God, he

yaT^T^

attribute agrees

^^ ^ ^

thus,

"

substantive ; thus,

The

55 the living, the eternal.

is

in gender

its

and number with the subject; were true

his parents

believers.'

7

If

the subiect be a broken plural masculine the attribute may be ??^"-^ ~

put in the feminine singular

"

;

i-W^1

^^

thus, I'gd

Jv

tL>^\

[

do see." (their) hearts are blind although (their) eyes

Kur,an, Ixxix. 8:

day (men's) hearts be) cast down." a.

When

<*-> U- \&j\*u\ -S&&-\)

shall

be perturbed

"

C^

<

So,

that

OI1

their looks (shall

;

the attribute precedes the subject (which takes place in

then if the subject be dual interrogative and negative propositions), or plural, the attribute is to be placed ia the singular

jL^jT j.l J

" \

do not go out."

may

do the two

men

enter ?"

"When the subject

be put in the plural

;

thus,

JU-JJ 1

^U-

as follows

;

a

U

:

men

the

a collective noun the attribute ? " & all are obedient unto

is

^f&

^

him."

b.

When

the subject consists of two nouns in a state of regimen, to agree with the governing which

the attribute,

ought grammatically

with the noun governed noun, sometimes agrees in gender

"every living (creature so

j-/

rf

mittal of crimes is with

avoidance of decorum S

nine singular plural as

^

is

them

thus,

shall) taste of

^ Com-

(

meritorious, and

a virtue."

;

among them

the

In this last sentence, the femisJ~"*

word governed agrees with the

we have just

stated above.

J^\j&

\

9

a

broken

,

31

212

SYNTAX 01 NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES. 1

(he

Of

Decrees of Comparison.

211 we enumerated

270* In

more usual measures

tlio

of

verbal adjectives.

The comparative and

superlative degrees

of all such arc, as

we

of the measure

and ^JSJ

for the masculine,

noun

prefixed to a

observed in

81

,

for the feminine*

in a atato of regimen

lute sen$e ? having the article

may

When

&j!\

Jj^yl

"he

is

*'

^

she

is

noun, the adjective always

a very excellent

*'

woman ^

a most excellent

man

;"

Tbe

in a state

remains in the singular number and masculine gender u

$f

or used in an abso-

;

^)t "before it.

of regimen with an indefinite

These

Jl^v

;"

X

P^

JsfJ ^*

r^

thus,

;

3^1

1&

"they are very

Wliou the noun governed by the comparative

great men,"

adjective is definite, that

is,

when

it

has the

article or

an

affixed pronoun, the comparative generally remains in the

measure of

tlio

masculine singular, whatever

may be

^ w^D

the

gender and number of the noun following; as *uJl o

"aho

most excellent of women;" ^$\*&\ you two are the most truthful of the truthful." So in Kur,an, u ii 90: jjw{;J\ ^j*\ ^MsaJ verily thou wilt find them tie IB

tlio

,

fi

most greenly of men,"

ovov, tliat tlio comparative adjective is tlie

following

noun both

in gender

put in accordance with

and in number;

following examples: *TlJl JLa! ^Jr^sho

woman;"

$\

how-

It not unfrequently occurs,

is

a most excellent

i^i UX "tliey both are the most

'

as in the

excellent *

(men) of tho tribe." Wlion the foiaparative, liaving the

article prefixed^

DEG-KEES OF COMPARISON.

is

it

placed absolutely,

243

number with

agrees in gender and

s

the noun or pronoun to which,

it

refers;

"they two are most upright men;"

^ An

J^Jl IsX


u^

^ 3*r "He

1

become most

is

supreme."

insignificant

^

Again, ^tSt

most excellent among men." in this

as

adjective,

regular form ^La*!

and in

like

measure

last

they two ix.

The

has caused

but the word of

;

may be

either

of the

may be

j*I,

see

"When the

215.

neither accompanied

is

of the regular

by the

article,

nor in a state of regimen with the following noun,

always employed in the

and when a comparison

example

JoS

:

\

3.

s>

LXL S'^'BQ

thou;" is

"

"t-

^fii

(

<^J

iL^l jV^I

^^

followed

is

sedition is worse than

are

jfSil &*^-\ SS

is

for equivalent to our "than;" 7

is Ox-

2*11

?

than he;'

made, the adjective

is

^ which^ ^ ll j

it

form of the masculine singular;

"we 5

God

plural masculine of the

example,

e^Ul*.?, or irregular, as

o~o

:

^JL&I] lb "they are the

manner, the feminine

particle

40

or of the irregular or broken form j^l*f;

,

comparative adjective

by the

ll&

who have been unbe-

the word (viz. the power) of those lievers to

"

lib

u U/u^

50-0

^iciM

So from the Kur,an,

are Tery diminutive (women)."

QiM

thus,

u

murder;"

more worthy of the kingdom

Ahmad ^

is

more

^1^1

^U

than

trutfcfal

J

-ng

HJ\ fj^

U

"

there

nothing more hurtful to the constitution of men. than this

vile pliant."

word

;

When the comparative

or is accompanied

superlative

degree;

by the

tjius,

adjective governs another

artiole, it

^^$1 U^

then expresses the $J1

u

God

is

the

SYNTAX OE NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES.

244

Gx-O-O

most merciful of the merciful; 57

ji\

35

yj

s

jjj\

"God

is

most

groat" 278. "When the comparative adjective

is

indefinite complement, as in the expression l^-j

J^\

must

"be

J^j

Q\ ^

most excellent as a man," the complement of tho same gender and number as the noun or pro-

J^

constitutes the subject of tho proposition; thus,

u

Ui

they two arc most excellent as men,"

"When

tho tfubsluntivo governed by the adjective of comparison followed

by

tho words being u

u

Jjl

<jwUl

y*>

he

is

put in the accusative

is

tho most excellent of

little

inverted, the proposition

follow the comparative adjective, but *

of comparison

;

is

In an interrogative sentence, the order of

man."

t/uoad

same

u complement, the

case; thus, l^-j

men,

Or

yb "lie is

noun which iir*Uv

followed by an

xr

*"

^<*0

*

as jJi'\ ciUl f^\ *

thou more oxcellenty ?1 **tiho prosecuted (lo UK)

*

is

prefixed to the object

^ "than which

^

<*~*^a\

&L+

LLJJ^J

the fruit of

tlu%

^ does not

U

of the

O

O

Jj

JiaU

two art ^

\*J-*O

L5L^JbjT;

date tree; nay, what

she presented (wan) hotter than that" 2711 Between tho adjective of comparison and the object

compared u as 7^c

^

restrictive or

JL

o%

^1

jjji

complementary word may intervene;

"Zaid

in

more abundant

m wealth than

u

*Ainru;" d^Ii ^* ^j^ ^jii.1 v.jl thou art inoro agreeable in njf view than any besides thoo." In these expressions the #

aad not simply

Js^t

and J&.\*

\*%

o

^^

x o*

u?^? XCi^l and If the noun which con-

adjectives of comparison arc in reality,

DEGREES OF COMPARISON. stitutes the subject of

comparison be in the nominative case,

must precede the comparative adjective

it

&U ^1^1

ing example:

whose father

#y*l

as in the follow-

;

ji^ d^X "I

passed

by a man

handsomer than he;" but on no account

(is)

ought we to say

245

'&*

&y\

c/*, though ^^-\ J^-y "***'

it is

quite

$.

correct to say, as

we

formerly stated,

man whose

passed by a

*\

be correct to say

man whose

father

sentence, the verb

thus

:

made

When

more

"

of,

c/J^

I passed

by a

as in this last

When,

the construction will run " I passed by a man whose

(or to a greater degree)

than he

is."

the preposition involving the comparative adjective

but preceded by a negative preposition, the

affirmative,

above arrangement will

^

use

lL*j&\ x^\ (j-li: Jj>~/

father is fair,

is

than he. 57

jji^ ^js* "I Neither would

55

^^ ji^ ^j^

*sL*

is fairer is

^^

father is handsome.

f

it

x\

ox

j^j jj-^

differ

VST*

^^ ,<,

,

'

Jjs^l a^c

man

^

as in the following example

;

"*?/"

'
^^^0-1 JU-^ ci-ui;

i"

U

UT

:

i

I have not

whose eye the collyrium is more beautiful than in that of Zaid;" and if in this last sentence we employ seen (any)

in

the verb ^1^- instead of the adjective ^>-?,

^,

preposition c,x

<^

^U

cr^

^ ,

we may

for the

substitute the particle els'" like;" as follows: ' p ox ^ vf^-' ' Cn ^i^ TJ 11

^s?

^ .

*,

^^s^ Jsr

1

J^-x

^/^sr; M>-J

^-+11) ^*? literally,

"I have not seen (any) man

in whose eye the collyttuta

beautiful like the beauty of

in the eye

it

280. Verbal adjectives in the comparative state, even

is

when

derived from transitive verbs, never have the noun which they

put in the accusative case. Such of them as are derived from verbs expressive of love or of aversion, ar&

directly govern

i"

WVNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES,

combined, with the complomcnt, denoting the object of the and to that deHculenoe, by moans of the preposition J ;

x

noting llm subject, by

"the

tnio

^^

^iJt

rf.

believer

*<J

-

,

(

*O

c"^

1

^

1

of Clod than (any) Iwsulos cleivecl

h

fndli

its

Hum

*

''

*il

u

^

i

lg(

lo

j&

lm

than you."

than is

willi

more beloved

" or "to recognise

m
of

th<^

preposition

more*, ctonvorsant

ifn

ohjoct

with the

any other

by means

(///,

Bearchful) of

Comparative adjoctives derived from

^rbn follow tho construct ioa of their roots

i^

very ulmtinonl in (utiuiw of) the world

IB

(lo follow) the goo*l,

and moat

and very

far r
ftirthcr ol>sorv(

k

,

d Si

than

thaii

thus,

and very

from crime,

that in the employment of

may bo somewhat

comparative adj
nio

?

;

cnuiloutf of

28 L W<* may

elliptical 1

of

scon in tho following example:

mon* studious

is

^*>[f

himself-" *

comparative adjective

know,"

l>y

J^

d<*riv
may bo

tlw proposition J; as /

a

"I am

coiuicHjfcMl

IB

it

Higiiificatioi^

^

believer

A

liirn."

Ul

**-ir^

WliHi

you."

tril

<*omplomcni

'^ J^V

thus,

<^;

^ 1C

from a verb wgniiyuig

combined with

^

^

God more

loveth f

*.

,

^ L^

J[;

*Jb'

llius,

^ ,2*

thuH.

; *

"

'

,

1"

my

*

Sr

'

V*j\*

(am) of him;"

~)i\
m wowmtnilar

;

<jwJS\

to tho buffalo

"ho

^ ^^

where

)J>

uecennity

&

v

in

i

more needful for

^j^lJ

of

^&j^ U

"

jij

aad

than to the luxreo;" whoro

GOVERNMENT OF NOUNS. *L

is for

extend*

still

"

^

^Xl5

farther, *

tj

&**

(J*-

than

its

^ ^^^ *^

The

resemblance." the

in

as

247

example

*

^

^**

o

may

already given:

"*-

u"^\ ^rj ^^j (

\Jt

ellipsis

U

^

I have not

man

in whose eye the collyrium appears more " beautiful than in the eye of Zaid ; in which sentence *L* is " than the beauty of it (viz., the ellipticaly used for seen any

^L ^

We

collyrium) in the eye of Zaid." or eyen

may even

say here

*

Government of Nouns,

"When in Arabic one noun governs another

282.

genitive case, the governing word, as

put

first,

and

the

first

place, ;

it

loses its nunation, retaining

thus,

or

c-^j

cl?l^?

governing another word, becomes u

respectively, as Joj

cl?\^

Zaid's book," etc.

Secondly, if

plural masculine, as joj l7l^

a

250

stated,

?

subject to the following modifications.

is

simple vowels

we

in the

it

drops

Zaid's

"

^l^

merely the

a book,"

book;" <xj (^\^

its final

Zaid's two books," etc.

In

when

c-^, and cpl^

cSlix^,

it

is

^

u

in

be a dual, or a regular syllable

or

u

Thirdly,

if

Jj

(

68)

;

the govern-

ing word be a

diptote (singular or broken plural), it then becomes a triptote, as we observed, 68, a, with respect* to

the influence of the article. is

an affixed

some farther

when we come a.

An

when

worf governed pronoun, then the govemiag word undergoes modifications, which we shall notice hereafter Lastly,

th.e

to treat of the personal pronouns.

adjective, or a participle

need adjectively, when accompanied

-48

SYNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES.

by a complement,

put in a state of construction similar to the " as

is

preceding examples;

J^. ^>J

^LjH

Joj cLjjli "(a man) striking Zaid/

The

^

be definite

;

arriving at

flic

BtcKlfant in

arc*

Ka'ba."

indefinite XG-O

f

*)

:

\

though " jJU ^oJ& a

its

complement

gift (or victim)

If the antecedent or subject

is to

be made

of cottnso lakes the article; thus, pLaSl iJLjuSl "those

it

definite,

Urns, Kur,an, v. 96

of face;"

fair

striking or striker of Zaid)."

(lit.

employed remains

adjective thus

man

a

"

5

^^

prayer;" t,

hoad of the winner

;"

*

-jS

\

^j

"he who smites the M^lSll x " i-4^* Muhammad who is fair of

'*r' &,

"*

*

x

who

*

t

^1^

1

f

countonanco."

b.

The in

prefixed

U

tlnw, j-^t

;

is

mO

X

.J\ (jwU\ x r

$

tho uiowi (w)

what

the fmst unbeliever in

IKJ

arc the

l)OKt imtioii

x

***"

*J *'

XCiJ C/A!]

**

^^

cl^l

283*

him;" *

9

^J] ^*y

Wo

forbidden;"

"tlio tiling which pleases

to

xiSS

j>\& J^\

x

^

%

"do not

among mankind f

so likewise,

*"*" J}

culj J^l

*'

verily, tho first edifice built for

y;t

worship God)

is

that (which

liavo already fttutod that

Bamo

&

u^r^yil ^la J^i ISl "you

(jwU15

that has appeared

^

mankind (wherein

is

serves to

it

5,

x

mankind

not unfrequently

a slate of regime?!! to the substantive which kM

qualify

used adjcctively

or notin

a
is) at

when two

Mecca," substantives

and aro put in a stato of appoHition. "When, however, wo moot with, instances whoro tiioy aro put in a stato of rogimon wo aro to consider signify tho

tiling tlioy agroo in case,

?

tho construction aw elliptical 9

(or wallet),"

moans jjj x xt,o

so ^

^w-^t '"O

y

(

u ;

thug, j^S oJj *

^0

Zaid of the sack

4

(J^\ ^J

"Zaid nicknamod

^

"tho day of Thursday/

a oJ^"**9

f4^!1

tho

}*

tho day called Thursday;"

5

is X-10-M3

,^\

for" /X ^

X5u

249

GOVERNMENT OF NOUNS. "the the

elliptical

called

by

expression for

When

noun

is

generally put

cLJLtf

jJLs

turn unto

God

The words

K

rule, for

the house

is

by some

as (jLSJuJt ut-4?-

;

complement which

in the plural, but it

$\

^J\ \jj

u

\

and

(fern,)

may,

is

number

in the dual,

less elegantly,

thus from the Kur,an, Ixvi. 4:

"if you both (wives of the prophet)

(penitently), for verily

your hearts have swerved."

IsK "both," form an exception

to

this

they can be prefixed only to nouns and pronouns of the

See hereafter,

dual number.

284.

"

a noun which ought logically to be in the dual

be put in the dual or singular;

UL^J

(or temple)/'

which expression

(the epithet) holy ;"

in a state of construction with a

is

the

the prayer of

^jj& U ^LliM cLw

improperly written in a state of concord a.

"

hour;" (jwjjuM ci4? "the holy house

first

an

is

prayer/' means ^J^\ teuM si*

first

There

285,

c.

many words used only n

are

regimen, the word governed being either expressed or under? ^ ?

It is always

stood.

"

" possessors

;

expressed after

"

^L

likeness

>; ;

^

^

"pos$es$0r ;"

^ exception.^

^

There

which the word governed may be omitted; in which case the governing word takes the are others after

4?

article

fo;

;

such a^f

9

^

c

^

the totality ;

?>

SYNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES.

250

luminaries) nioveth in a (peculiar) orbit;'

5

where Ql

is for

J,j7

"the

U$J>, literally,

totality of these two."

^^u" ^gUi l^ij lILos J*^H u^lJ

Again,

"as to these

ii.

254:

we

apostles,

have distinguished a portion of them above a portion;" is for *f*wu So again in xvii 109 where j^Le. ^1^

^^

O-O

^

:

^OrtO

x^

-*U^\

J^\

j?c/"'

<jJJ

y^<3J

(

^

s

u

by whichever (name) you

U\

voke Him, (God, or the Merciful,) *

names

excellent

?? ;

where

s

u $

He

verily,

*& is for

u

in-

has most

5

o**

-Si

*J

Words

^U

#

which

are

indefinite

thus used only in a state of regimen remain

even when their complement

is

definite *

;

thus

x

' i

>j

U

"

Ah, many besides thee among women (have been) deluded (by me), fair ones whom 1 have dismissed with a divorce," where the word j X

noun u/ remains

though accompanied by the

affixed pro-

indefinite,

s

285, "Words expressive of time or portions of time, such as

^ ^ and

"timof

when employed state of

follows

the

j^X*

;

^ "a day;"

in a vague

and

IX

"an

hour,"

indefinite sense are put in a

regimen with a verbal proposition or sentence that in which ease they reject the nunation and retain vowels

single

^lir^JEi

thus,

;

$

from

the

Kur

?

an,

at the time

^

vi 119

uL$

(when) she will arrive at her abode;"

jij

Ji53T2

:

lit "this (i) the day (on which)

their voracity shall benefit the righteous;" l|^i

a

etc.,

"

to

him

(shall be) the

^

vi,

kingdom

73

:

(on

GOVERNMENT OF NOUNS.

that)

day (when) the trumpet shall

25 1

sounded.'

Tbe

5

"When

words of time such as the foregoing refer to a past event in a state of regimen with a nominal

may be put

they

16

proposition; thus, Kur,an, ad.

when they came forth;"

when

so also

^fi jU

:

J~?

rQ^

^ "on "

or*J

tlie

a* *^e

day

**

me

This rule does not apply to a words of time employed in a specific sense ; such, as jl^ a Hajjaj (was) governor*" Ss x

7

day/ a.

S x

as the apposite of
The words

and

*jj,
JJ

a night/

cj,

and such

5

etc,

also be

may

like,

employed as indeclinable, in which case they have always a fai^a

may

say jJbJ

^

\&&

;

in the phrase

(when) he conversed with ine,"

There are

b.

after

many

,*^^

we may

which the word governed " u "after;" before;"

is

|*j>

also say

indeclinable words

IjJb

lj

whose

(as above),

"

^

^oW final

"behind;" Jj$ the right;"

jUj& "to the

viewed as adverbs*

Whim

"on high;"

U1 "before"

"after;"

left/'

'.'^

are)

sufficient*^

is

like,

d

Such are

"otter;"

^

j^3 "above;"

^

*T]

"to

which are generally

^

''

t"

'

&& *

) ,-^

J>*y 4i

T

A/^5

^*I

"*

Sni01$3%$ well wor
Kur,an, xxx. 4: iS>

.

they are employed absolufcdy^ ^

viewed in the same phra&$ thus,

J ^*

(in presence of);

and such

or^toary j^Iet of syntax; thus, "

j*

generally suppressed*

^

"without" (sine); ffi "first;"

we

from the day

vowel

JJ^ "sufficient;"^

J2

the

jj

vowel; thus instead of

for their final

tiiii^p as dedSunbl^ or

^

JJJ

M

^j^JT^J "To

3Miay

b@

indeclinablo

;

God belongs

252

SXOTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES.

command

the

(both) before and after (the present time)

tence, according to

c*

either

by the

own nature,

<xw

^r

both/' or "twain/' have this pecu-

(fern.) lsi

word which they govern must be a

by an

article or

affixed

for instance, a proper

dual,

and

restricted

pronoun, or be

name

definite from its o-o ' s ^a^

;

thus,

^^J^S

\

\3|J M-i^jll ""

s

**

both of these

men and

^

both did that;" to the

good and

both of these

*rj

uxlJ

;"

"Verily

are expressed separately,

cannot govern the two together as with us ; thus " both Zaid and are not allowed to say in Arabic, jj/*^ jjjj

the words

liK*

K

^

***

'Amru;" but wo must

alter the expression

"Zaid and 'Amrn, both of them/ ig

UK "We

Ui*l

a limit, and both of these (have)

When two nouns

au aspect and a power,"

we

women

^

'

i

^ fe-s^J^J,^ J

<

to the evil there is

K and

sen-

"

K and

The words

liarity, that the

some grammarians, we might read

which

;"

set aside

" Both,

my

by

U&K

and say,

*&j jjj

7

Sometimes, however,

this

a poetical license, as in the following verse

brother and

my

friend find in

me

a support in

rule

:

their mis-

fortunes and adversities*'

28C. Tlic governing

word may be followed by more than

one word governed; thus3

what u

Is

liiddon

and

^J^\

J5l
pji

(of what is) manifest;" j*ji

"tho knowerof \^

L^\^\ Jd^ Sometimes

tho creation of the heavens and of the earth,"

the governing

without

it,

word

is

omitted,

when

as in tho following verso *

\ys

the sense

;

**

**&

/

is

obvious

GOVERNMENT OE NOUNS.

253

"Dost thou consider every man a man? and (every) (shining) find, in

"^ y

^Sj J> of

?^

^

jJli'*

tfJ^C-O

Jf

/?^M fkSH

Muhammad

s

word J omitted before ^ I

.

The

contains an ellipsis of a similar kind

following sentence X

where we

in the night a fire (of hospitality) ?"

the second line, the

fire

X

^^

w"

Kalawun

the son of

:

^^

"when

the Nasiri days 5

arrived/

which sentence,

expressed at full length, would have run as follows 5
;

^r

, ,',

^^^

^

Muhammad a.

The

fire

by De Sacy,

.

i"

,

the son of Kalawun," alluded to in the last sentence but one is thus explained

viz.

"The

:

hospitable Arabs were in the habit of lighting

fires by night on elevated spots near their encampments, so that the wearied wanderer of the desert might know where to seek for shelter

and hospitality."

287.

As a general rule, the two nouns in a state of construction

must not be separated by any intervening word.

may be made, however, l^TJ dlM J

thus,

the voice,

<* jLUlJ

by God,

in the case of interjectional phrases Sl&M

of her

^ s

bridle.

7'

verily, 'Qs

_

Abu

"

own master

^j^ ,

^

3'

$omeifcp&es7 either

by an

;

the sheep heareth so in

;

"

next sentence^ -.i

^;^4;^e ,'***)

one mi^ht

lAsim, of Zaid had beeix ^

poetic licepice, other

An exception

^flstto otit

t

a^i

with a

a/bu^i of langti^e or

by

word$ beside ^<%*|te,tlie Ibt^oicg are

inserted between the BOUB$

IB:^-^

af i"

atifi th

*& regimen;

thus,

book was written by

254

SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS.

the hand, one day, of a

a

they both aro

tlic

Jew;"

l!

U.U

^ cJ^Tf ^J

in war,

brothers,

Mm

of

U

\'j\

who has no

brother."

SOTAX

OF THE

PKONOUNS.

Personal Pronouns. 288, In a simple sentence the isolated personal pronouns

83) placed between the subject and the attribute, supply " the use of the verb 'Ho bo;" thus, Stf God,

(

fj^jT^^Tji $O ^ "

Ho

(is)

the Living, the Eternal ;" jU\

those,, they (are) it (is)

the fuel of the

contentment."

"

place of the verb

noun of the

a

^

isolated pronoun,

which

Uiw0

;

as

111

dfH

$

last

case, followed

lit.

is

a pro"

1 am.

light of the

affixed its

by

^

compensates for the verb

own a

to

jit

?

cent,"

to

"opulence,

1

<1>)\ y& Ul

"1 am the

be;" thus cSla^\ uL%\ uXjl "verily thou a

^1*1

then expressed by an

is

84) in the accusative

(

"i.

proposition begins with the particle

verily," etc., the subject

pronoun

1

even when the subject

to be,"

God;" jj'&Tjy

When the

world,"

yjb y*

^

C&J\ "as

third personal pronouns supply the

or second person

first

the Lord thy

The

fire ;"

li

j^

(art) the munifi-

verily as to theo ? thou (art) the munificent;" so

5R

cjC|^ Ul J$\ "vorily ? I

pronoun

is

am

thy lord."

affixed

thus employed in the genitive or accusative case

(governed by a verb or particle) for the

"When the

of emphasis?

in the aominativ

ease,

by

its

it is

frequently accompanied,

correspondiEg affixed pronoun

which, however, cannot b

so toans-

255

PERSONAL PRONOUNS. * ^ XU

*

lated in our idiom

me

beholdest me,

'* \j\

x

o

tf

C,

if

thou

(I say) less than thee as to wealth

and

\

"*

offspring;" ?cJxJJ

/

uJol* Js\

x

thus, Sl^

;

*

o

^JJ

^\

^x

^ ULM

Uc^ U

"what hath s

S

(I say,) from that?" ^sf

u!

9

<*

9

'

prevented t

'

-0

<x

c.

,-

you two, you two, ic^l^Sl 1^ ^1 "to whom (belongs) this book? to us, us, (I say);" a thou shalt equip him, Mm, (I. say,) and his iplj y* ^4^ (

attendants;"

^ ^\ ^ M

{J

Ul

a

woe unto me,

3^j!^

^^, (I say,)

the miserable."

The isolated personal pronouns denoting the nominative case are seldom used as such, but they are sometimes added to the verb to a.

render the expression

more emphatic;

thou wilt come, I will come,

thus,

d-^>"

(even)."

I,

IJ1

^\& "if

uLJ!sj~ s

In such instances as these,

however, the pronouns must be of the same person, number, and a plural verb, however,

gender as the verb

;

nouns singular for

its subject,

&U^

\xxs>-UL '

LiLJ>

C

\j\

we

IxjU-

will

what

There

is

different persons

come,

I

;

thus,

and thou, and we

needful for us from him."

is on,e

instance where the verb

person singular, although the subject of

person singular, dual or plural

;

it

defender of attacks

(fjfeejbc)

made upon

289,

rights

;

only

is

employed in the third

be of the

this takes place

begins with the particle Cijl "only;" thus,

tions

have several pro-

^-*

will take

b.

Ul^U

and even of "

may

I,

or

when

first

or second

the proposition

\J\

the

their reputation/'

We

undergone by

to
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS.

250

attached, as well as to those undergone

We

RolvGB.

and we cannot do better than

;

Htiidonl

De

all

to

lay before the

er Sacy's rulen to that effect (Or. Ar. Tom. l 457). -

on receiving an affixed pronoun the nunation the Iriptotos disappears and the simple vowels only

In the firt of

them-

affixes

arrived at that stage of on? liavo progress deem It most proper to treat of the subject at full

where we length

by the

now

remain, as

place,

we

282 with respect

stated,,

?

2nd The

of nouns,

displaces both the

affixed

pronoun

to the

government

of the first person

numtion and the simple vowel

^

84 a)

(

?

;

hence, in this instance, the distinction of the three case terminations of the

noun

IB

we

inferred from the context, as 3rd. NeuriH ending in affixed

final

change

"a

'^L disappear

"two books/

3

it

do in our into cj> ?

and the ;

thus,

gen. and aocm* rospoctively

^y/with and

C^?

into

^,

if it

womon ;" ^I^J /V mase.

pi.

or

nem. dual

nom.

pi.

^l>^

X

shot ;"

'$)

gen.

become "

^>

u^J

5th.

thy sons."

sons,"

if its

Nouns end-

vowel be dawma

;

bo torn; thus, sl^ "women;" ^IlJ "his "

to

Ms women."

6th.

In the third person

^ 9

of verbs, tho quiosoont alif after 3 disappears

"they assisted;" "

of masculine

^

the affixed pronoun cS, become "

ing in lumza change the samo into Jr

and

final

so,

language.

"his benefit."

with the affixed pronoun

and I^li? "your two books ;"

J\jf\ft

OWE

on receiving the

&&

benefit;*'

of the duals,

^

plurals ending

^^

J}

pronoun; as Xi

The

4th.

and the cases must be

entirely lost,

^S ' '

"thoyaasistedmo;"

;

as

s s-

^J"they^eV

they throw against them."

7th. After the

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

257

verbal termination 15, of the second person

pL masc, of the made moyeable by damma* followed by . *

preterite, the * is '

S-

inert; as 1SSVJ

"y 011 saw;" /&j*J "you saw

them,"

8th.

In those persons of the aorist, which end in JjjJL ; as ^j2& " they write;" the final ^ is sometimes dropped before the a affixed pronouns and tf ; as ^J,<J*$ for \j$ff& y u ^der " me;" so I^IJO yon hate us," for l2jyju. In the third person

^

sing. masc. of the preterite of

such verbs as have

^

for the

on receiving the affixed pronoun ^J the final ^ of the verb may coalesce, by tashdld, with the ^ of the affix ;

final radical,

^j& "he

thus,

has

rendered

The

me

for

powerful;"

\j&*

(Kur. may, in ^ nouns as well as in verbs, either be retained or changed into 9th.

xviii. 94).

as

alif]

J^ "a

boy;"

&

quiescent after fatfya,

or L-J "his boy;"

L^ "he threw him." ^ qidescent after fafha,,

threw;" Jly or terminating in

when

followed

"

by

290.

The

\

towards ;" i3$\

principal modifications to

selves are liable, are the following

of the

u

of Jcasra

first

is

3

"upon;"

The

affixes

them-

pronoun instead

"sias/ Jty&&~

is to

jazm

towards thee."

which the 1.

takes

person singular takes the vowel fafh

?

^), heace Z/C&

^

the

affixed

modified according to

affix

"

:

when united with afty word ending

thus, tfli&L

10th. In particles

the affixed pronouns; as ^J^

"

" upon us ;

"he

^j

"

"my

in

1

sins;" ^UliLc

^ , or

,

"two

^ inert

;

slaves,"

289 into Uic, (by dropping the

final

my two slaves." When the word to which the

be joined ends in

^ inert or quiescent, this last

united by tashdid with the affix; as? .J "in,"

^ "in me

;"

SYNTAX OF TEE PKONOUNS.

258 "

upon,"

two slaves/ "

^L^)

3

^U

"upon me;"

^iSl "of

of the

Muslims/

the word to which the affix

flamwsr-that

is,

in long

"

^iLi the ^

7,

inert or quiescent

^

^

affix

;

sense

y^\

"my

which

friends," for

J^\

person singular

employed in a vocative

Is

the word to which the

then becomes "

last

lT

so

;

my

^ in place of ^,

3.

Muslims."

This

when

iljT.

"my

kasra only remaining.

Mmm^

from ^tlJt and

J UT,

^A^

^

affix ;

x

*

Is

used when

such as

also to

^

and

^.

an accusative pronoun hero always represents words

^

^

and

^

when

taking this affix of the

singular, are written J*\ SrV>

In like

;

The

affixed

case.

The

first

person

**** -si*

-as

rule holds with the

w

#*'**

tit

and ^t, ^&, ^, ^,

as,

fathers," for

iolncd to active verbs, and also to particles ending in -

the

some-

the noun

anil almost always,

;

united ends in

is

when

" pi.)

is

first

its

in the case of the

^iLli (nom.

thus,

of the

times entirely suppressed, often takes place

When

my Muslims."

affix, as

?

This same

(modified

changed into ^, and the

is

Muslims," (modified ^il^) "becomes 2*

^LlC

^ Is attached ends in^ preceded by

same unites by imhdld with the final

of

^(l) "of

(modified

two slaves;"

my 3

J$i

so,

and .Jj

V

for

^zrv

first pern, pi.,

manner ^$ makes

^

nouns of the third person

5,

^\> and^x ^1

as Ut

and

* X*

and

U<3

.

Ui,

^

?

4,

.

The same ^^

^^

U1 for UJl and *

The

UK

affixed pro-

and ^>, change

their

are united end^ ^awwa Into 7wra when tho word to wMch they " m torn or in ^ Inert or quiescent; thus SJl5 his house ;" "in the house of them y \j Ji "in Ms house;" Ujy^ ?

f

,

^

PEESOKAL PKONOOTS.

Mm"

two;" 4J "in

The

a.


Mm;"

shoot)

"

affix *

or

"in

on him ;" l^U

sometimes loses

"he may throw

it;"
u

259

on them/

own vowel and

its

5

(or

etc.

takes

jazm

this,

;

however, occurs only in poetry or in measured prose, such as the

Kur,an or the Makamat of Hariri

The

unto him."

l

affixes

change the final jazma into the affix thus,

JU

becomes

JU

{s

thus, Ajy for

;

a^J

we

shall give

and *& when followed by wasla,

damma

then the

but when, by a rule just stated,

;

* takes kasra before the

final

In this last instance, however, some grammarians hold that .

,

A transitive verb

different

or a verbal noun,

may

have attached S

S"

s-

"he gave

me

to

them." The two

it"); so

affixes,

"

o

may

/^o-*,,

as 5'

I

gave i

it to

^j+f*ub\ them two

the affix of the >

first

to verbal

>

pf ike I

is

the

gave them

to drink."

made

njoveable

to

them

;

as

it

w ,

and the following as in th

"

(against)

to eat ;"

UU^wL^

is

l

it is

"

;

-m^* a rule,

and that

s&$ie riole holds

my affeotion fop

<"*

"you"

by damma and

affix J thus,

The

&^'

O? 9* L

me

gender or

In such instances,

infinitives

of the affixes

to

differ in

person precedes that of the second

nouns or

first

it

.

I

?

When

two

be of the third person provided

second person precedes that of the third. [

he gave

"it will suffice the

^^**&

however,

JlLel

as

;

be not identical, in other words they must *

to it

an accusative and a genitive or dative, pro-

affixes, viz.,

vided they be not of the same person (lit.

;

we may

^^

, 9?^^ say *%A& and even >^lc

5.

7fl#$fe

lulc "on you be peace;" "on them be pe&ce." fill! ^Ilc

pL*\

f

36,

"to you;" the

the letter ^ f

^Jf^>

case of the teiwiwtion *3,

or

"

is

inserted

he will shew them

289.

260

SYNTAX OF THE PB0NOUNS.

We

c.

affixes,

have already stated, 84, /. that instead of employing two that which denotes the accusative is in instances used

many

separately, having the particle

C|

mode

This

prefixed.

of construction

serves to avoid all ambiguity in instances like the preceding, where be first obvious at which is the accusative and sight, may not,

it

s

which the secondary case x

thee to

him/ but f

^^f\

1

but

thou wcrt thyself ")

^2^ " I

Itol^Sc?

c*

"thou

I

0ave

.

In like manner

iJac!

me

caused thee to seize

equally incorrect to say

<$\

fK(

U5

uAn

3

^ 99( J hence we must not say ujCgJa^ "

;

uJ3c^

thought she was she"

not sav

but ^uj uJcLaSl

;"

It is

.

" I

thought thee thee"

u/U uJcl^

thotightcst

we must

So

me

be)

(to

(lit. I

for

(i.e.

"thought

^j^L& we must say myself."

for

Lastly,

thought her her")

;

we must

say Ubut

rf.

"We remarked in

singular dative; for

added

is it is

to verbs

*'

O" *^?

^\ "*

1

"

i&$y^ (j^ \

aught) shall never go

^

of the

first

person

denote either the accusative or

only, to

away

^ ^

**

are

w^10

With verbal

camos to

f

disappointed

me

adjectives the affixed

complement, or the

first

truly towards

you acting

another than the Antichrist inspires

e.

^

often added, however, to participles and verbal adjectives;

example; <
\2li Siji

84, d. that the affix

of the affixes

me

(that he

L^

first

\Jpf^ Jl^-Il\^

pronoun which serves

when

of

them

With a noun

of

When

be two, ought

be expressive of the

a genitive, whether always to bo considered as the or of the verb, complement of a verb transitive.

be

if there

subject

as a

may

there are two,

it

complement of a verb doubly

receive

with more fear for you/'

considered as either a genitive or accusative case. action the affixed pronoun, or the

may

me?"

active, or the first

there are two affixed

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

261

pronouns as complements of the same verbal adjective, or of the same noun of action, the second of them ought always to be considered as

We

an accusative case.

have shewn,

are joined to a transitive verb that

84, /. that

it is

more elegant

to

is

more

add the two

With

course there occur no ambiguity.

affixes

which denotes the accusative

be separated in combination with the particle $\ verb, however,

when two

;

suffixes,

infinitives

may

with the simple

and

provided of

participles

it

correct to separate the last of the affixes or that denoting the

accusative.

Demonstrative Pronouns, 291.

As

a general rule the demonstrative pronouns agree

and number with

nouns to which they refer, There is, however, one whether expressed or understood. notable exception, viz., a broken plural masculine or a regular in gender

tlie

feminine plural, usually takes for

its

demonstrative pronoun y

the feminine singular of the latter 5 for example '3*SC"'O

"those armies;"

IbJIl **

horses;"

j&9 ^ **

O-O

$^

\

O

c33j

c*"O*^

"these days;" &s*\ **& "these " ss

*i ,-/*

I

OS.

^

:

9 02G-0

uj5H cJSlM

^

x*&

this million

//

>

(lit.

thousand of

thousands) of dinars."

The demonstrative pronouns, being in their nature definite words, must have the noun which they specify also definite as is often the " TOVTO TO a.

this saying/' etc, Greek in such phrases as pq/j& in which the noun is the attribute, the proposition, however,

in

^filter

may remain

delusion*" flius,

*$&

indefinite;

Sometimes the

$&\j!**

(

Kulzum

yif "they say this is expressed by an entire phrase ;

js^

attribute is

L^kf J^

shore of the sea of

as

lxa>

^^ '*and (i,e.

the

this (is)

what

Bed Sea)."

(is

found) on

In interrogative

262

SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUNS.

phrases the subject is

that?"

U

lli*

"

Is

put

what

after the attribute

is

thus cLl J j& tf*

;

this?"

The remote demonstrative pronoun which

292.

formed

is

d/ uJ", etc., of the from the preceding by second person, not only agrees in gender and number with adding the affixes

the noun

it

3

but the affixes themselves agree in

qualifies,

gender and number with the person or persons addressed. For example, "that book," if you are speaking to one man, ' s ' S ^ G-o

is

c-jls&l

expressed

~

cL3J

;

and

if to

one

woman

s

?

~"*

<

c^li^l

cj3J

\

;

are addressing two men or two women you will say you ***& y s G.-O 9 / if there be more than two men c^l^l j U& J3 3 <JL>1^3

if

9

\

1

^ o~o

f

and

if

more than two women, the expression

the affix Practically speaking, however, o

^

uXJo and uJoj without any and number of the persons addressed.

alone

Of

the Relative

relative

pounded of the

either

pronoun^ or

and the demonstratiye

the word to which

by means

by being in a

of the article

thus, Kur. iv, 21:

who have suckled you; a

those

J

.

generally

53

1S5O

3-.

Aii^t

^jjti] **o

also IT.

14

:

*

being coms

1J

(modified

relates in itself

it

or of an affixed

)T

state of regimen, or p

name;

^

tfx

and ^JJ pronouns ' ^3^ T o s

article Jl

^^) must have

definite,

is

1

Pronouns. tf-"

The

c^l^

s

respect to the gender

used, as

293.

is

?

x

'<

into

;

;

being a proper

*

?

%jffi "your mothers *

*^Uj

o

*

C"*

among your women who have come

^

S

^ i^lSl ^17 to disgrace."

(

-^

J^\

A

broken plural ox a ragnkr feminine plural take the relative in

THE RELATIVE PEOKOUNS.

263

^

the feminine singular ; as o^jJLjT
^T

x

^.x?

^U

$j^

-


(viz.,

Si '

'

f

^M

cdtt

c

c->U.V

those of the Kur,an),

God

believe in the verses of

which he sent down upon

his

prophet."

294. The relatives

and

^jf

as

^T,

we

stated in

*86,

are never employed in the oblique cases singular, and rarely in those of the dual and plural ; but the omission is supplied by means of an affixed pronoun that follows ; for example :*

u<^c

me ;" *ij\\ this

tS

??C

o

fcj\

"

^\

^^

f'ss-

t&i ^jj

x&

*$*>

maiden

is

~o

"the physician whose son

u-^Jal!

t^jiSt

C

"&

9

?

\

"

$

"

the robber

j^llll

The

verb or participle active ^ox

souls are longing;'

a^xW.

55

^&\

5

*

'-

x

t

where cXljX

is

^j&s ^i^

for

2jj^.

may

by

does not hold


when

elliptieally

thee

is

a blessing ;"

affix

preposition

is

;

j

may

an4

A^

''ttafl*

fe

affix

Itself is

m ^^^* ^^ ^Js*

Sufaanmi jws@d omiffed.

for

^Qkr* *$\ &)\ "the

be omitted when the Native

Hm whom

^* the complement

used

The same

governed by the same prepositkoa U I passed

is

God bestoweth on

when governed by a

and preposition

the wealth for which our

JuJ^

where

when governed by a

be seen in the following

may c~

So in the sentence $*

sustenance which

omitted

as

; '

L^ <j& ^ 9 j{?

whom

personal affix expressive of the

accusative case is sometimes omitted

example:

son slew ; "

whom my

J^fy i-f^^sr^ "the merchant with

found."

with

is

%;"

whare

after

This laat rule, however,

there are two distinct verbs in the

264

SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. ^

sentence

as

;

from which s o<x

tlion

desircdst

^^J

LJS^

"I

ci?ifcj

mo;"

abstained from that

where we cannot sav

oxx

P

.tf~

^^J ^^

^

,

*J c^l? g^U ^J

^y*

Bitting the

last

construction may, however, be occasionally are to regard as a poetic licence.

word aj.

Such

met with, which

we

The

295,

^

relative

\

^ and U

like

of

which more anon,

sometimes includes the notion of an antecedent, as follows -<* ^ovx

{

^A\

tu^j

^b L^ ^ ^ *?'

~2

s?

*

j>

2

*

^i^jl s^H

frf

:

rt

"that which I

despised (would have) saved me, and that in which 1 confided has destroyed me." TMs kind of construction is

adopted

when

the writer wishes to give an emphasis to certain words

in the sentence

which will bo better understood by a few For instance, lot us take the sentence, "The two

examples.

;

?? poets sent a letter to the waj5irs. *

If the emphasis be on

the two poets," then the sentence will ran as follows; o ^

,

^

x-

^

$,

^^jT"

^Hn

"**'

*

"

those two who sent
be on "the wazlrs, ?? tho construction will be as follows: X "^ ~s*>t"

*\jj$\

t

^

UU;

x

99^ f

x

y\j$\M\

^j

x

?*

^\

'

they to

whom

sent a letter, (the same) are the waz!rs,"

the two poets Lastly, if the

" 7 emphasis be on the word letter/ then the sentence 5JV

run thus,

^

t*O

*O

^J

will

tS>*

DL; 4jj^ ^lill PJ ^t.

In each of these

modes of expression it will bo observed, that the relative begins tho sentence, and that the noun on which the emthree

phasis is to be placed,

gender, number, and

nominative ease*

and with which the

case, is

relative agroeis in

placed at the end, and in the

THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. a.

in a simple proposition,

When,

word having a reference M^ O

?

^o S^S-

9

\



<s

p

;

we must employ

to time or place, such as,

if

we intend

last,

"

in the nominative case; thus, $

day on which

and

I fasted

(was) Friday."

J

o

-"

intended to render the same em-

it is

with the affixed pronoun thus, 4-jCj

;

with the desire of seeing thee;"

if

is

employed in a " I


came

expressed emphatically will be,

'vBS

S L^Jl>-

"that

i.^.,

t^^ll,

desire of seeing thee."

We may

is

pronouns, both relative and

affix,

may

the word

is

I

came, was the

observe, however, that in a con-

noun

that the true antecedent

which

for

struction of this kind, if the

which

on Friday

with the affixed pronoun, and

similar to the preceding


*

a proposition includes a word expressive of "cause,"

phatic, the preposition

t^Cj

I fasted

^

that

1

"desire," or "purpose,"

manner

emphatically a

an emphasis on the word Friday,

the preposition

JJ

When

"

to lay

put the word denoting Friday ^5 "

b.

to express

P

L^VK^P

}

we wish

265

feminine, as in last example, the

The reason

be masculine.

is

^J^\ "the thing" or "object/'

of the masculine gender,

is

296. In a simple proposition consisting only of a subject

and an attribute (the verb being understood), such

"Zaid

(is) thy father

emphasis,

when

?>

"'Amra

*$

;

is

required,

indicated

it

^&\

be meant

to place the

thy father is Zaid;"

u

^s.

say, cJ^I

If

Ijlf

yj ^jJl

^*

if

^jJI

"he who

**

he who

(is)

(is)

standing

If the emphasis is to be laid on the subject, 3E

must

th,e rela-

emphasis on the attribute, the pref>

Amru."

;

Ij the

together with the appropriate personal prpnouii*

ceding phrases will ran thus, Sjj d>^1 J tSS ?

LJ^I

standing

by employing

15^

tive

is

as,

is

we

"&.

Sj j* L/^| "he who

(is called)

Zaid

(is) 34

thy

2GO

SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNM.

father;"

^$\ "he who

ffi

(is

called)

'Amru

(is)

-In each, of these examples, the personal

standing."

pronoun 288) along with the relative, the real antecedent to both being j^T "the man," understood. is

employed

297.

^\,

by a verb

^/*-

article

Tho^

relative

(

$

sometimes supplies the place of the

especially in those instances

where it is followed or a preposition, as in the following examples; viz.,

^

<*f}

judgment

is

^

p^V

"thou

&$\

satisfactory;"

Jl

art

is

^

\J&

ccaseth not to evince gratitude to those

In both of these examples %\

not a judge whose

who

^$\. So, "from

], M'A$$\'&

the tribe, out of which (sprung) the apostle of God."

7:

#

JUC4

l^

19

aSf

lyii.

who have lent unto God an unto them."

x, w*x^ t

^^1* a.

acceptable loan,

it shall

to those

be doubled

Here, again, the article Jl prefixed to the words t

*."*

*

and CJU^A^

The

Kur,an,

1^ ^liii^ ^T^

men and women, and

"vorily to those almsgiving

who

are with him."

evidently used for

in the following phrases, viz.:

"to

IB

x

article

)1

may

a nubfltitutc for the relative pronoun

further be employed instead of the relative,

in combination with a participle, active or passive,

when used em-

m

For example, let take the phatically as a substitute for a verb. *s J(*~Gj&*& sentence JtJJI U1 "God protects the brave (man);" instead of

^

which we

may

say emphatically, f

the brave

man

tects (is) i&e

God;" or

(is)

brave

man ;"

""

who $Tji4T,J$T"he ^5

0**0

135

protects

jCo

jUi &\ $ty\

"he whom God

pro-

in which last phrase the personal pronoun

THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. For further

may be omitted.

illustration, let us

26*7

examine the following

^ uL

examples; thus, the sentence
expressed Ul JLlC^

^^LUn

ij\

from the two Zaids

{

J>fy\

{p*

is

as

ways,

j4^H' "the

V/v

I,"

be

viz.

follows,

:

conveyer of a letter

where the personal pro-

'

y -p

yz>

different

Muslims was

to the

s?

noun

four

may

In the three following modes of

omitted after iJJUSU

emphatic construction, however, the affixed pronoun of the third person ,

viz.:

the two (persons) from

^wjli

whom

&\~>j

' i

whom

I

conveyed a

letter

conveyed a

I

to the

Muslims (was) a

\<\

ui

Uf**

j^*^

(are) the

?

j

Muslims

letter to the

from the two Zaids

^

"^

?^

\'

"that which

The pronouns which," when employed 298.

It

^J]

^^^ J^ W

.

from the two Zaids

o/n

^^LMM]

two Zaids;" J^lliSI 111^ |^^

(are) the

to

*u"

\'<>*n

.

-,

,

must be expressed, "

"those

Muslims;" I

conveyed

letter."

U

^tfoat

as relatives, are indeclinable.

They

"he

who," and

or she

from ^jJt in this, that they include, absolutely, in themselves the force both of antecedent and relative ; thus, differ

j&

^

"he who hath

passed."

U

to

As

disbelieved ;"

^

a general rule

whatever

is irrational

;

or

when

and

this rule, however,

^ iM^ :

1b@

ap-

latter are per-

in one and the same sentence both rational 4*

^.

cp^lJl^

To

when the

and ^rational beings are included $G*^ O -O (jcj^\j

"that which has

for instance,

plied to irrational or lifeless beings ;

C

refers to rational beings,

or lifeless.

there are occasional exceptions

sonified

JC

^

j^rt

$

4iS

the heavens and (on the earth)

u

urito

make

j

thtu%

God

for

those

example

who

adoration ;" or

:

are in

we might

SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS.

268

U

"

unto

t,

and that which

la the heavens

IB

Again the

adoration."

3

c\jjy

(

whatsoever the

(for

women

whomsoever)

(to the

number

declined In

against

espouse yo

When

so employed,

it is

^ "$>

"

i will slay (any one)

whom-

^ ^ ^^

"bring

war upon mo;"

\*a&

come unto me with) those who have rebelled

(lit,,

mo f \&

hath said tlmt."

m

>

^j^- ^

soever that makes

unto mis

8:

singular as a triploto, but not In the dual or **

plural;

"and

iv.

wlio or whatsoever,"

effect of a rolativo.

tlio

tliuB,

Kur,an,

*

wore! ^\ (fern. &\)

somotimoH tho

to rational

of) two, throe, or four (each)," cc

The

be applied

agreeable unto you from among

in

,

299,

U may

^ *& C^ ^ t>sP^

*&A\

J^

t?iij

(on the earth) make

is

to quality or quantity; thus,

from others as

that which

indicate a class of such beings, distinguished

when we

"beings

relative

God

^U "We may *

"

JlJlS

^A\

inform

me what

(female)

IKWO observe, that In such phrases <&%

employ the feminine iU,*

this last, it Is not essential to

,

though that would bo quite correct becomes

indoclitiablo

tion with

when

it IB

1

in a state of construc-

not merely understood, and followed by a nominal

proposition, tho holongfl to

have

vfe.,

situations

an affixed pronoun, or any other complement which

IB oxprostfod,

shall

;

In certain

$,

ubjct of which

but which

Is

ifl

the pCTBonal pronoun which

merely understood, not' expressed;

withdraw from tho wholo army whomsoever of them been

most

violent

in

thoir

rebellion

against

the

269

THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOTJNS.

^

Merciful;" &ti\ shouldst meet with

them

is

jj

In the

most virtuous." S5

declension of the

we

sentence

word

we

J>1


and become respectively

\g\

first

;

two preceding senexpressed, or had the

of the

thus, jJSl j^

^\

So in the second

.

have

said,

sometimes take after them the affix U, ^^Z and l^j They are thus employed in \

^ ^\ ^

.

noun following from

and the noun so specified

;

"if thou

should have to 'assume the regular

order to specify or particularise the

same kind

\*\

should, under similar circumstances,

The words ^\ and

a.

U

iLJb

pronoun had "been

been omitted,

affix of {j\

^

children of Malik, salute whichever of

tlie

tences, if the personal

^J3U

is

others of the

put in the accusative case

;

for

?

example

34^

:

\A

{$\

{

"we

^~s?

" fj\ 12

band." or a

If,

noun

f^\\

thus

will

Q God! pardon

act,

we on our

us, us

who

of the subject y> understood,

The words if

the

\Q\

and

noun

\$y\

may

be omitted in such phrases as the

specified be restricted

by

the article Q], or if

be in a state of regimen with a substantive which

a of

t~A?&A

men

(juliS\ c..g/t

t^JJ&\ (j^r

far hospitality/'

a pronoun of tto

first

Of 300.

are a special

in apposition, the latter is to he put in the nominative case

preceding,


part;"

however, the word following t^J and l^ul be an adjective

*as the attribute

.

\sjs.\

""

We have

This

we Arabs

mode of

is

are the

expression

is

it

so resipoted

m&k

;

prompt

used only after

person singular or the Interrogative Pronouns.

just

&hewu th

use and application of

^

?

270

SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS.

C, and 4/1 as relative pronouns; we shall now the manner in which they are employed

briefly notice

In

Interrogatively.

asking a question

and

^

generally applies to rational beings, to Irrational beings and lifeless If the noun to things-

U

which they

refer accompanies them,

they are not subject to

any variation on account of gender,, number, or is however, the noun be not expressed, then

case.

^

we showed

declined as

U

B, ^4-j " ??

(^^

a

in

mm

For example,

87, a.

came

^m

n

mo

to

5

If

regularly

A

says to

should

B

ask

who? without any additional word, the expression would " be 1^ but if he asked, who came ?" it would be * ^

W

;

**

IE like manner,

B

"

should ask

tive case*

or

If,

L^

is

A

??

however,


"I Mlled

the expression

B

asks

^

youth?" There

*

says 1U-J eLki'

whom ?

"whom,

\J& ^

if

O

A

a

is iCi

whom

alone

is

*

(*>

a man," and

in the accusa-

hast thou killed?"

used; as uLl0

^

or

however, some instances in which

aro,

declined under such circumstances; as In the following o-CJ

^

f ^ o ^jf

example: ^^1 yis fire (of hospitality)

>x}l

^

w^,^

^^

u^U^

plural J^J used Instead of application of

from that of

which they stated In

^

a

they came to

wo

my

said, the*

sec the regular nominative

^ tt

The

^

1^1

and I said who axe you? they

JIBES/* IE which sentence

301.

^U

*

A

$ and

inasmuch as

refer, the latter Is

If

'*


followed by the word to

put In the genitive

case, as

we

88.

They aro also subject to all the variations of number and ease when used alone as J&j c^JfJ a I ^w ;

two men;*' and pression will bo

If

the speaker bo asked

u i^jr-li

\l

^!f

what two

?

u

whom?

my

??

the ex-

friend?"

271

THE INTEKKOGATIVE PEONOUNS.

a.

The interrogative

^j\ is also

employed with an

a state of regimen, to express admiration

"

thou earnest unto

me with

(a certain)

;

indefinite

thus, J4-; L/^ *s &

noun

in

&rAs L^^T s T #

man, what a man !"

If,

how-

s ever, a definite

noun

precedes, the

the accusative case; as, Jj>-j

^\

word

Jkl is to

Jjj \J*?\^

be put adverbially in

"2aid came unto me,

The noun respecting which admiration

what a man!"

is

thus ex-

5

pressed

by means of ^\ may be *

prised in a verb

;

and

<^s\

in which the suppressed

is

itself

understood, or virtually com-

then to be put in the same case as that

noun would have been were $.

For example, in the following phrase, grievously vexed, what a vexation!"

^\

$Q^\ is

case, because the sentence, if stated in full,

put

X"

it

expressed.

MO

\j&\ "they were in-

the accusative

would have run thus,

272

SECTION SYNTAX OF

\mm

VIII. AND PARTICLES.

Use and Application of the Preieriie Tense. 302. The Arabic preterite corresponds with what wo call the indefinite past, and also witli our It has protorporfoot fonnor the meaning in simple narration when preceded by the adverbs S^ "once on a timo ;" and others of the kind expressive of indefinite past time

ample

Uuj^

:

l^L>~tS

^/J}

^ ^y, jinow1^

a time wont forth against two together," etc.

UB in the following ex-

;

bti%

^Ul

HftlS

Sjtj*

a lion once upon

they (both) united

In the following wenteneos

our protorpcrfect tensc?

"

it

corresponds with

^^ !U^f ^

wo have described the administration now we will narrate the vissirate of those

"verily cestor, '

irit

^^W my

1

\'

H'^

^Lc jjaLa5

:V^V *-^ u>,4*?i $ '

^1

J&J&

17*^

^

%*

of their an-

remaining;" '**\*?*\u -k

^\ L^*i

Ijr

remember

4 *'

have conferred upon you, and (remember) that I have rendered you superior to (the rest of) mankind." bonc^fite that 1

Wo may hero observe, the particle

j

wo

when

"now/* "verily,"

past time y which is rogpeote3 as

that

the preterite oto.,

by no uneani the

shall see immediately.

it

is

preceded by

always

case in

signifies

many

The same

a

other

rale holds

USE AND APPLICATION OF THE PRETERITE TENSE.

respect to u]

rcdth

and ^-^

"

when," and

otlier

2*73

words synony-

mous with them.

The

303.

employed to express, with

preterite is frequently

greater energy, present or future time, especially in correla-

a general application, or proverbial sen-

tive propositions of .

tences,

such as the following:

jj

SV^

^ ^ "he who

J^

53 conceals his secret attains his (wished for) object, literally,

"he who hath concealed,"

who

etc.

;

so ujCIs

^ 3& ^ "he

<

reporteth unto thee (another's secret), will report from

thee

secret

(thy

to

5

another);'

literally,

brought thee hath carried from thee." propositions of this b's.

or

3^

kind

first

When

correlative

of which begins with -$?

" whosoever,"

^f\

the

"he who hath

U

"whatsoever," Ui

"as

^

often as,"

"whithersoever," and such like

express only a para ticular not general truth, the preterites in both clauses are to be translated by our future ; thus, Kur? an iv, 59 CtLfr-

:

L# { ?

tests'-

GJ^Ssix oy/ f

7

<.

*

s

\'\*s

U.*a ML>- ^ulo^ ^JA^L^^S.^ uis j f ^' f >

LC

<

shall

have been burnt out, we

/T

rn

i

as often as their

sMns

them

other

shall substitute for

skins."

304.

The

pluperfect tense is formed in Arabic

ing the preterite of the verb preterite of the verb to

^

(

by employ-

158), together with the

be put in the pluperfect tense ; thus,

L!C

^

and

so on, bearing in -mind that the

"he had, Britten;"

cL^ <JUK

"&he

tstd written;"

two verbs must

agree * in gender, number, and perso^i throughout.

strictly

When

be expressed, instead of repeating the particle A* is inserted between the latter

several pluperfects are to

^

with each,

35

274

SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PARTICLES,

and the preterite Immediately following, which serves to throw the

succeeding preterites

also

into

jt

cUJ

the

pluperfect;

thus,

^i ;&


a$l

gone into Khurasan in order to fight Bafi the son of Laith and this Eafi indeed; had (previously) revolted, and had shaken off his ol>edience and had conquered Samarkand; ?

,

;

?

?

?

and Eashid in person went forth against him ? and died at Tils." Here we see that in consequence of the particle jj, the verb

^

when

it

occurs for the second time in the

extract, throws the three following preterites preceding * '

s' s,

"

jlc^3 a.

and LJju

The

that of it


l

.

into the pluperfect tense.

particle ll,

when placed

after

^,

has a similar

effect to

on the preterites that follow in the same sentence ; that

throws them

all

into

the pluperfect tense

;

thus,

for

is,

example

:

"and when

Jj ill 3

march of the enemy towards Akka had reached Salhn-d-Dln (Saladin), he had assembled the Amirs." In such in-

the news of the

stances as these, however, the reader

must be mainly guided by

the

purport of the context*

305.

When

the particle j! "if," expressive of a supposition,

followed "by two correlative sentences,, each having its verb in the preterite tense, the first of such is to be ren-

is

preterites

dered by tho pluperfect of the indicative, and the second, to which is prefixed the particle 3 "by the preterite of the subjunc,

tive

;

as? L3cLr*J

1oj&

cLJ^

" j)

if

I had

known

this* assuredly

USE AND APPLICATION OP THE PEETEEITE TE^SE. *

*&$

I should have admonished thee;"

%&]

275

x

Cljj&

jfj

"if Grod

we should have directed you." however, the second member of the sentence be negative, aorist is used with the particle as we p "not," which, had directed

99 gives to the

plained in thus,

^^]

us, assuredly

aorist the

5

(JlvJ

p

dU

life!*

power of the

If,

the ex-

preterite

^ "if thou hadst been

here,

j

my

brother had not died."

If after

a.

the verb of the

Jl

member

first

of the proposition is

in the aorist tense, and that of the second in the preterite, they

take a future signification, and the past subjunctive, and the second

uL^

LL$j

jlo

JI^Jl

5

may

first

by the

future conditional;

[y^\

L5J^c Z^\j

be translated by the

J^ij

$

thus,

"if the miser

touched the palm of Yahya, his soul would have become generous in 5

After the

bestowing gifts/ of the

first

compound

of the correlative propositions

the construction of the second clause

j

particle

u3i$ JJx

"had

5)

not been

it

is

is

y

"if not/' the verb

frequently understood, but

not thereby aifected ; thus,

'All (i.e. for 'All), verily

>Umar

would have perished," 306. In a correlative proposition the negative particle 3 35 to the "not, gives preterite of the first clause a future especially

signification,

when

the second clause has a sub-

junctive or conditional sense; as in the following

K^LIj 5 J

J

]

jf

^

i/j*&

J

example:

l win not taste of

your food, unless you will promise me that you will not inconvenience yourselves on my account." The peculiar effect of

y

tion

is

further observable in phrases expressive of a declara-

on 0$h

;

as

may be

seen in the following sentence^

viz.

:

SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PAETIOLBS.

276

"I have sworn while

swear) that wine shall not disturb me,

(I

soul is in

my

body, and

my

my

words in

my

power

of

speaking."

When

#.

the negative particle

i

has been preceded by another

U

negative proposition in which the particles ployed, the 5 loses thus,

^

} \)\ i\jj

all

^

and J have been em-

temporal influence on the following preterites

^\)\

*

^

5

f

4^^ ^ ^^ "I

;

kave ex-

perienced in (things) marvellous, what no spectators have ever seen,

^, and

JU

*

which

(| 195), in

51

is

on the tenses that immediately

307

The compound

no narrators have related,"

arid (what) ^^

* *

When

particles XI,

the last member, have no influence

follow.

the conditional particle

^

a

?

if precedes the

pretcrito ? the latter then acquires the force of the future or sub-

junctive;

a

as,

L^\ X

^

"

\j*s>

c/p

^ LZJ^\ Jc

Js<^>-1 I

j^.

\&\ &

hath been written to you, that when death hath approached unto one of you, If ho (shall or should) leave property (let It

?? there be) a wili

^

If the verb ^\

and a verb In the

* t

signification; thus, xnittod a crime or

present tense

y

*

9

*

"j

you ,

I

J\ |s

0x0*

ci^f^ ^^jA

e^ ^\ t/

"If I have com-

$

fault,"

When,

be expressed, the preterite of

aorist of the verb required arc * P ^ O^ 0/0^ ff x

M ^S ^^ ^

coino between

preterite, the latter expresses a past t-x

boon guilty of a

is to

should

employed

44 "giTO thanks IjXM "* X

;

to

after ^1 , a

^

and the

thus, for example

God,

if It

:

be him *

serve."

When

the particle

^ comes A

before two correlative propositions,

277

USE AND APPLICATION OF THE PRETERITE TENSE.

'which the le

first is

conditional

verbs, if in the preterite,

JU <JJ2

'he

f2

same

Ais

may

and the second by

zbjunctive,

erty ;"

&

LlOJ

&\

iili.

5\j

[3

$\ ^

first

may

then say so,"

me, I will

tell

(for

51

unto you."

"

"

but

(it is

not;"

if

as,

essential)

if not, I will

tel1

7

jf

^\)

The same rule holds

hand

each clause be

not

^

to

me

'

l

preterite

by our present indicative or

^

jlS &\ ^\

pro-

"

^

^ y^ ^ ^

^^^^

tell

thus,

;

my

do that, I shall lose

I

be expressed either o *o ^5

>resent subjunctive; as, ,

by

first,

the present

Should the second clause not have a

nil not tell unto you."

the

"#

from Halab (Aleppo), and

ver the citadel to Salih." tegative; as,

first

the simple future indicative

rule holds after the particle

^TciJL

on the

secqjid dependent

be rendered, the

d& ^ j& Q "if you

tat thou shouldst depart

ense

and the

f

^

u\^"if

thou art the son of

etc,

308. *The particle \& signification; tinis,

\l|

"

7

when' gives

^ &r ^.^

to the preterite a future

S^^U^

"when

the

state shall have come (to fee realized), promise of the future we will assemble you together*" If U1 Tbe followed by two correlative clauses expressive of a general statement

by means

of two successive preterites, the latter, in both clauses, are to

be translated by our present indicative

L'$

cdj^fiT^ {)

afeir, the didficulty

\\

;

thti^ for

"when Ta^ya

becomes easy."

example

;

tmdertakes the

It is needless to add,

of past events (as may be however, that in the narration known by the context), the Arabic, preterite, even when pre-

ceded J>y U1, must necessarily be rendered into English by

278

SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PARTICLES.

our simple past tense; thus,

Ql

\^\\\ f^ \fy

|

jj

"

when

they saw (a chance of) doing business, or of gambling, they dispersed themselves for that purposed 809, In Arabic the preterite

m

or maledictive sense.

benedietive,

employed in an optative For example, when an $

Arab mentions the name be

After naming the prophet

exalted.*' S

"&

of God, he adds, ^li? y&

"may He

Muhammad, he adds

*&

1i5"*CJ

'

SU1 unto him, and Ju may God be propitious jXj feU may ft he have granted unto him peace;" so, <&^ djj| "may God **

jfo"*

^J

have been pleased with speaking of holy Gt>d illumine

Ms

Mm,

35

This last formula

men

deceased, as

tomb.

3?

When

ing sovereign, the formula

is also

allunion is

Jp

used when

is 5111

made

Jjf

"may

to a reign-

Ms

iZli

reign be pro^j "may of a minister or longed ; when speaking commander-in-chief, the phrase is ? ^oJ j& "may his victory be glorious,'* When is,

3?

people apeak of ^UalaJI spirit,

or

"

Satan," or of any other very evil

they generally add, Si

A^ " may

the Lord curse

Mm

?? ;

some such pithy expression*

On

the

Uw md Application

310* This tonse

grammars and marians,

is

of

the

Aonst.

improperly called "the future" in most

dictionaries, in imitation of the

Hebrew gram-

I consider the torn Aorist (as used

the more appropriate, inasmuch as this tense

is

by Be Saoy) employed

'to

express not only fatority, but also time past or present, ac-

cording to eireumstaneos-

USE AND APPLICATION OF THE AQRIST.

The

a*

aorist, as

279

a general rule^ expresses our present of the in-

dicative, definite, or indefinite, except in such, instances as

out in

This

99, etc.

is

especially the case

when

it is

preceded by the

OO

"$.

negative particle

man

is

u

we pointed 1*>

tff

"not;"

$jl#j ^HjSI ^fjj Ci

&L-J jj&l

as,

not deemed just by the testimony of the people of his

In the following passage the aorist

house."

by our present

indicative

is to

and partly by our future of the indicative

"

conceal the book which

and who buy with (the price of) but

fire

;

has sent

down

:

"

(from, heaven),

a thing of small value, eat nothing

it

and God on the day of judgment will not speak to them,

He

neither will

311.

God

u

i

fifl

who

own

be translated partly

us

they

a

The

them."

corresponds with our future simple or When preceded by the particle "not at

aorist 1.

compound. all/' ul*^,

justify

^1

or one of its abridged forms

^, ^X,

all

Jg,

of

2. When preceded futurity. by the negatiye " I not provided, however, that none of the other negatiye or Ul has occurred in the particles U, phrase immediately

which indicate a

?

p

we

before, as

?

cursorily observed

the case, there

may

102.

3.

When,

as is often

a plain indication of a future sense; as be seen in the following sentences, an, iy. 34: is

Ear,

^S>

^

"whosoever

that malevolently and iniquitously,

we

shall cast

^ 5^ uIi^J ull^ (hell) fire

shalt

;

find

tfljlc

ujxJ3

^] & ^7 ^ J^S ^

my

unto

return

twinkling of thine eye

?>

thee

shall do

him

^ i^

into

^thou

more speedy than the

The following sentence shews the

230

SYNTAX 0? VEEBS AND PARTICLES.

influence of the particle

&H

jib

l^L

u

Xj

m*&J

3,

thus in Kur,an,

^ Jjj

which

"foar ye a

\^J\

make

satisfaction

it

employed

after the preterite

then serves as a complement

without the intervention of any conjunction, in which case

may be

translated "by our infinitive, or

ceded by "that,"

"they two "began c-jylj $l

^li

fell

to

;

fountain of water that he

ll

Sometimes the

down

aorist thus

participle

the

kissing

^5? uLijtj ybj

;

as,

employed

^J^

<j*jl

\

may lS^>

^JJ

(as it were)

a bridle ;"

*"

+%%

ground and weeping;"

**

by

1

1.'

*O

^^\

^ %

ii^

^

<*

^j ^y

&& " we con-

tinned to watch his return, like the watching for the

new

of the festivities."

313.

We

have shewn,

substantive verb ^tf,

804, that the preterite of the

when combined with

that of any other

verb, gives the latter the sense of a pluperfect tense. IB

be

and he stood in the water bathing a jlaw ^^ he departed, leading my heart

himself;" A^tjU*

^

pre-

c

A^ilj *UJ1

moon

it

end that," etc. thus, Jfc\&2 fedispute with each other;" so, likewise: a hc camo to a

by our present

"and he

by our subjunctive

to the

u %&

might drink." translated

a

:

7

aorist is frequently

of another verb, to

we have

45,

any be accepted from them.*,

for another soul ? neither shall

The

l*

3

shall not in the least

day when, (one) soul

312.

^ir

li.

combined with the

aorist of another verb,

When the two

together have tho effect of tho Latin imperfect indicative;

tlm% uUij y\

a

lio

was writing*"

Should the proposition,

USE AND APPLICATION OF THE AORIST,

281

^

p

^

^)

put before any other aorist, gives to the a similar meaning. "When one or more verbs in the

aorist latter

(of

have gone before, they communicate that sense to the following aorist, without the intervention of J>l, as may preterite

be seen by the following examples: U&^/b ^U-r^ Us "they (the two bulls) were striking (or pushing) each other with " their horns ;" ^p l! it (the tortoise) never rested/' etc.

j&

<$\ i^/u

'x&jxjtj

j

&~*j

t

^

(jSy^Jlt

among- the wild ,

;

5ylsL*l

"his companions from

y\

came unto him and

beasts

visited

him;"

S-

u-Qg^ j

\

i; ^

c^^sr ^= -x

c-^-a

*M

*

&

"!A

1

*' 'KI X ^

. ^AXC s

^T ^ Jatar

rode to the chase; and he sometimes drank, and at other times

amused himself; and presents and gifts came to him from Eashid; and Bakhtishu'a the physician was with him, and

Abu Zakkar the a.

blind sang to him."

Sometimes the

aorist bears the signification of the past indefi-

nite,

without being preceded by either the preterite or the aorist of the

verb

^

did is

you

;

$3

thus,

kill the

^


sllJl

&j^ {*$

"

prophets of God,' hefore (now) 1"

^ a7 In

(to

them) why

this sentence it

evident that the attending circumstances are quite sufficient to

determine the sense in which particle

jjl

"if/' precedes the

^j&& must

combined

be translated.

"When

aorists, the propo^itiw will

fcbe

Mve

the sense of the Latin imperfect subjunctive; a$ ii Ili^fdllolving expression

:

i-osr

eu%3


cui

3 "if thou W6rt

to

know him, thou

wouldst love

314. In addition to, the pluperfect and imperfect^ which,

the Arabs express

by

pwfodbftg the preterite of the yerb

^

SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PARTICLES.

282

to the preterite

and

aorist of other verbs,

which in our grammars

tense,

"by prefixing

^

the aorist of ^

"$

j?

the future perfect,

to a preterite, sometimes in-

between the two verbs

serting the particle aJ f^

is called

they form another

.

,

g

^^U* {& J\

Jj

uJc>J yifa Ji J^S(

*

;

for

t"*O

S

\

\&

tXCjl

example f

^ "

*

U

"they say

?

when

will this

menace (take

:

ySy

effect) if

yon Tbo trustworthy ? Say thon perhaps somewhat of that which yon wish to hasten, will have (already) mounted behind you." >*>

Uj

S

f

j^
upon

.$

UU

\# s

U^

^ ^?

their camels ?

have taken

t

O^

and

/'*

f

t

**.

%*.{<*

ss

^s

.

*

?

Eush

^iXe^Ub A^JU (j^f^ ^JLC Jj^l

UJe>-} Ja

us seize them, and then

lot

retaliation for

what has been done

to us.

we

shall

55

315, "We have already pointed out the three modifications to

which the

ticles

aorist is subject in

which may precede

it,

consequence of certain par-

Tho

aorist apocopated,

drops the vowel of the final radical,

which

99, is employed

etc.,

in conditional, hypothetic, or retributive propositions; thus,

&\ ^f^~\ uXll

^aC ^

u

he who

may have benefited

thou (in return) benefit him f cjy^

you may

be, death will overtake

thee, do

^^ \j>3 U2j ^wherever you;"

"wherever thou mayest go, I (also) will go f ^it thou shcmldst go out, I will go out with thee." sitions of this kind, if

each of the verbs indicates futurity,

both of them arc put in the apocopated form of

them only denotes future

time, the same

of the apocopated or common, form, see

imperative

i0

In propo-

;

but

may

if

the last

optionally be

99, a*

accompanied by a verb expressive

When j>f

the

a con-

USE AND APPLICATION OP THE AOBIST. tional future, the latter is

"

J<\ When

a. ;ter

s^s sister? ?

*aJJ

j^&j

When

The

b.

s

comes

I

o

the apocopated aorist, the

is prefixed to

ss

&~* tX^ ^^j

{(

loses its

J

after the eonjunc-

before, it denotes prohibition

and whosoever among you $

"*'

vowel

fast (during) it."

;

thus,

shall see the

^

,*&

x&L

*^*M

"approach not

!ll

IJ^AJ

this tree."

aorist apocopated preceded

lot yet,"

ji

^

*<j

him

)nth, let

u (two)

}

J

command, and the

ms uJ and J. ?

put in the apocopated form; thus,

me, (and) I will assist thee,"

assist

the particle

expresses

283

by

the particle

always bears a past signification

4&11J

^ J^Sl "he &

but found

(it)

not;"

so,

i

"not," and di

thus, for

;

example

:

sought for something that he might eat S ? O*O

J^ ^

^JjSl

-

J^

*r

^

"

ill

when he

at-

he was not able."

apted to ascend,

316. The aorist antithetic, whose peculiarity is to change 9 damma of the third radical into faffa, and to reject the al ^ of the terminations (except in the feminine plural) 1

100 we responds to the Latin present subjunctive. In ve given a list of such particles as require this form of 3

aorist after

ill

now add

aotes

them, on the more important of which

we

a few observations.

"scope/'

"end,"

Their general signification " "aim/' or purpose/Mjifce cr

^io lie 0^(1 that/ 7 functions "that/' "in order that/' / 7

.t

;

.j

!

"I

\

bread witlx

>

.

When

me

(

desire that tfeou mayest assist;"

^

i wigit

tMt thou mayest

(ches moi} this night."

the particle

^,1

is

followed

by

5

"not," as in 5f

(for

y!+fc,

284

'SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PARTICLES.

after

and requires the

retains its governing power,

it still

If the verb following

ii.

^1

aorist antithetic

intended to express simple, pre-

is

sent, or future time, the regular form of the aorist is employed as ~ s ^ & y ps O-T j>. o ^^or o* XCT _. , (t 3 I lmow tlmt lie sl eeP s ; 1 know that he v* ^\ Ae] <$.

'$.

.

,

t

p&

j*u

'

f^

9

After yerbs expressive of "doubt," "opinion/' "think-

will assist/

"^

r*

ing/' "considering/' etc., such as

form of the

^, v*^">

^J,

etc.,

the regular

employed, but the antithetic form

aorist is generally

is

sometimes to be met with/'

It

i.

sometimes happens that the particle

words "that not/' "lest" (Lat.

nc).

We

^

corresponds with our

are not to conclude, how-

ever, that ^\ of itself bear** a negative sense, but there

some word

which

in the proposition

hibition; thus, in the K,ur,Sn ix. 46,

"they who that they

and

may

not

their persons

" verily

stand

it

God and

believe in

we have

fight,

;

so, xviii.

occur

we have

the following example:

the last day will not ask leave of thee

(for

n

may

may

imply a negation or pro-

the true faith), with their substance

^w

58:

^1 $&\

^Ls

^5^

^*f

cast veils over their hearts lest they should under-

(the Knr,fin)/'

1

c.

The

particles jjf

and J, denoting "that/ "to the end

order thai/' invariably require the

"ho came same

aorisfc antithetic

;

as,

that/'

"in

LjC^ L/*^"

that he might beat thee/' or "in order to beat thee/*

The

and LJ, "lest, as also

to the

tioA

XX

XX

rule applies to the

might

"\

J

eat it/'

;

thus,

The

compounds

1L

S^O Ci J"^^ *^ e 80t|g^t f r something ifcat he " particle

^^i.

1

1

that/ "in order that/' "until/ re-

quires the antithetic form in like iimmier

;

thus.

USE AND APPLICATION OF THE AOBIST. " "

me

inform I will

d.

that I

march on

The

may

fly

away from

tliee ;"

285

<

the sun sets."

till

when

particle j\ (which properly signifies "or," or "else"),

denoting our conjunctions "that," "until," "unless," requires the antithetic aorist

.J^.

thus,

;

thee, or thou shalt give o

my

due;"

ILxJ

so,

me my * 0<

x


?

LXl^jJ 3

jjl

1

due/

^

verily I will persecute

me

"until thou wilt give

i*e.,

'&''?
^^jlH

I

"verily

1

cA

will slay the unbeliever,

"

Muslim

or he shall become a

"

^if

L5

;"

*>J^\

j\

'^J^l

him

wait for

I will


come

until he

Sometimes

out."

cation of our words X

"

" whether," ps

c->ji>

ifl

when

,

repeated, has the signifi-

me)

or" (Latin

O

G X

j\

SS

X

^ uJo

.

^\ s^-fc ^ij)\

s

,

thus, for example

;

t-.

j i

,

.

it is

^w^i

;

,

no anair of

thine whether (God) be gracious unto them, or chastise them." x

<* ^

^.

The

particles ^,31 &

and Ui "good!" "well!" when employed in a &

on a preceding proposition, require the

conditional sense depending

which then bears a future

antithetic aorist,

This will be

signification.

sV*

^s*

by the following examples,

best understood

viz.

"

LjCJI ,
:

I "will

..

come

for protection to thee;"

when

the reply ^j

"good

!

I will assist thee;" or

c/J^^

^j

"

aid thee;" or

cJ^l

it

^\

""

"welf!

examples we see that the particle verb, or

different

aorist is

;

or lastly,

!

by the Lord

^^

4

*

g^

my

friend

will not assist thee,"

t ) J\

may

I

I will

In th0se

be used $lone before the

by a negative

particle.

If,

however, any

from the above intervenes, the common form of the

used; thus,

the pronoun

I

good

^\

be accompanied by a word expressive of an oath ; by

may

a vocative case

wojd

(

I)

rf

^

c^yjUl

^*

f '

^ c3^^ ' is s ,5-^

be,

x

^\

jilij

X

I will assist thee ;"

may

.

151

t^aJt Ul^Jl "good!

I will assist thee,"

intervenes^ the emphatic negative

^JS

"not

When at all,"

286

STNTAX OP VERBS AND

PABTICLE13.~

always requires the aorist apocopated, and gives

^ UU

* s ?<*S

tion; thus, Kur,an

Gehenna)

shall

When

ii.

74: a^j**

by no means touch

the conjunctions

a future

it

^"^

"

9

-f

'

jUl lLJ3

XI

sigrdfica-

<$

^

"the

fire (of

us, except for certain limited days."

uJ and j

two propositions, indicating, in the second, an immediate dependence on the first, of which it is a jf.

join

consequence, they require to be followed w

s"

t

o

t

i

^ifcl

*

*

x

't

u

x

^

*

*r

own

6&

inhabitants;"

he forbade any

*Y.

*

?

-"C*

houses, until

^^ woman

*-*/%

(J^**-

i

i

bL*j

MB

Zaid in followed

I

may

house, that I

The

expresses

of

them

is

a

other, it has

317,

may

go

*rf

ye

^ 10 ^

particle ula,

"is

when

L

X

$,

^

"punish

LJ and ^

me

not, lest

that the former

is

When

either

mere connective of sentences not dependent on each no influence on the verb that follows.

;

and

is

aorist la

.*<"<"

#^yi

of'iioX'

cA^

used always with a future

formed by affixing

may be

strongly asserting; as

P#M tji*

^^ %Z*

"pardon me,

order of things, which the latter does not.

commanding^ urging, "

The

^^ly

chief difference between

aorist antithetic^ as

in

^J^l

lj

him?"

to

c31^

as,

The paragoglc

signification

|yl

^J\

&\ ^aXU jloJ!

J

tlao

do not enter any

jJS

imperative, corresponds with the Latin "iie,"

and the English "lest;" I perish/'

as '

i

permission, and salute

j^

*3h^\

*

entering the palace of the Caliphate until he

enter paradise ;"

by a negative

lyjsL

you ask

knew who she was;" jsh JXjll ^JJ Lord! that

F ^ **f*
*

**

r

the aorist antithetic

by

a

"

^^ Aj^.j^a

lyiUwj j I^M^U^U

^^s

house, except your its

*

0
tfl

r*

seen in

,^T

x

or simply

101*

forbidding,

may be

^

is

wisliing 3

to the

employed

asking,

or

seen in the Knr^anj cii 6; u &<* U i

^

ox {'VfSi

^^ c^*

shall see toll, again (I jsay)

It

^

ye

i

'

f r^-

^^

venly

shall surely see it

with

USE A.ND APPLICATION OP THE INFINITIVE.

the

eye of certainty

287

then shall ye be examined on that day

;

soncerning the pleasures (in which ye had indulged during It is also

life)." )f

^\

C

and U); thus, Eur.

children of

jhall

Adam,

SJ

3

after the particle &1 (compounded ' S? f ? C/ 's^s
vii.

*&+ l^j

33:

among

f^

^^

yourselves

used when preceded by the or by any expression denoting an oath thus, -

>

It is also

;

-o

^

"3-

"by God he

.JJ0V dUlJ

^

{-**$,

verily apostles from

come unto you."

^article

he (the devil) [

employed

will deceive

will assist;

said, verily (I

them

*f.s

75

^M^T\ HMjsS J>y thine

swear)

t-^&j*^ JlJ

eminence that

all."

318. The imperative

used only in the second persons singular, dual, and plural of the active voice, as may be seen n the paradigm 94 and in The first and third 103. is

persons of the active voice are

we have

,he aorist as

made imperative by means In

just shewn.

its

ilready mentioned in

319.

The

infinitive or verbal

Infinitive,

noun, as

we

stated in

>o

105,

own verb

frequently combined in a sentence with its

in

we have

103.

U$e and Application of the

s

use and application

imperative has no peculiarity beyond what

.he

of

in

adverbial sense, with a view to give additional

me

*

expression;

mte ^*M>

^

*>

f

U*lw ,^-y*

thus,

$~*

$'

saying ;" so in this paseoge fro;& ^j Los?

)

j+&3* \jy*

$

U^U

j

jvv

|*

*>

is

12

*-

/

fed

titte

Kur,

^!"^

^p^Ke Hi. 9

day on winch.

:

iii6

leavens shall be shaken with, commotion, and the mountains jhall Et is

utterly

move away n

u (lit.

inova

away by moving

u alsg used adverbially to express purpose,"

5

').

cc

5

iateutk%

^

SYNTAX or VEBBS AND PARTICLES,

288 or

"

5

design/ **"*

ilpr

jj&

etc.,

like the Latin

llS

"Zaid stood up

dum

gerund in

honour

\

jjj

to

?

Amru. 3?

the complement alone, they

may

115:
S

'/ s>

J^tA] o^j" part) of Abraham

' Ijb^t ''

\

pardon (on the see that

"and

tf

Abraham, the

God,"

Kur,an

thus,

;

"understood,

governed in the genitive

subject, is ,

where we

for his father;"

the object of the sentence being

which

will

be more manifest

if

express the sentence by means of the finite verb;

a


^J>\J&^\ *

xx

"man

5

Abraham begged pardon

J

1

father/

C""*O

Again, in the Kur.

is

for

t

"

fij\

expressed,

was a prayer

there

'

the infinitive Jll*^ *

by*

is

governed in the

"be

genitive "by the infinitive of a transitive verb ix.

:

for (the purpose of) doing

320. "When the subject of a sentence alone or

as follows

;

(.

xli.

-rf

49 JLS *12j :

I

not wearied in asking for what

is

of

God

thus, for his

OO

^ ^Ci

\

5'

good

we

(or

t

x

jLCJ

H

"for

happiness ")*

The noun denoting the object, may be put in the the infinitive and accusative, if any word intervenes between 321.

the object so as to prevent their being in a state of regimen ; thus,

Kur. xe. 14

:

C^ I^Ti '^ ^ ^

feeding the orphan in a day of famine

sentence llcy the object of the

thus*/

the accusative case

\AP\ '<&\d\ X* x*

JLtS ** <**

?? ;

"(thp act

may

by the

of)

where we see

put in the accusative

If the infinitive should be preceded object in

^

article

case.

Jl, its

immediately follow^it;

"feeble in huxting his enemies;" ^"^

^ ^ "I do not timidly abstain from^smiting

USE AND APPLICATION OF THE INFINITIVE.

tie

tie

When

both the subject and object connected with infinitive are expressed, the subject is usually put in the ear."

and the object in the accusative

lenitive, Lll

289

]

^

#3J*

|pCw>-


\

^

J^j

"

;

thus, for

was in

it

example

:

this year that the

"

the slaying Ja'far (on put JVfar to death/ literally, bie part) of the Caliph took place in this year ;" so, likewise " Jufi a memorial of the mercy of my lord to^Jj
Jaliph

is

The preceding

rards his slave."

onstruction, but the following is D

is

the most

common mode

by no means unusual

;

that

of is

say, the object is

tie

put in the genitive and the subject in This is more especially the rule when the

nominative.

bject is a ' ^s s - S~ lyoj

nto

UcU^o

'

SS

?

S


^

""

whether in speaking

*J1

?

j^l teJb\&*


O

*"

^

*?**

Z$

people whatsoever to style

all

laster

^

pronoun and the subject a noun; for example: " ' '""^

^

Qa\

u

4r4-3l it is

^

s

to him, or in writing to *

ouse by whomsoever

^

^US\ f-^<* "he forbade him our lord and our

him;"

a pilgrimage to the (holy)

practicable."

322. Infinitives of intransitive verbs govern the subject .here being no the in case for example object) genitive ; :

'&&

^ J>ffij\

)ok place in this f

yj

manner."

intransitive verbs follow

1th regard to th **

s

samples: ^J33 iat,. w.. P

j

its

"the

As

falling of

Zaid to the earth

a general rule the infinitives*

the construction of tocb Y6rb#

use of the prepositions ; as

s

^

&

fjjj ^J

U

"I have

121

tfce

following

not the power over

"I

cannot do that;" %L* $*\ ^C^\ "the expulsion inhabitants from it." The infinitives of abstract or sub-

antive verbs have their subject in the genitive and their at37

200

SYNTAX OF VERBS

tribute in the accusative ; thus,

"

man must have boon

that

of religion ." sitive

verb

Is

AJ8TD

^

jJt

J^\

created

Sometimes an

PARTICLES.

is

^

^

one of the foundations

infinitive derived

from a tran-

employed in a vague and indeterminate manner, 9

j^ ^ ^

without a complement as all die j&\ ^ y&j <JJ a deviation from the way of God, and disbelief in him, 7> most heinous sin in the siht of GocI \

\

;

Use

nd Application of

is a

the Participle*

323. Present participles follow the construction of those

verb* from which they arc ilorivod; thus, & "7 Anmi whose father slew Mahraful ; n which is the same as ^OX f.": /OX / X X yx- O^ r ^ 1.X Ox 7 .*< ^of ^<"|X i?0x if WO Said UJJAS^ ^1 Jis *9 i/^ 4/^" ^ ^^j '^ ^' 'Hj

^

t

.

1

"

J5aid

to the

whoso son

is to

same thing an

??

wed j^ubaida to-morrow which 9 ^ s*"f ^^ frf V;T MT ^*"' ^\ ;

^j

*

ing tho aorint of the verb

324 sitive

The proBont

^^\

\&&

comes i

T.

by employ-

a)j?

instead of the present particle*

participle or

noun of agency

of a tran1. It

verb admits of two modes of contraction,

maj

tho object in tho acoraative case, like tho Yerb froir

"

which trol

it

as

has been

CKW)

atiRw;

J4afe

^ ^^

(with thy face) their Kibla* the ccmitivo case

wily a

;

as

fcff&$fa\

^uT ^

2. It

athou

may

^oso who sMt

not

t,^"^ ;x

qjyM

^ IE

take tho article

JV

may

in

^j

shall to^tc of death." e?ery (croaturo) living

of

MOT

gOTorn tho object "

^^ C&

thou shdt assemble mankind;"

mode tho

con-

this

lasl

USE AND APPLICATION OF THE PABTICIPLES. the object or complement be also definite

"the

striker of the slave;"

here to say

nor

ox dj

j

u^

c_^uLll

^

-53

j

thus, j^!

;

^VJ cl^llM "the

&\

x-

the head of the slave."

291 c

1

striker of

x-

be incorrect, however,

It "would

neither ought

we

to say j^J cl

7?

j^c c-jUoJ] nor

When the noun

of agency governs

complement in the genitive and this complement is accompanied by another noun which ought to agree with it in case, such other noun may be put in the genitive #.

its

agreeably to the grammatical concord, or tive as the object (to labour) is

;

thus,

u^j

^

may be

it

"

Hu^ A^~

^Jc^

a seeker of rank or of wealth,"

-

"

jllll

verily,

grain and the date stone to put forth

it is

put in the accusa-

whoever

rises

up

So, Kur,an vi. 96

God who

:

causeth the

he bringeth forth the living from the dead, and he bringeth forth the dead from the It is living. he who causeth the morning to appear for rest,

b. its

and the sun and the moon

When

the

;

and he hath ordained the night

;

for the

(of time)*"

noun of agency governs the accusative case

nunation in the singular as well as the

and plural as we see in the

first

rejected, as if the

final

^

and

^

it

retains

of the dual

quoted expressions of the last p^rs-

Sometimes, however, both

graph.

computing

tlie

two words were in a

nunation and

state of

final

regimen, (vide

^

aue

382)-;

two (men) striking Zaid;" thus, \%j tSJJ t^L^If "the \yi]?"tte (three or

more men)

striking Zaid."

in theaccusative be a pronoun, participle, ot the particle

When

the pronoun

W

is affixed

(

it

If,

may

290

c),

however, the object tins put

be either

may

affixed directly to the

intervene between them.

directly, the participle loses its

292 in the singular

but

;

strikers of

" iJI

optionally retain or reject the final

may

we may say

dual and plural; lience

two

VERBS AND PABTICLES.

SYNTAX

Mm,"

So

either

" *$>j&\

or

'

in the plural

w

of the

*lijlSjl "the s 's ? -CS'*

we may say u^JjUlS!

or

the (throe or more) strikers of thee."

325, The noun of agency of a verb doubly transitive,

a verb governing two accusatives, verb from which the accusative

it is

or it

;

derived,

may

follow the rule of the

by putting the two

may govern

the

first

may

say either

may

say either

***

"C

xtf

***<

-*

objects in

of its complements

in the genitive and the second in the accusative. * '"&<*

i.e.

9

Hence we "

Ox

si?

S

or

\js?" by juj ^tf \$\ \ji" uy \^jj (jwtf U^ " 1 have clothed Zaid with a precious garment," So we

"

iUli

iJXc ^Ife

dost thou consider

when

observe that

Amru

?

c^j

$b

1

or

5iJiU

j^

^fe dLJl ji

We

may

***

a wise

man?"

further

the participle, thus doubly transitive,

complement in the genitive and its second in the accusative, the latter may be placed between the its first

governs

participle

^Ixi^l tute?

and the word governed in the genitive;

dJdj

3

u

jjU

So ? in

refusing his bounty to

Kur 5n

ady.

?

48

:

"do not imagine that God will ?? (made) to his own apostlos. 826.

When

*UJ *&%

him who Jjsllr*

act contrary to

thus,

is desti-

2M ^^l^i*

Ms

promise

the present participle expresses a quality in-

herent in the subject^ and independent of any reference to it

time,

may

may

govern

its

a say

mnrfn

A-P

^TplsTSjj ivvneffiii/fin'n

subject in the genitive;

Zaid whose father ?

ftAlrlA-m

fntns

nl^fiA.

is

thug

standing."

fYJTftfiTyfc

we

This

wh&TL the

USE

AJSTD

participle is derived

from a neuter verb.

found, however, with participles that

when such

verbs,

c.

o-o

293

APPLICATION OP THE PABTICIPLES.

It is sometimes

come from mere

are used as

participles

transitive

adjectives;

tf-o

thus, L.JJS1 f^\}\

The noun

"the merciful of heart."

agency accompanied by the

article

is

)1

of

equivalent to the

pronoun and a verb; thus, \^> x\ Z$&\ 13J* is s equivalent to \^ xj\ '^ ^&\ US "this is he whose father

relative

-C5-.O

killed >Amru.

a.

The present

with participles of intransitive verbs are applied,

regard to the use of the prepositions, in the same manner as the verbs from which they ?

unto him

o4^w

;" *-^ L

^

came ;

"

Jil

* ^ >

^Jj \$ S j " U^ God is not


are obedient

all

thus, & f^

heedless of what

ye are doing," 327. is

The

subject to

which the passive

generally put in the nominative case

l\

sentence:

;

participle is attached

as in the following

^f&* ^J "Zaid, whose

2Ul

father

is

now

may, however, be put in the genitive, being then governed by the participle, or it may be employed adverbially It

slain."

in the accusative case

^

or

\>\

f

its

<

;

hence we

may say either

c_^

\

'

'jf&

^J

/"*

Jjiul

doubly of

f

\ .

If the passive participle belongs to a v

transitive, it preserves in the accusative

complements

;

thus, li^J j

j

(J**!*

&J

"

t^

^

Zaid has been presented with a dirham." 328.

The

construction of the passive participle, and of

verbal adjectives derived from the passive voice,

more

clearly explained as

follows:!.

By

may be

substituting, for

294

SYNTAX OP VERBS AND PARTICLES*

the participle or adjective, the verb

either in the pre-

itself,

terite or the aorist of the passive voice,

necessary, the subject or nominative which

understood.

restoring, if

may have been

in substituting, for the article

3, Lastly,

^

In

2.

.#3;

relative

pronoun

^ oooU or

**

11.

a

233

;

as

;

may be

PO f\ ypjj ^ tf

1

5

^ ^ J&& ^ ^ *t

'S

<

o*To

i">

-d

/-

*,-"."To"?

}

viz.,

o

incumbent upon the father

is

it

tribute to) their (the mothers') subsistence;" "

<**

/*

i
**!*

is

bom,

?J

So,

234

:

*<jfy

*^

*

C

npon the

15^

child,

man

to

5s

a mother shall not be compelled (lo do what

on account of her

(to con-

where S j

x

i

equivalent to Sij S olj ^ASI J4>S^

whom a child a

-

\

the mothers shall give suck unto their children for two

years entire, and

is

the

*

or if there be no article the relatives

seen in the following examples,

}<-**

$ *"*'

is

unreasonable)

nor shall a father be compelled on

^

account of Ms child ;" where A! is equivalent to % A! j SlJ a * ho to whom a child has been born* So Kur. i. 6 and 7

3^

7

a

direct us in the straight way, the

thou hast been gracious, and

In

thine anger,"
o?v

Afljus

***>**??

t<

CP^MJ 1^

whom

who have

of those to

whom

not been subject unto

the three last words, viz., x v^ c T ^ M^ti t Tx are equivalent to A^ic u-^iy J ^3J against this passage *

*

i

I

there has been no inveighing "wrathfally;^ or more

exactly in Latin, contra qnos non est

Concord of a Vert with S29,

way

:

We

mmcfum cum

it

Nominative*

huve already mentioned in

jrole (liable!

howeve^

to

iracundia*

numeroBS

250

that,

as a

exceptions), the

CONCOED OP A VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. verb, in a simple sentence or proposition

comes

295 then the

first,

nominative or subject, and lastly the object. When the verb thus precedes the subject, if the latter be singular and mascuthe verb always agrees with it in gender and number ; " thus, ^^4^ *U5\ Satan made him forget the naming

line,

j^3

\

of his Lord."

however, the subject be a feminine singular,

If,

the verb must agree with

it

in number, but not necessarily in

If the subject be really of the female sex,

gender.

and

if it

the verb must then be in the immediately follow the verb, f-a c*o

But its

if,

s

9

l^\

feminine; thus, j>J&\

L^Jli

"the wife

of 'Aziz said."'

however, any word intervenes between the verb and

feminine nominative that follows

it,

the verb

in the masculine

;

thus, Sj^Vj

may be

used

"

1

s^ i*\ ^\ verily a man In such instances, how-

J^

(

whom

one of you hath led astray*" ever, grammarians consider it to be the more correct mode to

put the verb in the feminine. 330. If the subject be merely a grammatical feminine, the

verb

may be

immediately

"

of either gender,

not

or

the pure milk

is

;

thus

that from

whether in

it

the

precede

its

following

which the scum

is

gone ?

subject

example

"but

;

wlten

gone the milk is bare." When a&y word interthe verb should rather be ia the masculine; thus,

the s^um

is

s

^ .wUU

?

^^

'Qs

$Q "in

pretence against yotu"

order that

men may have no

If the verb is separated from the o

nominative feminine

by the

particle $[ "unless," or ^s C**O

cept,"

^

is

put in the maamline

;

as JUM

*o

^1

9

$

SlSS l\

"exs

J0

l^

29 G

SYNTAX OP VERBS AND PARTICLES.

"there ?

no one innocent except the handmaid of Ibnu-1-

is

?3

The verb may however, here agree with the noun in gender the word Sls3 would then be understood Ula.

?

;

directly

after the verb

praise 1*J and

uLf;;

Slx3

thus^

JUu,

when

174,

cLSj U.

Hi

the subject

The verbs

is

feminine

of

may

be employed cither in the masculine or feminine, but the masculine "

is

excellent

When

woman Zainab/ than by

the subject

^ ??

opinions

^l^LJl

;

believed?'

\

*!&

putting the verb

is

a masculine plural, the verb

in the singular; thus. Ear, an

"

who were impious J^T l^ ^^\ "do we believe

When

3

ul^J $*$

as

;

maybe

it

preceding

better to say ?

the

is

in the feminine

331,

it is

preferable ; thus,

those

the subject

ii.

58:

altered their as fools

have

the broken plural of either

is

a masculine or feminine singular, the verb preceding

it

may

be optionally put in the masculine or feminine singular; thus,

their <

"

-rr-

j-i

*-^s^

u.

/A 69

""

cJJa

Kur,an hearts became hardened a

^ D^J c~4<^ ^3

were treated

as liars.

When

5

o

^ ^ Ox-

*"/

:

OPP fp

>^jb

after that

?? ;


<*

Li^uud

tff

*j

,,

then

again in vi 34

:

verily apostles (sent) before thee

*

a regular plural masculine^ the verb must not be put in tho feminine, but it may be so with 382,

^w

plural of

tho subject "

^1

is

a BOB? ?) and with such like words; which,

though having tho termination of regular masculine plurals, do not preserve the forms of their singulars, for these pluials are in fact broken ones; as Israel said*"

^Tpl

The verb may

also

\

cu!^

a

the children of

b put in the feminine, and

297

CONCORD OF A VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE.

even in the plural feminine, when the noun following is a " " nation ;" or when it is a tribe" or as collective one jjy " the name of a whole species; as Ixc sheep;" J,i "bird," ;

etc.

as SL.

;

-TX

Ic.

jlLlT ffi

^7

>

x<

"the birds eat thereof;" ox -TX ^-^^T 7,^

Kur.

so,

'<

-.xtf,?

>

f

107; Ti<

Jj$ CUuJ ^Ua3\ t-^Juj \5-& i^ u^UaJl i-^r^ J|jfcJ Sr>!^ u the Jews have said (that) the Christians are (grounded) '

1

2^

ii.

^\T

on nothing and the Christians say the Jews are grounded u the one sect accuses the other of not poson nothing," i.e. ;

mere grammatical or conventional feminine, or a feminine broken plural, the verb preceding it may be put in the singular feminine, ^ ^ x If the subject be a

sessing the true religion."

<jf

or even in the singular masculine; thus,

"women

\Z U c^V*

in the city said;"

which they have earned

evils

p^

them."

assail

t.

^

&*&\

^-

^3

"J\i

"and

the

Occasionally,

though rarely, a regular feminine plural may have the premasculine thus, Kur, an he 10 ceding^verb in the singular ^ O^o :

;

.

~Q

?

P

oTx

.,*

.

x ?

J^i^uU u\j>\k

(.

*^

ff

?\'*'?\i*s\'' cj^^iH &\s>>

\A\

i

when

1

1*

believing

women

faith with

come unto you seeking refuge then plight ye them." 333.

The names of Arab

tribes are generally of the femi-

nine gender, but as collectives they are not unfrequently found

with their preceding verb in the masculine plural; thus, ,^0-c*?

^jJOl

"

ox L-ft-^s

o

^

o^/,

i"f

fft>

x

^ l^Ujj^^y-jJuu^^x iC/v.-'x'x

0,"

<s>
J.JU 4yax^

Pb

?

ix

^^U

o

x^i^^

L^nX^sf

and there congregated together (the tribe of) 'Amir son of Sa'saJ, of 'Ukail, and of Eushair, and they complained one after

another,

Saifa-d-Daula."

of

what

befel

them from (the conduct

of)

298

SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PARTICLES.

334.

The dual

C3 plural ; thus, U **

follows the

^ ^^

JX

\

^

^

as the

there entered the prison with

^

im

him two youths ;" ^r}\

same rules of concord " j

v^Jtf "tho

two men

said."

Although,

when

the verb precedes the

subject to put the verb In the singular,

with a dual or plural

as

we have

just

seen, it is

subject, yet the verb

may

usual

agree regularly in number and in s'

<*

t"*" fiS'"

^

^^\

gender with such subject; thus, ^^l* ~S \J^^ '&& u the young damsels have seen the grey hairs glisten upon

my

face (or cheek),"

335.

When

the noun which

is

tho subject of the proposi-

tion is put in the inchoative case,

25 2, and consequently

precedes the verb, tho latter must agree in gender and number " with the noun thus, IS jL$$\ J^lf Sjl God produces ;

creatures,

then he gives them

"this money o

of ours that

o^s>

7'

life;

(k\

<JLsjj

11x^1^ *$>

has been returned unto us; ??

u

have the true believing women come ^>-j c^lx^^iSl J^ back?" The same rule holds when the subject, having been previously expressed,

is

evidently understood; for example:

^

b

from

Ms

prayer, he put

a

Iris

and when the Shaikh had ceased

hand

into his wallet,

and he took

out thence sundry papers which had been written in various colours at the time of x-

verbs

*

3^ and

Ms

leisure-"

Hero wo

the see that *

xxt?

jjjl

being tho pronoun

are IE tho Bingular masculine, the subject

^

referring to Itlll understood.

Again,

299

CONCOED OF A VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. the plural feminine, the pronoun

is

^j,

referring to

l^

^L being understood,

"the papers."

must be observed, however, that if the subject be a broken whether it come from a masculine or a feminine noun, or if it

a. It

plural,

may be, and usually is, emmay be seen in the following

be a regular plural feminine, the verb

ployed

feminine singular;

in the

o ^c-o ^

example JJ^\ " \

doves

who

^

rest

s

9

^Ju

as

s '' s

~+*>

3

<&

s'

^l^-^^U^r

on the branches of the Arak

/:

jt"-o

C/VjSl !

cyU*U^

t>

31

bear the message of

a lover, who cannot recover from his intoxication/' If the broken plural be that of rational beings of the masculine

b.

gender, the verb

may

be put in the masculine plural ; for example

#&i ; jS b Xy& jj

j$\* who by

turns watch over ? 5<#

day;" l^julil they lay

\\

S3fc

*JJ

God

:

has angels

angels in the night and angels in the

;

9

F*-"**

^

u-^UJl ^\ "when kings enter a town

waste."

In such compound tenses as are expressed by the union of the


verb

it

^j Ijl^-J

you '

^&j

"

^

and the preterite or

aorist of another verb, if the subject is

put between the two verbs, the verb ^l follows the rules of concord of the verb which precedes its subject, and the second verb follows those of the verb placed after collective noun,

in the plural; thus,

men

^/^Lj

51

are not grateful;" ^JwUI

afraid of

its

subject.

and precedes the verb, the

(jwUnJ&T

When

latter is

^^

the subject is a

commonly

"but

placed

the generality of

^yksc *&* <J&* "some

of

them

are

men."

*

336.

The

rules

which we have hitherto

laid

down

respect-

ing the Concord of verbs with their nominatives apply only to

300

SYNTAX OF VEBBS AND PARTICLES.

The verbs

the third persons singular, dual or plural

of the

and second persons must always agree in gender and number with the noun or pronoun which constitutes the sub-

first

ject of the proposition, unless the verb

subject

by the

ciJl

S I>"^

SI 95

is

one,

thou

o

Ul llJU-

"no one came except

be separated from the besides ;" as follows:

thee

5?

where 5dl

;

*Ts-

u

any

*

the subject consists of several nouns or pro-

u

X ??

u

the real nominative to the verb

s.

j

5

except/

$\

precede them in the plural as " I and thou camo/ literally, we came, I and

singular, the verb

%

cJij

particle

When

337,

nouns

"

may

;

?

or the verb

may be put

in the singular and agree

^

with the next nominative thus, \J*y &ify p/* JuilX; " Maryam and Haran spoke against Moses." When the subject consists of two nouns or pronouns, and precedes the verb, ;

the latter requires the dual number; as in the following

example: tortoise

J^sd

W$l-j

jueM iU>-j UbUu3 S^

i*-*3j\j

and a hare once upon a time contended one with

the other (in running) and

tween them."

made

the mountain the goal be-

If the subject consists of more than two nouns

or pronouns and precedes the verb, the latter plural

;

a

5usr*^

thus,

\j&? $>$)

(once) had a dispute.

is

'J$ "the belly and \

put in the the two feet

33

When

the subject consists of two or more nouns of different genders, and is placed before the verb, the latter is 338,

usually employed in the dual or plural, as the case a thus,

^fJLjiJ ailT^

J^f-;

f$^?%

<3*^

may be

idleness

;

and

CONCORD OP A VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE.

301

withdraw (men) from God and bequeath, (as an If the subject consists of a noun in inheritance) poverty," the singular and another in the plural, provided it be a broken too mucli sleep

plural, the

#j

tence:

"

verb

put in the dual, as in the following sen-

is

\^ JV^j u^Stl c^U^j $Ac*.\ji*>jjd\ J*

and when there

sounded on the trumpet a single

is

and the earth and the mountains shall

shall

blast,

be carried away and

be broken to pieces."

339.

"When the subject

consists of

two nouns in a

state of

regimen, the verb not unfrequently agrees with the word governed, instead of the governing word, which is the general ' ' '<" **< 1 .LI T7" 00 T x x *\/ ? 111. 28 c^>U^ JCST Js rule; thus, Kur,an ^^.

^

:

"

u ^^

l

on the day when every soul shall find whatever

_

,

rt

..

done of good;"

|-gS

u

(jwulJ

o

x

o

4

,,-53-f

s<*

opo^,

c^-^1 ^1 j-^- /^

nation that has been produced from

340.

'

which rule

also holds

the same person.

If,

when

has

it _

you are the best

among mankind."

The verb must always agree with

person, whether such nominative

_

//

its

nominative in

be expressed or understood,

there are several nominatives of

however, the same verb has several

subjects of different persons, the verb agrees in person with

the nearest subject

;

and in such

case, the first person takes

precedence of the other two, and the second of the third; ft .* ^O .xi' 9.,xx x Jx ,^-V " ,x T we have come, I and thus, <& uos;~b~ \>&~\j e^ulj U] UJU>,

/*

I j-,

-,

..

and we have taken from him what may be necessary us," where we see the verb put in the first person plural,

th&u, for

because

its

nearest nominative is of that person.

Again, in

SYNTAX OF VEBBS AND PABTICLES.

302

S>s

s s

^y*

ju*

/

.

*t

the example,

's
"

^ s>

^jj

"S

" G

9

*

9 9

s

'

<

.1

Li.

u->^y^j u^ol

l^/**-

thou

and thy multitude shall present yourselves before God (lit. between tlie hands of God) along with. Aaron/ where the 3

nearest nominative it

of the third

;

of the second person and the next to

is

liencc the Tcrb is put in the second person

plural

Government of Verls. 341.

A

transitive verb generally governs its

complement

or object in the accusative case, without the intervention of a any particle ; as in the sentences \^ &*j cS^ Zaid struck ?5 5 Amxu; 4>/^ !3 "ho does not drink wine at all." ?

^iX When, however, by an verb precedes

it,

inversion, the object of the transitive

the object has the preposition

prefixed to

J *"'

?

it

;

%

as Jjj^S? t[jjU

&\

"if you will interpret the

vision."

342. Verbs doubly transitive govern two accusatives of

and

different pcrsons 3 or of different things, or of a person

thing both; as

1^1^ $U

^

xo


.

^IkU!

his wasslr poisoned water to drink;" #*

gave thy son flesh to eat;" pressive of

" ing/'

tl-sl

f

a

L^>\ cu^tl "I f*

f*

\j&*$$

the Sultan gave

$*

%

"$>

^jH

Zaid

Amru

3

presented

^X

^

"

Verbs exwith a splendid garment." " a doubtbelieving/ "thinking/ knowing/ 5

3

3

considering/* and such like, govern two accusatives,

i&5 that of a direct object

L^

"I \}

(as) dead

and that of an attribute ;

believed

Zaid

^$\^^

who have been

5

slain in the

(to

u

be)

thus,

intelligent;"

do not consider those

way

of

0od"

(i.e.

in de~

GOVERNMENT OF VERBS.

303

Q^ ^

fending the cause of God and the true faith); u " they received the (true) faith as a (matter for) jesting. There are, however, other modes of construction applicable to this class of verbs, as 9

&.. s

^'i

^s

ff

{[ rr

*

may be

-i

seen

IT

the following examples

by

ji

i

i*

:

-^..i"^

cuu JjU jjj Zaid is intelligent, I think ;" or JjU " or lastly )3l& Zaid, I am thinking, is intelligent 3JjJ ,

i

??

;

"I

think, verily, Zaid

343.

When

is intelligent.''

employed in the passive

transitive verbs are

voice they of course lose their objects or accusative cases,

which then become the subject. manner, lose the

like

first

of their

Yerbs doubly transitive, in objects, which then becomes

the subject, while the second object

still

remains in

its

preced-

ing form; thus, in the active voice, l^IJl^ U xjfj ^iLilll " the Sultan gave his wazir poisoned water to drink," bea the wa#ir comes, in the passive voice, l^i^* z& Jjj^l

J*

\

received poisoned water to drink."

Q ]pi

^Zaid gave

?

^L

In a similar manner,

Amru

a splendid garment," a) in the passive voice becomes, VpL^ Amru has {Ja*\ o o *^ been presented with a splendid garment &^ uj] '**L\ u thy son has been given flesh to eat." So in the Kur,an, ii, 95:

l^s^

joj JUcl

1

Q

"$

f

'

9^

,>*"***

-j&]\ \^\ i.e,,

*>

^

^\\

those to

whom has

been brought the book;"

the Kur,an*

344. It sometimes happens that the same

noim may be the

and the object of another that folIf the verb wMch governs the noun as its object

subject of one proposition

lows

it.

comes ject,

first,

and then the verb

the objective case

to

is left to

whieh ttat noun

is

the sub-

be tmder$tood, and the noun

304

SYNTAX OF VEKBS AND PARTICLES,

appears only in the nominative ;

?

me ;"

and Zaid struck

(Zaid),

Amra), and

?

Amra

^^> eLu^

as, 3SJ

'$

"

^& ^ ^

passed "by me."

J ^H;/*

"I

struck

I passed (by

It is permitted, however,

according to some grammarians, to give an affixed pronoun as its object to

to

the

verb

first

which the noun

is

thus, joj

;

^^

the subject comes

^

6^

If the verb

.

and then

first,

that

which governs the object, the latter is in like manner suppressed, and the usual rules arc observed in the agreement of verb with the subject thus, ^l^fj cLJjJ J 53 two Zaids struck me, and I struck (them).

the

first

The noun may

345,

the

;

first

verb

having

also

be put in the accusative

the

termination

that

"

^^

the

case,

indicates

its

agreement with the understood pronoun, which represents

noun

that

for ^Jjj^n

in the nominative case

struck therou

and an

subject

"

^^ i^^/^

ciop J ??

a

;

as, ^tjjjj

1

uLj^J ^

\jj

me

and I

the Zaids struck

If such a verb bo employed as requires a

became;" and

^

andjl^ "he" or "it was," or that attribute be common to two proposi-

attribute, like if

such as "I was

and Zaid was

the attribute

may

be given only onco or may bo represented by a separate

pro-

tions,

ill,

ill,"

}

noun;

as,

ill," or,

fejjX ojj

&^i s

$\ Ck^i ojj a I was ill, and

or

is

^ ^ uL^

SuJ

j JCl &

^

jj

j

so

U

uL

a

"I waB I was

;

(ftl>)

so,

an
but

subjects should be of the

all

first

of

^ a^

and Zaid was

I was, and Zaid was,

was Zaid." The

the OEO most in use

two

^^

u>^^

ill

;"

?

ill,"

that

is,

of these three methods

them

require that .the

same gender and number,

wise the attribute must be repeated.

was

other-

305

GOVERNMENT OP VEKB3, ^ S

346.

The same

rule takes place with such verbs as

deemed;" Ll*ui. "he supposed," when governing

believed, or

by means

a complete proposition, formed

attribute both in the accusative case; as,

The

believed Zaid (to be) learned." to

of a subject and

CJJ.lc

different subjects

and the noun, which in one of the propositions of the verb "to believe/' may, in the other,

of the proposition

which

"Zaid has believed UJli \*

believed

me

ty

so,

\*j uLolb j

CLSli

"he has is,

believed

"I have

and he has believed me to be

peated; thus,

and

?

Amru

as

me and I ?

have

believed Zaid to be

The

so."

method most approved of by grammarians. of different genders

^^

x$\

"&.-'

believed Zaid learned ;" that learned,

be the subject

and I have believed Zaid learned;"

uiojJs j loSj ^jJk

C*J

;

the subject

me learned, and I have believed Zaid JLZ& j u~2k "he has believed me, and I

,x

or

is

governed by that verb; thus,

is

have believed Zaid learned;" or

"he has

"I

L^olk

IjJj

may be common

attribute

two propositions, and, of course, to two

learned."

J^ "he

first is

If the subject be

and numbers, the attribute must be

J.\ \^ j

\*

&.!

^jj^^

the

" J&\

re-

I regard Zaid

(my) two brothers, and they (two) regard me

as

a brother,"

a.

For a more detailed account of such

Grammar the reMer

as

peculiarities of Arabic

lave been treated of in the four preceding paragraphs,

is

246 to p. 252,

referred to

From

De

Sacy's Gbramnaaire Arabe,

that excellent

alluded to bave been abridged,

Tome

ii.

p.

work the four paragraphs here

30C

SYNTAX OF VERBS

Of

Abstract or Substantive Verbs.

"he

The verb ^l

347.

AN!) PAETICLES,

(or it) was," expressing the ex-

istence of the subject of a proposition, and its relation to the attribute, takes the subject in the

attribute in the accusative;

be a (truo) sage until he lls>U Jjjwll

^

Ms

ness for

ll^pi

shall

jJiian

x

^ w\ "God

have subdued

^^

It

"there

i

Jj

no

is

and

its

merciful;"

all his passions

??

;

has greedi-

^K;

l^od

;

The same

(either) stones or iron."

tribute precedes

??

-i*

thus,

l\

^\

'

^x ^

P

ij^

rule holds

^

5

(real) science except 1

concealed in the breast

is

is

"he who

o"

what

ease,

tS-O

steed will have poverty for his companion;'

^ Cj&^ ^ U

j^\ x

A!

asCL&J

nominative

u VjLi"

"

ty/

when

bc

it

be ye

the

at-

great or

ranall."

348* There arc in Arabic several verbs denoting existence, a tlio sisters of Mna" which called by grammarians cJ>V^.l

^

are construed like the latter, such arejjli and JoT "it

Tbe-

^^

"i*

camo

5J ?

was"

or

or

"

"came

to pass

7

etc.

are best acquired ?

;

happened at eve

the morning/

^l

??

To

by

ili j"

those

"it returned/' "

ip^

it

was or came

practice.

All of them

L5

to pass on

?

which

however,, like

require their attributes to be put in the accusative; thus,

0^1

All x

"

;

we might add many more

UjS jli djj "Zaid has become rich;"

by the favour of God become n T have become the brother of poverty ;

are

etc.


x

XXI

brethren;" |U* lit

t4

307

ABSTRACT OB SUBSTANTIVE YEEBS. "

became black;"

face

^1*X aL^^M

scorching;"

be worthy of praise;'

^

The verb

U

uLjJj

"virtue never ceases to "

is

march ye

5

employed along with the preposition a

to denote possession, in

J

"the heat became

\^^^ j$\ ^3 U V^j

5

whilst daylight continues.'

349.

-

tf^ J^M ^-^

manner

similar to the Latin

the Arabic language not possessing any " to have," or word that corresponds exactly with otix verb

rule, est

pro habeo

;

This mode of construction will be

with the Latin hdbere.

^

uXiX "a obvious from the following examples, viz., j^jj & ^ " a king, there was to him a king had a minister," literally, minister ;" again, jjj

^S

'Jtj^r^

of this

(is),

The

ject

" it

mere

had a camel;"

and among the examples

those (people),

it is

not? "

in the accusative.

existence, without

^^

iS^i. SJ

^

^1

^U

"$

c3CJSj1

In a similar manner the negative verb ( 173) requires its attribute to be put

Sometimes, however, for the sake of em-

the attribute is phasiSj *

combined with the subject by means *>

of the preposition c->; as ^

^Wheu

<"*"

SI

not for them that they should eater

it is

unless with fear. 55

often employed in a

is

any reference a copula or connective between a sub^ ^ & $ ?

;

5

u

preterite of the verb ^l

and an attribute thus,

unjust.'

^j

father

was (once on a time) a merchant and

and serving as

JJ3 "he or

^ Umy

55

general sense denoting to time,

^^

%\ c33J JlU^

that there

he had a son. 350.

^

2&r

Jl& y ^

$>

W3

Jill

*'

'

" Ju!3

the exceptive particle

$ St

God is not (assuredly) "


unless,"

except/'

SYNTAX OF "VERBS AND PARTICLES*

308

intervenes between the subject and the attribute, tie latter "

s

6

put In

tide

nominative;

thus,

JQL

J51j

f

^ s

i,

s^S"**3

*^\

l\

""

u

the

JlJ

nothing but a transitory pageant.'

5

is

(present) life

is

times

employed, without any variation, in the third

tjLj3

is

Some-

person singular masculine with the affixed pronouns

LLj "it 5

they/

is

not he;

??

l^lJ "it

not she;" l^lJ "it

is

;

thus,

not

is

etc.

Varh of Praise and

Censure.

851. Verbs of praise and censure are very restricted in their inflection,

being principally employed in the third per-

son singular masculine of the preterite, and occasionally in the third person, singular feminine of that tense.

The

very rarely used in the dual or plural. this 1*J)

,

Ij^l (made

"When the noun that accompanied by the a

ho

a$J^o2l PU

a bad dwelling.

man

principal verbs of

kind are, as we stated, 174, ^J (sometimes 1*3 or 1*5", or a he or it is good; ?? JJu "ho or it is bad; ?? to which we

may add

it is

are

They

5

is

*

up of is

article J1 it is

an excellent

When

is

Zaid

Akin to JJu manner;

;

is

clslXe lou*

ti

"

it is

thus, 5JJ cj4^1

without the

+ \3) "this

is

delightful."

the object of praise or censure

;

3 '

"

JJb

J0

without the

SbfJ

5

is

"wicked

article, SJ I !ta' >X^

is

lj "an

"

a bad

is

article

excellent

a bad servant thy servant

bad/ which

^

&ty\ JJu "it

assistant;

thus,

is

put in the nominative case ;

the same noun

put in the accusative ??

^^

is."

construed in the^same

is

the

man

is

man

??

Zaid;

Zaid."

or

309

INCHOATIVE AND APPROXIMATE VEBBS. Verbs of Admiration and Surprise.

primitive triliteral verb

Any

352.

verb of admiration in two ways, as 3*j*

U

and

Jjjjft

When

.

tlie

may be converted into a we stated in 173, viz.,

former expression

is

used, the

name of the person or thing admired is added to it in the accusathus, tive case, without the intervention of any other word the "When Zaid!" is handsome U "how very jj ^-1 of admiration is a pronoun the affixed pronoun is em;

object

fe

ployed; thus, acute

is

him

jj& U

liSS

"

how, very

and how conspicuous are the proofs of When the second form of the verb of

his genius,

excellence in

!"

employed, the object admired, follows in the genitive case governed by the preposition L^> ; thus,

admiration, it

J^Osfoj^

^

o

viz.,

jf

,

is

t-3&

j^&? +j\

"how

very noble

is

the disposition of a

prophet!" Sometimes the noun or pronoun which is the object of admiration omitted ; but this very rarely happens, and only in such instances

a. is

as lead to

no obscurity in the

sense.

Between the verb of admiration

and the object admired, it is allowed to admit words expressive of time or place, an adverb or a word in the vocative case; for example: %

c~o

UJ*U| ^Isajl

jJ "

^-juo-l

^

u

"how

beautiful is her rushing on in the

battle-field!"

Inchoative

853.

The

and Approximate

peculiarity of these verbs

is,

Verbs.

that of themselves

they convey merely a vague sense, and require another verb after them in the aorist, as a complement, with or without the

SYNTAX OP VBEBS AND PARTICLES.

310

B

Among

that,"

conjunction ^\

^v G

t

note "beginning the action or state expressed

which

aorist,

thus,

-^

*

the inchoatives are iS^l, x^l 3

"by

will be best illustrated "by a

the following

few examples;

two "began to dispute one with the w ]/rl&3J H*>- "they ^ S f S\* * uQj <wsH 3?M "he "began to lick it with his tongue;"

""

""

other o

??

;

p

,

^tf

/

x

/

-^

?/"

/| u j^^. ^jl J^j

^yw

c

c?

^ L5^c>rji

/

y

^

P.

^j*

V.

Jyy. c)^

Moses pity ? receive them P

(Korah.) "began to say 3

to say 3

earth.

Among the

354.

3'

pened that; (Lat.

!

parum

me

%s

uXjl

?

&, and

abfwit gum).

tlJj*

s, , , _ b J^^r aTr ly-arun

^i "it nearly hap-

little

The verbs

?

and Moses (began)

!

approximate verbs are "

f

^^

was wanting that" and cly are used

which case they assume the meaning ?? A few examples of our adverbs "perhaps," "it may be.

only in the preterite, in

will

show the use of these better than a long

tion; thus,

jr%

tlr*

^

^

^^ ^ 45^

S0 "

^loft

^A^ Jpt H

descrip-

Zaid may go out; ??

perhaps the wayfarer

??

(of hospitality) ;

H "perhaps L5

may

see thy fire

iUj "the lightning very

nearly took away their sight;" Jjyf JJJSl cf?5K "the spirit 5* All of these rarely require the was nearly departing.

^y^j however^ when expressive of apprehension of any thing, and which may then be considered as an impersonal verb, requires the conjunction interposition of ^1; the verb

$

thus,

^^L^Lj 11S \fi! ^

"

?

355.

may happen that you may bo good for

it

^js.

a thing and (novortheless)

;

it

There arc several other verbs whose mode pf eon-

311

SYNTAX OF INDECLINABLE PARTICLES.

Such are

struction is similar to the preceding.

1.

Verbs

a place ; such as expressive of entering or tending towards "he went or preceded;" thus, "he entered;"

^^

2\ u&y ^J\ Ji-5 "he entered into a certain cave that ' ~ * '

"

'

'

s

.

.

^

*~^*o

^

f>

'**

?s

o^x^-

hemightenjoytheshadeinit;"LlaLsM +p* u^^i c-JUi!] ^lU^Ui " then they went to the foxes that they might enter into a " 2. Yerbs expressive of continuing," league with them." " " as such persisting," "remaining," or persevering ;" {ju and

"he continued"

+\9\

or "persevered;" as aujT

"Zaid continued sending applies to the verb

"

CJ

" 33

he was accustomed

(during the day)

;"

to

he was firm" or "unmoved;"

c>lJ

"

and cjC01

Cc,

rule oli

Jb "he continued," "he ceased not

;"


1J U, JS

5JJ {j

The same

S

he remained or put up (during the

So the verbs negative, 3lj o

night)."

"Jj\ 3~>Vjj

Ibn Buwaih."

U "he

^

"he

failed not,"

ceased not;"

"he

i.e.

per-

severed (until the end of the period indicated in the proposition)." a.

When

going, the

a negation

is

employed in such propositions as the

same must be put before the

"he

is

you

will not do (it),"

hardly able to speak plainly;"

$yntm 356. In Section Y.

Ijliaj

of Indeclinable

we

first

verb

;

thus,

fore-

^!j oUj

^\ vxll^ Ui

S

"

perhaps

P<wUd$

treated of most of the indeclinable

and in the present section we have occasionally noticed the mode in which some of them the tenses of the verb more especially the aorist.

particles of the

Arabic language

;

3

SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PARTICLES,

312

"We

shall

same

now conclude

few additional remarks on the

with, a

subject, observing the order

adopted in Section V. above-

mentioned. All prepositions,, whether separable or inseparable ~o

35V.

&

118,

(

"

<& **

goyern the genitive case; thus,

etc.),

God

to

*CJU^

;

"*

*

'~

>>*

,

the house;" JlllM

"

<xjpr

^J\


under the heavens ?

J"~

o

u

<~*j&\ 4*r &*

"in God;"

;" jlSif -'

^ "in

from the quarter

of the south to the quarter of the north."

We have

a.

341, that, as a general rule, transitive

already stated,

verbs govern the accusative case direct, without the aid or intervention

This rule, however,

of any particle. instance,

tlio

phrase

pressed -sr*? LS *J
lie

X'

I

"

"

he knew

lj!s?-

^j

"he threw

It."

The

***

he was conversant with

is liable to

"he threw a

some exceptions

may

stone,"

also

;

for

be

ex.-

(or shot) with a stone;'* so
latter phrase,

however,

may

be rendered

it."

358* Intransitive or neuter verbs arc naturally connected

with their complements by means of a preposition; thus, U k camo * a fo^^teia of water*" "When,

^ J^

<J\

^

however, an intransitive verb governs a complete proposition, either verbal or nominal, beginning with the conjunction ^1

or its

^,!

?

the proposition which ought to connect the verb with

complementary proposition

&

&\

j^^

not do that revolts against

?? :

me/

is

instead of so, 3

frequently "omitted;

u^J

3^

^ 4^ ^ ^^

instead of

$

^

^\

"

^j^t. ^

thus,

"J16

J wonder that te

c4f^

}

^o likewise,

313

SYNTAX OF INDECLINABLE PARTICLES,

^

-$.

.!J

s

4-f.

J)ot[

,,-ss

<&\ * JA>

SI

'* *

"he ordered him

that he should not grant * < one," instead of u ob Sb ; the last example x

.

permission to any

remarkable, as

is particularly

+&&

position c_> that

a. It is to

omitted, if

it is

" signifies

only by means of the pre-

he ordered."

be observed, however, that the preposition must never be

a doubtful meaning should be the result S f

for example,

"

u33J Jx&?

I desire that

omitted

we should have been

^ " ^ i*?$j

preposition, such as S s

be

$.

LXjp Jxi 359.

^\

:" for if

left to

I

am

-

is

J

in this

book;" In

house."

jllll

cause the words j\d\

L

When,

conjunction, the

j]&\

s~

^

the noun forming the

no word intervenes between

i^j j

^

j>

2t

Jt\
"

c^l^ll tj3p

^ ,llfy

8

s

yjUotf
C<*O

there

t-&

2*\2*}j

the house/' or

there

S

is

no

man

is

?

after

5,

two nouns

second of them

is

it aztd

follow,

no

is

no doubt

there

^ intervene between

nomijiative or the accusative; *O

by some other

in the

we may also say ^Cj\ j^jJl word ^UUl is now in the nominative, *

&~

tive

X

this last sentence

in whicti case the

^

^^j

had been

averse from thy doing that."

subject; thus, f

god but Allah;"

place

J

^\

generally put in the accusative case, but

vrithout the nunation, provided its

J^AJ*

which case the sense would

After the negative adverb

subject of negation

its

not say

"

the 'preposition

supply

for instance, in

the negative and

S

^ cLw^ instead of uj33

thou wouldst do that

we must

;

<*

^

3

be-

the nega-

coupled by a

optionally put in the

hence we

may

either say,

**

^Jij 1

cc

we may

there is no

man and

(no)

woman

in

^

^e

negative

1,

say, i**\j J4"j

If

314

STOTAX OF VEBBS AND PABWCLES.

Iiowever 5 be repeated before each noun?

It

of the nouns In the accusative case? or

it

one of thenij no matter whether the it

may may

Influence each Influence only

or last, or ? finally,

first

Influence neithor? "both nouns being used In the nomi-

may

M^U&^ J^y

we may say,

native case ; thus,

"O X-^-Ox-^^^X or x*\\ $j D^j y or finally, ^St no man and (there Is) no woman *>

^ S*]^

S

^ J>J

or h\^\

$

'

~*

-^

a

f~

j O^-J

X

In the house."

"

there

SS

Is

So in the

formula of exclamation frequently used by good Musalmans

when anything surprising or extraordinary occurs to them &

*O $

s<$ ?

41 b SI

s

X

*S

i-

or lastly , Allb

$\

'S3.-Ol3S6i3i.P-'"

or AJJU

3

5t

*j>

J| *

^

g

J

j^*

j

x'Cij'

;

x

viz., x

or

J

"there

^

$

**O

tf

-*

-

no power and no

Is

strength but in God."

a. If the subject of

negation bo qualified by an adjective the expres-

^^ xx

sion admits of three varieties; thus, or

djU

Js>-j

J),

or 1SU

j4y

X

we may say

"there

^s JU J>-J S,

1dSI

^

no man sleeping

is

in

the

house." **

360* The negative particles

simple proposition^ whose verb attribute to Is

no

man

)

Is

*

and U, when prefixed

^

bo put in the accusative;

present;" Ujll l>j

order that this rule

may

U

<

understood? require the a thtiSy

Zaid

Is

l^C 54y ^

particle

In

hold, however, it is necessary, 1st,

tween the subject and attribute the ;

there

not standing."

that the attribute should follow the subject $

not Intervene

to a

particle 2|

3rd, that the particle

2nd, that be-

;

U may

" except/^toay not liave the

^1 (ia a negative sense) combined with

it:

and

SYNTAX OF INDECLINABLE PAETICLES.

when

lastly,

must be

D

used, tlie subject, if an appellative noun,

is

Should any of these four conditions be

indefinite.

wanting, the particle

which

attribute 3jj

U

1S\-

<14&

"the a

ptf

secret trusted to

Zaid

is

not

"

The

361.

there

3JU

4-^ ^ ^J ^* "Zaid is " Muhammad is not ^1* U 73

S

is

i-u3

not a liar;" J^

them

not betrayed;"

is

"With an indefinite noun

ill."

on the

used in the nominative case; thus,

God is

iJJU

their influence

lose

not standing;

is

nothing but a liar;" S "&*+Q + " asleep ;"

U

and

S

is then,

"Zaid

315

we

should say

no man immortal."

^ and

interrogative particles

u

^l^ or

^

u

how

how many ?" govern the accusative ; for example %s " U l how many dirhams ? J> l^y c^^ ^"W ^aany men ?" &a>j If a preposition be prefixed to these particles they govern " for how many dirhams the genitive thus, J&}j* 1L "by" or much ?"

:

s



;

U

\

s

They also govern the genitive (hast thou bought this) ?" when not used interrogatively but merely as part of a c ^ * * " I know not how many narrative j[ 1 thus, c^Jo/ Jl^j 1^ S s ;

\

men thou mayest have

^

killed." s

"55

362.

The exceptive conjunction

sides," etc.,

accusative, IjuJ

in

When

the proposition

^J^r

is

is affirmative

a the men came

the proposition

excepted

"

except," "be-

(^1 +2)

governs the person or thing excejpted in the

when

(J*&\

1\

is

may

me

for

example

:

except Zaid,"

negative, and the person or thing

may be

put either in the agree with the subject from which

expressed, the latter

accusative case, or it

to

;

SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PARTICLES.

316 tho exception

me

accosted

Is

made;

thus, 3?

^

..

In which

except Zaid;

s

tS

substitute U'T optionally J. J

)H

/

"I have

L^ ^ " no one

a^-1

SI

\ju[j

^

sentence **O

pc*o

"55

S\ so also I>jIS\ <*SJ

;

^

we may

c^i3b

&

>

"3.

cLJjl C*

S

not brought tho books, except the Pentateuch ' C-S**

?? ;

x-"""

where instead of LjfJl we may

substitute 4/!f31 in the same

case as

3C3. If the person or tiling from which the exception

be not expressed, but understood the object excepted 5

j

must be In tho same case in which would have been n
'-55

expressed subject interpretation of so \jj

;

"^

SI >

cLiVj M-/

U

;

lastly,

God

except

?? ?

U

no one knows the

whore oo^

^^ U

"I

we have J^U

the word which precedes

Is

X

>?

" *.

Ja'far is

;

as

but a

4>9&

v)

SI

liar ;"

^^U

general subject, the noun following

me a.

"

JA^ ^ X

J

Ja'far Is not but a ^Jilfl

<

^

" verily

If the person or thing

bo not of tho nature of that comprised in the

cxcopted

to

When

understood*

the subject, and that which

the unbelievers arc but accursed."

tive CUBC

lli-1 is

the attribute of a proposition, the two words must

it

bo In the nominative ?

understood;

passed not (by any

one) except by Ja'ia?/' where

follows

is

^^

HH

un-

5 ^^

I saw no one except Zaid," where

j^c,l\ X / >

tlie

-X

t/

*

it

"

^

>

Jjo thus,
^

understood;

Har

is

;

thus,

7

Cl -^

5l

l*Ll

>

,3*1^ v" .

*

U

X]

"

must be

in the accusa-

EO one (creature) came

53 except a horse.

When

tho particle Sj

not merely used

for the

is

fresh exceptions, and repeated, forming

purpose of greater energy, tho general

subject

SYNTAX OF USTDECLINABLE PARTICLES. being understood, and not expressed, the cepted

is

name

of the

317 first

thing ex-

and the others in the accusative ; " I* no one stood up except Ja'far,

put in the nominative case,

thus, Slsr* \

^

1

^

^ yif z^

Ju*^ "

except Sa'ld, except

JH flj

*

Muhammad.

If the general idea be expressed,

and

the proposition should be affirmative, all the exceptions are put in the

accusative case; thus,

were

1M

jpiiHjXe

Ijjj

$]

slain except Zaid, except 'Uinar, except

"the people

J;xj

l^Sl

'Amru."

If the general

idea be expressed, and the proposition negative, and if there should be ' ss o ^r * #'<*, an inversion, the same rule holds; thus, &o.\ &***\ l\ ]'!*&- JH lr I* '

*

"

*

no one has escaped except Ja'far, except Ahmad." If there be not an inversion, one of the nouns will be in the case in which would have &

been the noun following

511

,

there be but one exception, and all the

if

"G5'^5$x'C'rf* $\ S>.\ Ju ll ^-" r

"ui

others will be in the accusative; thus, ^f

\

^j&i*

1\

*

\^ 1H oj^ -*

}

$>

s>

no one has been saved except Zaid, except 'Amru, except

Ja'far,"

&,

364. The exceptive particles

and 1j^, 185, may lU-, the them, indifferently, accusative, the genitive, or even the nominative, according to the light in which we view

take after

them.

If

we

them

consider

If

&U. |^U " they

we view them as

prepositions, then

;

they of course govern the genitive as

active verbs, then .they juj

naturally govern the accusative are dead except Zaid."

as

;

thus,

as

joj

\

ll>-

^U

j

and lastly,

mere adverbs, they may be followed by the nominative t

j

U

When, however,' the expressions &. \j3Li. a "that which is free from," and lie U what goes beyond,"

as ojj liU-

ar# employed, the object excepted tive case

;

thus, CC!c ?

alight ^excepting

L,

Abbas."

U

must be put in the accusa"

^^jjli

and they made them

3 18

SYNTAX OF VEKBS AND PARTICLES.

The exceptive

365. of

all

which

particles Jlc ?

^, ^, and ?T^,

3,

In reality,, substantives, signifying "dif-

are.

5

ference/ govern the person or tiling excepted in the genitive

and are themselves always put

in the

same

case in which the **

person or thing excepted would be, *

c

used; thus, **jj+&

me

to

except Zaid

have not

djj^ JA*S>-

^0JP "no i^p \^L ^-AiU culil U

Un

L*

^Jp\*r

J^ Ux ll

"

OI10

came

I have passed

"I have

a horse.'

^^

and

had been

31

(

to

one has spoken " or

&$\21

I

J?

the

Pentateuch

me

except Zaid;

me

;

J?

?? except Ja far; ?

by no one except

Ja'far;" ?

one except Ja far;"

crca ^ ire )

came

me

to

be observed, however, that the

It is to

^^

to

struck no

i*^" ^ Ullt0 ono 3

except

men came

the

LS i*^

or

books

the u

brought

gwQl

j^

;

the particle

"^^

^^^ I*

Ix>.1 7?

if

except

particles

being indeclinable, or rather having their three

cases alike, follow the preceding rule, only virtually, though

not apparently.

366. The exceptive compound particle less" (nisi or ti

it is

"if

prefixed

;

thus, LXfJjJ Suj )?

thee, rt

So "

m

and

ie,

TT

ijJ

v

rt^o

God

f *^iT

:

)

before

wore not Zaid, I should have

"if Zaid had not existod," or

Kur. u. 252 if

if it

"un-

and the verb of the hypo-

thetic proposition that follows takes the particle

"

??

not,

no influence on the subject of the

nori), lias

sentence to which

8jl

^^
ox

it;

visited

"had

not prevented."

o#/o^

x $rf ^rf / <"'<+

^^ ^&MJ$ i^^ ^M ^uli

^JJl

jJ**>JljJ

had not prevented men, the one (party) by the

other, verily the earth

would have been corrupted."

r SoHie-

SYNTAX OF INDECLINABLE PARTICLES.

319

times the affirmative part of a hypothetic sentence of this kind is

when

omitted,

it

thus, Kur. xxiv. 10

be easily inferred from the contest

may

^

:

"had not

the clemency of

his

[verily

mercy

verily

a.

God

When

God

(been) npon them, and also

he would have punished the

the subject of the proposition following the particle SJ

generally used in the affixed form

a pronoun

example

^ ^ U&M ^c S

~G

j

2""**^

'

\

*S$ "if it had not been for

p

the isolated pronoun

uJ

jJuUjl

is

is

as in the following

;

' S

S

world would not have come out of nothing."

i*}*?***

perjurers], for

gracious (and) wise."

is

it is

:

'*% #& &\'j&

&\l

gy

j

him

the

Sometimes, however,

employed; thus, from the KurSn xxxiv. 30:

"had

it

not been for you, verily

we should have

been (true) believers."

The

367.

y

particles

^

or

^ "verily," ^"indeed;" ^

"but;" L^J "I wish," "would

$

that they require the

put in the accusative case

space;"

iS^sr*

^j

noun

66,

;

thus,

have this pecu-

J),

that follows $ ^^

^jjL iU ^ I

fi#

&3

^

& and

*% \g>

them

to

" verily

be

God

$$ jy "she

between herself and him there should be a wide

JJU-

Muianunad

(

"like as;"

were!" (utinam)

G

forgiving (and) merciful;"

desires that

3^l>.

it

"perhaps," "peradventure"

liarity,

is

$

"that," "with regard to," "anent;"

or

is

^

tl*i

ill SuJ

sitting;" 111 tSJj

L^J3

\jJiss4

"as

if

is

standing,

but

Zaid were a lion;"

that

Muhammad

were present!"

perhaps

Muhammad

is

"would

1$

$

"Zaid

"

returning to-

SYNTAX OF VERBH AND PARTICLES.

320

day." That these particles, however,

ing power,

it is

between the

necessary

particle

tliat

and the noun, with the exception, perhaps, it

governs

;

as

When

a sign."

verily in this (consists)

particles are

retain their govern-

no other word should intervene

of a preposition with the noun

a

may

combined with another

LA

uJ3
^

the preceding

particle, so as to form

one word, their governing power ceases, as in the sentence " 33 Jj] SL iLl U^ verily knowledge is with God. 1

197 we noticed the more ordinary interjections. Of these the most frequent of occurrence is U", corresponding 368. In

"

0," used in addressing or calling a person and it takes after it the nominative case, and occasionally the ac-

to our

;

cusative, there being

no distinct form of a vocative

An

the Arabic language. elliptically, as in

use of

"the

lion!

so jlill

a

the lion

tho

vocative case, referred to

enemy or

67.

!

P

our

exclamation

is

own language;

that

is,

sometimes made s^*v*

thus,

x41

,,*<>*

<xJt

"bewarfc of the lion!"

For a more detailed account

rather of its

case in

of the

substitutes, the student

is

321

SECTION ^>"

369,

/

u^^\ *b

Prosody

The prosody

IX.

?

Ilmu4-'ArucL

of the Arabs, from

which

derived

is

and the Musalmans of India, is founded on the following simple principles. In the first place, every word in the language begins with a consonant, that of the Persians, the Turks,

which consonant

is

moveable by one or other of the three

primitive vowels

(

22).

Secondly, a syllable consisting of

merely one consonant, moveable by a primitive vowel, is .naturally short; but if such syllable be followed by an inert consonant, the primitive vowel becomes long

by

position.

For the sake of simplicity and perspicuity, we intend in this Section to make a free use of the Eoman character and ;

in so doing let

it

be observed that the three vowels

when unaccented, represent the fatha damma These vowels are, respectively. said, naturally short

when

,

0, f9

Jcasra

and

-7-,

&,

and

we have

just

followed, in the next syllable,

by a

as

and they become long by position ;when followed by an inert letter ; hence it will not be necessary for us to perplex the student with & superfluity of long single moveable consonant,

and short marks, very ridiculously applied, as they

are, in 41

PROSODY,

322

we have

every work on Eastern Prosody which

The accented vowels

5,

J,

and

yet seen.

are always understood to

w,

be long, as they are the representatives of the three of prolongation In

a.

1

<
atif,

present Section, with a view to

tlio

sure/' the short vowels arc

happens

to liave tho

quantities

made !"^Lf

to

;

ilras,

in

marked

assurance doubly

Anapsesttis

^^

Fadilun, the it

vowel

first

is

from the Amphrmacer

In tho tables representing the sixteen metres, pp.

3S8 and 320, we have

also

marked

when two consonants

long, except

"make

as another foot, but of different

same vowels tlie

respectively.

in those few instances where one foot

bear the short mark, to distinguish

fladilun.

li

andj waw,

letters

the short vowels as well as the follow

tho former, or a single

consonant at the end of a hemistich.

Of 870*

adopted

the Metrical Feetr-'ifr (plnr. sT^rO-

Wo

mentioned,

tlio

verbal root J*i with

50, that the Arabian Grammarians

various modifications, as

Its

a more formula for representing the various forms and measures This is not all, however they have of nouns and verbs. :

applied the same root together with for exemplifying tho

s

i\^\

Its

formations, as models

or metrical feet in prosody.

instead of saying that tho

word

]&., for example, of the meastire

lmlu&) they simply say that

it IB

a similar rule applies to

the other

all

feet.

Thus, is

)j*s,

an

and

The Arabian

feet is exceedmethod, then, of exhibiting the various poetic and to clear and simple^ as it appeals at once to the ear

ingly

the i

eye. ,

is,

The only as

we

objection to the

formerly stated, that

employment of the

it Is

root

altogether raroitablft

OF THE METRICAL FEET.

323

European students, however satisfactory

to

We

the Arabs.

It

prove to

may

here, therefore, select as our formula tho

J^s which Bears a close resemblance in form to Jju with the important advantage of its having for its middle root

3

3

consouant a letter whose sound a European ear can

easily

realize.

a.

The structure of the Arabic language

that of the ancient

in Arabic

we have

such as that,

tongues of Greece and Borne

we never meet with

"a vowel

in

"a vowel

sonant

is

The

classical rale

if

IB

short," can

the

in

followed by two consonants becomes

last syllable of

every foot ending with a con-

The reason

always long in Arabic verse,

foot

Latin

and Greek,

following

may,

for

and

(369),

another classical

munis syllaba

rule,

versfts/' does

is,

often

begin

cloas,

viz.,

that the foot

This rule

an equally obvious

if

Finally,

have no place here.

have tho following rule in common,

following must begin with a consonant

hold

viz.,

Hence our

M%tXr/o
before another vowol

long by position."

one particular,

more vowels

U^X^laSew

naturally Bhort,

in

a concourse of two or

All the three languages, however, viz.,

most widely from

differs

Ultima

not apply in Arabic

with

a est

vowel.

com-

for in tho latter

tongue, the last syllable of a verse must be cither absolutely long, position, or if naturally short, It is artificially

371.

The Perfect

or

Standard

Arabic arc eight in number. literal,

Uteral,

Of

not

reason, viz.,

cuj usque :

(loos

by

prolonged*

foot

those,

eL?UJC*

talm&t in

two arc quin
each consisting of three syllables; four arc septieach consisting of four BylkblcB

two are also

septilitoral,

but consisting

;

and tho remaining


324

PBOSOD7.

All of these, with their measures, and their corresponding Latin names, may be seen in the subjoined Table of STANDAEJ) FEET, IATIN NAME,

MEASURE,

NO,

2.

JupU c

3.

(/

*

"'

Ampbimacor

Mafadlhm

Epitritus primus

M

*"

quartos

^iLpl^.*

Mafftclilatuu

lambo-Anapccsius

8.

^L^l^vn Mutafadiltm

An&p&sto -Janibus

The eight foregoing Perfect

several modifications,

either

by

tlxe

feet

vil/tf or

iL

"which gives rise

to

^7fo/,

called ghair mlimai^ ix\

appears to bo of

ever,

?

^-^

*x

v

\-y

s*x

admit,

of

eaeh^

This result

called

is

"deviation," or "infirmity/'

i.o. ?

some

^^

-

s /

addition or abstraction

of one or more letters or syllables. tliUlj X

^

-

MaiVlulillu

7.

8T2.

v - /<

lertius

V

cujA^-

6.

"^

sectindus

Fadiliitun

^L^xLuu* Mustafdilun "

^

X

^J'SloU

6,

^

"Ffidiluu

*

^l.MtflL

4.

^

Bacchlus

(^y^i 3?adulun

1.

QUANTITY.

thirty

or

Imperfect*

little

more

additional feet,

Tliis distinction^

how-

utility, for in

most

practical

poetic compositions the Bo-callccl Imperfect feet occur, inter-

mingled with

make

tlio

himself

Perfect.

acquainted

Tho

student, therefore,

with

all

the

feet

had

better

established facts, without troubling his head about the

cumstance of tlmir being Perfect or Imperfect* (A

ample,

the

regular

BaccMns f

by becoming

MA

f

'^ -^

i-

^t

c

^Jlai

f "

dy**

^^

as

simply

cir-

3?or ex-

*

S lve nse

^ JL

O"^

;

but then, the regular

feet

a <

^U

OF THE METRICAL FEET.

325

according to certain rules which our restricted limits here do not permit us to enter upon. The Imperfect Feet of ordinary occurrence may be reckoned at about nineteen in number but ;

to these the native

grammarians add several more

which, however, being matters rather of curiosity than of practical utility, are here passed over.

TABLE OP IMPEBFECT FEET. LATIN NAME.

;

326

PROSODY.

a. It

may

be observed that the preceding

list

of metrical feet

regular and irregular, corresponds,

number and

Romans

quality,

is

the

with those

The Arabs, however, have neither the Tribrachys

of old.

nor the Dactylus in This

very nearly, both as regards in use among the Greeks and

more

have been able

their list, so far as I

to ascertain,

surprising, as the greater part of the verbal roots in

the language consists, theoretically of three short syllables. 9

Of

the

373. "We shall

Metre

-jy*&\ (plural

now proceed

of

to lay before the reader a Table

of tho Sixteen Standard Metros employed In Arabian verse. It

These,

may be

observed, are wholly composed of perfect feet,

and are thence called perfect motroK in the last paragraph,

;

but, as

we hare shown

372, since there arc a great number

of Imperfect feet, so there are numerous imperfoet or secondary metres.

Here again the

for the great

body

distinction is whimsical

and

useless

;

of tho poetry of the language, especially

poems of any length^ are found to admit of Imperfect metre, probably because tho perfect would prove too monotonous by long continuance*

It

would have occupied

too

much

of our

space to have Inserted, in our Table, tho translation of the

Arabic names of tho various metres great use if

name

Is

we

did, for in

;

nor would

mont Instances the aptness of the

not very perceptible.

We

also in this Section dis-

pense with giving the equivalent of the nunation in technical terms

when printed in

terms? however,

wo

shall

be of any

It

make

the

Roman

all

character.

Arabic

Of such

a sparing use, as our object Is

to explain clearly the principles of the art^ not to enlarge ar* nnwrftA ftwWiAma of UTXXft Its flrv tftrthnirtfllrfctas

WA

OF THE METBES.

"

rivalling the to

name a.

fact,

J?

Rhetorician,

u

whose

327

rules teach nothing but

his tools."

The Arabs consider a verse

to consist of

what we

with them, viewed as a single verse,

which they

call

a couplet

u^Jo

call

is,

" bait, i.e.

a tent" or

"

two equal members

;

in

a house ;" as will be seen

in the following extract (a little corrected) from Gladwin, viz.,

" It is

generally allowed that a bait, or verse, cannot consist of less than two S"

hemistichs

;

and each of these hemistichs

a j?J*32 misra',

is

"

word which

si*

j^

called

3

misra? or

-?

one of the two folds

literally signifies

of a door ;" and the resemblance between a distich and a door of two folds, consists in this, that in

folds

may

you

the same

open or shut which

when you shut both together

manner

as with a door of two

you please without the other ; and

it is

still

but one door; so also of a

you may scan which of the hemistichs you please without when you read both together they will form but one The first foot of the first hemistich, in a poetical composition,

distich,

the other, and verse.

is called

Jj^

sadr, and the last foot thereof

second hemistich, the cL-^J

darb or J^f

general

name

first

foot is called

The intermediate

'qyz.

hashw,

jJ*L>-

"chief," and ibtida signifies

The meaning

Jo^c

f Jcyl

ibtida,

feet of

"commencement;"

the

first

for, as

hemistich

is

called 'arud, as signifying the

Of the

and the

last

both have the

"

of sadr is the first

The

the distich, as the other does the second hemistich.

the

'arttd.

first" or

beginning

last foot of

"pole of a tent;"

the pole is the support of the tent, so is the distich supported

"on this prop

;

complete, nor

hemistich

and its

is called

until this foot is determined, the hemistich is not

measure known. " darb,

i.e.

The

last

of one kind," or

foot

of the second

" alike," it resembling

the 'arttd inasmuch as both are at the end of a hemistich.

" signifies, literally,

situation in filling feet are 80 caflled,"

the stuffing of a cushion,"

up the

Hashw

and on account of

their

interior of each hemistich the intermediate

PKOSODY.

)

)

VJ

W

'

)

H W

pq

S

I

d #

cf

^

pf

J3 .55

I

i

1 5 S

I

I

f I

I

a

*

PH

r

A T*

g

a

T3

!

| a

rt

2

1 I

j*q

r

te

,

i

^ S

1

I


OP THE METRES.

329

) _[_ I

I

1 I

I

I

1

)

I

I

i f J

I

i $ ft

I

i

I

s

a 3 I

I

S

)

1 1

I

I

)

}

330

I'HOSODY.

314. In the general treatment of the various metres 1 have

adopted an entirely new plan of my own, which, I flatter myself will be found far more perspicuous than the clumsy method ?

by the native grammarians and their servile imitators In the first place, I have adopted the Eoman in Europe. character throughout, which is a great saving of space, followed

Secondly,

marked the

I have carefully

quantities of the

only in those cases where there might possibly For instance, when a vowel is followed by occur a mistake.

vowels ?

"but

single consonant at the end of a

two consonant^ or by a

word, as in the foot Mtisfafdilun, it is quite superfluous to mark the quantities of the first, second, and fourth vowels,

and

to write the

Mmtajllun^

on the

as

wo have It

wibjoot.

seen

followed

it is

and consequently

it

it

still

or,

would be equally superfluous

marked the third vowel of onco see that

more absurdly, figure in some recent works

word MustafflUun,

this foot as short, because

we

at

single moveable consonant,

by a

short

is

to have

rule (sec

by

369).

Lastly,

the root J^i as by our adopting the various modifications of wo aro enabled to explain, in a satisour standard of

measure,

of Arabian Prosody, in accordance factory manner, the subject

with

its

a, If

true principles

the inadequacy of employing the proof be requited to shew

modifications of the root find it in the second

J

yoi

?

of

in the

Bo

Roman

character, the reader will

Grammar,

Saey's

p. 618,

where the

thus represented, viz., Fd"0-ln, eight Perfect foot are

v -v-.

>.

The grand

defect here

tive of tlio nondescript consonant 5

is, ,

that

which

we have no is

representa-

altogether ignored

;

OF THE METBES.

331

the consequence Is that the learner is not only perplexed, but utterly

The proper course would

misled.

eschewed the

Roman

clearly have been, either to

have

character entirely, or to have employed a

more

appropriate Arabic root for the purpose of illustration.

With a view

375.

to exhibit, in the clearest manner, the

affinity or relationship that holds "between

of each, class, I have

made use

the various metres

of the straight

line,

which

leads more directly to the point, than the circles used

Prosodians of the East, I.

Let

us, for instance,

where we see at a glance

:

two

by the examine Class

that,

by taking away the

first

syllables of the

metre Tawll from the leginning of the hemistich, and by transferring the same to the md> we have the metre Madid, which comes next. In like manner, if we transfer the first three syllables of the

ginning to the end of the hemistich,

and

on with

Madid from

we have

the be-

the metre Hasty

In Class IV. I have slightly altered the usual arrangement, by placing the Sar7 metre at the end of the class, rather than at the beginning, as it is formed

by

so

beginning of the latter to

Werve otvfc

*

the rest

transferring the first three syllables of the

ifoe

>,

all

#*

MyjtatMh from

We

its close.

may

further

that all the metres of Class IV. consist only of two

of the

four

What we have

Epitriti

feet

of

the

here denominated the

fee Arabs, called the

Mve

Circles

of the metres in each

;

Fwe

ancients,

variously

Classes of metres, are,

because they describe the re-

by means of

circles,

of which the

see specimens in p. 9 of Oletk, and in p. 147 of Freytag* i

ircle

they

call the

Discordant

;

the second, the Associated

;

332

PROSODY,

the third, the Extracted,

its feet

being taken from the

fourth they call the Resembling or Similar

The

cordant.

common to

two

first

;

first circle

and the

circles are peculiar to the

fifth,

Arabs

;

;

the

the Coa~

the rest are

the Arabs and Persians, with this difference, however, that

with the former the Hexametric form. (See

376)

is

preferred

when

they employ the third circle,

370. Tlio student will bear in foregoing Tables

each stanza or

we have

that throughout the

given only the

first

hemistich of

the second hemistich "being a mere

vorflc,

repetition of the first; irwflt consist

mind

of an even

consequently every complete verse

number

A verse

of feet.

consisting

of eight foot, as in the metres of Class L,

is

Muf/mmman

foot, like

Class IV*

or Oetametcr

;

called (J^^JZo

it is

if it

be of six

we

&

those in

Mttmdfhs or Hexameter.

of the metres are used in both forms,, as

Some

shall see here-

and some of the Hexamotrio metres by dropping a in each hemistich become what is called ^jj^ MurabM

after foot

said to be

?

;

or Tetrameter,

,

Wo

shall

now

proceed to offer a few brief and plain

observations on such metres only as are of most frequent occurrence.

These are the

!Fbw~il\

the JBa*if 9 the Wafir,

the Kfimil) the Khafif^ the &arV, the MntaJcaril and the Hq/ae. XI) o

remaining metres are

especially

among the

of

comparatively rare

older writers.

We

usage,

have already ob-

a sparing use of the Thero are 3 ^however, a technicalities of the "Arfl Motrica." few teraw, such as the Mrff$ the Dart, and the IlasJw (See served

(

JJ78),

373, a) which

that

wo

should

we must

make

horc employ for the sake* of con-

OP THE METEES.

Those who have a

ciseness. this sort

may

333

taste for additional matters of

consult Freytag, in whose copious

find at least three

hundred of them, more or

the

Of

Metre Tawll, or

the

work he

will

less.

Long*

Standard, Fadulun, Mofadllm, Fadulm, Mafodlfan, (twice).

378. This poets.

It is

a favourite metre among the older Arabian Octameter, and subject to one deviation (zihaf)

is

in the last foot or 'Arud of the

first

hemistich, which

become Mafadllun instead of Mafadllun, final foot of the

second hemistich

it

sionally the intermediate feet or

may a.

deviate into Mafadllun

Hashw

and Fadulu

Of the seven famous Arabian poems

posed about, or a

little

three, viz., that of

metre

the

admits of two deviations,

Mafadllun and Mafadl instead of Mafadllun.

viz.,

of each hemistich

com-

called the Mu*all&,h$t}

Muhammad,

Amm-l-Kais, of Tar ofat and

Taml.

Occa-

respectively.

previous to, the time of }

The Mu'allakat

may

In the Darb or

are

the

first

of Zukgir, are in

what we

may

call

the

"Competition Poems" of Arabia; and they derive their title from the circumstance of having had the high honour of being written in letters of gold,

and suspended

for public perusal in the portico

of the

temple of Mecca.

Of

the

Mvtre Bant^ or the

Standard, Mustaf$fan> F&4il^,

J^^?*% MdiU^

(twice),

f%

379. This, like the preceding, older gpets.

It Admits of

is

a fawurite metre with the

we .derkeon

ia

&e 'Amd,

viz.,

334

PROSODY,

fddilun Instead of Fadilun

j

and In the Darl

Fadilnn and Fading for Fadilun*

y

By omitting

it

admits

both.

the fourth foot

in each hemistich, the verse becomes a Hexameter, in which ease the "Arud may be Mustafdil instead of Mustafdilun; and

the Darb

may

Mustafdil.

deviate from Mustafdilun into Mmtafdildn or

Fibaaliy, all

the feet in this metro admit of several

For instance, Mustafdilun may, in addition to those wo have mentioned, become Mutafdilun^ Mukadilun, or deviations.

Muiadil&n,

Of

Metre Wafir^ or

the

the Exuberant*

Standard, Mafa$ilatun, Itn/adilalun, MaftiQitatun, (twice).

380. This metro

is

occasionally (though very rarely) em-

ployed as an Octamctcr by an additional Mafadilatun in each hemistich.

Its

general form, however,

Hexameter; in

is

which case both the ^Arud and the Darb generally admit the deviation MafSUlil instead of Mafadilatun.

By

withdraw-

ing Mafadilafun from each hemistich of the Hexameter, occasionally employed as a Tetrameter

Dar"b or last foot of the verso into Mafadiltun* ?

The

fifth

may

poom

;

and

of

it is

in such case, the

deviate from Mafadilatun

of the Seven Mu^allaMt^

by

Amra the son of Kulthum, is composed in the Hexametric form

The poet lived, in " the days of ignorance" as the Arabs express it, which moans that he flourished before of this metre*

the time of Muliammad,

Of

the

Metre J&nl, or

the Perfect*

Standard, Jlfutafl$il!unt Mwtqftl$ilwt, Mvtafa$ilvn 9 (twice),

381. This metro, like the preceding, with whict

it

is

OP THE METRES.

33$

employed occasionally as an Octameter ; but most commonly as a Hexameter or Tetrameter, As 4 Hexclosely allied, is

ameter

admits of one deviation in

it

In the DarI

for Mutafddilun.

it

may

'Ar&d,

viz.,

Mutafa

deviate from the regular

The fourth of the Mrfallakat

or MutafddiL

foot into

tlie

Mutafd by Labid, and the sixth "by 'Antarah, are composed in the Hexametric form of this metre.

Of

the

Metre Khafif, or

FadUatm,

Standard, Fadilatun, Mmtafdilun^

382. This metre

is

the Nimble.

(twice).

of frequent occurrence both as a

Hex-

ameter and as a Tetrameter, the former being the more common. It admits of one deviation, both in the 'Arud and J)arb of the Hexameter,

In the Tetrameter, the

Fddilatun. verse,

by dropping

may

the last syllable of

ZtorJ, or last foot of the

deviate into Mutafdil in lieu of Mwtafdilun.

seventh and last of the MtfalfaMt

by

The

Harith, the son of

composed in the Hexametrie form of the Khafif. This metre is also a great favourite with the Persian poet% who employ (as the Arabs sometimes do) Mafddilm

Hillazah,

is

generally instead of Mmtafdilun, as the middle foot of the hemistich

Of

the

Metre Sarf, or

Standard, MBttafftiw,

83. This poets.

metre

is

the

MMafdilm, MfduUtu,

(twice).

a favourite with the earlier Axabiaa

It is employed only in the Hexametric form;

admits *of several deviaticm

boh :

in the

and

'And and Darl

of

336

PROSODY.

tho verse,

t^

Sari

3

is

In the former, Mafdulatu may "become Mafdufa, or Mafula ; and IE the latter it may deviate Into

MafduU)

With

or Mafdu.

the Persian poets the

of Tory frequent occurrence, only the last foot of the

hemistich generally deviates into Fadil&t^ Fadulun, or instead of ?

JM

Of

Metre Mutafcarify or

the

Mdntm,

Standard* Fadnlun,

384. This metre

is

the

Faffl'km,

Proximate*

Fadulun

(twice),

generally employed as an Octameter, may deviate into Fadul^ Fadu, or

la which case tho Darb

F^

instead of

F<$ulw<

It is occasionally used as a

Hexa-

meter? in which form both tho *Arud and tho Darl admit of

As an Octamoter it is Persian poets who generally

tho deviation of Fadulnn into Fadu.

a

with the

groat favourite

change the

last foot of

each hemistich into Fadul, Fadiij or

Fmlal

Of

Metre Hq/a&9 or

the

the Tremulous.

Stadord, Jfw^f/(l/fe% Jfwtqffflm, Mustaffilunf Mwtaffifan

885. This

is

(twice),

a favourite metre both with the Arabs and

Persians? the former preferring the Hexametric forai^ as

intimated in

the

foot,

pose In

876

?

a.

It admits of several doyiations in all

In consequence of

it

as if it

which

were plain prose

ployed when didactic or treated of In verse.

we

it in ;

almost as easy to com-

hence

It Is

scientific subjects of

Of works

of this nature

generally em-

any length

are

we may mention

the Alfiya (or Quintessonco of Arabic Grammar), bv Jamalu-d-

OF THE RHYME.

The

Din, commonly called Ibn Malik. peculiarity in

which

metres

the

viz.,

it

differs

337

from the

Ra/jaz has another

rest of the

Arabian

hemistich of each verse generally

first

rhymes with the second Darb of each Terse does

as in our heroic

metre; and the

not, as is usual, necessarily

rhyme

with that of the verse following, though there is no rule to the contrary. The deviations to which the standard foot Mustafdilun

is liable are,

In the Darb or

dilun.

Mustafdilun

may

Mutafdihw, Muftadilun, and Mutalast foot of

the second hemistich,

deviate into MustafdiL

This metre

who employ

a favourite with the poets of Persia

it

is also

both as an

Octameter and as a Hexameter. a.

The eight metres which we have

frequent occurrence

come down

among

the oldest Arabian poets whose works have

to us, such as the collection of poetical fragments entitled

the Hamasah, to which to,

most

just noticed are those of

and the Dlwan of

we may add

'All

the Mu'allakat, already alluded

Bin Abl Talib, the son-in-law of Muhammad.

Our* limited space does not permit us to notice the remaining eight metres.

Suffice it to

deviations as

Darb of the

say that they are

we have above enumerated,

all

subject to

verse, but occasionally deviations are to be

B(tskw or interior part of a verse.

The

some such

chiefly in the 'Arftd and

met with

in the

classical student will at

once

most of the ZiJiafat or deviations of the Arabian verse, are * similar in principle to those that occur in the Iambic metre of the

perceive that

Greek tragedians.

Of 386.

the

Rhyme bill (pi

The rhyme of the Arabs

^/\

).

agrees, at least, virtually,

that. of other nations, viz., the last syllable of

one verse

PKOSODY.

338

corresponds In pronunciation with the last syllable of the verse

There

following*

however, in the poems

is this peculiarity,

of the Arabs, that with the exception of the species called or "wedded" (See 390), the ^jjjl mmdawty) "paired" same rhyme is continued in the Darb of each Terse through-

"When the verse ends with a consonant the

out the piece*

rhyme It

said to

is

"be

$Ju* mulwiyodah) "fettered," and when 5vxG

ends with a vowel,

The

it is

said to be

;

&Lk* mutlaJmh^ "free."

consonant of a verse constitutes the essential part of

last

the rhyme, and is called the tVJ rawl^ "that which binds" " The species of poem called jwaj Jcafidafa (See unites," or 389),

may bo further

qualified

by a

relative adjective formed

For example, if the rawi bo the letter * mim, with or without a vowel, the poem in called iu*!* 51*09, and so on with regard to any other letter constituting the rawl*

from the

letter,

with the exception of

coded by

tlicir

homogeneous

\

,

j

,

when

pre-

is

the rawi*

When

the (

moveablo by a short vowel, such the same as if it were foltheoretically lengthened, tho letter of prolongation with which it is homo-

consonant of a verse

vowel

inert,

short vowels, in which case, the

consonant bearing the short vowel last

^

and

is

is

lowed by geneous

;

and

this easily accounts for

stated respecting the letters

the

mwl of a

1,

j,

what we have

and ^,

just

as not constituting

verse ; for virtually their presence does not affect

the quantity of tho final syllable*

Of

the

Di/mnt

Jfibwk of

Poem.

387, Tho poetical compositions of tho Arabs, like those of other nations, are called

by various names, conformaMe

to their

OF THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF POEMS.

manner of

subject, the

Of

treating the subject, and their form. kifah y the l*^3

&

these the principal species are, the

and the

Jcaiidah)

j*j+

339

each of which

muzdawaj ;

we

shall

here briefly describe.

Of

the

Kifah

;

388, This species of in use

among

(pi.

and

J

to

poem appears

&

have been extensively

the Arabs previous to the" time of

Muhammad.

The collection of ancient fragments of poetry called tib&llamasah is chiefly, if

to native writers, or, as

we

The Kifah^ according of not fewer than two verses,

not entirely, of this form.

must

consist

should call them, couplets, nor does

than one hundred and seventy-five.

between the KiV&h and Kasidali hemistichs of the

first

Kifah) but whatever stich of the first

is

The

admit of more

it

difference as to form,

that the

merely this

couplet do not necessarily

rhyme

two

in the

the rhyme of the second hemicouplet, the same must be continued in the

may be

In conclusion,

second hemistich of every succeeding couplet.

we may observe, that both the lEasldah and the Kifah may Hi composed in any metre which the poet may choose though of most frequent occurrence are the seven metres we ;

Bt**V

iefly noticed

from

Of l"f

378

the * Ju*o

,

I

(

pL

ootf*)*

resembles the Idyllium of the

generally, are praise of great per-

subjects,

living or deceased; Deflections,

384, both inclusive.

Kasidah

p0em

"This kjn(j Of Ife

to

In the f

the

satire; elegy; first verse,

'JLriid

also paoral

or as

we

and

should say,

must always rhyme with

340

PROSODY.

the Darb) and

as in the case of

?

rhyme must continue

JKXt'ah, that identical

in the second hemistich of each verse

When

to the end of the poem. is

tlic

the subject of the Kasldah

panegyric, the poet generally finishes with a benediction

or prayer for the health and prosperity of the person addrcssed, such as ?

"

May thy

us long as the sun and

life,

health,

and prosperity endure

moon revolve!"

According to the

author of tho Char Qulmr^ a valuable treatise on Arabian

and Persian Prosody, the Kamlak must consist of not fewer limn t\vcnty-fivo couplets, nor must it extend to more than hundred and

0110

uppearn in

for,

to

haw

the

first

fuivonty-fivo.

This statement,

however,

boon made without due consideration; place, thoro are numerous KasldaM of

fewer than twenty-five couplets. further states, that,

Secondly, the same author

among the Arabians,

the Kasidah seems

been unlimited as to length, as they have sometimes made it exceed five hundred couplets. This last assertion,

to liuve

ought 1 know to tho contrary, but I have never yet soon a Kjmdah of this extreme length. The Mtftdfakat) or seven Arabian priase poems, suspended of old

may bo

alao,

111

true, for

tho temple of Mecca, to which

we

formerly alluded, are

tho Kaiidah species.

all of

Thoro are two other species of poetical composition derived >,>?

a.

f

from tho Kasflda/t, which Ilubtfl, sists

and tho

wo may

$s Ghazal,

here briefly notice,

Tho 2iul&\

of Four hemlBtichs, of which tho

Imvo tho salne rhyme, t&ko the wliicli

first

Imfe

first,

as its

name

two stanzas out of the KagtdaA we flic

the

^j^j

imports, con-

second, and fourth must

not necessarily the third.

nearij correspond* with

viz.,

In

fact if

have the

we

Rub&\

epigram of the ancients "both in

its

OP THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF POEMS. form and in the mode of

its

more

It is

application.

341

especially

em-

ployed in order to express the date of any event by the <xsrl mode of numeration. 5.

(See

The Ghazal

39.)

a short

is

As

twelve stanzas.

poem

consisting, at

an average, of

five to

in the Kasldah, the first two hemistichs

must

rhyme, and that same rhyme is continued in the JDarb of eaqt stanza to the end of the composition. The ordinary subjects of a Ghazal are extravagant descriptions of the beauty of a mistress, and the sufferto which we may From what we have just

ings of a lover (from the cruelty of the former)

add the commendation of wine and stated then,

it

hilarity.

Ghazal

will be obvious that the

from the Kasldah, except in regard the Mu'allakat,

by

to length.

'Arnru the son of

Kulthum

;

differs in

no respect

In fact the is to

fifth

all intents

of

and

purposes a Ghazal, so far as the subject of

The

differs as to form.

Of 390.

the

l^oj^

the Arabs.

among

Mwdawqf,

i.e.

"paired"

The term Mwdawaj (called by the Persians Mathnawl)

generally applied to compositions of greater extent than

we haye

those ,

it is concerned ; it merely and the Ghazal are more in use

the Persian poets than they are

among

is

JRuba'l

already described.

It is

unrestricted as to

from three couplets upwards to any number, according to the nature of the subject. It consists of a succession of stanzas or couplets, all of the same metre, and the *dond

length

of each stanza

must rhyme .iriife

Ifee first

;

but the

themselves do not necessarily rhyme with one another, * The metre generally assigned the Kifah and Kasidah.

a,s

*

Muzdawaj 3,

as

we

is

the Raja%) or some of

its

numerous modi-

hence such compositions denominated by the general term $jj>-j\ (plur. intimated in

385

j

342

PROSODY. **

>

\

The Mu^dawaj

in Arable corresponds

with the hoxamotric poems of the Greek and Latin, or with such of our own poems as are composed in the Iambic metre of ten

j*r\j\).

with rhyme.

syllables,

Most Arabian poems

a,

from

classes described still

more

it treats

under one or other of the three general

A

888-390.

poem, however,

the subject be eulogy,

place, or tiling, the composition is called **

poem

is

"?

U

called

i^ ^

*

4-Jr* (#"

t^]/).

paniment

is

*

*

A

P

'

or l*s&\ (pi. **

sj,

/Vr^l *

have a

called Ju^cl (pi. ^Jllt

are prefaced

wo

1

Q* the praise

^r^ ).

"**

of any person,

A ^uu), ^-

(pL

An

which

is

elegy

called

satiric -M

&, or -V 1

poein intended to be sung with musical accom).

When

troduced into prose compositions, which

otc.> as

may

restricted denomination, according to the subject of thus,, if

;

fall

is

poetical quotations are in-

very frequently the case, the

by the general terms Jx^ "poetry/

noticed in

1

or Iku "verse/

42, a.

Poetic

891.

The

poots of Arabia appear to have availed thorn-

Vatum much more

solves of tho LiQ&totia

freely than their

tunoful btothtoE of Europo ovor did, with, the exception, s^

of the

of

may bo

poetry

The Arabs,

like the

to tho strict grammatical rales that apply

Tho

may bo

Italy,

to possess a language peculiar to poetry,

and not amenable to plain prosa

modem

principal licences that obtain in Arabian

classed under tho following species; vi& 1.

The shortening

of long vowels in tho middle or end of a

by

tho letters of prolongation*

they to it tho

may

2.

By

word

a contrajy

lengthen a short vowel either by adding

homogeneous

letter of prolongation, or

by doubling

343

OF POETIC LICENCE. the following letter according to certain rules.

3.

They may,

in certain triliteral words, altogether suppress the short vowel

of the middle letter, and substitute jazma instead of

They may add a

it.

4.

short vowel (generally a Jcasra) to certain

verbal terminations, in a

manner

wash

respecting the symbol

similar to

36, a.

y

siderable liberties with the nunation

,

what we

stated

Lastly, they take con-

and other case termina-

tions of the nouns, both in the singular, dual,

and

plural.

All these peculiarities, however, I do not here enter into at greater length, for reasons mentioned in our concluding para-

graph which immediately follows. 392. In conclusion, I have only to observe that

*

my

object

been merely to explain the true and simple principles on which the prosody of the Arabs is founded. It would have occupied too much space in

in this last Section has

m

elementary

Grammar

like the present to

The student who

subject at greater length. information, however,

have treated the

may

desires further

have recourse to one or other of

the following works, viz. ? "Tractatus de Pro&odia Arabioa,' 7

by Samuel Clerk, and work by Edward Pocock}, fe Clerk's work ^f

Oxonii, 1661, 12mo.

This Treatise

is

to a

generally appended

"Carmen, Tograi,"

etc.

is

and repulsiv^ j^p^^L'^40 aft the of tech&ies! Utois tJxe wt are ffiffiffiM with Latsja

V^^B im|^0 (

tions

;

lajbour.

but

still

The

?

a perusal of

it

wilt

amply

best work, t<>WOT^, 0m

that of Dr. Kreytag, ^titled 8vo. ?

fcepay

Aiatea Prosody

^Ito^Eimg

Boto% i$S%^4^^!T,

ife

is

der Arabisc&a

It feeate the sub-

PBGSODY.

ject In a clear

and

manner, illustrated throughout and from tlie fully pointed,

satisfactory

with numerous examples

poets,

The only

accompanied with translations, objection It be)

is,

not nearly so well

that

it is

known

objection to

it

(if

a language composed in German,

in this country as ours

is

throughout

Germany.

SlWd

a,

edition of the reader be possessed of the second

lie will Grammar, a wort now exceedingly scarce, end of .the second volume a very neat Treatise on Prosody.

De

find at the

Sacy's

t

Professor

in 1885 a small 8vo. volume on Ewald, of Gottingen, also published in of the merits of this last it would be rash tfce same subject; but

mu

to express

any opinion,

as I never

had

fathom thaf gentleman's Latinity, which that of Cicero and Quintffian, ever, I

am

So

sufficient

differs

perseverance to

very considerably from

far as I can understand him,

led to believe that he labours to

make

how-

the metre of the

Arabs square with that of the ancient Greeks and Komans. In order in every one to effect this object, Professor Ewald is forced to set up, of the sixteen metres, a standard of

Ms

bnm, which

all

preceding

mere deviations from other established grammarians have considered as this is mere matter of careful investigation, wherestandards. Well,

upon

my

own

authorise experience does not

a positive opinion.

metre are the

he

may

preface,

rule,

If Prof.

me

Ewald can yrou

and those of

all others

to give

that

sublimi feriam sidera vertid"

established, I prefer following in the

wake

why

then,

prtmatwly

i& his

Till this proof,

however,

is

of the native grammarians,

BND,

WJtnnBDt AUSTIN,

standards of

the exception,

well exclaim, once more, as he does rftdxaf

"

anything like

Ms

JHUQftfcBH, BttKEtfOftD.